The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About8/30/13 projectmanual2013remodelSECTION 00 0107 - SEALS PAGE ii I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described herein Was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a ° ® ®`�ese�¢ateede duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of lobo. ®® Q ®® a® ®q DWIGHT CLO ON HUMM ® ® ®B ®® = Z® GL®PTON BWm SC$' UL'rS? Date P op Icy license reneytal date is December 31, 2013 Pages or sheets covered by this seal DIVISIONS 21, 22, 23, 27, AND 28 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SEALS PAGE 12.137 000107-1 PROJECT MANUAL Introductory Information, Bidding Requirements, Contract Requirements and Technical Specifications MidWestOne Bank Main Office Renovation 102 S. Clinton St., Iowa City June 3, 2013 Bidding Documents Bid Date: June 21, 2013, 2:00 PM Pre -Bid Conference: June 11, 2013, 1:00 PM for all Bid Packages except BP #3 and BP #21 June 11, 2013, 3:00 PM for Bid Packages BP #3 and BP #21 Location: MidWestOne Bank, 102 S. Clinton St. IZ 215 IFAI �►�r [0j&Q'j0LI A R C H I T E C T S A PROFESSIONAL CORPORATION 221 E. College St. Suite 303 Iowa City, IA52240 319- 338 -7878 319- 338 -7879 FAX SECTION 00 0101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE PROJECT MANUAL FOR MIDWESTONE BANK MAIN OFFICE RENOVATION Iowa ISSUE DATE:JUNE 3, 2013 NM PROJECT NO: 12.137 THIS PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDES PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 221 East College Street, Suite 303 Iowa City, IA 52240 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PROJECT TITLE PAGE 12.137 000101-1 SECTION 00 0103 - PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER:MIDWESTONE BANK (Address) Contact person: Dan Black Telephone: 319- 356 -5920 Fax: 319- 356 -5849 e -mail: dblack @midwestone.com ARCHITECT: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS PC 221 E College St, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone: (319) 338 -7878 Fax: (319) 338 -7879 Principal -in- Charge: Kim McDonald Project Manager and Contract Administration: Dan Broffitt e -mail: dbroffitt @neumannmonson.com ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS: Structural: M213 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 422 Second Ave., Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 Telephone: (319) 364 -0666 Fax: (319) 364 -1456 Project Structural Engineer: Lynn Boettcher Mech / Elec:DESIGN ENGINEERS, PC 8801 Prairie View Lane SW, Suite 200, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Telephone: (319) 841 -1944 Fax: (319) 841 -1949 CONTRACTORS General:Knutson Construction 2351 Scott Boulevard SE, Iowa City, IA 52240 Telephone:319- 351 -2040 Fax:319- 351 -7163 Proj. Manager: Adam Hahn END OF DIRECTORY MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PROJECT DIRECTORY 12.137 000103-1 SECTION 00 0107 - SEALS PAGE MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SEALS PAGE 12.137 000107-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000103 PROJECT DIRECTORY 000107 SEALS PAGE 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 002413 BID CATEGORIES 002613 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 005000 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 006513 CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 01 3345.01 INSPECTION 006515 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012300 ALTERNATES 01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 013114 FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION 01 3300 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 01 3343.03 LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY 01 3344 LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 01 3345 LEED MATERIAL COST SUMMARY FORM 01 3345.01 LEED REUSED PRODUCT FORM 01 3346 LEED CONCRETE - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 01 3346.01 LEED CONCRETE PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 01 3347 LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 01 3347.01 LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 01 3348 LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 01 3348.01 LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 01 3349 LEED GENERAL PRODUCT LIST 01 3349.01 LEED GENERAL PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 01 3349.02 LEED PROHIBITED CONTENT INSTALLER CERTIFICATION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 015110 TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING AND COOLING 015721 INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016116 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 01 6116.01 ACCESSORY MATERIAL VOC CONTENT CERTIFICATION FORM 01 7300 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024100 DEMOLITION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.137 - 1 CU /61[0L 91191wdeL D]0AId 033000 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033931 CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS 034900 GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 035400 CAST UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 040100 MAINTENANCE OF CLAY MASONRY 040110 MAINTENANCE OF STONE MASONRY 040513 MORTAR FOR REPAIR AND REPOINTING EXISTING CLAY 055305 MASONRY 040515 POINTING MORTAR FOR STONE MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042001 MASONRY VENEER 044301 STONE MASONRY VENEER DIVISION 05 - METALS 053100 STEEL DECKING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055305 METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES 057000 DECORATIVE METAL DIVISION 06 -WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 060140 REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD DOORS, CASING, AND 072100 RUNNING TRIM 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 064100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064113 CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 0150.19 PREPARATION FOR RE- ROOFING 071300 SHEET WATERPROOFING 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 075400 THERMOPLASTIC (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076513 FLEXIBLE FLASHING 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078400 FIRESTOPPING 079005 JOINT SEALERS 079505 EXPANSION CONTROL DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081216 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 081316 TUBULAR ALUMINUM DOORS 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.137 -2 081433 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 084126 FRAMELESS SWINGING GLASS DOORS AND SIDELIGHT 093000 PANELS 084413 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 085113 ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 085123 FIRE RATED STEEL WINDOWS 085200 WOOD WINDOWS 086300 METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 090160 REFINISHING TERRAZZO FLOORING 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2236.23 METAL LATH 092300 GYPSUM PLASTERING 093000 TILING 095100 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 096105 REPAIR AND REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD STRIP FLOORING 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING 096813 TILE CARPETING 097200 WALL COVERINGS 097500 INTERIOR STONE FACING 099000 PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 101101 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10 2113.13 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 105617 WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 105626 HIGH DENSITY MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEM DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 123600 COUNTERTOPS 124813 RECESSED ENTRANCE FLOOR GRID DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 142110 GEARLESS TRACTION ELEVATORS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0010 Fire Suppression General Provisions 21 0500 Common Work Results For Fire Suppression 210553 Identification for Fire Protection Piping and Equipment 21 1000 Water -Based Fire - Suppression Systems MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 9 2 4 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS -3 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING TABLE OF CONTENTS PLUMBING Domestic Water Piping 6 221123 220010 Plumbing General Provisions 11 220500 Common Work Results for Plumbing 3 220513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 2 220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 2 220523 General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 2 220529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 4 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 4 220700 Plumbing Insulation 4 PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS 221116 Domestic Water Piping 6 221123 Domestic Water Pumps 3 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 5 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 1 221413 Facility Storm Drainage Piping 4 221516 Facility Natural Gas and Compressed Air 5 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 223300 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 Plumbing Fixtures 3 224500 Emergency Plumbing Fixtures 1 224700 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers 1 DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) HVAC 230010 HVAC General Provisions 11 230500 Common Work Results For HVAC 3 230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 2 230516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 2 230519 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 2 230523 General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 2 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC 6 230700 HVAC Insulation 8 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 15 HVAC PIPING AND PUMPS 232113 Hydronic Piping 232123 Hydronic Pumps 232300 Refrigerant Piping :1 %T49_1I:aC6'19N1- 141101Ll 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Air Duct Accessories 233416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 233600 Air Terminal Units 233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles CENTRAL HEATING EQUIPMENT 235100 Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 235216 Condensing Boilers CENTRAL COOLING EQUIPMENT 236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units 236500 Cooling Towers 23 6500.1 Cooling Tower Chemical Treatment 12 4 3 10 4 3 2 1 3 3 4 4 4 CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 237200 Air -To -Air Energy Recovery Equipment 6 237313 Modular Indoor Central- Station Air - Handling Units 3 DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT 238146 Water- Source Unitary Heat Pumps 4 238239 Unit Heaters 2 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260010 Electrical General Provisions 10 260500 Common Work Results for Electrical 3 260519 Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 3 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 4 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 7 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 3 260923 Lighting Control Systems 8 262416 Panelboards 4 262726 Wiring Devices 4 262815 Motor and Service Disconnects 2 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 3 262913 Enclosed Controllers 2 262923 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers 5 263353 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply 6 265100 Interior Lighting 7 268239 Electric Heaters 2 DIVISION 27 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS 270010 Telecommunications General Provisions 11 271000 Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding 4 271100 Telecommunications Cabling and Equipment 5 271200 Telecommunications Testing and Documentation 4 274500 Sound Masking System 2 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280010 Electronic Safety and Security General Provisions 8 283100 Fire Alarm and Detection System (Addressable) 14 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321313 CONCRETE PAVING MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation 00 2413 - BID CATEGORIES PART 1 — GENERAL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and to each Bid Category. B. Definitions: Where the word "Contractor" is used, it refers to all subcontractors and suppliers. Knutson Construction is the General Contractor. PART 2 - POINTS OF CLARIFICATION A. Each Contractor shall remove and replace existing ceiling tile as required to complete work in occupied areas of the building. Broken or dirty tile shall be replaced with new tile to match existing. B. Each Contractor shall schedule its construction operations in accordance with the Master Construction Schedule in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. C. Inspection of Conditions: The Contractor involved shall require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. D. Although the following clarifications assign work to particular Contracts, it is the responsibility of each Contractor to review all Contract Documents to ascertain the total scope of work under each Contract. The work with Contracts includes, but is not limited to, the indicated work. E. Specific Bid Categories are listed herein. Only proposals for complete bid categories will be accepted. F. Time is of the essence. Submission of a proposal is bidder's representation that the required materials, equipment, and manpower are available to complete the project work in accordance with the attached schedule. G. Contractors may be asked to submit unit prices for various portions of the work. Unit prices shall include all necessary labor, materials, design, equipment, jobsite overhead and profit to complete the scope of work. Unit prices shall be in effect for the duration of the project. H. Before a bid is considered for award, the bidder may be asked by General Contractor to submit information regarding the bidder's organization, financial resources, proposed suppliers and sub -tier subcontractors, plant and facilities, insurance information, and other criteria deemed relevant to the successful performance of the work. I. Bidders are encouraged to attend the scheduled pre -bid conference in order to familiarize themselves with conditions. J. Bids shall be in strict accordance with the bid documents and instructions to bidders. K. Each Contractor will install all sleeves & piping in the new construction. All sleeves, core holes or saw cut openings in the existing construction needed for the contractors work to pass through existing floors or walls shall be provided by the Contractor which has pipes, ducts, conduits, etc. passing through them. L. Contractor shall examine the conditions under which the work is to be installed and notify the General Contractor in writing of any discrepancies or conditions detrimental to proper performance of the Work. This Contractor is not to proceed until the required corrections are accomplished. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 1 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation M. Provide and maintain an effective safety program and conform to all federal, state and local safety codes. N. Provide to all other trades information (drawings, diagrams, templates, embedments) in other related work necessary for the coordination of the work. O. Each Contractor shall at all times maintain a clean and safe passageway for the Owner, personnel, etc. P. Each Contractor shall field- verify dimensions, materials and conditions. Q. Each Contractor is responsible for all detailed layout from the indicated bench mark and control points required for proper location and coordination of work described. R. All Contractors are to coordinate all work with the work of other trades through the General Contractor for proper function and sequence to avoid construction delays. S. All Contractors are to include the cost of sorting and transporting construction debris from the work areas to central location established by the General Contractor. T. Other than the building permit, the Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits, assessments, fees, bonds and other charges as necessary to perform and complete the Work of this Contract; including fee, if applicable, for installing equipment furnished by others, including connection charges and inspection fees. U. Due to site storage limitations, Contractor shall schedule material deliveries so they only have a 3 -5 day working stock of material on -site. Coordinate storage locations with the General Contractor so materials do not interfere or impede the work of other contractors. V. Warranties shall commence on the date of "Substantial Completion." If a warranty extension is required to provide a warranty from "Substantial Completion," it shall be included in the Base Bid. W. Use of public roads, streets and other transportation facilities at the site shall conform to the regulations of the local authorities. Damage to streets, public roads, or other facilities shall be made good by the Contractor responsible for the damage. X. Parking areas for construction supervisors and personnel is not available on site and cost for parking are the responsibility of the Contractor. Y. Works hours shall be Monday through Friday from 7:00 AM to 3:30 PM unless approved by Construction Manager. Z. Monthly contractor's applications for payment will be processed through Textura. All fees associated with this shall be included in base bid. AA. Access routes through the building for the removal of debris and stocking of material and equipment must be coordinated with Construction Manager. Carts with debris and materials must be covered when moving through occupied areas. AB. Construction manager will provide OSHA minimum lighting. Any additional lighting shall be the requirement of the contractors. AC. Contractor shall provide 1 hour of general clean up labor for every 50 hours of site labor. These hours shall be used at the discretion of the Construction Manager for general site clean-up. AD. Contractors shall provide hoisting and unloading for their scope of work. Parking spots for unloading are not available. A first come first serve 15 minute loading /unloading zone is available. Contractors are responsible for all loading and unloading costs. PART 3 — CONSTRUCTION PHASES Phase 1 (12 Months): Tower Levels 4 -6 Tower Windows Level 2 -6 Masonry Maintenance all buildings all levels Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 2 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Scaffold Tower Tower, Taylor, Weber and Courtyard roofs Cornice Work Phase 2 (6 months): Tower Interior work Levels 2 -3 Phase 3 (8 months): 84' building interior and exterior complete Basement to Level 2 Phase 4 (6 weeks): Temporary Teller line in Younkers Building Phase 5 (6 months): Level 1 and Basement of Tower PART 4 — BID PACKAGES BID PACKAGE #01- Final Cleaning The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements 1. Provide cleaning of completed construction phases. 2. Provide cleaning of glass interior and exterior. 3. Provide cleaning inside casework. BID PACKAGE #02 - Demolition The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 3 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Demolition and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Spec 02 4100 Demolition Provide selective demolition as shown on drawings. Provide demolition debris removal. Please note that location for dumpster is not available and debris removal from building will be required to take place in the loading and unloading zone on the street. All demolition debris must be taken down existing elevator or stairway to dumpster area. Trash chute will not be allowed. All costs associated with debris handling need to be included in contractors bid. Furnish and install protection of existing terrazzo and wood flooring to remain. Protection will be removed and disposed of by others. Record and file with general contractor all required LEED -CI documentation for demolition debris. Exclude window removal Note 43 Exclude curtain wall system removal Note 48 Exclude AC unit removal Note 428 &33 Exclude Elevator Demo Note 429 BID PACKAGE #03- Masonry Maintenance The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the an d related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 4 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Spec 04 0100 Maintenance of Clay Masonry Spec 04 0110 Maintenance of Stone Masonry Spec 04 0513 Mortar for Repair and Repointing Existing Clay Masonry Spec 04 0515 Pointing Mortar for Stone Masonry Spec 04 2000 Unit Masonry Spec 04 2001 Masonry Veneer Spec 04 4301 Stone Masonry Veneer 1. Cleaning of existing brick veneer and associated castings. 2. Removal and replacement of existing hard joints. a. Contractor is to establish quantity to be included in bid based on physical inspection of existing building. 3. Removal and replacement of existing soft joints. a. Contractor is to establish quantity to be included in bid based on physical inspection of existing building. 4. Fill building scaffold of the tower will be provided by BP 421 for use by Masonry Maintenance contractor. 5. All necessary protection of other buildings, property and public. 6. Off hours work if necessary to complete building washing. 7. Necessary lifts /scaffold to complete masonry maintenance of 84' building, by Masonry Maintenance contractor. Unit Price 41 — Hard Joint Removal and Replacement Unit Price 42 — Soft Joint Removal and Replacement BID PACKAGE #04 — Casework and Countertops - Furnish The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Casework and Countertops and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 5 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Division 02 Spec 06 2000 Spec 06 4100 Spec 06 4113 Spec 10 5617 Spec 12 3600 Existing Conditions (partial) Finish Carpentry Architectural Wood Casework Custom Plastic Laminate Casework Wall Mounted Standards and Shelving Countertops 1. Include installation of all solid surface, simulated stone and stone countertops and accessories. 2. Include all necessary countertop supports. 3. Exclude standing and running trim not integral with supplied scope of work. BID PACKAGE #05 — Standing and Running Trim — Furnish Only The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Standing and Running Trim and related trades as necessary for the completion of MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 06 2000 Finish Carpentry 1. Exclude installation. 2. Match existing profile of trim that remains. 3. Prefinish all trim. BID PACKAGE #06 - Roofing The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 6 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 07 0150.19 Preparation for Re- Roofing Spec 07 5400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Spec 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Spec 07 6513 Flexible Flashing 1. Remove and dispose existing roofing systems. 2. Provide temporary roofing at roof tie -ins where and when necessary. 3. Caulking for scope of work. 4. Exclude roof blocking 5. Provide necessary temporary patches at roofing for mechanical pentrartions. BID PACKAGE #10A — Glass & Aluminum Systems for Complete Project Interior and 84' Building Exterior The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the ...::= ... and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 7 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Spec 07 2100 Spec 07 1300 Spec 07 9005 Spec 08 1216 Spec 08 1316 Spec 08 4126 Spec 08 4413 Spec 08 6300 Spec 08 8000 Spec 10 2813 Thermal Insulation (Partial) Sheet Waterproofing Joint Sealers (Partial) Aluminum Door Frames Tubular Aluminum Doors Frameless Swinging Glass Doors and Sidelight Panels Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls Metal- Framed Skylights Glazing Toilet Accessories (Partial for Mirrors) Install hardware on aluminum doors, furnished by others 2. Furnish and install mirrors. 3. Provide demolition of existing windows (not in bid package 41 OB), storefront and curtain wall systems. 4. Provide rough opening preparation at existing construction for installation of new windows. 5. Provide interior and exterior sealant at all windows installed under this bid package. 6. Provide all necessary waterproofing. 7. Provide and install power operators for vestibule doors. 8. Include all interior storefront systems. BID PACKAGE #lOB — Exterior Windows for Tower The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 07 2100 Thermal Insulation (Partial) Spec 07 1300 Sheet Waterproofing Spec 07 9005 Joint Sealers (Partial) Spec 08 5113 Aluminum Replacement Windows Spec 08 5123 Fixed Rated Steel Windows Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 8 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Spec 08 5200 Wood Windows Spec 08 8000 Glazing 1. Provide demolition of existing windows. 2. Provide demolition of ac units in existing windows. 3. Provide rough opening preparation at existing construction for installation of new windows. 4. Provide interior and exterior sealant at all windows installed under this bid package. BID PACKAGE #11— Drywall, Plaster and Plaster Restoration The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 05 4000 Cold- Formed Metal Framing Spec 06 1000 Rough Carpentry Spec 07 2100 Thermal Insulation Spec 07 8100 Applied Fireproofing Spec 07 8400 Firestopping (Partial) Spec 07 9005 Joint Sealers (Partial) Spec 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Spec 09 2236.23 Metal Lath Spec 09 2300 Gypsum Plastering Provide unit price to furnish and install 24" x 24" access panels, rated and non - rated. Provide patching of walls per Demolition Notes. Provide wall patching at location of removed MEP duct, piping and conduit. Set hollow metal frames. Provide Fire caulking and fire stopping at top of wall. Provide backing and blocking. Provide necessary wall prep /scraping to prepare existing walls for plastering. Unit Price 41 — Access Panels Rated Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 9 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Unit Price 42 — Access Panels Non -Rated Unit Price 43 — Plaster Restoration at Lobby Ceiling — Flat Surface Unit Price 44 — Plaster Restoration at Lobby Ceiling — Drop Beam Unit Price 45 — Plaster Restoration at Lobby Ceiling — Column Capitals BID PACKAGE #12 - Tiling The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 09 3000 Tiling Spec 09 3033 Stone Tiling 1. Provide minor floor prep to complete this scope of work. 2. Provide all accessories necessary for installation of tiling. 3. Cleaning of existing tile in lobby. 4. Provide a unit price /sf to remove and replace unsuitable tile at existing lobby tile. BID PACKAGE #13 — Acoustical Ceilings The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 10 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 09 5100 Acoustical Ceilings 1. Provide attic stock to owner as required by specifications. BID PACKAGE #14 - Flooring The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Spec 09 6500 Resilient Flooring Spec 09 6800 Carpeting Spec 09 6813 Tile Carpeting Spec 12 4813 Entrance Walk -Off Mats 1. Provide minor floor prep. 2. Exclude waxing of resilient flooring. BID PACKAGE #15 - Painting The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 11 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 06 0140 Refinishing Existing Wood Doors, Casing, and Running Trim Spec 09 7200 Wall Coverings Spec 09 9000 Painting and Coating 1. Provide filling of nail holes in standing and running trim. 2. Provide prep and paint for fire escape. 3. Provide painting of exposed MEP piping. 4. Provide refinishing of existing wood trims and doors that are to remain per plans. BID PACKAGE #16 — Fire Protection System The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements BID PACKAGE #17 — Wood Flooring Refinish and Patching Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 12 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Spec 09 6105 Refinishing Existing Wood Strip Flooring 1. Provide patching of wood flooring in quantities indicated on plans. 2. Provide unit price of wood flooring patching for quantities that exceed those indicated on plans. Unit Price # 1 — Wood Floor Patch $ BID PACKAGE #18 — Terrazzo Refinishing The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Terrazzo Refinishing and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 13 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Spec 09 0160 Refinishing Terrazzo Flooring BID PACKAGE #19 — Door Supply The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Door Supply and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Spec 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors Spec 08 1433 Stile and Rail Wood Doors Spec 08 8000 Door Hardware BID PACKAGE #20 — Elevator The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Elevator and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 14 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation Division 01 Division 02 Spec 14 2100 General Requirements Existing Conditions Gearless Traction Elevators 1. Provide demolition of existing elevator. 2. Elevator removal and reinstallation shall be completed within 60 calendar days. This time frame shall include state inspections. Elevator will be replaced during Phase 1. BID PACKAGE #21— Scaffolding The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Scaffolding Systems and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Item Scaffolding 1. Include screening on outside of scaffolding system. 2. Include means to limit pedestrian access to upper levels of scaffolding system. 3. Worker access must be provided at each window level and eave. 4. Include necessary protection of existing roof system for scaffolding system installed on existing roofs. 5. Scaffolding system must be constructed to allow pedestrian access under system. Please allow for double handicap width. 6. Engineer stamped design by engineer in state of Iowa. 7. Scaffold for tower during Phase 1 of project. BID PACKAGE #22 - Specialties The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 15 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Specialties and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Spec 10 1101 Visual Display Boards Spec 10 2113.13 Metal Toilet Compartments Spec 10 2813 Toilet Accessories Spec 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties 1. Exclude supply of mirrors. BID PACKAGE #23 — Roller Shades The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Roller Shades and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Spec 12 2413 Roller Window Shades BID PACKAGE #24 — Coiling Doors The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 16 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Coiling Doors and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 08 3313 Coiling Counter Doors Spec 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors BID PACKAGE #25 — Structural and Misc Metal Supply The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Structural and Misc Metal Supply and related trades as necessary for the completion of the MidWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 05 3100 Steel Decking Spec 05 5000 Metal Fabrications Spec 05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings Spec 05 5305 Metal Gratings and Floor Plates Spec 05 7000 Decorative Metal Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 17 of 18 MidWestOne Iowa City, Iowa Main Office Renovation BID PACKAGE #26 — Concrete Paving The following information is provided in order to define and describe the scope of work that will be required of the successful Bidder. It is intended for the following information to be complementary with the requirements of all the other Contract Documents. This Document will become a part of the successful Bidder's Final Contract. The scope of work shall include all labor, materials, supervision, equipment, tools, insurance, taxes, and all other items to perform this work. The intent of this Bid Package is to contract for the Concrete Paving and related trades as necessary for the completion of the M1dWestOne Main Office Renovation in Iowa City, IA. The following reference to specifications sections is not intended to limit the scope of the Bid Package and is listed as a courtesy to the Bidder. All sections of the specifications are deemed included in all bid packages. The scope of the work shall include, but not limited to, the following: Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Division 01 General Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Spec 321123 Aggregate Base Courses Spec 32 1313 Concrete Paving 1. Include furnish and install of subgrade material required for sidewalk construction. 2. Include furnish and install of membrane waterproofing and locations shown on plans. 3. Include sidewalk closures and pedestrian re- routing as necessary to complete scope of work. 4. Include all necessary notifications or permitting required by the city for sidewalk closure. Knutson Construction Services Midwest, Inc. 18 of 18 SECTION 00 2613 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM PROJECT: MIDWESTONE MAIN OFFICE RENOVATION BID DATE: JUNE 21, 2013 SUBMIT REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTIONS DURING THE BIDDING PHASE TO: NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECT P.C., 221 E College St, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 REQUEST FROM: DATE: / /2013. SPECIFICATION SECTION /TITLE: - Description: ; Article /Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Trade Name: ; Model: ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS AND ATTACHMENTS In submitting this Request, the Undersigned acknowledges and represents that: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Attachments: The following attachments are considered an integral part of this Request: Product Data, descriptions and specifications necessary for evaluation. Drawings necessary to indicate proper installation in the Work. Tests and Reports consistent with specified performance requirements. SUBMITTED BY: ,(Title) Firm name: Telephone: ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION Fax: Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 3300. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Reviewed by: END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Date: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 12.137 002613-1 SECTION 00 5000 - CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT See Section 00 5200 for the Agreement form to be executed. The Agreement is based on AIA A102. The General Conditions are AIA A201. FORMS Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Bond Forms: Performance and Payment Bond Form: AIA A312. Post -Award Certificates and Other Forms: Certificate of Insurance Form: ACORD Form 25 -S. Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703. Application for Payment Form: AIA G702 and G703. Clarification and Modification Forms: Supplemental Instruction Form: AIA G710. Construction Change Directive Form: AIA G714. Change Order Form: AIA G701. Closeout Forms: Contractor's Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: Architect's Form. Certificate of Substantial Completion Form: AIA G704. Contractor's Certificate of Completion Form: Architect's Form. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Form: AIA G706. Affidavit of Release of Liens Form: AIA G706A. Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form: AIA G707. Owner's Acceptance Certificate Form: Architect's Form. REFERENCE STANDARDS AIA A102 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is the Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, With a Guaranteed Maximum Price; 2007. AIA A201 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; 2007. AIA A312 - Performance Bond and Payment Bond; 1984. AIA G701 - Change Order; 2001. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment; 1992. AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet; 1992. AIA G704 - Certificate of Substantial Completion; 2000. AIA G710 -Architect's Supplemental Instructions; 1992. AIA G714 - Construction Change Directive; 2007. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 12.137 005000-1 SECTION 00 6513 - CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION PROJECT: (Address) OWNER: Owner Representative: TO (ARCHITECT): NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 221 E College St, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: FROM : (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: DATE: , 20_ DECLARATION AND REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: As of the above date, the construction of the Work of the above Project has progressed sufficiently that the Project (or designated part thereof) can be occupied by the Owner and utilized for its intended purpose. We understand that occupancy and use of the Work designated as substantially complete shall not constitute Owner acceptance of the Work or portions thereof. The Work to which this Declaration of Substantial Completion applies includes the following CONTRACTOR'S PRE - INSPECTION AND INITIAL PUNCH LIST: In accordance with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract, We have conducted an inspection of the designated Work for conformance with the Contract Documents. A comprehensive list of incomplete work and items needing correction includes the following: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION 12.137 006513-1 We understand that failure to include an item on the above list does not alter Our responsibility to complete all Work in conformance with the Contract Documents. The above items will be completed or corrected within days of the date of this Notice. Please schedule and conduct the Architect's inspection as required to verify the status of the Work. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: The undersigned hereby certifies that demonstration and training of the Owner's personnel has been fully completed in accordance with requirements of Section 01 7900: Owner's Representative: (Name) Date The undersigned hereby certifies that TAB work has been fully completed in accordance with requirements of Section 23 0593: TAB Agency: (Name) By Date ATTACHMENTS: We have attached evidence of Inspection and Acceptance of the following Authorities having Jurisdiction: Building Inspector:_Y_N Fire Marshal:_Y _N Y N MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION 12.137 006513-2 SUBMITTED BY: (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF DOCUMENT MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION 12.137 006513 -3 SECTION 00 6515 - CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION PROJECT: OWNER: Owner Representative: TO (ARCHITECT): NEUMANN MONSON ARCHITECTS 221 E College St, Suite 303, Iowa City, IA 52240 Attn: SUBMITTED BY: (CONTRACTOR) (Address) Representative: CONTRACT FOR: General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction CONTRACT DATE: , 20_ CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF FINAL COMPLETION: We, the undersigned, do hereby certify that: The Work provided pursuant to the Contract Documents for the above Project has been inspected and determined to be complete and in compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The following Supporting Documents have been fully executed (in duplicate) and are included with this Statement: _FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT _AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS (AIA Doc. G706) _AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS (AIA Doc. G706A) _CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (AIA Doc. G707) _INSURANCE CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED OPERATIONS (ACORD Form 25 -S) (Contractor's Name) By Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) ARCHITECT'S REVIEW: The undersigned, Architect of the above designated Project, hereby states that: The Work performed by (Contractor) under this Contract is, to the Architect's best knowledge, information and belief, in substantial compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. The Certificate for Final Payment is a complete and accurate accounting of the cost of the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all changes and modifications thereto. The total cost of the Work as completed is $ including the following Change Orders. C.O. No.1 dated Add $ C.O. No.2 dated Add $ Upon final inspection of the Work and receipt of required Closeout Documents, I have certified final payment for this Project as a condition of final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. Neumann Monson Architects P.C. By Date MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION 12.137 006515-1 (Authorized Representative) (Title) OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK: The undersigned, on behalf of , hereby affirms that the Work performed by pursuant to the above referenced Contract is accepted and final payment has been authorized in accordance with provisions of the Contract. Date (Authorized Representative) (Title) END OF DOCUMENT MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION 12.137 006515-2 SECTION 01 1000 -SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: MidWestOne Main Office Renovation. B. Owner's Name: MidWestOne. C. Architect's Name: Neumann Monson P.C., Iowa City, Iowa. D. The Project consists of the Renovation of an existing bank office building. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on the Cost of the Work plus a fee as described in Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02 4100. B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings. C. Plumbing: Replace existing system with new construction, keeping existing in operation until ready for changeover. D. HVAC: Replace existing system with new construction, keeping existing in operation until ready for changeover. E. Electrical Power and Lighting: Replace existing system with new construction, keeping existing in operation until ready for changeover. F. Fire Alarm: Replace existing system with new construction. 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. C. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Use of site and premises by the public. C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. D. Existing building spaces outside of work area may not be used for storage. E. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to times as arranged with owner to limit disruption to building occupants. F. Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers and fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in phases during the construction period: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SUMMARY 12.137 01 1000-1 Phase 1: Complete demolition and new construction on levels 4, 5, and 6. Modernize elevator. Complete work as needed on lower level, and levels 1, 2, and 3 to provide utilities and pathways for utilities to serve new construction on upper levels. Additionally, complete demolition and new construction in rooms 260, 261, 262, and 263. Complete demolition in area of Store Room 032 and provide doors 032A and 0328. Phase 2: Complete demolition and new construction on levels 2 and 3 in the "1911 Building" and the "Webber Building ". Phase 3: Complete demolition and new construction on "1984 Building" including exterior work. Complete work on building entrance canopy. Phase 4: Complete demolition and new construction in "Younkers Building" for new temporary teller line space. Phase 5: Complete demolition and new construction on Lower Level and Level 1 in "1911 Building" and "Webber Building" including exterior work. B. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SUMMARY 12.137 01 1000-2 SECTION 01 2300 -ALTERNATES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of alternates. B. Procedures for pricing alternates. C. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time. 1.02 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner - Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 (Add /Deduct) - New Entry Canopy: 1. Description: Provide New Entry Canopy as detailed on Drawing A -301 in lieu of Modification and re -use of existing canopy. Comply with requirements of appropriate specification sections and Drawings. B. Alternate No. 2 (Add) - Vault Waterproofing and Sidewalk Paving Replacement: 1. Description: Demo existing sidewalks and Provide new concrete paved sidewalks along Washington St. and along Clinton St. between grid lines F and M as specified in Section 32 1313. Provide new vault waterproofing at Washington St. sidewalk as specified in Section 07 1300. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALTERNATES 12.137 01 2300-1 SECTION 01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electronic document submittal service. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Preinstallation meetings. E. Construction progress schedule. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Stages of the Work, occupancy, B. Section 01 3114 - Facility Services Coordination: Administrative procedures and coordination of mechanical and electrical work. C. Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals: D. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. E. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Project record documents. F. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Additional procedures for submittals relating to commissioning. G. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Instruction of Owner's operating personnel. 1.03 ARCHITECT'S DIGITAL DRAWINGS A. Digital files of "Background Drawings" are available from the Architect for the expressed use by the Contractor, and designated subcontractors and suppliers, in the construction of the Work and the preparation of shop drawings. 1. Upon receipt of request for specific files from a prospective "User ", Architect will forward a copy of the form "Digital Media Agreement" (a copy of this form is included at the end of this section) for acceptance and signature of "User ". 2. Upon return of signed form together with fee of $50 per original drawing, the Architect will prepare and transmit requested files to the "User ". 1.04 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Owner's designated contact person. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for construction access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format. This procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 3000-1 1. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in electronic format; paper document transmittals will not be reviewed. 2. Electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. 3. Drawings and graphic presentations may be submitted in DWF format upon approval from the Architect. B. Construction Submittals: Refer to Section 01 3300 for additional requirements. 1. Construction submittals transmitted for purposes of review and information are to be in electronic format and transmitted via an Internet -based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. 2. Cost: The cost of the service is to be paid by Contractor; include the cost of the service in the contract sum. 3. Architect, Architect's consultants, subcontractors and suppliers will be permitted to use the service at no extra charge. 4. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner. 3.02 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via an Internet -based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in electronic format. 4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants are to be permitted to use the service at no extra charge. 5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software capability is provided by the service provider. 6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed electronic documents will not be reviewed. 7. Drawings and graphic presentations may be submitted in DWF format upon approval from the Architect. 8. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts. B. Submittal Service: The selected service is: 1. Submittal Exchange (tel: 1- 800 - 714 - 0024): www.submittalexchange.com. C. Training: One, one -hour, web -based training session will be arranged for all participants, with representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of the user of the service. D. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner. 3.03 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after execution of the Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 3000-2 3. Contractor. 4. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, the Owner's jobsite representative, the Contractor's key administrative and field personnel, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 9. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to completion. 10. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 11. Security and housekeeping procedures. 12. Application for payment procedures. 13. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 14. Requirements for start -up of equipment. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Owner, Contractor participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of scheduled pre - installation meetings. 6. Review of submittals schedule and status of construction submittals. 7. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 8. Maintenance of progress schedule. 9. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 10. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.05 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Make arrangements for meetings required by separate specification sections; prepare agenda appropriate for each meeting. B. Review project conditions required for satisfactory installation of the Work. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 3000-3 C. Require attendance of affected installers, manufacturer's representatives and others as may be necessary for the proper coordination of the Work. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.06 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 15 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Incorporate the following schedule for contract closeout: 1. Closeout Meeting: Schedule at least 45 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. Submit initial copy of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review. 2. Demonstration and Instruction: Schedule at least 15 days prior to Substantial Completion. 3. Contractor's Punchlist and Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: Submit at least 10 days prior to anticipated date of Substantial Completion. a. Architect will conduct inspection of Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Request. 4. Architect will issue "Certificate of Substantial Completion" in accordance with provisions in the Conditions of the Contract. 5. Closeout Submittals: See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures. 6. Final Change Order: Architect will prepare and issue within 5 days after Substantial Completion. 7. Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion: Architect will conduct Final Inspection of the Work within 5 days of receipt of Contractor's Certificate. 8. Architect will issue Final Certificate for Payment within 5 days of completing satisfactory Final Inspection. 9. Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work and Final Payment: See Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures. G. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.07 SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Bar Charts: Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. C. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8 -1/2 x 11 inches. D. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. 3.08 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND INFORMATION A. Refer to Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for additional requirements. 3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Refer to Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for submittal requirements. B. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Warranties. 2. Bonds. 3. Other types as indicated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 3000-4 C. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.10 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically- marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right -side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - GENERAL A. Refer to Section 01 3300 for additional requirements pertaining to construction submittals. B. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. C. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. D. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. F. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 3000-5 SECTION 01 3114 - FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements for coordination of facility services construction. B. Coordination documents. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for coordination. B. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems. Systems Demonstration. C. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Project record documents. D. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Instruction of Owner's personnel. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit name(s) of person(s) responsible for review and coordination of mechanical and electrical work required for this Project. B. Submit coordination drawings and schedules prior to submitting shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Submit schedules prior to start -up of various equipment and systems. D. Submit schedules for instruction and training of Owner's operating personnel. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Administrative Personnel: Use persons who are technically qualified and administratively experienced in field coordination for the type of mechanical and electrical work required for this Project, for the duration of the Work. B. Field Measurements: Verify field conditions prior to beginning fabrication and installation of system components to assure proper fit of completed assemblies. Identify conflicts which directly relate to the installation of mechanical and electrical work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION REQUIRED A. Coordinate the work listed below: 1. Fire Suppression: Division 21. 2. Plumbing: Division 22. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Division 23. 4. Integrated Automation: Division 25. 5. Electrical: Division 26. 6. Communications: Division 27. 7. Electronic Safety and Security: Division 28. 8. B. Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of products. C. Conduct meetings among Subcontractors and others concerned, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. D. Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of meetings and reports to concerned parties. 3.02 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. Prepare coordination drawings to organize installation of products for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, and to identify potential conflicts. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION 12.137 01 3114-1 B. Prepare a master schedule identifying responsibilities for activities that directly relate to this work, including submittals and temporary utilities; organize by specification section. C. Identify electrical power characteristics and control wiring required for each item of equipment. D. Maintain documents for the duration of the work, recording changes due to site instructions, modifications or adjustments. E. After Architect review of original and revised documents, reproduce and distribute copies to concerned parties. 3.03 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination with related work. Transmit copies of reviewed documents to Architect. B. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors. C. Check compatibility with equipment and work of other sections, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements. D. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. E. Coordinate controls, interlocks, wiring of switches, and relays. F. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. G. When changes in the work are made, review their effect on other work. H. Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents. 3.04 OBSERVATION OF WORK A. Observe work for compliance with Contract Documents. B. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects; promptly submit. 3.05 DOCUMENTATION A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record: 1. Specification section number and product name. 2. Name of Contractor, subcontractor, and supplier. 3. Name of testing (TAB) agency and name of inspector. 4. Name of manufacturer's representative present. 5. Date, time, and duration of tests. 6. Type of test, and results. 7. Retesting required. B. Assemble background documentation for dispute and claim settlement. C. Submit copies of documentation to Architect upon request. 3.06 EQUIPMENT START -UP A. Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operable condition as required by Section 01 7300. B. Observe start -up and adjustments, test run, record time and date of start -up, and results. C. Observe equipment demonstrations made to Owner; record times and additional information required for operation and maintenance manuals. 3.07 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT A. Prior to "Substantial Completion" inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, and ready for operation. B. Assist Architect with review. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY SERVICES COORDINATION 12.137 013114-2 SECTION 01 3300 - CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction Submittals for Review and Information. B. Preparation and transmittal of construction submittals. C. Contractor's review and Architect's approval of construction submittals. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Processing submittals. B. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals. C. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. D. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Preparation of submittals related to systems startup, functional testing and commissioning. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Include cost of electronic submittal processing through "Submittal Exchange" in base bid price. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Submittals for Review: Submittals required by individual specification sections relating to a portion of the work which must be acted upon by the Architect before work on that portion begins. Note that construction submittals are NOT Contract Documents. Submittals containing information different from requirements in the Contract Documents do not affect or modify the Contract unless and until a change order is properly issued. 1. Shop Drawings: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, and schedules specifically prepared by the Contractor to illustrate and depict some portion of the work more clearly and in greater detail. 2. Coordination Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to show how multiple- system and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated to avoid conflicts resulting from available space requirements. 3. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures that illustrate physical appearance, size, and other characteristics of materials and equipment for some portion of work 4. Samples: Physical examples of materials and workmanship which illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material and establish the standards by which the work will bejudged. B. Construction Phase Submittals for Information: Transmit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for OWNER. No action will be taken. 1. Design data: Performance requirements and material characteristics providing the basis for portions of the Work designed by the Contractor. 2. Documentation required by individual specification sections: a. Certificates. b. Test reports. c. Inspection reports. d. Manufacturer's instructions. e. Manufacturer's field reports. 3. Other types indicated. 1.05 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE PARTICIPANTS A. Contractor: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Establish a realistic submittal schedule that allows for resubmittal. 3. Coordinate submittals. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 12.137 01 3300-1 4. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents, site conditions, dimensions and construction means and methods; indicate any part of the submittal that does not conform to the contract requirements. 5. Review submittals prior to transmitting them to Architect. Use the transmittal form included with this section. 6. Distribute approved submittals to subcontractors and others. 7. Maintain copies of approved submittals at the jobsite for reference, and retain copy of approved submittals for the Owner's record. 8. Maintain transmittal log and track progress. B. Subcontractors and Suppliers: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Properly prepare complete and accurate submittals with extraneous information deleted. 3. Submit in a timely manner based on construction schedule and allowing adequate time for Contractor and Architect reviews. 4. Maintain records and current status. C. Architect: 1. Specify reasonable requirements. 2. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that the Contractor has reviewed and stamped submittals. 4. Review submittals for conformance with design intent. 5. Review submittals in a timely manner, or take other appropriate action. 6. Forward submittals to consultants. 7. Maintain a copy of approved submittals, and forward a copy to the Owner upon request. 8. Maintain a submittal log and track progress. D. Owner: 1. Read and understand the Contract Documents. 2. Coordinate Owner - furnished items installed by the Contractor. 3. Coordinate Contractor - furnished items installed by the Owner or under a separate contract. 4. Coordinate work to be completed under a separate contract. 5. Follow project requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that Product List is complete and accurate. B. Identify practical groups of submittals and prepare initial submittal schedule. 3.02 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL SERVICE PROCEDURES A. Refer to Section 01 3000 for additional requirements. B. Construction submittals transmitted for purposes of review and information are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via an Internet -based submittal service that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. C. Transmit construction submittals to Architect using the electronic submittal service website: www.submittalexchange.com. D. Architect / Engineer review comments will be made available on the electronic submittal service website for downloading. Contractor will receive e-mail notice of completed review. E. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. F. Contractor may receive submittal information from subcontractors and suppliers via any of the following options: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 12.137 01 3300-2 1. Electronic (PDF) submittals provided to the Contractor via the electronic submittal service website. 2. Electronic (PDF) submittals provided to the Contractor via e-mail. 3. Paper submittals provided by subcontractors and suppliers shall be forwarded to Scanning Service for electronic scanning and conversion to PDF format. G. Printed Submittals: 1. Provide two printed sets of shop drawings for structural framing in addition to electronic submittals. 2. Submit paper copies of any reviewed submittals not electronically transmitted, at project closeout for record purposes. 3.03 PROCESSING SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 3000 for additional requirements. B. Attach a copy of the Project Transmittal Form to all submittals. C. Group submittals related to building elements or systems together for transmittal in accordance with submittal schedule. D. Only specified submittals will be processed by the Architect. 3.04 SUBMITTAL PREPARATION A. To aid in tracking and filing, each submittal shall contain the following information: 1. Project name and project number, 2. Date submitted, 3. Description of the item submitted, 4. The specification section reference number, and 5. A consecutive submittal number. B. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. The purpose of the submittal shall be one of the following: For approval, For information only, Resubmittal. C. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. D. Provide space for Architect's submittal stamp. 3.05 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A. Only submittals which have been reviewed and stamped by the Contractor shall be forwarded to the Architect. When the Contractor determines that submittals do not meet contract requirements, return them to the originator for correction or modification as appropriate. B. The purpose of the Architect's review / approval is to check submittals for conformance with the information and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. C. Upon review by the Architect, the submittal shall be stamped with the status of the review as: 1. Approved, 2. Approved as noted, 3. Approved as noted / resubmit, or 4. Rejected / resubmit. D. Submittals which require no action or are not subject to review, will not be returned. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS 12.137 01 3300-3 SECTION 01 3343.03 - LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT GOALS A. This project has been designed to achieve the LEED Certified (minimum 40 points) rating as defined in the LEED(r) for Commercial Interiors, 2009 Edition. B. Many of the LEED credits can be achieved only through intelligent design of the project and are beyond the control of the Contractor. However, certain credits relate to the products and procedures used for construction. Therefore, the full cooperation of the Contractor and subcontractors is essential to achieving final certification. C. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the relevant requirements and provide the necessary information and instruction to all subcontractors and installers. D. Since Contractor and subcontractors may not be familiar with LEED requirements, this section includes a summary of the products and procedures intended to achieve LEED credits. 1. Some credits are marked PREREQUISITE; these must be achieved regardless of the level of certification; many are dependent on proper performance by Contractor and subcontractors. 2. Other credits involve quantifying percentages by weight and cost; these require careful recordkeeping and reporting by the Contractor. 3. See www.usgbc.org for more information. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Sections that include requirements intended to achieve LEED credits include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Section 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality Controls: 1. Contractor's IAQ management plan and construction procedures; EQ Credit 3. C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Overall project requirements for: 1. Reused products; MR Credit 3. 2. Recycled content; MR Credit 4. 3. Regionally- sourced products; MR Credit 5. a. Contractor is not required to provide any particular minimum percentage of regionally- sourced products; however, to collect the information necessary to determine whether these credits can be achieved, Contractor is required to submit the LEED New Product Source Form for every product for which application for payment is made. D. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: List of product categories having VOC content restrictions, evidence required, and reporting requirements. E. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Construction and demolition waste management; MR Credit 2. F. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance and operation manuals for commissioned systems; EA Credit 2. G. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: 1. Fundamental commissioning; EA PREREQUISITE 1. 2. Demonstration of commissioned systems and training of personnel: EA Credit 2. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. LEED Rating System: LEED -CI 2009 edition. B. Required: Achievement of this credit is essential for certification of this project. C. Not Required: Achievement of this credit is not expected or not possible for this project. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY 12.137 01 3343.03 - 1 1.04 INFORMATION SOURCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE ); 1791 Tullie Circle, NE, Atlanta, GA 30329. Tel: (404) 636 -8400. Fax: (404) 321 -5478. www.ashrae.org. B. Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD); 939 Ellis Street, San Francisco, California 94109. Tel: (415) 771 -6000. www.baaqmd.gov. C. Center for Resource Solutions (CRS); Presidio Building, 49 P.O. Box 29512, San Francisco, CA 94129. Tel: (415) 561 -2100. Fax: (415) 561 -2105. www.resource- solutions.org or www.green - e.org. D. Green Seal; 1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Suite 827, Washington, DC 20036 -5525. Tel: (202) 872 -6400. Fax: (202) 872 -4324. www.greenseal.org. E. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD); 21865 E. Copley Drive, Diamond Bar, CA 91765. Tel: (909) 396 -2000. www.agmd.gov. F. U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC); 1015 18th Street, NW, Suite 805, Washington, DC 20036. Tel: (202) 82 -USGBC or (202) 828 -7422. Fax: (202) 828 -5110. www.usgbc.org. PART 2 LEED SUBMITTALS 2.01 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for additional submittal procedures. B. Submit LEED submittals and reports to Architect, unless otherwise indicated. C. LEED Submittal Forms: Procedures for using the forms. 1. 01 3345 - LEED Material Cost Summary; to report total material only project cost for computations necessary for MR Credits 3,4,5,6, and 7. 2. 01 3345.01 - LEED Reused Product Form; for documenting type, source, and cost of reused products; MR Credits 3.1, 3.2, 5.1, and 5.2. 3. 01 3346 - LEED Concrete - Containing Product List, for documentation of concrete materials and products used on project 4. 01 3346.01 - LEED Concrete Product Submittal Summary Form, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, cost and weight for individual Concrete products. 5. 01 3347 - LEED Metal- Containing Product List, for documentation of steel and other metals used on project. 6. 01 3347.01 - LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, cost and weight for individual Metal products.. 7. 01 3348 - LEED Wood- Containing Product List, for documentation of wood and wood -based products used on project. 8. 01 3348.01 - LEED Wood- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, FCS documentation, VOC content, certification of no added urea - formaldehyde, and cost and weight for individual Wood products. 9. 01 3349 - LEED General Product List, for documentation of products used on project. 10. 01 3349.01 - LEED General Product Submittal Summary Form, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, VOC content, flooring certifications and cost and weight for individual General products 11. 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification; for each installer to certify compliance with VOC requirements for adhesives and sealants, including duct sealers, and to certify no use of urea - formaldehyde- containing wood products; EQ Credits 4.1 and 4.4. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY 12.137 01 3343.03 - 2 PART 3 CREDIT SUMMARY 3.01 SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS): 17 POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A. SS Credit 1 - Required points - Site Selection. 1. The project is located in a building that meets the criteria for the number of points indicated, using the options for Heat Island Reduction - Roof, Water Efficient Landscaping - 50% Reduction, and Water Efficient Landscaping - No Potable Use or No Irrigation. B. SS Credit 2 - Required - 6 points - Development Density and Community Connectivity. 1. The project is on a site that meets the criteria for Option 2, Community Connectivity. C. SS Credit 3.1 - Required - 6 points - Alternative Transportation: Public Transportation Access. 1. The project is on a site that meets the criteria for Option 2, Bus Stop Proximity. D. SS Credit 3.3 - Required - 2 points - Alternative Transportation: Parking Availability. 1. No modifications to the facility are required. 3.02 WATER EFFICIENCY (WE): 0 POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A. WE Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Water Use Reduction, 20% Reduction. 1. Appropriate high efficiency and /or waterless fixtures are specified in Section 22 4000. B. WE Credit 1.1 - Undecided - 6 points - Water Use Reduction, 30% Reduction. 1. Same solutions as for WE Prerequisite 1, but greater reduction. 3.03 ENERGY & ATMOSPHERE (EA): 13 POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A. EA Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning. B. EA Prerequisite 2 - Required - No points - Minimum Energy Performance. C. EA Prerequisite 3 - Required - No points - Fundamental Refrigerant Management. D. EA Credit 1.1 - Required points - Optimize Energy Performance, Lighting Power. 1. The design meets the criteria for the number of points indicated. E. EA Credit 1.2 - Required points - Optimize Energy Performance, Lighting Controls. 1. The design meets the criteria for the number of points indicated. F. EA Credit 1.3 - Undecided - 5 points - Optimize Energy Performance, HVAC. 1. The design meets the criteria for the number of points indicated. G. EA Credit 1.4 - 4 points - Optimize Energy Performance, Equipment & Appliances. H. EA Credit 2 - Undecided - 5 points - Enhanced Commissioning. 1. The commissioning authority's responsibilities with regard to design phase review, review of Contractor's submittals, and post- occupancy review are specified in Section 01 9114, which is included for Contractor's information only. 2. Contractor's responsibilities for post- occupancy commissioning are specified in Section 01 9113. 3. Responsibilities for preparation of operation and maintenance manuals for commissioned systems are specified in Section 01 7800. 4. Responsibilities for demonstrating commissioned systems and conducting training of personnel are specified in Section 01 7900. 3.04 MATERIALS & RESOURCES: 4 POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A. MR Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Storage & Collection of Recyclables. B. MR Credit 1.1 - Required - 1 point - Tenant Space, Long Term Commitment. C. MR Credit 2.1 - Required - 1 point - Construction Waste Management, Divert 50% from Disposal. 1. Construction procedures and measurement of diverted waste are specified in Section 01 7419. This section requires the Contractor to perform the measurement and computation. 2. Waste prevention and disposal procedures specific to certain types of work are specified in many sections. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY 12.137 01 3343.03 - 3 D. MR Credit 2.2 - Undecided - 1 point - Construction Waste Management, Divert 75% from Disposal. 1. Same as for MR Credit 2.1, but increased quantity. E. MR Credit 3.3 - Undecided - 1 point - Materials Reuse, 30% of Furniture and Furnishings. 1. Furniture and furnishings are not included in the construction contract. F. MR Credit 4.1 - Required - 1 point - Recycled Content: 10% (post- consumer plus 1/2 pre- consumer). 1. The definition of recycled content for the purposes of the contract documents is included in Section 01 6000; qualifying products do not include plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or communications equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, or wiring. 2. This project contains many steel- containing products; submission of a complete list of all metal- containing products will be required, with documentation showing steel mill source and mill process, allowing computation by using industry- averages for recycled content; the forms are specified in Section 01 3516. 3. Concrete using recycled materials such as fly ash to replace Portland cement as much as possible while retaining strength and design requirements is specified in: a. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 4. Contractor's reporting and measurement requirements are specified in Section 01 3515 and Section 01 6000; calculation of project totals is not the responsibility of Contractor. G. MR Credit 4.2 - Undecided - 1 point - Recycled Content: 20% (post- consumer plus 'h pre- consumer). 1. Same as for MR Credit 4.1, but increased quantity. H. MR Credit 5.1 - Required - 1 point - Regional Materials: 20% Manufactured Regionally. 1. For the purposes of the contract documents, the term "regionally- sourced" is used instead of "regional materials" and is defined in Section 01 6000 in the same way as for this credit. 2. Contractor's reporting and measurement requirements are specified in Section 01 3515 and Section 01 6000; calculation of project totals is not the responsibility of Contractor. I. MR Credit 5.2 - Undecided - 1 point - Regional Materials: 10% Extracted and Manufactured Regionally. 1. Same as for MR Credit 5.1, but for an additional 10 %. 3.05 INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY: 8 POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A. EQ Prerequisite 1 - Required - No points - Minimum IAQ Performance. 1. The building ventilation has been designed to meet the minimum requirements of ASHRAE 62.1 -2004. B. EQ Prerequisite 2 - Required - No points - Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control. 1. Owner intends to prohibit smoking in the building. 2. Exterior smoking areas are located at least 25 feet away from entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows. C. EQ Credit 3.1 - Undecided - 1 point - Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction. 1. Good construction procedures intended to prevent future problems are specified in Section 01 5721. D. EQ Credit 4.1 - Required - 1 point - Low - Emitting Materials, Adhesives & Sealants. 1. Product criteria and reporting requirements for VOC- restricted products are specified in Section 01 6116. 2. The following products are used in this project and will comply with the specified VOC restrictions: 3. Firestopping sealants; specified in Section 07 8400. 4. Architectural joint sealants; specified in Section 07 9005. 5. Duct sealers and sealants; specified in Section 23 3100. a. All adhesives used on the project, whether explicitly specified or not, are considered VOC- restricted products. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY 12.137 01 3343.03 - 4 E. EQ Credit 4.2 - Required - 1 point - Low - Emitting Materials, Paints & Coatings. 1. Product criteria and reporting requirements for VOC- restricted products are specified in Section 01 6116. 2. Paints and stains are specified in Section 09 9000. a. Water -based paints or solvent -based paints with VOC content meeting the credit criteria are used for all interior opaque applications. b. Other coatings, such as stains and clear finishes, are specified to meet the most stringent of federal EPA, state, or local criteria. F. EQ Credit 4.3 - Required - 1 point - Low - Emitting Materials, Flooring Systems. 1. Product criteria and reporting requirements for VOC- restricted products are specified in Section 01 6116. 2. The following products are used in this project and will comply with the specified VOC restrictions: a. Resilient flooring and base; specified in Section 09 6500. 3. Carpet tile; specified in Section 09 6813. 4. Adhesives used in connection with carpet systems. G. EQ Credit 4.4 - Required - 1 point - Low - Emitting Materials, Composite Wood & Agrifiber Products. 1. Product criteria and reporting requirements for VOC- restricted products are specified in Section 01 6116. 2. The products covered by this credit include ONLY particleboard, plywood, medium density fiberboard (MDF), wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door cores, and laminating adhesives used on -site or in the shop. 3. A project -wide prohibition on use of these products if they contain added urea - formaldehyde is specified. H. EQ Credit 4.5 - Undecided - 1 point - Low - Emitting Materials, Furniture. 1. All applicable furniture will meet the criteria but is not included in the construction contract. EQ Credit 7.1 - Required - 1 point - Thermal Comfort: Design. 1. The overall design solution is implemented in the drawings and many sections of the specifications. EQ Credit 7.2 - Required - 1 point - Thermal Comfort: Verification. 1. Owner's O &M program will address procedures for identifying and implementing corrective actions. 2. A survey of building occupants will be conducted by Owner within 6 to 18 months after building occupancy to determine level of comfort; Owner will develop a plan for corrective action if more than 20 percent of occupants report dissatisfaction with thermal comfort in building. 3.06 REGIONAL PRIORITY (RP): 3 POINTS TO BE ACHIEVED. A. RP Credit 1.1 - Required - 1 point - Region Specific Environmental Priority: SSc3.3 Parking Availability. B. RP Credit 1.2 - Required - 1 point - Region Specific Environmental Priority: SSc2 Development Density and Community Connectivity. C. RP Credit 1.3 - SSc1 op. 2 path 5 Roof Heat Island Effect. D. RP Credit 1.4 - Undecided - 1 point - Region Specific Environmental Priority: MR2 Construction Waste Management - 75% Waste Diversion. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED -CI 2009 REQUIREMENTS AND CREDIT SUMMARY 12.137 01 3343.03 - 5 SECTION 01 3344 - LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 1.01 PURPOSE A. These forms are for the Contractor's use in submitting documentation to be used to determine whether particular credits have been achieved. The cooperation of subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers is required. B. These forms apply to the following LEED Credits: 1. MR Credit 3 - Materials Reuse. 2. MR Credit 4 - Recycled Content. 3. MR Credit 5 - Regional Materials. 4. MR Credit 6 - Rapidly Renewable Materials. 5. MR Credit 7 - Certified Wood. 6. IEQ Credit 4 - Low - Emitting Materials. 1.02 FORMS A. 01 3345 - LEED Material Cost Summary Form: Certification by Contractor, to report total material -only project cost for computations for MR Credits 3,4,5,6, and 7 B. 01 3345.01 - LEED Reused Product Form: Certification by Contractor, for documenting type, source, and cost of reused products; MR Credits 3.1, 3.2, 5.1, and 5.2. C. 01 3346 - LEED Concrete - Containing Product List: Certification by Contractor, for documentation of concrete materials and products used on project D. 01 3346.01- LEED Concrete - Containing Product Submittal Summary Form: Data certification by manufacturer of product; cost and quantity certification by Contractor, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, cost and weight for individual Concrete products and components. E. 01 3347 - LEED Metal- Containing Product List: Certification by Contractor, for documentation of steel and other metals used on project. F. 01 3347.01 - LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form: Data certification by manufacturer of product; cost and quantity certification by Contractor, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, cost and weight for individual Metal products. G. 01 3348 - LEED Wood- Containing Product List: Certification by Contractor, for documentation of wood and wood -based products used on project. H. 01 3348.01- LEED Wood- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form: Data certification by manufacturer of product; cost and quantity certification by Contractor, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, FCS documentation, VOC content, certification of no added urea - formaldehyde, and cost and weight for individual Wood products. I. 01 3349 - LEED General Product List: Certification by Contractor, for documentation of products used on project. J. 01 3349.01 - LEED General Product Submittal Summary Form: Data certification by manufacturer of product; cost and quantity certification by Contractor, for documentation of Recycled material content, Regional Material locations, VOC content, flooring certifications and cost and weight for individual General products. K. 01 3349.02- LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification: Certification by each installer working on project regardless of product type, for each installer to certify compliance with VOC requirements for adhesives and sealants, including duct sealers, and to certify no use of urea - formaldehyde- containing wood products; EQ Credits 4.1 and 4.4. 1.03 PROCEDURES A. All LEED submittal forms are to be submitted by Contractor; certifications are to be made by indicated party. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 12.137 01 3344-1 B. Where a LEED Submittal is called for, fill out and submit the appropriate form. 1. Fill out one form for each different brand name product and each different manufacturer of a lot of commodity products. 2. Where required attachments are specified, attach the documentation to the back of the form. C. Each form must be signed by the entity capable of certifying the information. 1. Certification signatures must be made by an officer of the company. 2. For products, certification must be made by the manufacturer not the supplier. 3. For custom fabricated products, certification by the fabricator is acceptable. D. Submit the completed forms in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, as information submittals. 1. Give each form a unique submittal number. 2. Do not combine LEED forms with product data or shop drawing submittals. E. Submit forms applicable to work for which application for payment is being made, either prior to or concurrent with application for payment; payment will not be made until relevant forms have been submitted. F. For work covered by multiple applications for payment, the initial submittal of a LEED form is sufficient for subsequent applications unless the nature of the product has changed. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED SUBMITTAL FORMS 12.137 01 3344-2 SECTION 01 3345 - LEED MATERIAL COST SUMMARY FORM 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM A. Identification Project Name: Project No.: Architect: B. This form applies to the following LEED Credits: 1. MR Credit 4 - Recycled Content. 2. MR Credit 5 - Regional Materials. C. Procedure: 1. Because the above listed credits require computations based on the material costs for the project, the Contractor is required to submit the following cost breakdown, in addition to any cost breakdown specified elsewhere. 2. Costs are to be material costs excluding labor, overhead, and profit, but including delivery, storage, and handling charges. Revise cost summary whenever materials actually installed change due to contract modifications or Contractor preference. 3. Do not include costs for Mechanical, Electrical, or Plumbing components, and specialty items such as elevators and possibly kitchen equipment, classroom equipment, office equipment and furniture. 1.02 CERTIFICATION $ TOTAL COST OF ALL MATERIALS FOR PROJECT DELIVERED TO SITE IN DIVISIONS 3 -10, 31, 32 $ TOTAL COST OF ALL MATERIALS FOR PROJECT DELIVERED TO SITE IN DIVISION 11 $ TOTAL COST OF ALL MATERIALS FOR PROJECT DELIVERED TO SITE IN DIVISION 12 $ TOTAL COST OF ALL MATERIALS FOR PROJECT DELIVERED TO SITE IN DIVISION 13 $ TOTAL COST OF ALL MATERIALS FOR PROJECT DELIVERED TO SITE IN DIVISION 14 1.03 CERTIFIED BY: (GENERAL CONTRACTOR) Print Name: Signature: Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED MATERIAL COST SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3345-1 SECTION 01 3345.01 - LEED REUSED PRODUCT FORM 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM A. Identification: 1. Project Name: 2. Project No.: 3. Architect: 4. Product Name: (brand name, model number, etc.) 5. Source Firm: www. a. Contact: tel: 6. Supplier /Sub: www. a. Contact: tel: 7. Applicable Specification Section Number(s) B. This form applies to LEED MR Credits 3.1 and 3.2. 1.02 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION A. Product Description: B. Explain source: C. City /County, State: D. Country: E. Distance From Project: F. CERTIFIED BY: (Source Firm) 1. Print Name: 2. Title: (officer of company), Date: 1.03 COST CERTIFICATION A. Unit Cost: $ per (unit); No. of Units Installed: B. OR (enter cost either above or below, not both) C. Total Installed Material Cost: $ D. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED REUSED PRODUCT FORM 12.137 01 3345.01 - 1 SECTION 01 3346 - LEED CONCRETE - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 1.01 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Name: B. Project Location: C. Project No.: D. Architect: 1.02 CONCRETE - CONTAINING PRODUCTS A. Concrete - containing products are those made of B. Procedure: For each concrete - containing product provided for this project, submit "LEED Concrete Product Submittal Summary Form ". At minimum, submit for the following products. C. Permanent Concrete - Containing Product List: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Section 03 4100 - Precast Structural Concrete 3. Section 03 4500 - Precast Architectural Concrete 4. Section - 5. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry a. Concrete Masonry Units 6. Section 04 7200 - Cast Stone Masonry a. Cast Stone Window Sills 7. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving 8. Section 32 1316 - Roller- Compacted Concrete Paving 9. Section D. Temporary Concrete - Containing Product List: 1. Section - 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION A. _ I certify that there are no other concrete - containing products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost. B. _ I certify that there are no other temporary facilities or construction using concrete - containing products that exceed 1 percent of the total material cost. C. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF DOCUMENT MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED CONCRETE - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3346-1 SECTION 01 3346.01 - LEED CONCRETE PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM RESPONDENT INFORMATION NAME AND TITLE COMPANY Name Phone Number Email Address BACK -UP INFORMATION SOURCE (Attach substantiating documentation from the Manufacturer) PRE -CAST PRODUCT INFORMATION TYPE OF PRODUCT SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER NUMBER OF ITEMS OF THIS TYPE COST OF PRODUCT MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR NAME PERCENT of Concrete in Product Cost of Concrete in Product Mass of Cementitious Material in Concrete RECYCLED CONTENT AND REGIONAL MATERIAL INFORMATION Location 1 of FINAL MANUFACTURE PERCENT of material from this location (by weight) Location 1 a of SOURCE MATERIAL PERCENT by weight of Source Material from this location MASS of Slag and Fly Ash content from this Source CAST -IN -PLACE MATERIAL INFORMATION TYPE OF MATERIAL SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER COST OF PRODUCT VOLUME of Material MASS of Cementitious Material in Concrete RECYCLED CONTENT AND REGIONAL MATERIAL INFORMATION Location 1 of FINAL MANUFACTURE PERCENT of product from this location (by weight) Location 1 a of SLAG and FLY ASH Acquisition PERCENT of Source Material from this location (by weight) MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED CONCRETE PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3346.01 - 1 Acquisition location weight) Acquisition Location 1 b of other CEMENTITIOUS Material PERCENT by weight of Source Material from this Location 1 c of Fine AGGREGATE MaterialAcquisition PERCENT of Source Material from this location (by Location 1d of Coarse AGGREGATE Material Location 1 e of ADMIXTURE MATERIAL Acquisition PERCENT of Source Material from this location (by weight) (Provide attachments as needed to expand the documentation above to meet the needs of a particular material) END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED CONCRETE PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3346.01 - 2 SECTION 01 3347 - LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 1.01 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Name: B. Project Location: C. Project No.: D. Architect: E. This form applies to LEED Credits MR 4.1 and 4.2 (recycled content). 1.02 METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCTS A. Rationale: Although all steel contains reused steel, steel products often cannot be traced to a certain mill lot and, even when they can, the mill's certificate usually does not indicate the proportion of new to reused steel. B. Procedure: Determine recycled steel content by estimating the proportion of reused steel based on trade association surveys of mill practices multiplied by the quantity of steel by weight in the product. 1. Referenced Mill Practices Survey: See the current edition of Steel Recycling Institute "Steel Takes LEED with Recycled Content," at http: / /www. recycle - steel. org /PDFs /leed/ Steel %20Takes %20LEED_June06.pdf. 2. If the mill source cannot be identified, the product will be considered to have the lowest reused steel content reported in referenced mill practices survey. C. Aluminum can significantly contribute to the use of recycled content material and regional manufactured and sourced material. D. For each metal- containing product provided for this project, submit "LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form ". At minimum, submit for the following products. Initial those for which the material content form is attached. E. Metal- Containing Product List: 1. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Concrete reinforcement (bars, mats, wire, mesh), anchor plates. 2. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel framing members, plates. 3. Section 05 2100 - Steel Joist Framing: Bar joists and girders. 4. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Steel decking. 5. Section 05 4000 - Light gauge steel framing and trusses. 6. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel fabrications made from rolled shapes, including equipment supports. 7. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Steel stairs and ladders. 8. Section 05 5213 - Pipe and Tube Railings Steel handrails and railings. 9. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 10. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames. 11. Section 08 1116 - Aluminum Doors and Frames 12. Section 08 3613 - Sectional Doors 13. Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 14. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows 15. Section 08 6200 - Unit Skylights 16. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Non -load- bearing steel framing (studs, ceiling framing, shaftwall) 17. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended ceiling grid. 18. Section 10 2113.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments: Steel toilet and shower compartments. 19. Section 10 5100 - Lockers: Steel lockers. 20. Section ( 21. Section 12 9313- Bicycle Racks 22. Section MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3347-1 1.03 CAST IRON - CONTAINING PRODUCTS A. Rationale: Cast iron is considered 100 percent recycled. B. For each homogeneous cast iron product, report total cost on "LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form ". C. Cast Iron Product List: 1. _ Cast iron pipe. 2. _ Cast iron castings. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION A. _ I certify that there are no other steel- containing products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost less material cost attributed to mechanical and electrical. B. _ I certify that there are no other cast iron - containing products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost less material cost attributed to mechanical and electrical. C. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF DOCUMENT MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3347-2 SECTION 01 3347.01 - LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM RESPONDENT INFORMATION NAME AND TITLE COMPANY Name Phone Number Email Address BACK -UP INFORMATION SOURCE (Attach substantiating documentation from the Manufacturer) PRODUCT INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION TYPE of Product SPECIFICATION Section Number NUMBER of Items of this TYPE COST of Product SALVAGED MATERIAL INFORMATION PERCENT of Salvaged Material (by weight) RECYCLED CONTENT AND REGIONAL MATERIAL INFORMATION Location 1 of FINAL MANUFACTURE source Location (by weight) source Location (by weight) PERCENT of material from this location (by weight) Location 1 a of SOURCE MATERIAL PERCENT of Location 1 MATERIAL from this PERCENT of Post - Consumer Recycled content PERCENT of Pre - Consumer Recycled content Location 1 b of SOURCE MATERIAL PERCENT of Location 1 MATERIAL from this PERCENT of Post - Consumer Recycled content PERCENT of Pre - Consumer Recycled content Location 2 of FINAL MANUFACTURE PERCENT of material from this location (by weight) Location 2a of SOURCE MATERIAL MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3347.01 - 1 source Location (by weight) source Location (by weight) PERCENT of Location 2 MATERIAL from this PERCENT of Post - Consumer Recycled content PERCENT of Pre - Consumer Recycled content Location 2b of SOURCE MATERIAL PERCENT of Location 2 MATERIAL from this PERCENT of Post - Consumer Recycled content PERCENT of Pre - Consumer Recycled content (Provide attachments as needed to expand the documentation above to meet the needs of a particular material) END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED METAL - CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3347.01 - 2 SECTION 01 3348 - LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 1.01 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Name: B. Project Location: C. Project No.: D. Architect: 1.02 WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCTS A. Wood- containing products are those made of solid wood, wood chip, or wood fiber, or containing components made of solid wood, wood chip, or wood fiber. B. Procedure: For each wood - containing product provided for this project, submit "LEED Wood- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form ". At minimum, submit for the following products. C. Permanent Wood- Containing Product Lists: 1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry a. Wood framing, furring, and supports b. Blocking, curbing, and nailers c. Sheathing d. Decking 2. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry a. Molding and trim 3. Section 06 4100 - Custom Cabinets a. Particleboard substrates 4. Section - 5. Section - 6. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors a. Particleboard core and structural composite core types 7. Section 08 5200 - Wood Windows 8. Section - 9. Section 09 6429 - Wood Strip Gymnasium Flooring 10. Section 09 8400 - Acoustic Room Components a. Tectum 11. Section 12 3410 - Modular Plastic Laminate Casework a. Particleboard substrates 12. Section 12 3600- Countertops 13. Section - 14. Section 12 6613 - Telescoping Bleachers a. Plywood decks and risers D. Temporary Wood- Containing Product List: 1. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming a. Concrete formwork and formwork supports 2. Section - 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION A. _ I certify that there are no other wood - containing products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost. B. _ I certify that there are no other temporary facilities or construction using wood - containing products that exceed 1 percent of the total material cost. C. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3348-1 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF DOCUMENT MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3348-2 SECTION 01 3348.01 - LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM RESPONDENT INFORMATION NAME AND TITLE COMPANY Name Phone Number Email Address BACK -UP INFORMATION SOURCE (Attach substantiating documentation from the Manufacturer) GENERALPRODUCT INFORMATION SALVAGED MATERIAL INFORMATION TYPE OF PRODUCT SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER NUMBER OF ITEMS OF THIS TYPE COST OF PRODUCT PERCENT by weight of Salvaged Material RECYCLED CONTENT AND REGIONAL MATERIAL INFORMATION this source this source Location 1 of FINAL MANUFACTURE PERCENT of Material from this location (by weight) Location 1 a of SOURCE MATERIAL PERCENT of Post - Consumer Recycled content from PERCENT of Pre - Consumer Recycled content from RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIAL INFORMATION TYPE of Material or Component that is Rapidly Renewable weight) FSC INFORMATION VOC CONTENT INFORMATION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 PERCENT of Product that is Rapidly Renewable (by PERCENT of Product that contains Wood PERCENT of wood that is FSC certified VOC content of any adhesives used LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT 01 3348.01 - 1 NO ADDED UREA - FORMALDEHYDE CERTIFY that this product contains no added urea - formaldehyde (Provide attachments as needed to expand the documentation above to meet the needs of a particular material) END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED WOOD- CONTAINING PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3348.01 - 2 SECTION 01 3349 - LEED GENERAL PRODUCT LIST 1.01 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Name: B. Project Location: C. Project No.: D. Architect: 1.02 LEED GENERAL PRODUCTS A. General products for the purpose of LEED are those made of materials that contribute to the following credits but are not covered by the Concrete Product List, the Metal- Containing Product List, or the Wood- Containing Product List. 1. MR Credit 3 - Materials Reuse. 2. MR Credit 4 - Recycled Content. 3. MR Credit 5 - Regional Materials. 4. MR Credit 6 - Rapidly Renewable Materials. 5. IEQ Credit 4 - Low - Emitting Materials. B. Procedure: For each new product provided for this project, submit "LEED General Product Submittal Summary Form ". At minimum, submit for the following products. C. General (New) Product List: 1. Section 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing 2. Section 07 2100 -Thermal Insulation 3. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing a. TPO Membrane - Mechanically Attached b. PVC Membrane - Fully Adhered 4. Section 07 8400- Fire Stopping 5. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers 6. Section 08 6200 - Unit Skylights 7. Section 08 8000- Glazing 8. Section 08 9500- Translucent Insulated Daylighting 9. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies a. Gypsum Board Panels 10. Section - 11. Section 09 3000 -Tiling 12. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings 13. Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring a. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile b. Rubber Floor Tile c. Linoleum 14. Section 09 6813 - Tile Carpeting a. Carpet Tile - Fully Adhered 15. Section 09 8400 - Acoustic Room Components a. Tectum 16. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating a. Interior painting b. Exterior high - performance coating 17. Section 10 2113 - Plastic Toilet Compartments 18. Section 12 3600 - Countertops 19. Section 12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats 20. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving 21. Section 32 9223 - Sodding 22. Section 32 9300- Plants MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED GENERAL PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3349-1 23. Section D. Temporary General Product List: 1. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls a. Barricades and enclosures 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION A. _ I certify that there are no other general (new) products used on this project that exceed 1 percent of total material cost. B. _ I certify that there are no other temporary facilities or construction using general products that exceed 1 percent of the total material cost. C. CERTIFIED BY: (Contractor) 1. Print Name: 2. Signature: 3. Title: (officer of company), Date: END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED GENERAL PRODUCT LIST 12.137 01 3349-2 SECTION 01 3349.01 - LEED GENERAL PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM RESPONDENT INFORMATION NAME AND TITLE COMPANY Name Phone Number Email Address BACK -UP INFORMATION SOURCE (Attach substantiating documentation from the Manufacturer) GENERAL PRODUCT INFORMATION SALVAGED MATERIAL INFORMATION TYPE OF PRODUCT SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER NUMBER OF ITEMS OF THIS TYPE COST OF PRODUCT MANUFACTURER OR VENDOR NAME PERCENT of Salvaged Material (by weight) RECYCLED CONTENT AND REGIONAL MATERIAL INFORMATION Location 1 of FINAL MANUFACTURE this source this source PERCENT of material from this location (by weight) Location 1 a of SOURCE MATERIAL PERCENT of Post - Consumer Recycled content from PERCENT of Pre - Consumer Recyled content from RAPIDLY RENEWABLE MATERIAL INFORMATION TYPE of Material or Component that is Rapidly Renewable (by weight) VOC CONTENT INFORMATION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SUMMARY FORM 12.137 PERCENT of Product that is Rapidly Renewable VOC content of Product and /or any adhesives used Intended Product Use LEED GENERAL PRODUCT SUBMITTAL 01 3349.01 - 1 FLOORING CERTIFICATIONS Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Certification FloorScore Certification (Provide attachments as needed to expand the documentation above to meet the needs of a particular material) END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED GENERAL PRODUCT SUBMITTAL SUMMARY FORM 12.137 01 3349.01 - 2 SECTION 01 3349.02 - LEED PROHIBITED CONTENT INSTALLER CERTIFICATION 1.01 LEED SUBMITTAL FORM 1.02 A. This form applies to the following LEED credits: 1. Credit IEQ 4.1; VOC content of field - installed adhesives and sealants. 2. Credit IEQ 4.4; added - urea - formaldehyde content of composite wood and agrifiber products, defined as particleboard, plywood, medium density fiberboard, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door cores, and laminating adhesives; applies to manufacturers /suppliers and installers. B. Procedure: 1. Because installers are allowed and directed to choose accessory materials suitable for the applicable installation, each installer of work on this project is required to certify that his /their use of these particular materials complies with the contract documents and to provide documentation showing that the products used do not contain the prohibited content. 2. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are defined by the U.S. EPA and state and local regulations applicable to this project. See Contract Documents for minimum criteria. A. Adhesives: I certify that the installation work of my firm on this project has not required the use of any adhesives. B. OR (certify either the above or the below, not both) C. Adhesives: I certify that my firm has NOT installed any adhesive with VOC content exceeding that specified in Section 01600 on this project; product data and MSDS sheets for all adhesives used, whether specified or not, are attached. D. Joint Sealants: I certify that the installation work of my firm on this project has not required the use of any gunnable or pourable joint sealants. E. OR (certify either the above or the below, not both) F. Joint Sealants: I certify that my firm has NOT installed any joint sealant with VOC content exceeding that specified in Section 07 9005 on this project; product data and MSDS sheets for all joint sealants used, whether specified or not, are attached. G. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: I certify that the work of my firm on this project has not required the use of any composite wood or agrifiber products, as defined above. H. OR (certify either the above or the below, not both) I. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: I certify that the composite wood and agrifiber products, as defined above, furnished or installed by my firm DO NOT contain any ADDED urea - formaldehyde binder; product data and MSDS sheets for products used, whether specified or not, are attached. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LEED PROHIBITED CONTENT INSTALLER CERTIFICATION 12.137 01 3349.02 - 1 SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Mock -ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00 3100 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01 4313 - Quality Assurance Inspections and Testing. D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialist and responsible officer. B. Test Reports: After each test /inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. C. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation /application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start -up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 4000-1 F. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Where referenced standards in individual specification sections are listed, the references included in those reference standards shall be incorporated into these specifications as if specifically listed. G. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK -UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 4000-2 B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Accepted mock -ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock -up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock -up and clear area when directed to do so. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Submit reports of all tests /inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing /Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested /inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested /inspected. c. To facilitate tests /inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing /inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re- testing required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re- testing required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 4000-3 G. Re- testing required because of non - conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start -up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 4000-4 SECTION 01 5110 - TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING AND COOLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. System(s) for conditioning interior spaces during construction. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. C. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. D. Section 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality Controls. E. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternates: See Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for description of alternatives affecting this section. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of temporary climate control equipment with size, location and installation of temporary utility services. a. Test electrical grounding for compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Coordinate layout and installation of temporary climate control equipment with finish trades. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least two weeks prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide temporary facilities required by Work progress and the following: 1. Plastering and finishing gypsum board assemblies: a. Refer to Section 09 2116 for additional requirements. b. Provide temporary climate control necessary to maintain dry bulb temperatures between 55 and 80 degrees F with less than 50 percent relative humidity during installation, taping and curing of joint compound. 2. Curing and drying concrete slabs: a. Refer to Sections 03 3000 and 03 3931 for additional requirements. b. Concrete slabs shall be properly cured and at least 45 days old before beginning aggressive drying. c. Provide temporary climate control necessary to remove excess moisture and reduce emission rate to levels acceptable to finish flooring manufacturers. d. During slab drying, maintain relative humidity below 30 percent with a humidity ratio below 30 grains per lb of air. e. Allow for moisture testing of the slab to be performed at least 60 days prior to installation of floor coverings to permit sufficient drying time should excessive moisture levels exist. 3. Installing hardwood flooring and finished millwork: a. Refer to Sections 06 2000, 09 6429 and 09 6566 for additional requirements. b. Provide temporary climate control necessary to stabilize moisture content in hardwoods prior to installation. Comply with moisture level recommendations of manufacturer and USDA Forrest Products Laboratory - Wood Flooring Moisture Map. 4. Painting and coating: a. Refer to Sections 09 9000 and 09 9600 for additional requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING AND COOLING 12.137 01 5110 - 1 b. Provide temporary climate control necessary to control condensation and maintain satisfactory conditions recommended by products manufacturers for surface preparation and coatings application and curing . c. During paint and coating application, maintain dew point temperature in the space at least 10 degrees F below temperature of surface being painted. d. When dry abrasive blasting carbon steel surfaces, maintain dew point temperature in the space at least 17 degrees F below the temperature of the surface being prepared. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data for Temporary HVAC System to include: 1. Climate Control Equipment. 2. Temperature and humidity controls. 3. Duct, duct accessories, pipe, and piping accessories materials and construction. C. Shop Drawings: Design layouts and descriptive data showing: 1. Equipment layout and duct and /or pipe routing. 2. Staging and Sequencing layouts. 3. Enclosure and barricade construction. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with regulatory agency standard, State of Iowa for required temporary facilities not specified herein. B. Design Standards: Follow Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. Requirements for temporary facilities are minimum standards. Provide additional facilities as required for proper execution of Work and to meet responsibilities for protection of persons and property. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." 3. Desiccant Wheels: Bacteriostatic and non - toxic, manufactured under ISO 9001 certification. Glass fibers which form support matrix shall be made from uniform continuous strands larger than five microns in diameter which are not considered a possible health risk by International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC). Wheel shall be tested according to ASTM E84 -90 (Standard Test Method for Surface Burning of Building Materials) and shall achieve a flame spread index of 0 and a smoke developed index of 10. 4. Dry bulb temperature and relative humidity shall be continuously monitored on each floor, using an electronic monitoring device (EMD). This device must be capable of recording readings at 15 minute intervals and data downloadable to a PC. A printout of data from each EMD shall be delivered to Architect as requested and at project completion. 5. Use a sling psychrometer to measure dry bulb and wet bulb in space on each floor. Take readings at beginning and end of each shift; record readings and deliver to Architect as requested and at project completion. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE FOR TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT A. Munters: www.munters.com B. Other source specifically approved in advance by Architect; submit qualifications for review. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING AND COOLING 12.137 015110-2 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Defined to include heating, cooling and desiccant dehumidification equipment and associated power cable, gas lines, and temporary ducting. 2.03 GENERAL A. Provide products for temporary construction using equivalent type as required for permanent construction, except for products that are manufactured for that specific temporary intent and approved by Architect. B. Where materials for use in this Section are not specified or detailed, propose products in writing and obtain approval from Architect before commencing work. C. Size temporary air systems to supply outside air at a minimum of one complete air change every 120 minutes. D. Temporary units shall have a 30% filtration for outside air. 2.04 TEMPORARY COOLING UNITS A. Size temporary cooling equipment to maintain temperatures below 80 degrees F. B. Equipment: Provide minimum air quantities as specified in this Section. C. Cooling Equipment may be used to control humidity under following conditions: 1. Equipment is capable of maintaining humidity in the range specified here or elsewhere in specification. 2. Reheat coils are utilized to lower relative humidity in air stream. 2.05 TEMPORARY HEATING UNITS A. Heaters: Heating equipment must consist of electric or indirect fired combustion only. No direct -fired space heaters or re- circulating hot water systems permitted. B. Heater Controls: Automatically turn heater off if airflow is interrupted or internal temperature of heater exceeds its design temperature or that of supply duct. 2.06 TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION EQUIPMENT A. Use dehumidification equipment to control environment in space 24 hours a day while joint compounds, paints, fireproofing, and wall paper are being installed and until materials in space reach moisture levels as recommended by manufacturer(s). This equipment may also be necessary to maintain specified conditions until building is commissioned. B. Desiccant dehumidification, as manufactured by Munters, Corp., of solid desiccant design having a single rotary desiccant wheel capable of fully automatic continuous operation. C. Do not re- circulate air through dehumidification equipment unless positive pressure is maintained and minimum outside air requirement is satisfied. 2.07 TEMPORARY DUCTWORK AND AIR DISTRIBUTION A. Supply Ductwork: Canvas spiral duct. If supply ductwork is placed outside building, securely attach or anchor to withstand damage from winds. B. Interior Distribution Ductwork: Polyethylene tubing (Layflat) of appropriate diameter to inflate fully without flutter. 1. Distribute conditioned air through 2 -3 inch holes cut in Layflat ducting. 2. Distribute air evenly throughout area being served. 3. Suspend temporary system from existing ceiling structure as recommended by system manufacturer. 4. Coordinate with Architect for mounting locations within building. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Modify and extend temporary facilities as required by Work progress. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING AND COOLING 12.137 015110-3 B. Provide weather protection and environmental controls as required to prevent damage to work, and to other property. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary climate control equipment. Where disposal of soil and waste products, whether or not they are contaminated, is required, make legal dispositions off site following governing authorities' requirement. 3.02 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION A. Size and configure temporary climate control to maintain occupied space temperatures between 40 and 80 degrees F during hours unless conditions that are more stringent are required in other sections. Relative humidity shall be maintained at or below 50% unless conditions that are more stringent are required by other Sections. B. Utilize temporary ducting to distribute conditioned air to affected areas of the building. Do not use permanent ductwork to distribute temporary conditioned air. C. Keep doors closed and cover openings to maintain a reasonably airtight envelop around space to minimize infiltration and avoid pockets of high humidity. 3.03 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT A. Maintain temporary climate control equipment in service until Substanial Completion and successful commissioning of permanent HVAC systems. B. Completely remove temporary climate equipment from site at completion. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain in proper operating condition until use is no longer required or as otherwise approved. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AND COOLING 12.137 TEMPORARY DEHUMIDIFICATION, HEATING 015110-4 SECTION 01 5721 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A. See Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures, for overall project goals relating to environment and energy. B. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. C. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures: LEED credits relating to indoor air quality. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services. C. Section 23 4000 - HVAC Air Cleaning Devices: HVAC filters. D. Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Testing HVAC systems for proper air flow rates, adjustment of dampers and registers, and settings for equipment. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air - Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; 2012. B. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization; 2010. C. CAL (EESR) - California Energy Efficiency Standards Residential Alternative Calculation Method (ACM) Approval Manual, Chapter 7; 2005. D. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction; 2007. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. LEED Submittals: Submit all submittals required in this section in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01 3343. C. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction as a guide. 1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 12.137 01 5721 -1 2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. 5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters. 7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. 8. Provide photos of each measure described in the IAQ Plan to document compliance for LEED submittal a. Contractor shall provide photos of each measure taken at three different dates b. Provide photos to Architect with submittal of pay application concurrent to photos taken. 9. Describe coordination with commissioning procedures. D. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times. E. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content. B. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV of 8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture - impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. D. HVAC equipment and ductwork may NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum. 2. Exhaust directly to outside. 3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation. E. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. F. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay -in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 12.137 01 5721 -2 G. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. H. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS 12.137 01 5721 -3 SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re -use of existing products. C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. C. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions: Requirements for VOC- restricted product categories. D. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal requirements potentially affecting packaging and substitutions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. LEED Submittals: Use forms specified in Section 01 3344. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re -used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site. C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified. D. LEED Submittals: State cost of each reused product, quantity installed, and total cost of reused products. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 6000-1 B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and /or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable. D. Regionally- Sourced Products: 1. Overall Project Requirement: Provide materials amounting to a minimum of 10 percent of the total value of all materials (excluding plumbing, HVAC, electrical, elevators, and other equipment) that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a radius of 500 miles from the project site. 2. Specific Product Categories: Provide regionally- sourced products as specified elsewhere. 3. LEED Submittals: Indicate location of manufacture; in all cases indicate location of final assembly; for harvested products, indicate location of harvest; for extracted (i.e. mined) products, indicate location of extraction; for products involving multiple manufacturing steps, indicate all locations of manufacture or assembly; provide manufacturer or supplier certification of location information. E. Products with Recycled Content: 1. Specific Product Categories: Provide recycled content as specified elsewhere. 2. Calculations: Where information about recycled content is required to be submitted: a. Determine percentage of post- consumer and post - industrial content separately, using the guidelines contained in 16 CFR 260.7(e). b. Previously used, reused, refurbished, and salvaged products are not considered recycled. c. Wood fabricated from timber abandoned in transit to original mill is considered reused, not recycled. d. Determine percentage of recycled content of any item by dividing the weight of recycled content in the item by the total weight of all material in the item. e. Determine value of recycled content of each item separately, by multiplying the content percentage by the value of the item. 3. LEED Submittals: State unit cost, post- consumer and post - industrial content percentages, quantity installed, total material cost, and total recycled content value; attach evidence of contents from either manufacturer or an independent agency. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 6000-2 B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with acceptance of substitutions and re- approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving /storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 6000-3 I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 6000-4 SECTION 01 6116 - VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. VOC restrictions for product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS." B. All products of each category that are installed in the project must comply; Owner's project goals do not allow for partial compliance. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing and certifications. C. Section 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality Controls: Procedures and testing; LEED requirements. D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, substitutions and product options, delivery, storage, and handling. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. VOC- Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or applied on -site in the building interior: B. Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CAL (CHPS LEM) - Low - Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS); current edition at www.chps.net /. B. CAL (VOC) - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers (including Addendum 2004 -01); State of California Department of Health Services; 2004 C. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. D. GEI (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARD Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org. E. GreenSeal GS -36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2011. F. GreenSeal GS -11 - Paints, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993. G. GreenSeal GC -03 - Anti - Corrosive Paints, 2nd edition, January 7, 1997. H. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. I. SCAQMD 1113- South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; January 1, 2004 rules. J. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current listings at www.scscertified.com. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Evidence of Compliance: Submit for each different product in each applicable category. C. Product Data: For each VOC- restricted product used in the project, submit product data showing compliance, except when another type of evidence of compliance is required. D. Installer Certifications for Accessory Materials: Require each installer of any type of product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 12.137 016116-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All VOC- Restricted Products: Provide products having VOC content of types and volume not greater than those specified in State of California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current GREENGUARD Children & Schools certification; www.greenguard.org. b. Current Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label Plus certification; www.carpet - rug.org. c. Current SCS Floorscore certification; www.scscertified.com. d. Current SCS Indoor Advantage Gold certification; www.scscertified.com. e. Product listing in the CHPS Low - Emitting Materials Product List at www .chps.net/manual /lem_table.htm. f. Current certification by any other agencies acceptable to CHPS. g. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with CHPS requirements for getting a product listed in the Low - Emitting Materials Product List; report must include laboratory's statement that the product meets the specified criteria. 2. Product data submittals showing VOC content are NOT acceptable forms of evidence. 3. Exception: The product categories listed below are not required to comply with this requirement. B. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not greater than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. c. Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements. C. Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not greater than required by GreenSeal GS -36. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current GreenSeal Certification. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. D. Paints and Coatings: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. VOC content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS -11, Paints, 1st Edition, May 20, 1993 for architectural paints and coatings. b. VOC content limit established in Green Seal Standard GC -03, Anti - Corrosive Paints, 2nd Edition January 7, 1997 for Anti- corrosive and anti- rust paints. c. VOC content limit established in SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings in effect January 1, 2004 for clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, and shellacs. 2. Determination of VOC Content: CAL (VOC) - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers (including Addendum 2004 -01); State of California Department of Health Services; 2004. exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. E. Carpet and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required for CRI Green Label Plus certification. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current Green Label Plus Certification. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 12.137 016116-2 b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. F. Carpet Tile and Adhesive: Provide products having VOC content not greater than that required for CRI Green Label Plus certification. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current Green Label Plus Certification. b. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. G. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products and Adhesives Used for Laminating Them: Provide products having no added urea - formaldehyde resins. 1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a. Current SCS "No Added Urea Formaldehyde" certification; www.scscertified.com. b. Published product data showing compliance with requirements. H. Hard surface Flooring Systems including: Vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood flooring, ceramic flooring, rubber flooring and wall base. 1. Provide systems certified as compliant with the FloorScore standard by an independent third party. 2. Floor finishes such as sealer, stain, and finish must meet the standards of SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings, rules in effect January 1, 2004. 3. Tile setting adhesives and grout must meet SCAQMD Rule 1168 July 1, 2005. I. Ceiling and Wall Systems 1. Systems include all gypsum board, insulation, acoustical ceiling systems and wall coverings installed in the building interior 2. Provide products that meet the testing and product requirements of CAL (VOC) - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions From Various Sources Using Small -Scale Environmental Chambers (including Addendum 2004 -01); State of California Department of Health Services; 2004. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to reject non - compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner. B. All additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non - compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 12.137 016116-3 SECTION 01 6116.01 - ACCESSORY MATERIAL VOC CONTENT CERTIFICATION FORM 1.01 FORM A. Identification: 1. Project Name: 2. Project No.: 3. Architect: B. Use of This Form: 1. Because installers are allowed and directed to choose accessory materials suitable for the applicable installation, there is a possibility that such accessory materials might contain VOC content in excess of that permitted, especially where such materials have not been explicitly specified. 2. Contractor is required to obtain and submit this form from each installer of work on this project. 3. For each product category listed, circle the correct words in brackets: either [HAS] or [HAS NOT]. 4. If any of these accessory materials has been used, attach to this form product data and MSDS sheet for each such product. C. VOC content restrictions are specified in Section 01 6116. 2.01 PRODUCT CERTIFICATION A. I certify that the installation work of my firm on this project: 1. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any ADHESIVES. 2. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any JOINT SEALANTS. 3. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any PAINTS OR COATINGS. 4. [HAS] [HAS NOT] required the use of any COMPOSITE WOOD or AGRIFIBER PRODUCTS. B. Product data and MSDS sheets are attached. 3.01 CERTIFIED BY: ( INSTALLER /MANUFACTURER /SUPPLIER FIRM) A. Firm Name: B. Print Name: C. Signature: D. Title: E. Date: (officer of company) END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CERTIFICATION FORM 12.137 ACCESSORY MATERIAL VOC CONTENT 01 6116.01 - 1 SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and /or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances. C. Pre - installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated equipment and materials. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. C. Section 01 5000 - : Temporary exterior enclosures. D. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash /waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse. E. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout procedures related to achieving Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work. F. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparing operation and maintenance manuals and obtaining warranties and bonds. G. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Training Owner personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems. H. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for general submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Iowa and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Iowa. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-1 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Provide temporary facilities /system(s) for conditioning interior spaces as required by Work progress and the following: 1. Curing and drying concrete slabs: a. Refer to Sections 03 3000 and 03 3931 for additional requirements. b. Concrete slabs shall be properly cured and at least 45 days old before beginning aggressive drying. c. Provide temporary climate control necessary to remove excess moisture and reduce emission rate to levels acceptable to finish flooring manufacturers. d. During slab drying, maintain relative humidity below 45 percent with a humidity ratio below 30 grains per lb of air. e. Allow for moisture testing of the slab to be performed at least 60 days prior to installation of floor coverings to permit sufficient drying time should excessive moisture levels exist. 2. Temporary climate control necessary to maintain satisfactory conditions recommended by products manufacturers for proper installation, application and curing of specified products. E. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. F. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 2. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. 1.06 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 1000 - Summary, for occupancy - related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean -up of work of separate sections. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-2 H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over - ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-3 E. Protect and preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading and fill placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation and ground floor elevations. K. Periodically verify layouts by same means. L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Separate areas in which alterations are being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings. C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. 2. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-4 E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. 2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 3. H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re -cover and refinish to match. 3. Patch as specified for patching new work. I. Clean existing systems and equipment. J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off -site; do not burn or bury. K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non - conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-5 B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. C. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. E. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400 - Firestopping, to full thickness of the penetrated element. H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. I. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. J. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash /rubbish from site periodically and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. 3.10 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start -up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start -up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-6 D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start -up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start -up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training. 3.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 23 0593. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash /rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Refer to Section 01 7700. B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. C. Owner will occupy all of the building as specified in Section 01 1000 - Summary. 3.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the warranty period. B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 12.137 01 7300-7 SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors. C. Minimize trash /waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring. 5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps. 6. Concrete masonry units: May be used on project if whole, or crushed and used as sub -base material or fill. 7. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze. 8. Glass. 9. Gypsum drywall and plaster. 10. Acoustical ceiling tile and panels. E. The Owner's goal for this project is diversion of 75 percent, by weight, of potential landfill trash /waste by recycling and /or salvage. Revenue or savings shall accrue to Contractor. F. LEED Certification for this project is dependent on diversion of 75 percent, by weight, of potential landfill trash /waste by recycling and /or salvage. G. Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports; all landfill disposal, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues; use the same units of measure on all reports. H. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. Methods of trash /waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, state and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. C. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing: Handling and disposal of land clearing debris. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 12.137 01 7419-1 B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations. C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity. D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity. E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste. I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run -off water. M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged. P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. LEED Submittals: Submit Landfill Alternatives Proposal, Waste Management Plan, and Waste Disposal Reports in accordance with procedures specified in Section 01 3343. C. Submit Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner; submit projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling. D. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where trash /waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash /waste in the landfill(s). 3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. a. List each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled. b. List the local market for each material. c. State the estimated net cost, versus landfill disposal. 4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 12.137 01 7419-2 5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging. 6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site - separated and self - hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. E. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash /waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, of trash /waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards, date removed from the project site, and receiving party. c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards. c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method. F. Recycling Incentive Programs: 1. Where revenue accrues to Contractor, submit copies of documentation required to qualify for incentive. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for substitution submission procedures. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 12.137 01 7419-3 B. For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition to requirements specified in Section 01 6000: 1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product. 2. Cost savings on waste disposal, compared to specified product, to be deducted from the Contract Sum. 3. Proposed disposal method for waste product. 4. Markets for recycled waste product. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation. B. See Section 01 6000 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling. C. See Section 01 7300 for trash /waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Manager: Designate an on -site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Architect. C. Instruction: Provide on -site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D. Meetings: Discuss trash /waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre -bid meeting. 2. Pre - construction meeting. 3. Regularjob -site meetings. E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. As a minimum, provide: a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on -site, such as wood cut -offs for blocking. b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable. c. Recycling bins at worker lunch area. 2. Provide containers as required. 3. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be recycled or salvaged. 4. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic. 5. Provide adequate space for pick -up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 6. If an enclosed area is not provided, clearly lay out and label a specific area on -site. 7. Keep recycling and trash /waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 12.137 01 7419-4 H. Reuse of Materials On -Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off -site. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 12.137 01 7419-5 SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contract closeout procedures related to: 1. Substantial Completion of the Work and 2. Final inspection and Owner's acceptance of the Work. B. Closeout submittals including: 1. Substantial Completion documents. 2. Final Completion documents: a. Final Application for Payment with supporting documents. b. Project Record Documents. c. Warranties and Bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Performance and Payment Bonds, warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Preparation of Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Operation and maintenance instruction of Owner's personnel. D. Individual product sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual product sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Substantial Completion: The stage in the progress of the Work when the Work is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: Submit three copies of required forms and related documentation certifying that status of Work is consistent with "Substantial Completion ". B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Provide three sets of revised documents in final form for use by Owner's personnel. Refer to Section 01 7823 for additional requirements. C. Material and Product Warranties: Submit fully executed manufacturers' warranties within ten days following Date of Substantial Completion except as follows: 1. For equipment and component parts of equipment put into service during construction with OWNER "S permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period . 2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance; list date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. D. Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion: Submit two copies of required forms certifying that Work has been fully completed; make submittal within 45 days after Date of Substantial Completion. E. Claim for Final Payment: Submit three copies of required final Application for Payment forms together with supporting documents. F. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Submit two copies of required forms with claim for Final Payment. G. Project Record Documents: Submit required Record Documents with claim for Final Payment. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 12.137 01 7700-1 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and inspection of the work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly closeout procedure, with provision for accommodating items installed later. B. Final Utility Connections: Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements for final connections. 1.06 PRE- SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION MEETING A. Convene at least 30 days before submitting Request for Substantial Completion Inspection for purpose of reviewing required closeout procedures with representatives of Owner and Architect. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate completion and ensure clean -up of work of separate sections of the Project Manual. B. The Owner intends to occupy the entire project area at Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Comply with additional requirements in Section 01 7823. 2. Include operating instructions and maintenance data prepared by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described equipment and systems. 3. Use Operating and Maintenance Manuals as reference for instruction of Owner's personnel. B. Demonstration and Training: 1. Comply with additional requirements in Section 01 7900. 2. Prior to Substantial Completion, perform demonstration and train Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems designated in individual sections of the Project Manual. C. Preliminary Inspection for Substantial Completion: 1. Schedule and conduct preliminary inspection of the Work accompanied by Owner's Project Representative. a. Determine and identify items to be listed for correction and completion (punchlist) on Contractor's Declaration of Substantial Completion. 2. Verify that surface finish materials are properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and exposed surfaces are clean and free from damage. 3. Verify final adjustment of operating items, equipment and system components to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 4. Verify specific operating and performance requirements described in individual specification sections. a. Secure certification by TAB contractor that testing, adjusting and balancing work has been completed, and respective systems are performing in accordance with specified design requirements. b. Replace filters of operating equipment. 5. Verify that utility services are properly connected and of the correct characteristics. 6. Verify inspection and acceptance of the respective portions of the Work by Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: 1. Provide the necessary assurance that the progress of the Work is consistent with Substantial Completion as defined by the Contract Documents. 2. Upon receipt of the required forms the Architect will schedule and conduct a Substantial Completion Inspection. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 12.137 01 7700-2 B. Certificate of Substantial Completion: Upon verification of Contractor's Punchlist, and subsequent determination by Architect that status of Work is suitable for occupancy by the Owner, the Architect will prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Doc G704- 2000). C. Upon issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor may request payment of the contract retainage of five percent of the value of completed Work. This request shall be accompanied by a sworn statement from the Contractor that ten calendar days prior to date of the request, known subcontractors, sub - subcontractors and suppliers received notice of the Contractor's intent. The Contractor shall release retained funds to subcontractors in the same manner as retained funds are released to the Contractor by the Owner. 1. Payment will be withheld on the value of work not yet performed as of date of Substantial Completion. The retained amount shall be equal to two hundred percent of the actual value of labor and materials yet to be provided as determined by the Architect. 2. Additional funds will be withheld equal to two hundred percent of the value of Chapter 573 claims currently on file. D. Complete and correct respective items of work listed and attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion within 30 days following Date of Substantial Completion. 3.03 FINAL CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion: Certify that the Work is complete and has been inspected and found to be in compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Claim for Final Payment: 1. Prepare application for payment on approved forms. 2. Amount of final payment shall be the unpaid balance of the contract sum. 3. Final payment shall be made 31 calendar days following date of Owner's written acceptance of the completed Work. C. Evidence of Payments and Release of Liens: Prepare the following: 1. "Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" (AIA Doc G706). 2. "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AIA Doc G706A). a. Include separate waivers of lien from subcontractors, suppliers, and others with lien rights against property of the Owner. 3. Obtain "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" (AIA Doc G707). D. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit one set of the following Record Documents; record actual revisions to the Work: a. Drawings b. Specifications c. Addenda d. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. e. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by the Owner. 3. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: a. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. b. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. c. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 4. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: a. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. b. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. c. Field changes of dimension and detail. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. E. Material and Product Warranties: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 12.137 01 7700-3 1. Obtain required warranties executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with OWNER'S permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co- execute warranty documents when required. 4. Retain warranties until time specified for submittal. 5. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals; indicate on Table of Contents. 3.04 FINAL INSPECTION OF THE WORK A. Following submittal of required closeout documents, the Architect will conduct a Final Inspection of the Work. B. Accompany Owner's Project Representative and Architect on final inspection of the Work. C. Complete items of work determined and identified during final inspection. 3.05 OWNER'S FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK A. Upon satisfactory completion of the Work, the Architect will recommend acceptance of the completed Work by the Owner and final payment to the Contractor. B. The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of the effective date of their acceptance of the completed Work. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 12.137 01 7700-4 SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures: Contract closeout procedures. D. Section 01820 - Demonstration and Training: Operation and maintenance instruction of Owner's personnel. E. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. F. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 PRE - SUBMITTAL MEETING A. Convene 15 days before starting work on Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the purpose of reviewing Architect's comments on preliminary draft. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Preliminary Draft: Prepare two copies within 30 days after start of Work. Indicate proposed formats and outlines of contents. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit 2 copies of completed documents upon 50 percent completion of construction operations. One copy will be returned within 15 days, with Architect review comments. Revise content of all document sets required for final submission. 4. Submit three sets of revised final documents in final form at least 45 days prior to estimated date of "Substantial Completion" for use by Owner's personnel during demonstration and training activities specified in Section 01 7900. B. Product and Material Warranties: Obtain required manufacturer's warranties; assemble original documents in separate three -ring binder to be submitted within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 1. Ensure that manufacturer's warranties have been completed in OWNER's name and registered with respective manufacturer. 2. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8 -1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 12.137 01 7823-1 E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. Certificates. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CARE AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for Design Data provided by the Architect, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 12.137 01 7823-2 B. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. E. Operating Procedures: Include start -up, break -in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Include test and balancing reports. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 WARRANTIES A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co- execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. E. Manual of Warranties and Bonds: Bind original documents in commercial quality 8 -1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. 1. Cover: Identify binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. 2. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. 3. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 12.137 01 7823-3 SECTION 02 4100 - DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of built site elements. B. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions. D. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling. E. Section 07 0150.19 - Preparation for Re- Roofing: Removal of existing roofing, roof insulation, flashing, trim, and accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. IBC Chapter 333 - Safeguard During Construction C. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. D. Iowa DNR - Erosion and Sedimentation Control Regulations: Iowa Construction Site Erosion Control Manual. 1.04 PERMITS A. Contractor shall comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials. B. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, sampling, analytical costs, permits, and fees. Provide notices required by governmental authorities. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Site Plan: Showing: 1. Areas for temporary placement of removed materials. C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures that would affect the existing structure. D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of ten years of documented experience in demolition of buildings in an urban environment. 2. Refer to other sections for additional requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide all materials necessary to safely demolish and remove all buildings and improvements on the site as shown specified. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DEMOLITION 12.137 024100-1 B. Perform work in a manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE A. Remove portions of existing building areas indicated on the drawings. B. Include portions of the building necessary to perform the subsequent new construction work whether specifically indicated or not. C. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. 1. Salvage wood plaster lath for reuse where possible. D. Protection: 1. Erect barriers, fences, guard rails, enclosures, chutes, and shoring to protect personnel, structures, and utilities remaining intact. 2. Protect existing objects designated to remain, and in the event of damage, immediately make repairs or replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner's Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Maintaining Traffic: 1. Minimize interference with roads, streets, driveways, sidewalks, and adjacent facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, alleys, or passageways without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. If closure is permitted, provide signage indicating closure and signage to direct traffic to alternate route as per plans. F. Dust control: 1. Moisten surfaces as required to prevent dust from being a nuisance to the public, neighbors, and concurrent performance of other work on the site. 3.02 GENERAL DEMOLITION, PROCEDURES, AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241 and IBC Chapter 33. 3. Use of explosive materials is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. C. Drawings showing existing construction; utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents, but cannot be accepted as all inclusive. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DEMOLITION 12.137 024100 -2 D. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. E. Commence with salvage operations at as soon as possible after receipt of notice to proceed. 1. At the Contractor's option, continue salvage throughout the life of the project. F. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. G. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of structure. 3. Stop work immediately if structure appears to be in danger. H. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify CM, Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management. 2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point. 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Cooperate with local utilities concerning their removal, demolition, or relocation of utilities. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without prior written notification to Owner. F. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take -offs that are in use without prior written notification to local users and Owner. G. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. H. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. I. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain. J. Cap ends of all utilities abandoned on site. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied, if any. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction necessary and code compliant. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DEMOLITION 12.137 024100 -3 C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, Telecommunications, and Fire Alarm System): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. 3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind -blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DEMOLITION 12.137 024100 -4 SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete for composite floor construction. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (Errata 2007). C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. D. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). E. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. F. ASTM Al 85/A1 85M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. G. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. H. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2012 and its references. I. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2009. J. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2011. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of concrete slabs with size, location and installation of service utilities. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least two weeks prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance of concrete producer and all affected installers. Review satisfactory jobsite conditions, design mixes and field quality control requirements. C. Sequencing: Ensure that under -slab utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. D. LEED Submittals 1. Submit LEED Concrete - Containing Product List and LEED Concrete - Containing Product Submittal Summary Form 2. Submit LEED Metal- Containing Product List and LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 12.137 033000-1 3. If any wood or wood -based form materials, including supports, are permanently installed in the project, submit documentation required for sustainably harvested wood as specified in Section 01 6000. E. Proposed Mix Design(s): Material proportions for each class of concrete; indicate compressive strength development at 7, 28, and 90 days; indicate alkalinity (pH) of hardened concrete sample at 90 days. 1. Develop time - temperature- strength relationship for each design mix to be used in evaluating early -age compressive strength. F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318, current editions. B. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. C. Engage only experienced concrete finishers in the finishing of concrete surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with following form offset tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 600- Product Requirements for recycled content and regional materials B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one -half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 80 percent. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280). 1. Type: deformed, unfinished billet -steel bars. D. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. E. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C. E. Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100. 1. Acceptable products: a. GranCem(tm) cement manufactured by Holcim Inc. b. NewCem(tm) cement manufactured by Lafarge. F. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 12.137 033000-2 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixture Manufacturers: 1. BASF Corporation - Admixture Systems: www.basf - admixtures.com. 2. The Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com. 3. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. C. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260. D. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non - redispersable type. B. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi - layer, fabric -, cord -, grid -, or aluminum- reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Non - Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non - metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. ASTM C1107/C1107M; Grade A, B, or C. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Bond Break Material: Self- adhering flexible flashing. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Cementitious Materials Content: Minimum 525 lb per cubic yard. 2. Replace as much portland cement as possible with fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag as is consistent with ACI recommendations. 3. Ratio of Water to Cementitious Materials (percent by weight): a. Interior Floor Slabs (water reducing admixture): Maximum 45 percent. 4. Aggregate Size: a. Floor Slabs: 3/4 inch, maximum. b. Floor Toppings with depth less than 2 -1/2 inches: 1/2 inch, maximum. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of the structural drawings and as specified in ACI 301. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 1. Total Air Content: Determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 2. Water Reducing Admixture: Provide mid -range water - reducing admixture allowing 12 -15 percent reduction of water content in concrete mix for interior floor slabs. D. Structural Lightweight Concrete: 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M; 1 -1/2 hour maximum mixing and delivery time. 1. When air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 12.137 033000-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. B. Verify that bond -break material is placed around entire perimeter of interior floor slabs. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean before applying release agent. C. Install self- adhering bond break material on interior vertical wall surfaces to separate perimeter of interior slabs on grade from vertical surfaces. Extend bond break material horizontally under slab at least 6 inches and tape seal to sheet vapor retarder. D. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 1. Fill honeycomb areas and tie holes with Mortar -LN, manufactured by Aquafin, Inc.: www.aquafin.net. B. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1 R; thin floor coverings include carpeting and resilient flooring. C. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1 R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. 1. Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water - diluted hardener in three coats per manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats. 3.06 CURING A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit superimposed loads to be applied to concrete components until at least 75 percent of minimum design compressive strength has been achieved. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 12.137 033000-4 B. Take appropriate precautions to prevent staining of concrete floor surfaces. Since no satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum and rust stains from concrete, comply with the following: 1. Cover and protect floor surfaces from damage and staining during the construction period. 2. In addition to diaper, equipment such as pipe cutting machines shall be placed on suitable drop cloths. 3. Do not permit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. B. Contractor shall submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. C. Testing agency may perform tests of concrete and concrete materials at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. D. Break one cylinder at 14 days and the remaining two cylinders at 28 days. E. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M. 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch -up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 12.137 033000-5 SECTION 03 3931 - CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Final curing of concrete floor surfaces. B. Surface treatment with liquid densifiers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete floor finishing and initial curing operations. B. Section 03 3510 - Polished Concrete Floor Finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007) . C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. D. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. E. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2007. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the curing of concrete surfaces with requirements for sealing and densifying floor surfaces and installing adhered floor coverings. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least one week prior to the start of concrete work for floor slabs; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, moisture - retaining sheet, and densifiers, including compatibility of different products and limitations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by manufacturer of products specified. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 1 - Clear or translucent, Class A. 1. Water- based, membrane - forming type for application to surfaces subjected to exterior exposure during curing and not scheduled for application of subsequent finish materials. 2. Acceptable products: a. Cureseal 1315 WB, manufactured by Burke / Edoco. b. Cure & Seal WB 25, manufactured by SpecChem LLC: www.specchemllc.com. c. Super Aqua Clear Vox, manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com. d. Dress & Seal WB 30 manufactured by L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Vocomp -30, manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc.: www.wrmeadows.com. f. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Flooring Compatible Curing Compound: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONCRETE FLOORS 12.137 CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF 033931 -1 1. Liquid type for spray application to interior floor surfaces scheduled to receive adhered finish materials or coatings. 2. Acceptable products: a. Penetrating type formulation: E -Cure, manufactured by SpecChem LLC: www.specchemllc.com. b. Removable, waterborne, membrane - forming type: Kurez RC, manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Moisture - Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171. 1. White - burlap - polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide. 2. Other acceptable products: a. Transguard 4000 (tm) manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 LIQUID DENSIFIER A. Liquid Densifier / Sealer: Penetrating, liquid compound with liquid - repellent characteristics. 1. Basis of Design: Siliconate formulation. a. "Euco Diamond Hard" manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company: www.euclidchemical.com. b. "Seal Hard" manufactured by L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.: www.Imcc.com. c. "Liqui- Hard" manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc.: www.wrmeadows.com. d. "SpecHard" manufactured by SpecChem LLC: www.specchemllc.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Penetrating Surface Sealer: Polymer formulation. a. Product: Bellatrix(r) manufactured by W.R.Meadows, Inc.: www.wrmeadows.com. 1) Color: Clear. 2) VOC: 58 g /L. 3) UV Resistant: Non - yellowing. 4) Forms breathable film providing stain resistance and gloss finish. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. 3.02 FLOOR FINISHING A. Refer to Section 03 3000 for requirements for finishing concrete floors. 3.03 MOISTURE CURING A. Refer to Section 03 3000 for requirements for initial curing of floor slabs. B. Final Curing: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, continue to moisture cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. 1. Absorptive Moisture - Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap - polyethylene and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in damp condition for 7 days following initial curing period, and retain in place thereafter to help protect surface from staining and soiling. 3.04 APPLICATION OF CURING COMPOUNDS A. Membrane forming curing and sealing: Suitable for exterior exposure. 1. Where specifically approved by Architect, apply membrane curing compound immediately after initial curing operations. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS 12.137 033931 -2 2. Spray apply membrane curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 3. Avoid over application and puddling of material. B. Flooring compatible curing materials: Interior floors where scheduled. 1. Application: Apply curing materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 2. Where removal is required: Allow curing compound to remain on floor surface for at least 21 days. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 DENSIFICATION OF CURED CONCRETE SURFACES A. Allow concrete floor slabs to fully cure for at least 28 days before starting densification. B. Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply liquid densifier to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Buff treated floor surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Use heavy commercial, high- speed, floor burnishing machine equipped with 3000 grit pad. 2. Continue buffing until surface acquires a satisfactory "satin" sheen. E. Spray -apply 2 uniform coats of penetrating surface sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Allow first coat to dry (6 hours), then apply second coat at 90 degree angle to the first. 2. Allow second coat to dry for 2 hours before starting final buffing using high -speed burnisher with a hogs hair pad. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. B. Take appropriate precautions to prevent staining of concrete floor surfaces. Since no satisfactory procedures are available to remove petroleum and rust stains from concrete, comply with the following: 1. Cover and protect floor surfaces from damage and staining during the construction period. 2. Ensure that construction equipment, particularly components that may drip oil, hydraulic fluid, and other liquids, are provided with suitable diaper. 3. In addition to diaper, equipment such as pipe cutting machines shall be placed on suitable drop cloths. 4. Do not permit temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Exterior concrete surfaces: Use membrane - forming curing compounds. B. Interior floor surfaces: 1. Provide moisture curing except where other methods /materials are specifically permitted. 2. Where adhered finish materials and coatings are scheduled: Flooring compatible curing compounds may be applied. Verify satisfactory adhesive bond prior to proceeding with installation of floor coverings. 3. Gymnasium floor - concrete substrate: Flooring compatible curing compounds may be applied. 4. Where concrete floors are scheduled to remain exposed: Apply silicate type densifier and sealer. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CURING, SEALING, AND DENSIFICATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS 12.137 033931 -3 SECTION 03 4900 - GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural precast glass- fiber - reinforced concrete cornices. B. Supports, anchors, and attachments. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Concrete Materials, Forming, and Accessories. B. Section 05 4000 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Structural stud members. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Application of backer rods or bond breakers and joint sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008 B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011 a. D. ASTM C150 /C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. E. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. F. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2012. G. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. H. C1116/C1116M - 10a Standard Specification for Fiber - Reinforced Concrete I. C1229 - 94(2009) Standard Test Method for Determination of Glass Fiber Content in Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete (GFRC) (Wash -Out Test) J. ASTM D578/D578M - 05(2011)e1 Standard Specification for Glass Fiber Strands K. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010. L. PCI MNL -117 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2007. M. PCI MNL -128 - Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; 2001, Fourth Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, fabrication details, reinforcement, metal framing details, connection details, dimensions, and relationship to adjacent materials. Provide erection drawings. C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating surface color, finish and texture. D. Designer Qualifications. E. Fabricator Qualifications. F. Installer Qualifications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design units under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Iowa. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years of documented experience. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 12.137 034900-1 C. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience. D. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of units. Make records and access to plant available to Architect upon request. 1.06 MOCK -UP A. Construct one panel, 4 feet long by 2 feet wide, with surface finish applied, including supporting backup structure, attachments, fire, air and vapor seals applied . B. Locate where directed. C. Mock -up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with installation of backup supporting structure, windows and application of joint sealers. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points. Comply with manufacturer's B. Lifting Device: Capable of maintaining unit shape during manufacture, storage, transportation, erection, and in position for fastening. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass- Fiber - Reinforced Concrete: 1. Plastrglas, Inc: www.plastrglas.com. 2. Stromberg Architectural Products, Inc: www.strombergarchitectural.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED CONCRETE UNITS A. Glass- Fiber - Reinforced Concrete Units: Factory- fabricated, complying with PCI MNL -128, using rigid molds, constructed to maintain unit panel uniform in shape, size and finish. 1. Type II Glass Fiber - Reinforced Concrete— alkali- resistant (AR) glass fibers conforming to Specification ASTM C1666/C1666M. 2. Design and fabricate to comply with structural requirements for cladding and components of the IBC. 3. Design to withstand dead loads, positive and negative wind loads, and erection forces. 4. Control deflection of units to maintain fit with adjacent construction and openings within their tolerances. 5. Design connections to accommodate building movement without damage to components, wracking of joint connections, breakage of seals, or moisture penetration. 6. Allow for adjustment of connections to accommodate misalignment of structure without permanent distortion. 7. Concrete Mix: Of strength to accommodate panel configuration, panel size and weight, and manufacturing criteria, air entrained. 8. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 9. Appearance: Ensure exposed -to -view finish surfaces of units are uniform in color and appearance. 10. Finish of Exposed -to -View Precast Unit Surfaces: Match existing adjacent terra cotta masonry finish. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150 Portland Type I - Normal; white color. B. Concrete Aggregates: ASTM C33. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 12.137 034900-2 C. Reinforcement: Alkali resistant chopped glass fiber rovings specifically formulated for use in concrete, with lengths varying from 1 -1/2 to 2 inches. D. Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C260, ASTM C494/C494M, and ASTM C618. E. Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C979. 1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Manufacturers: a. Butterfield Color: www.butterfieldcolor.com. b. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com. c. Lambert Corporation: www.lambertusa.com. 2.04 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Structural Stud Members: Specified in Section 05 4000 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing. 2.05 SUPPORT DEVICES A. Connecting and Support Devices: ASTM A36/A36M steel; hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM Al53/A153M. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Spray -up concrete mix in multiple passes; maintain consistent quality during manufacture. B. Place metal framing members in position in mold. C. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast -in items as indicated on shop drawings. D. Fabricate connecting devices, items fit to framing members, fasteners and accessories necessary for proper installation. E. Locate hoisting devices to permit device removal after erection. F. Cure units to minimize appearance blemishes such as non - uniformity, staining or surface cracking. G. Identify each unit with corresponding code on erection drawings, in location not visible in finish work. H. Exposed Non - Galvanized Steel Components: Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter; prime paint in one coat, except surfaces in direct contact with concrete or requiring field welding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. 3.03 ERECTION A. Coordinate installation with that of structural supports, backup, and opening framing, if any. B. Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged panels. C. Erect units level and plumb within allowable tolerances. D. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints as erection progresses. E. When units require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected work and advise Architect. F. Site cutting of panels not permitted. G. Fasten units in place with mechanical connections. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 12.137 034900-3 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plane of Location: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 3/8 inch in 100 feet, non - cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment Between Two Connecting Units: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out of Square: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non - cumulative. D. Variation From Dimensions Indicated on Shop Drawings: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. E. Maximum Misalignment of Anchors, Inserts, Openings: 1/8 inch. F. Bowing of Units: Length of Unit/ 360. G. Exposed Joint Dimension: 1/2 inch plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed units from damage. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLASS -FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 12.137 034900-4 SECTION 03 5400 - CAST UNDERLAYMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Liquid - applied self - leveling floor underlayment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Alteration project procedures; selective demolition for remodeling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C109 /C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2 -in. or (50 -mm) Cube Specimens); 2012. B. ASTM C348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic- Cement Mortars; 2008. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure, freezing, and ambient temperature greater than 105 degrees F. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during and 72 hours after installation of underlayment. C. During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Underlayment: Blended cement mix, that when mixed with water in accordance with manufacturer's directions will produce self - leveling underlayment with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi after 28 days, tested per ASTM C109 /C109M. 2. Flexural Strength: Minimum 1000 psi after 28 days, tested per ASTM C348. 3. Density: 125 lb/cu ft, nominal. 4. Final Set Time: 1 -1/2 to 2 hours, maximum. 5. Thickness: Capable of thicknesses from feather edge to maximum 3 -1/2 inch. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread /Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Aggregate: Dry, well graded, washed silica aggregate, approximately 1/8 inch in size and acceptable to underlayment manufacturer. C. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials. D. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type. E. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST UNDERLAYMENT 12.137 035400-1 2.02 MIXING A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Add aggregate for areas where thickness will exceed 1/2 inch. Mix underlayment and water for at least two minutes before adding aggregate, and continue mixing to assure that aggregate has been thoroughly coated. C. Mix to self - leveling consistency without over - watering. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum bi- products, or other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete: Mechanically prepare steel troweled concrete to create a textured surface necessary to achieve the best bond; acceptable methods include bead blasting and scarifying. Do not use acid etching. B. Vacuum clean surfaces. C. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry. D. Close floor openings. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place to required thickness to achieve level flooring with adjacent areas, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft. C. For final thickness over 1 -1/2 inches, place underlayment in layers. Allow initial layer to harden to the point where the material has lost its evaporative moisture. Immediately prime and begin application of the subsequent layer within 24 hours. D. If a fine, feathered edge is desired, steel trowel the edge after initial set, but before it is completely hard. 3.04 CURING A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached. B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and cracking. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CAST UNDERLAYMENT 12.137 035400-2 SECTION 04 0100 - MAINTENANCE OF CLAY MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water and Chemical cleaning of brick and terra cotta masonry surfaces. B. Replacement of brick and terra cotta units. C. Repointing mortar joints. D. Repair of damaged masonry. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Mortar and grout. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA -Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section. 2. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work. B. Scheduling: 1. Perform cleaning, washing, blasting, and spraying of masonry at times approved by the Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on cleaning compounds, cleaning solutions, and methods. B. Samples: Submit four samples of face brick units to illustrate matching color, texture and extremes of color range. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: For cleaning materials, indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention, and limitations and restrictions for any product proposed for use. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. B. Restorer: Company specializing in masonry restoration with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Comply with guidelines set forth in the following National Park Service Technical Preservation Services Preservation Briefs: 1. Preservation Brief 01: Assessing Cleaning and Water - Repellent Treatments for Historic Masonry Buildings 2. Preservation Brief 02: Repointing Mortar Joints in Historic Masonry Buildings 3. Preservation Brief 06: Dangers of Abrasive Cleaning to Historic Buildings 4. Preservation Brief 07: The Preservation of Historic Glazed Architectural Terra -Cotta 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Restore and repoint an existing masonry wall area sized 4 feet long by 6 feet high; include in mock -up area instances of mortar. B. Clean a 10 ft by 10 ft panel of wall to determine extent of cleaning. C. Locate where directed. D. Acceptable panel and procedures employed will become the standard for work of this section. E. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF CLAY MASONRY 12.137 040100-1 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. B. Do not blast clean or use process creating dust, dirt, or spray, when wind is over 10 mph. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. All cleaning products shall be biodegradable, voc compliant, and free of harsh solvents. B. Cleaning Agent: Detergent and steam type. C. Blasting Medium: air or steam. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to be cleaned are ready for work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding elements from damage due to restoration procedures. B. Carefully remove and store removable items located in areas to be restored, including fixtures, fittings, finish hardware, and accessories; reinstall upon completion. C. Separate areas to be protected from restoration areas using means adequate to prevent damage. D. Cover existing landscaping with tarpaulins or similar covers. E. Mask immediately adjacent surfaces with material that will withstand cleaning and restoration procedures. F. When using cleaning methods that involve water or other liquids, install drainage devices to prevent runoff over adjacent surfaces unless those surfaces are impervious to damage from runoff. G. Do not allow cleaning runoff to drain into sanitary or storm sewers. 3.03 REBUILDING A. Cut out damaged and deteriorated masonry with care in a manner to prevent damage to any adjacent remaining materials. B. Cut away loose or unsound adjoining masonry as directed. C. Build in new units following procedures for new work specified in other section(s). D. Install built in masonry work to match and align with existing, with joints and coursing true and level, faces plumb and in line. Build in all openings, accessories and fittings. 3.04 REPOINTING A. Perform repointing prior to cleaning masonry surfaces. B. Cut out loose or disintegrated mortar in joints to minimum 1/2 inch depth or until sound mortar is reached. C. Use power tools only after test cuts determine no damage to masonry units will result. D. Do not damage masonry units. E. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material with air jet. F. Premoisten joint and apply mortar. Pack tightly in maximum 1/4 inch layers. Form a smooth, compact concave joint to match existing. G. Moist cure for 72 hours. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF CLAY MASONRY 12.137 040100-2 3.05 CLEANING EXISTING MASONRY A. Low Pressure Steam Cleaning: Apply up to 45 psi pressure to masonry surfaces at all indicated locations, maintaining uniform depth and surface texture throughout. B. Cleaning Detergent: Brush clean heavily soiled masonry surfaces at required locations with cleaning agent in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush loose mortar and dirt. C. Blast Cleaning: Blast clean with compressed air at up to 100 pounds pressure, against stone surfaces at required locations . 3.06 RESTORATION CLEANING A. Spray or Brush coat masonry with restoration cleaner, mixed into solution in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide a second application if required to match mock -up area. C. Allow sufficient time for solution to remain on masonry and agitate with soft fiber brush or sponge. D. Rinse from the bottom up with potable water applied at 400 psi and at a rate of 4 gal /min. 3.07 CLEANING A. Immediately remove stains, efflorescence, or other excess resulting from the work of this section. B. Remove excess mortar, smears, and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion. C. Clean surrounding surfaces. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF CLAY MASONRY 12.137 040100 -3 SECTION 04 0110 - MAINTENANCE OF STONE MASONRY PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General restoration cleaning of stone surfaces. B. Replacement of stone masonry units. C. Repointing mortar joints. D. Repair of damaged masonry. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 0511 - Pointing Mortar for Stone Masonry. B. Section 07 1900 - Water Repellents: Water repellents applied to stone masonry surfaces. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealants for soft joints in stone masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530 /ASCE 5 /TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International. B. ASTM C1515 -Standard Guide for Cleaning of Exterior Dimension Stone, Vertical And Horizontal Surfaces, New or Existing, 2011 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section. 2. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on mortars, patching materials, cleaning compounds, cleaning solutions, and restoration anchors. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: For cleaning materials, indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 /ASCE 5 /TMS 402 and ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. B. Restorer: Company specializing in stone masonry restoration with minimum ten years of documented experience. C. Restorers: 1. Certified stone masons and stone restoration professionals only. D. Comply with guidelines set forth in the following National Park Service Technical Preservation Services Preservation Briefs: 1. Preservation Brief 01: Assessing Cleaning and Water - Repellent Treatments for Historic Masonry Buildings 2. Preservation Brief 02: Repointing Mortar Joints in Historic Masonry Buildings 3. Preservation Brief 06: Dangers of Abrasive Cleaning to Historic Buildings E. 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Restore and repoint an existing masonry wall area 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include in mock -up area instances of mortar and flashings. B. Clean a 8 ft by 6 ft panel of wall to determine extent of cleaning. 1. Repeat, using same cleaning methods for up to three different panels. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF STONE MASONRY 12.137 040110 -1 C. Locate where directed. D. Acceptable panel and procedures employed will become the standard for work of this section. E. Mock -ups may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry neatly stacked and tied on pallets. Store clear of ground with adequate waterproof covering. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. C. Do not cut mortarjoints or use process creating dust, dirt, or overspray, when wind is over 15 mph. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cleaning Materials: 1. Diedrich Technologies, Inc; Product Envirestore 100T: www.diedrichtechnologies.com. 2. ProSoCo; Product - Enviro -Klean EK Restoration Cleaner: www.prosoco.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agent: Environmentally friendly, concentrated gel or foaming agents. B. Cleaning Agent: 0.5 lb of sodium hydrosulphite mixture to one gallon of water. C. Limestone Cleaner pre -rinse and neutralizer after rinse. 2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Conform to requirements of Section 04 0511. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to be restored are ready for work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding elements from damage due to restoration procedures. B. Carefully remove and store removable items located in areas to be restored, including hardware; reinstall upon completion. C. Separate areas to be protected from restoration areas using means adequate to prevent damage. D. Cover existing landscaping with tarpaulins or similar covers. E. Mask immediately adjacent surfaces with material that will withstand cleaning and restoration procedures. F. Seal windows and air intakes during periods of cleaning that generate dust. G. Rake out or cut away loose or unsound mortarjoints to provide firm and solid bearing for new work. H. When using cleaning methods that involve water or other liquids, install protective coverings to prevent runoff over adjacent surfaces unless those surfaces are impervious to damage from runoff. I. Do not allow cleaning runoff to drain into sanitary or storm sewers or fall directly upon landscaping. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF STONE MASONRY 12.137 040110 -2 3.03 REBUILDING A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not feather edges of patches or apply patching materials in lifts that are too thin or too thick. Cut edges at 90 degrees to at least 1/4 inch deep. C. Cut out damaged and deteriorated stone with care in a manner to prevent damage to any adjacent remaining materials. D. Support structure as necessary in advance of cutting out units. E. Cut away loose or unsound adjoining stone to provide firm and solid bearing for new work. F. Build in new units. G. Patching and Pointing Mortar Mix: As specified in Section 04 0511. H. Ensure that anchors are correctly located and built in. Install new restoration anchors as required. Use restoration anchor types suited to specific conditions encountered. I. Install built in stone work to match and align with existing, with joints and coursing true and level, faces plumb and in line. Build in all openings, accessories and fittings. 3.04 REPOINTING A. Perform repointing prior to cleaning stone masonry surfaces. B. Cut out loose or disintegrated mortar in joints to minimum 3/4 inch depth or until sound mortar is reached. C. Do not damage stone units. D. When cutting is complete, remove dust and loose material with air jet. E. Premoisten joint and apply mortar. Pack tightly in maximum 1/4 inch layers. Form a smooth, compact concave joint to match existing. F. Moist cure for 72 hours. 3.05 CLEANING EXISTING MASONRY A. Cleaning: Brush clean masonry surfaces at all locations with cleaning agent in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush loose mortar and dirt. 1. Apply pre- rinses and after rinses as recommended by cleaning agent. B. High Pressure Cold Water: Cold water blast with 600 psi minimum pressure to stone masonry surfaces, at all locations, providing uniform finish. 3.06 CLEANING NEW MASONRY A. Verify mortar is fully set and cured. B. Scrub walls with cleaning agent solution using stiff brush. Thoroughly rinse and wash off cleaning solution, dirt and mortar crumbs using clean, pressurized water. C. Protect area below cleaning operation and keep masonry soaked with water and flushed free of acid and dissolved mortar continuously for duration of cleaning. D. Before solution dries, rinse and remove acid solution and dissolved mortar, using clean, pressurized water. 3.07 RESTORATION CLEANING A. Clean surfaces and remove large particles with non - ferrous wire brush. B. Spray coat masonry with restoration cleaner, mixed into solution in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide a second application if required to match mock -up area. D. Allow sufficient time for solution to remain on masonry and agitate with soft fiber brush or sponge. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF STONE MASONRY 12.137 040110 -3 E. Rinse from the bottom up with potable water applied at 400 psi and at a rate of 4 gal /min. 3.08 AGING A. Rub in new stone work to match, as close as possible, adjacent original work. 1. Use pigmented powders formulated for masonry restoration in small amounts, rubbing in well with burlap rags. B. After each application, dust off surplus and wash down with low pressure hose. Allow surface to dry before proceeding with succeeding applications. C. Continue process until acceptance. 3.09 CLEANING A. Immediately remove stains, efflorescence, or other excess resulting from the work of this section. B. Remove excess mortar, smears, and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion. C. Clean surrounding surfaces. 3.10 PATCHING A. Provide existing stone sample to manufacturer to permit formulation of patching materials matching physical properties of the stone. B. Cut away loose or unsound adjoining stone to provide firm and solid bearing for new work. C. The area to be repaired should be cut to provide a minimum of 1/4" depth. D. Apply restoration materials in lifts, thickness as recommended. E. Scratch under coats or lifts to provide key for subsequent applicaitons. F. Do not install repairs that have a feathered edge. Re -cut area to provide proper depths. G. Follow manufacturer's directions and instructions for installation. 3.11 SEALING AND WATERPROOFING A. Apply sealing and water repellent material as specified in Section 07 1900 - Water Repellents. B. Seal joints with joint sealers specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MAINTENANCE OF STONE MASONRY 12.137 040110 -4 SECTION 04 0513 - MORTAR FOR REPAIR AND REPOINTING EXISTING CLAY MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for rebuilding and repointing existing brick and terra cotta masonry. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 0100 - Maintenance of Masonry: Bedding and pointing mortar for masonry restoration work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530 /ASCE 5 /TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a. D. ASTM C 387/C 387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete; 2009. E. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include design mix using the Proportion specification of ASTM C 270. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range. D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C 270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C 780. E. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to requirements of ASTM C 476 and test and evaluation reports to requirements of ASTM C 1019. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530 /ASCE 5 /TMS 402 and ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. B. Comply with guidelines set forth in the following National Park Service Technical Preservation Services Preservation Briefs: 1. Preservation Brief 02: Repointing Mortar Joints in Historic Masonry Buildings C. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I -Normal; color as required to produce approved color sample. Color shall match existing building mortar color. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MORTAR FOR REPAIR AND REPOINTING EXISTING CLAY MASONRY 12.137 040513-1 B. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387/C 387M, Type N, using matching color cement. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. E. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C 979. 1. Color: Match existing mortar joints when incorporated into specified mix design. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.02 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Exterior, non - loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2. Pointing mortar: Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match existing mortar, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment -to- cement ratio. 2.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. D. Do not use anti - freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re- temper only within two hours of mixing. F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two - and - one -half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 2.04 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Provide for testing conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section 01400. B. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C 780 recommendations for preconstruction testing. 1. Test results will be used to establish optimum mortar proportions and establish quality control values for construction testing. 2. Construct mock -up to test dry mortar color compatibility with existing in -place work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REBUILDING AND REPOINTING A. Install mortar to requirements of Section 04 0100. B. Work pointing mortar into masonry joints and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Build in new masonry units with full mortarjoints. D. Remove excess mortar from masonry surfaces. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean existing masonry surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 04 0100. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MORTAR FOR REPAIR AND REPOINTING EXISTING CLAY MASONRY 12.137 040513-2 SECTION 04 0515 - POINTING MORTAR FOR STONE MASONRY PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for repointing existing limestone masonry. B. Mortar for patching stone masonry. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 0100 - Maintenance of Masonry: Installation of pointing mortar, restoration, and cleaning of stone masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. B. ASTM E1857 - 97 (Reapproved 2004); Standard Guide for Selection of Cleaning Techniques for Masonry, Concrete, and Stucco Surfaces C. ASTM C1515 - 11; Standard Guide for Cleaning of Exterior Dimension Stone, Vertical And Horizontal Surfaces, New or Existing 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include design mix based on Property specification of ASTM C 270. Indicate compliance of component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C 270. C. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of ASTM C 270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C 780. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS A. At Contractor's option, mortar and grout may be field -mixed from packaged dry materials, made from factory premixed dry materials with addition of water only, or ready- mixed. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Repointing: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime, and graded sand; capable of producing pointing and repair mortar with the addition of water only. Minimum requirements: Type O mortar modified for pointing, ASTM C270 and ACI 530.1. 1. Color: match existing stone. 2. Products: a. AmeriMix, Bonsal/ Oldcastle brand; AMX 420: www.amerimix.com. b. Conproco; Product Matrix; www.conproco.com c. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc; Product Limestone /Sandstone Repair Mortar, Jahn M70; www.cathedralstone.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation POINTING MORTAR FOR STONE MASONRY 12.137 040515-1 B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I -Normal; color as required to produce approved color sample. C. Water: Clean and potable. D. Bonding Agent: mineral silicate type. 2.03 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Property Specification. 1. Pointing mortar: Type O unless otherwise required by conditions and mix requirements. 2.04 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. D. Do not use anti - freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. Do not add additional water that would affect color. Do not retemper mortar; comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2.05 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Testing will be conducted by Contractor's independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of Section 01 4000. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing stone surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install patching and pointing mortar to requirements of section(s) in which masonry restoration and pointing is specified. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation POINTING MORTAR FOR STONE MASONRY 12.137 040515-2 SECTION 04 2000 - UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block (CMU). B. Clay Facing Brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. E. Flashings. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. B. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. C. Section 07 2700 - Air Barrier Membranes: Fluid- applied membrane. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. D. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2012. F. ASTM A951/A951 M — 11: Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2012. H. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012. I. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011. J. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2012. K. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011. L. ASTM C150 /C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. M. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). N. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2012. O. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012. P. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. Q. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt- Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 2009. R. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT MASONRY 12.137 042000-1 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting at least one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units. C. Samples: Submit four samples of replacement brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Conform to applicable code for equivalent thickness requirements for fire rated masonry construction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. B. Handle and store concrete block units in pallets with protective covering. Do not remove protective covering until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths indicated on Drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non - standard blocks configured for corners and other detailed conditions. Provide bullnose units for outside corners. 3. Non - Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Both hollow and solid block, as indicated. b. Lightweight or normal weight. c. Exposed faces: Match texture of loadbearing units. B. Provide masonry units acceptable for use in fire rated assemblies where such assemblies are indicated. 2.02 BRICK UNITS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color, size, shape, and texture to match existing construction. 2.03 CLAY TILE UNITS A. Where clay (terra cotta) tile units are required, match existing in -place units. 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. C. Water: Clean and potable. 2.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur- O -Wal: www.dur- o- wal.com. 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT MASONRY 12.137 042000-2 3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O -Wal brand): www.h - b.com. 4. WIRE -BOND: www.wirebond.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82/A 82M; 0.1875 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 1 -1/4 in width, 0.105 in thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage from masonry face. 2.06 FLASHINGS A. Copper /Polymer Fabric Flashing: 3 oz/sq ft copper sheet bonded with rubber -based adhesive between two sheets of polymer fabric. 1. Manufacturer: a. York Manufacturing, Inc; Multi -Flash 500 Series: www.yorkmfg.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Flexible Flashing with Elvaloy KEE: Solid -phase flexibilizer added to membrane flashing. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Flex -Flash Flashing: www.h - b.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Asphalt Modified Polyurethane Flashing: Self- adhering sheet; 0.030 inch total thickness; with cross - linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces. 1. Products: a. Grace Construction Products; Product - Perm -A- Barrier (tm) Wall Flashing. b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Product - Air - Shield (tm) Self- Adhering Flashing Membrane. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 9005. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type I ( "No.15 ") asphalt felt. B. Masonry Veneer Cavity Weeps and Vents: polyester mesh formed into a block to fit brick 3/8 head joint, full height; color to match mortar. C. Drainage Fabric: Polyester mesh. D. Cleaning Solution: Non - acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.08 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Exterior, non - loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Interior, non - loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. C. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. D. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT MASONRY 12.137 042000-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built -in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortarjoint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. D. Interlock external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Cut mortarjoints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled. H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. I. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. 3.06 WEEPS /CAVITY VENTS A. Install cavity vents in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and lintels, near top of walls, and and at the tops of veneer panels. 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE CMU MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT MASONRY 12.137 042000-4 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT MASONRY 12.137 042000-5 E. Reinforce joint corners and intersections of load- bearing walls with strap anchors 16 inches on center. 3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 3.09 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beams with 2, No. 5 bars, 1 inch from bottom web. B. Reinforce pilasters and grouted cores of CMU with No. 5 bars, placed as detailed. C. Lap splices minimum 30 inches. D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install concrete masonry control and expansion joints as indicated on the drawings and as required by ACI 530. 3.11 BUILT -IN WORK A. Install built -in items plumb, level, and true to line. B. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non - cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, and conduit. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.14 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.15 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT MASONRY 12.137 042000-5 SECTION 04 2001 - MASONRY VENEER PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clay Facing Brick. B. Mortar. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Installation of Lintels. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 7200 - Cast Stone Masonry: Window sills and water table bands. B. Section 05 4000 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Steel stud backup for masonry veneer. C. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 2100 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section. B. This allowance includes purchase and delivery of face brick. Installation is not included in the allowance but is specified in this section and is part of the Contract Sum /Price. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. D. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011. E. ASTM C150 /C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012. F. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). G. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 2012. H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012. I. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene at least one week before starting work of this section. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar. C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Facing Brick: 50 of each type, size, and color combination. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MASONRY VENEER 12.137 042001 -1 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock -up panel sized 6 feet long by 4 feet high; include mortar and accessories and structural backup in mock -up. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock -up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK UNITS A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample. a. Basis of Design: manufactured by 2. Color and texture for patching original building: Match existing brick. 3. Nominal size: Modular. 4. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. D. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. 1. Color(s): To match Architect's sample(s) when incorporated into specified mix design(s). a. Basis of Design: manufactured by E. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2 -piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Eye and pintle anchors a. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage. 1) For masonry substrates, anchor plates shall be securely attached to masonry backup horizontal Joint reinforcement. 2) Provide individual unit for locations where horizontal joint reinforcement does not occur. 3) Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick. b. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches. 2. Loose ties and anchors a. Corrugated sheet metal ties: 7/8 inch wide x 7 inches long x 22 gauge, hot dipped galvanized for masonry to masonry anchorage. 1) Provide prepunched bent units where required for face anchorage. b. Bar anchors: 1 1/4 inch x 3/16 inch bar, minimum 12 inch length with bent ends to form a z- anchor, hot dipped galvanized. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MASONRY VENEER 12.137 042001 -2 B. Manufacturers: 1. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O -Wal brand): www.h - b.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.04 THROUGH WALL FLASHINGS A. Flashing Materials: Metal and Flexible flashing, as specified in Sections 07 6200 and 07 6513. B. Flexible flashing materials: "Flex - Flash" Cavity Wall Flashing manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.: www.h- b.com. C. Stainless Steel Drip Edge: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft temper; 26 gage (0.45 mm) thick; finish 2B to 2D. D. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. E. Flexible Flashing Materials (option): as specified in Section 07 6513. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Neoprene material. Manufactured with integral corner and tee accessories, fused joints. B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 1 inch wide x by maximum lengths available. C. Weeps: See Cavity Vents below. D. Cavity Vents: Polyester mesh. 1. Manufacturers: a. CavClear /Archovations, Inc; CavClear Weep Vents: www.cavclear.com E. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi -rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. F. Cleaning Solution: Non - acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.06 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Property Specification. 1. Exterior, non - loadbearing masonry: Type N. 2. Interior, non - loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment -to- cement ratio. C. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built -in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortarjoints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MASONRY VENEER 12.137 042001 -3 3.03 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Isolate top joint of masonry veneer from horizontal structural framing members or support angles with compressible joint filler. 3.04 WEEPS /CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through -wall flashing and at bottom of walls. B. Install cavity vents in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and lintels and at top of walls. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER A. Masonry Back -Up: Embed anchors in masonry back -up to bond veneer at maximum 1.77 sq ft of wall surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 16 inches on center. B. Stud back -Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back -up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 1.77 sq ft of wall surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 16 inches on center. 3.06 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 8 inches to form watertight pan at non - masonry construction. Provide end dams at all sill flashings, head flashings, and shelf angle flashings. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend stainless steel drip edge through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. C. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 3.07 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 4 inch bearing on each side of opening for each 4 feet of opening span or portion thereof. 3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install veneer control and expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, but not less than one for each 40 feet of wall length, at changes in veneer plane, at changes in veneer height, to restrict individual horizontal brick veneer panels to a height to length ratio of 1 to 4 maximum, unless otherwise justified by calculations. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install bond breaks between concrete and clay masonry veneers with specified building paper placed adjacent to the clay units, unless otherwise indicated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MASONRY VENEER 12.137 042001 -4 3.09 BRICK EXPANSION JOINTS (BEJ) A. Form expansion joint for installation of backer rod and sealant as detailed. B. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through expansion joints. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non - cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 3.11 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for pipes and conduit. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MASONRY VENEER 12.137 042001 -5 SECTION 04 4301 - STONE MASONRY VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cut stone veneer at exterior masonry walls. B. Metal anchors and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 0515 - Pointing Mortar For Stone Masonry B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Joint reinforcement, Ties, Anchors, and mortar and grout materials. C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011. B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. C. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012. D. ASTM C568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2010. E. ILI (HB) - Indiana Limestone Handbook; Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; 2007, 22nd Edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene at least one week before starting work of this section. B. Sequence work to coordinate the installation of stone work with installation of adjacent construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on stone units, sizes, setting and pointing mortar, and anchors. C. Samples: Submit four stone samples illustrating color range, texture, and markings. D. Samples: Submit mortar color samples. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type required by this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site. B. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation from forming on stone. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STONE A. Limestone: Indiana Oolitic Limestone. 1. Grade: Select, per ILI Handbook. 2. Color: match existing. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STONE MASONRY VENEER 12.137 044301 -1 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STONE MASONRY VENEER 12.137 044301 -2 3. Texture: Smooth, match existing. 2.02 MORTAR A. Setting Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S, using the Proportion Method . B. Pointing Mortar: Type N as specified in Section 04 0511, and using the Proportion Method in ASTM C270. 1. Color: Mineral oxide pigment; color as selected. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Veneer Anchors in Direct Contact with Stone: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel, of sizes and configurations required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads. B. Setting Buttons and Shims: Plastic. C. Flashings: Flexible type with stainless steel drip edge as specified in Section 04 2000. D. Weep /Cavity Vents: See Section 04 2000. E. Back Coating: Bituminous. 1. Acceptable Product: "Hydrocide 700" emulsified - asphalt manufactured by Sonneborn; www.chemrex.com.. F. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. 2.04 STONE FABRICATION A. Nominal Thickness: 3 inch. B. Nominal Face Size: Indicated on Drawings and to match existing adjacent stone. C. Pattern and Coursing: Indicated on Drawings and to match existing adjacent stone. D. Fabricate for 3/8 inch beds and joints. E. Bed and Joint Surfaces: 1. Cut or sawn full square for full thickness of unit. F. Backs: Sawn. G. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for shedding water. H. Cut drip slot in bottom surface of work projecting more than 1/2 inch over window frame. Size slot not less than 3/8 inch wide and 1/4 inch deep for full width of projection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify that items built -in under other sections are properly located and sized. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces. C. Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles. D. Coat cavity surfaces not to be in contact with setting mortar with back coating material. Allow coating to cure. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back -up. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. B. Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions. C. Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar. D. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize distracting visual variations . MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STONE MASONRY VENEER 12.137 044301 -2 E. Arrange stone coursing in running bond with consistent joint width. F. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width. G. Install weep /cavity vents in stone joints immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports, and at top of each cavity space; do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Attach wall ties to back -up to anchor veneer to back -up as indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. 3.05 JOINTS A. Leave the following joints open for sealant: 1. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. 2. Joints in projecting units. 3. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. 4. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. 5. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. 6. Joints labeled "expansion joint ". B. Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch and brush joints clean to accommodate pointing mortar. Fill joints with pointing mortar. C. Pack mortar into joints and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to concave joint. D. At joints to be sealed, clean mortar out of joint before it sets. Brush joints clean. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.07 PROTECTION A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non - staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STONE MASONRY VENEER 12.137 044301 -3 SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite floor deck. B. Metal form deck. C. Stud shear connectors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous structural steel framing. B. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Site applied painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold- Finished; 2007. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. D. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008. E. SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DECK A. Composite Floor Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Span Design: Multiple. 3. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 20 gage. 4. Nominal Height: 1 -1/2 inches. 5. Profile: Fluted; SDI WR. 6. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch. 7. End Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. B. Metal Form Deck: Corrugated sheet steel: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 20 gage. 3. Nominal Height: 7/8 inch. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STEEL DECKING 12.137 053100-1 4. Formed Sheet Width: 24 inch. 5. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 6. End Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. 2.02 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Deck Fastening System: Powder - Actuated. B. Basis of Design, Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc.; www.us.hilti.com. C. System Description: Hilti barjoist deck fastening system utilizing self- contained, stand up decking tool powered by 0.27 caliber short cartridges. 1. Fastener designation: X- EDNK22 THQ12; zinc - plated, carbon steel. a. FM approved for attaching Class 1 steel roof decks with 1 -60 and 1 -90 wind uplift ratings. 2. Fastener Pattern and Spacing: a. Perimeter fastener spacing: 12 inch. b. Composite Floor Deck (20 gage): Pattern 36/4; 12 inch fastener spacing. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, galvanized per ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars. C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping. D. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC -Paint 25, zinc oxide, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC -Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. G. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck. 2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. B. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1 -1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing. C. On steel supports provide minimum 1 -1/2 inch bearing. D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at every other transverse flute using mechanical fasteners. E. At male /female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum. F. Where welding is required, weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers. 2. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch -up primer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STEEL DECKING 12.137 053100-2 G. At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and mechanically attach to deck at each flute. H. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fasten 12 inches on center maximum. I. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion. J. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. K. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures. L. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fasten at each deck flute. M. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STEEL DECKING 12.137 053100-3 SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items. B. Miscellaneous structural steel members. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures: LEED credits relating to Metal Products B. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. D. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. D. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. E. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2012. F. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2012. G. ASTM A500 /A500M - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. H. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2007. I. ASTM A1011 /A1011 M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot - Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High- Strength Low -Alloy and High- Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength; 2012a J. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. K. SSPC -Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). L. SSPC -Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic "); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. D. LEED submittal: use LEED Metal- Containing Product List and LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL FABRICATIONS 12.137 055000-1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design structural steel under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Iowa. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - CARBON STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 572 or A 36.. B. Steel Tubing (HSS): ASTM A500, Grade B cold- formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 36. D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black and hot -dip galvanized finish, as indicated. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM Al53/A153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC -Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC -Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Steel Columns: Steel tubing; prime paint finish. 1. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. B. Steel Beams: Steel tubing; prime paint finish. 1. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Profile: as indicated on the Drawings. C. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates: For support of metal decking and joists; galvanized finish. 2.04 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items specified for Galvanized finish. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Prime Painting: One coat. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC -SP2. D. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. E. Galvanizing of Non - structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM Al23/A123M requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL FABRICATIONS 12.137 055000-2 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non - cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of- Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL FABRICATIONS 12.137 055000-3 SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted handrails. B. Stair railings and guardrails. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry. B. Section 05 5100 - Metal Stairs: Attachment plates for handrails specified in this section. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. C. ASTM A500 /A500M - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. D. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). E. SSPC -Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint; The Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). F. SSPC -Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic "); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. C. Samples: Submit two, 12 inch long samples of handrail. Submit two samples of elbow, wall bracket, escutcheon, and end stop. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code. B. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. C. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. 1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1 -1/2 inches diameter, round. 2. Intermediate Rails: 1 -1/2 inches diameter, round. 3. Posts: 1 -1/2 inches diameter, round. 4. Balusters: 3/4 inch round solid bar. 5. Infill: D. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry, for bolting anchors. 2. For anchorage of posts to stair stringers, provide brackets for bolted connection as indicated on Drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 12.137 055213-1 E. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T- shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold- formed structural tubing. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black and galvanized finish, as indicated. C. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop - welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth. D. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. E. Straight Splice Connectors: Steel concealed spigots. F. Galvanizing: In accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. 1. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC -Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic. G. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC -Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. D. Welded Joints: Shop fabricate prior to galvanizing. E. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. F. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. G. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. C. Anchor railings securely to structure. D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non - cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 12.137 055213-2 Maximum Out -of- Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213-3 SECTION 05 5305 - METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed metal floor gratings. B. Perimeter closure. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. C. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. D. NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2009 (ANSI / NAAMM MBG 531). E. SSPC -Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic "); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Load Design: NAAMM MBG 531. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240 of span; size components by single support design. C. Maximum Spacing Between Bars: To restrict pedestrian shoe heels. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide span and deflection tables. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of component supports, openings, perimeter construction details, and tolerances. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special requirements for opening and perimeter framing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet for Lock Forming: Hot - dipped galvanized, ASTM A653/A653M, FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC -Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Saddle Clips: Galvanized steel: B. Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Grating Type: NAAMM MBG 531, Pressure Locked Type. B. Fabricate support framing for openings. C. Bearing Bar: _ x _ inch size, spaced inches on center. D. Cross Bar: _ x —inch size, spaced inches on center. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES 12.137 055305-1 2.04 FINISHES A. Galvanizing for Steel Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. B. Verify that opening sizes and dimensional tolerances are acceptable. C. Verify that supports are correctly positioned. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place frames in correct position, plumb and level. C. Anchor by bolting through saddle clips. D. Set perimeter closure flush with top of grating and surrounding construction. E. Secure to prevent movement. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to NAAMM MBG 531. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. : Pressure locked galvanized steel bars, inch bearing bars spaced inches on center; 100 Ibs per sq ft live load. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES 12.137 055305-2 SECTION 05 7000 - DECORATIVE METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Railing and guardrail assemblies. B. Wall- mounted handrails. C. Free - standing railings at steps. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional requirements for cleaning. B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Supports. C. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood handrail. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2010. B. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2012. C. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010. D. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. E. ASTM A500 /A500M - Standard Specification for Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. F. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2007. G. ASTM A554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2011. H. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. I. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). J. ASTM E985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). K. AWS C 3.4/C3.4M - Specification for Torch Brazing; 2007. L. AWS C 3.5/C 3.5M - Specification for Induction Brazing; 2007. M. AWS C 3.9/C 3.9M - Specification for Resistance Brazing; 2009. N. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010. O. AWS D1.6/D1.6M - Stainless Steel Welding Code; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including description of materials, components, finishes, fabrication details, glass, anchors, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate railing system elevations and sections, details of profile, dimensions, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Indicate anchor and joint locations, brazed connections, transitions, and terminations. D. Test Reports: Submit test reports from an independent testing agency showing compliance with specified design and performance requirements. E. LEED Submittals: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DECORATIVE METAL 12.137 057000-1 1. Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product or component which contains recycled content. 2. Submit applicable LEED Submittal Form for each different product or component which has been extracted, recovered, or manufactured within 500 miles of the project site. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing decorative stairs and railing systems and acceptable to manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RAILING SYSTEMS A. Railings - General: Factory- or shop- fabricated in design indicated, to suit specific project conditions, and for proper connection to building structure, and in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. 1. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate railings and anchorages to resist the following loads without failure, damage, or permanent set; loads do not need to be applied simultaneously. a. Lateral Force: 75 lb minimum, at any point, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935. b. Distributed Load: 50 pounds per foot minimum, applied in any direction at the top of the handrail, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935. c. Concentrated Loads on Intermediate Rails: 50 pounds per square ft, minimum. d. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds minimum, applied in any direction at any point along the handrail system, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935. 2. Assembly: Join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts using slip -on non -weld mechanical fittings, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 3. Joints: Tightly fitted and secured, machined smooth with hairline seams. 4. Field Connections: Provide sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. 5. Welded and Brazed Joints: Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline; use methods that avoid discoloration and damage of finish; grind smooth, polish, and restore to required finish. a. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. b. Welded Joints: 1) Carbon Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1 /D 1.1M. 2) Stainless Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.6/D1.6M. c. Brass /Bronze Brazed Joints: 1) Perform torch brazing in accordance with AWS C3.4/C3.4M. 2) Perform induction brazing in accordance with AWS C3.5/C3.5M. 3) Perform resistance brazing in accordance with AWS C3.9/C3.9M 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Components: 1. ASTM A666, Type 304. 2. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A554, Type 204, 16 gage (0.0625 inch), 1 -1/2 inch diameter. 3. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes and Moldings: ASTM A276, Type 304. 4. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 Satin. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop - welded from matching pipe or tube; joints and seams ground smooth. B. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and other materials as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete for bolting anchors. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DECORATIVE METAL 12.137 057000-2 2. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry for bolting anchors. 3. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates for bolting anchors. 4. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws. C. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's drawings and written instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects and with tight joints, except where necessary for expansion. C. Anchor securely to structure. D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. E. Isolate dissimilar materials with bituminous coating, bushings, grommets or washers to prevent electrolytic corrosion. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non - cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of- Position: 1/4 inch. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove protective film from exposed metal surfaces. B. Metal: Clean exposed metal finishes with potable water and mild detergent, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations; do not use abrasive materials or chemicals, detergents or other substances that may damage the material or finish. C. Glass and Glazing: Clean glazing surfaces; remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. D. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DECORATIVE METAL 12.137 057000-3 SECTION 06 0140 - REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD DOORS, CASING, AND RUNNING TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refinishing existing stile and rail wood doors, casing, and running trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, substitutions and product options, delivery, storage, and handling. B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content. C. Section 01 6200 - Finish Carpentry. D. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data for products required by this Section. C. VOC Data: Provide documentation that all materials comply with VOC limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Strippers: As selected by Contractor and approved by Architect. B. Stain and Finish Materials: Match Existing Woodwork To Remain. 1. Products: a. Stain: As selected by Contractor and approved by Architect. 2. Clear Finish: As selected by Contractor and approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that existing doors and frames are proper size for new location. B. Verify that existing wall thickness is suitable for door frames installed in new locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation for refinishing: 1. Using approved stripping materials and procedures, completely remove existing coats of finish materials exposing original wood surfaces of doors and frames. 2. Lightly sand wood surfaces to provide smooth substrate suitable for application of new 3. transparent finish materials. 4. Verify that existing hardware preparation is suitable for proper installation of new replacement hardware. Make necessary modifications to unsatisfactory preparations. 5. New Doors and Frame Materials: Prepare for site finishing to match existing doors. a. 1. 3.03 APPLICATION OF FINISH MATERIALS A. Apply wood stain and clear finish coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of Section 09 9000. B. Lightly sand between coats of clear finish. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD DOORS, CASING, AND RUNNING TRIM 12.137 060140-1 SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. B. Roof - mounted curbs. C. Roofing nailers. D. Preservative treated wood materials. E. Fire retardant treated wood materials. F. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. G. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. H. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification C. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Steel stud partition wall framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. C. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood- Protection Association; 2003. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2012. E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. F. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on fire retardant treated wood. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. D. LEED Submittals: Submit LEED Wood - Containing Product Submittal Summary Form for each different wood product including those made of sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused wood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, as well as locally- sourced wood, and all composite wood products as specified in Section 01 3343.. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROUGH CARPENTRY 12.137 061000-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. C. Provide sustainably harvested wood; see Section 01 6000 Product Requirements, for requirements. D. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site; see Section 01 6000 for requirements for locally- sourced products. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S -dry or MC19. C. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ): 1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 2. Grade: No. 3 or Stud. D. Miscellaneous Blocking, Nailers, and Grounds: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Miscellaneous Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C -D, Exposure I. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A -C plywood (A -side exposed); 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Other Applications: Plywood, PS 1, C -C Plugged or better. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Metal and Finish: Hot - dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative- treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire - Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative- Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC- accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROUGH CARPENTRY 12.137 061000-2 ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . c. Do not use FR treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. d. Do not use FR treated wood in any application not specifically indicated. C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. a. Treat lumber exposed to weather. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. d. Treat plywood in other locations as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof /attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall- mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling- mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.03 ROOF - RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROUGH CARPENTRY 12.137 061000-3 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire -rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire -rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor -to- ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site -sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.07 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co- generation facilities or "waste -to- energy" facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROUGH CARPENTRY 12.137 061000-4 SECTION 06 2000 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items as indicated on the drawings. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification C. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. D. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. E. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. F. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. B. AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. C. AWI /AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.9). E. HPVA HP -1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2010. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories. 1. Provide the information required by AWI /AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories, to a minimum scale of 1 -1/2 inch to 1 ft. E. Samples: Submit two samples of finished wood trim 12 inch long. F. LEED Report: Submit for wood products made from sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused wood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, and locally- sourced wood, as specified in Section 01 3343 - LEED Requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum ten years of documented experience. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY 12.137 062000-1 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. 2. Company with documented experience in the fabrication of replacement woodwork as exists in the existing project building. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI /AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade. B. Provide wood species and cuts to match existing finish carpentry work. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site. 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: matching species, matching cut, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. B. Hardwood Lumber: matching species, matching cut, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish. 2.04 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A -B; glue type as recommended for application. B. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, matching cut, existing matched, veneer core; HPVA HP -1, Front Face Grade AA, Back Face Grade 1; glue type as recommended for application. C. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, book matched, medium density fiberboard core; glue type as recommended for application. 2.05 FASTENINGS A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; Paint finish in concealed locations and paint finish in exposed locations. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and Backing: Softwood lumber of S /P /F species. B. Primer: as specified in Section 09 9000. C. Wood Filler: Oil base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY 12.137 062000-2 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY 12.137 062000-3 C. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.09 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: 1. Transparent: a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose. b. Stain: As selected by Architect. c. Sheen: Satin. E. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC /WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: See Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY 12.137 062000-3 SECTION 06 4100 -ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. C. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 06 4113 - Custom Plastic Laminate Casework C. Section 12 3600 - Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. C. AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. D. AWI /AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. E. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.9). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet and shelf unit substrate and finish. E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Perform work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Provide mock -up of typical base cabinet and countertop, including hardware and finishes. B. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 12.137 064100-1 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI / /AWMAC /WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade. B. Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. 1. Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, American Walnut, quarter cut, slip- matched. a. Match Architect's sample 2. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, Birch, rotary cut, random - matched. C. Cabinets : 1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Wood. 2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Wood. 3. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: as detailed. 4. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless. 5. Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Flush panel. a. Custom Grade: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain to run and match vertically within each cabinet unit. 6. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.. a. Deflection: U144. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Veneer Faced Plywood Finish: HPVA HP -1; graded in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core of particleboard or medium density fiberboard; type of glue recommended for specific application; thickness as required; face veneer as follows: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, Cherry, plain sliced, slip- matched. 2. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, Birch, rotary cut, random - matched. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with interior grade adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for components indicated on drawings. 1. Panels: Manufactured without added urea formaldehyde; certified by the Composite Panel Association (CPA) to comply with their Environmentally Preferable Product (EPP) Specification CPA 2 -06. a. Thickness: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Face screwholding capacity: 250 lbs. c. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; NAUF, type as specified in AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Use for painted components and concealed components. 2. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. D. Plywood for Non - Decorative Purposes: NIST PS 1, Interior rated adhesives, core of wood plies from listed species unless otherwise indicated, thickness as indicated or as required by application. 1. Concealed Surfaces: PS 1; APA B -B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 12.137 064100 -2 2.04 COUNTERTOPS A. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Specified in Section 12 3600. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome - plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome - plated finish in exposed locations. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side - mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stainless Steel Bar pull, width of drawer. 1. Product: 101.20 manufactured by Hafele. D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish. E. Catches: Magnetic. White molded housing. F. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing /stay closed type. 6. Products: a. Blum, Inc.; www.blum.com b. Hettich America, LP: www.hettichamerica.com. c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. G. Hinges: selected self - closing type, bronze with satin finish. 1. Products: a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com. c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company - N /A: www.knapeandvogt.com. d. Julius Blum, Inc: www.blum.com. e. Soss; www.soss.com. f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Hinges: Conform to ANSI /BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 requirements; 2 -3/4 inch, 5 knuckle, heavy duty, full wrap around type. a. Tempered steel, 0.095 inch thick; brushed finish. b. Mill ground, hospital tip, tight pin feature with all edges eased; 9 screws minimum. 2.07 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Stain, Varnish and Finishing Materials: As required by AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Cabinet Style: As indicated for each location. B. Sub -Base: Provide separate 4 inch high sub -base constructed of plywood with water resistant glue. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 12.137 064100 -3 C. Cabinet Body: D. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Stile and rail, raised panel style. E. Drawer Construction Technique: Lock shoulder joints. F. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. G. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. H. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. I. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs. 1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim. J. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows: 1. Provide center matched panels at each elevation. 2. Provide sequence matching across each elevation. 3. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks. K. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. L. Provide cutouts for outlet boxes and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. 2.09 SHOP FINISHING -WOOD VENEER FACED CABINETS A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500, Nitrocellulose Lacquer, Transparent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. D. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 12.137 064100 -4 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 12.137 064100 -5 SECTION 06 4113 - CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated plastic laminate cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 12 3410 -Modular Plastic Laminate Casework. C. Section 12 3600 - Countertops. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. B. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2002. C. AWI /AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI /BHMA Al 56.9). E. NEMA LD 3 - High- Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet and shelf unit substrate and finish. E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Provide mock -up of typical base cabinet and wall cabinet, including hardware and finishes. B. Mock -up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12.137 064113 -1 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI / /AWMAC /WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade for plastic laminate faced cabinets. B. Cabinets : 1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 3. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: as indicated. 4. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless. 5. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 - Overlay; . 6. Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Flush panel. a. Custom Grade: Doors, drawer fronts and false fronts wood grain to run and match vertically within each cabinet unit. 7. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.. a. Deflection: U144. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade II /Custom; average moisture content of 5 -10 percent; species as follows: 1. Semi - Exposed Surfaces: Species Poplar. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Species Poplar. 2.04 PANEL MATERIALS A. Softwood Faced Plywood: Used for non - decorative purposes. 1. Concealed Surfaces: PS 1; APA B -B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer, Interior rated adhesives, ply -core, thickness as required. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with interior grade adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use for components indicated on drawings. 1. Panels: Manufactured without added urea formaldehyde; certified by the Composite Panel Association (CPA) to comply with their Environmentally Preferable Product (EPP) Specification CPA 2 -06. a. Thickness: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Face screwholding capacity: 250 lbs. c. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI /AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Use for painted components and components indicated on the drawings. 2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Product and Colors: as scheduled. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12.137 064113 -2 B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications and as follows: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled. 3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, through color, colors as scheduled, finish as scheduled. 4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome - plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome - plated finish in exposed locations. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. E. Grommets: Standard plastic or painted metal grommets for cut -outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable shelf supports: Side - mounted clips for 1 inch thick shelves. 1. Twin pin design with anti -tip restraints, keel to retard shelf slide -off, and slot to allow mechanical attachment of shelf to clip. 2. Pin supports: Multiple holes for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 3. Static load: Each support rated for 300 pound static load, minimum. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: 160 mm Pull. 1. Product: Riva Collection manufactured by Amerock: www.amerock.com. a. Length: 7 inches; 6 -1/4 inch centers. b. Finish: Graphite. D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish. E. Catches: Magnetic. White molded housing. F. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: Heavy Duty grade. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing /stay closed type. 6. Manufacturers: a. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. b. Hettich America, LP; Quadro: www.hettichamerica.com. c. Royal Hardware: www.royalhardware.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. G. Hinges: Conform to ANSI /BHMA A156.9, Grade 1 requirements; 2 -3/4 inch, 5 knuckle, heavy duty, full wrap around type. 1. Tempered steel, 0.095 inch thick; brushed finish. 2. Mill ground, hospital tip, tight pin feature with all edges eased; 9 screws minimum. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12.137 064113 -3 B. Sub -Base: Provide separate 4 inch high sub -base constructed of plywood with water resistant glue. 1. Finish for Toe Kicks: Resilient base specified in Section 09 6500. C. Cabinet Body: 1. Base and Tall Cabinets: a. Bottoms and Tops: 3/4 inch prefinished particle board; white both sides. b. Exposed Ends: c. Semi - exposed Ends: 2. Wall Cabinets: a. Bottoms and Tops: 3/4 inch prefinished particle board; white both sides. b. Exposed Ends: c. Semi - exposed Ends: 3. Cabinet Backs: 1/2 inch prefinished particle board; white both sides. D. Interior Shelves: 1 inch prefinished particle board; white both sides; PVC edges. E. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. 1. 3/4 inch particle board with HPDL - VGS both sides; PVC edges. F. Drawer Construction Technique: Lock shoulder joints. G. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. H. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. I. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. J. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs. 1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with plastic trim. K. Provide cutouts for outlet boxes and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. D. Secure sub -base to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid caps to match surrounding finish; flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12.137 064113 -4 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CUSTOM PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK 12.137 064113 -5 SECTION 07 0150.19 - PREPARATION FOR RE- ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of existing roofing system in preparation for a new roof membrane system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Various sections concerning installation of new parapet coping and cornice work. B. Section 02 4100 - Demolition. C. Section 07 5413 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. IBC Chapter 333 - Safeguard During Construction C. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2013. D. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with affected mechanical and electrical work associated with roof penetrations. B. Coordinate protection of rooftop telecommunications equipment with demolition and subsequent reroofing. C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. D. Schedule work to coincide with commencement of installation of new roofing system. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials Removal Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not remove existing roofing membrane when weather conditions threaten the integrity of the building contents or intended continued occupancy. B. Maintain continuous temporary protection prior to and during installation of new roofing system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Temporary Protection: Sheet waterproof materials; provide weights to retain sheeting in position. B. Recovery Board: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C1177, moisture- and fire - resistant board with factory applied acrylic primer coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing roof surface is clear and ready for work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Sweep roof surface clean of loose matter. B. Remove loose refuse and dispose off site. 3.03 MATERIAL REMOVAL A. Remove only existing roofing materials that can be replaced with new materials the same day. B. Fold up metal counter flashings to permit access to top edge of base flashings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PREPARATION FOR RE- ROOFING 12.137 07 0150.19 - 1 C. Remove roofing membrane, perimeter base flashings, flashings around roof protrusions, penetration flashings. D. Remove insulation cant strips, blocking, and existing skylight covering and flashing. E. Repair existing roof deck surface to provide smooth working surface for new roof system. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary protective sheeting over uncovered deck surfaces. B. Turn sheeting up and over parapets and curbing. Retain sheeting in position with weights. C. Provide for surface drainage from sheeting to existing drainage facilities. D. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or repaired deck surface. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PREPARATION FOR RE- ROOFING 12.137 07 0150.19 - 2 SECTION 07 1300 - SHEET WATERPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet membrane waterproofing for adhesive application to below -grade concrete deck. B. Drainage panels. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 2006a. B. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved 2010). C. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; 2012. D. ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds; 1998 (Reapproved 2010). E. ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T -Peel Test); 2008, F. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self- Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2011. G. ASTM D5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2006). H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. I. ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water . PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Self- Adhered Modified Bituminous Membrane: 1. Thickness: 60 mil (0.060 inch). 2. Sheet Width: 36 inches. 3. Tensile Strength: a. Film: 5000 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM D882 and at grip- separation rate of 2 inches per minute. b. Membrane: 325 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412 Method A, using die C and at spindle- separation rate of 2 inches per minute. 4. Elongation at Break: 300 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SHEET WATERPROOFING 12.137 071300-1 5. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970 at minus 20 degrees F, 180 degree bend on 1 inch mandrel. 7. Peel Strength: 7 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D903. 8. Lap Adhesion Strength: 5 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D1876. 9. Puncture Resistance: 50 pounds, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM E154. 10. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion. 11. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 200 feet when tested according to ASTM D5385. 12. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 13. Manufacturers: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Incorporated; MiraDRI 860/861: www.carlisle-ccw.com. b. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc; MEL -ROL: www.wrmeadows.com. 2.02 ATTACHMENT MATERIALS A. Termination Bar: Extruded aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with liquid membrane using depth to width ratio; comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. E. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply pre -coat adhesive surface conditioner at a rate of 1/3 gal /100 sq ft. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION -MEMBRANE A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond with pre -coat adhesive surface conditioner. D. Overlap "side" lap seams and "end" lap seams and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3 inches. Hand roll all lap seams to seal permanently waterproof. E. Mastic Application: Apply 1 inch bead of VM Masticseal at cut edges of membrane, horizontal sheet termination edges, and elsewhere in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SHEET WATERPROOFING 12.137 071300-2 3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. B. Place protection board (rigid insulation) directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SHEET WATERPROOFING 12.137 071300-3 SECTION 07 2100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in stud framed wall construction. B. Expanding spray foam insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and roof, and space between top of partition walls and structural deck. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Installation of brick ties and through -wall flashings. D. Section 07 2700 - Air Barrier Membranes: Separate air barrier materials. E. Section 07 5300 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C209 -Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2010. C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2010. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. LEED Submittal: Submit appropriate form for recycled content or Regional materials as specified in Section 01 3343. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBER BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Rigid mineral fiber, ASTM C612; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Non - combustible. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Thickness: 3 inches. 4. Maximum Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft. 5. Manufacturers: a. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. b. Roxul, Inc.; www.roxul.com. c. Johns Manville Corporationl; www.jm.com. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation THERMAL INSULATION 12.137 072100-1 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Thickness: 3 inch. 3. Manufacturers: a. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. b. Roxul, Inc.; www.roxul.com. c. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation . B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of fins or irregularities. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Install in Curtain Wall void space behind Spandrel Glazing where practical. B. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency as follows: 1. 6 per insulation board. C. Install boards to fit snugly betweenframing members D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. E. Fill joints and crevices exceeding 1/8 inch in width with spray foam insulation to ensure continuity of exterior thermal envelope. F. Tape seal joints between adjacent panels. 3.03 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install in Curtain Wall void space behind Spandrel Glazing in areas where installation of board insulation is impractical. B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. D. Coordinate work of this section with installation of glazing specified in Section 08 8000 3.04 SPRAY FOAM INSTALLATION A. Spray apply expanding foam insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions B. Where expanding foam insulation is applied to voids and gaps assure space for expansion to avoid pressure on adjacent materials that may bind operable parts. C. Install foamed -in -place insulation at junctions of dissimilar wall and roof materials to achieve a thermal and air seal . 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation THERMAL INSULATION 12.137 072100-2 SECTION 07 5400 - THERMOPLASTIC (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs. B. Section 07 7200 - Roof Accessories: Roof - mounted units; prefabricated curbs. C. Section 08 6200 - Unit Skylights: Skylight frame and counterflashing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2008. B. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing; 2011 a. C. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low - Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011. D. FM DS 1 -28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007. E. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section: 1. With minimum five years documented experience. 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 15 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 3. Exceptions NOT Permitted: a. Uplift damage due to wind of speed greater than 56 mph but less than 72 mph. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFING A. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation. B. Total roofing system thermal resistance: R 25. C. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2. Roof Covering External Fire - Resistance Classification: UL Class A. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation THERMOPLASTIC (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING 12.137 075400-1 3. Factory Mutual Classification: Class I and windstorm resistance of 1 -90, in accordance with FM DS 1 -28. 4. Insulation Thermal Value (R), minimum: 30; provide insulation of thickness required. D. Acceptable Insulation Types: 1. Minimum 2 layers of polyisocyan u rate board. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: 1. Material: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878. 2. Thickness:.060 inch, minimum with at least 15 mils of TPO product above scrim. 3. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets practical. 4. Solar Reflectance: 0.75, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 5. Thermal Emissivity: 0.80, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3 -year, certified by Cool Roof Rating Council. 6. Color: White. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Vapor Retarder: Plastic, self- adhering ; compatible with roofing and insulation materials. 1. Fire - retardant adhesive. 2. Suitable for direct application to metal deck. D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. 2.03 GYPSUM PANELS A. Insulation Cover Board: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C1177/C1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch thick. B. Mechanically- attached membrane installation; 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick; high density polyiso board 1. Georgia - Pacific: G -P "Dens- Deck" Roof Board; www.gp.com 2. Firestone Building Products Co.; ISOGARD HD Cover Board; www.firestonebpco.com /roofing 3. CARLISLE SYN TEC; SecurShield HD Cover Board; www.carlislesyntec.com 4. Atlas Roofing Corporation: ACFoam HS Cover Board; www.atlasroofing.com 2.04 EDGE METAL SYSTEM A. Perimeter Fascia: Factory fabricated metal components approved by membrane manufacturer. 1. Provide 2 -piece assembly consisting of the following: a. Base: Continuous heavy gage, cold- formed galvanized steel base mechanically fastened to roof edge blocking. b. Fascia Cover: Prefinished, cold- formed 24 gage galvanized steel cover; snap -on design. 6 -1/2 inch nominal height. 2. Acceptable products: a. "Anchor -Tite" Fascia manufactured by Metal -Era, Inc.: www.metalera.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Expansion Joint Flashing: Sheet metal, as specified in Section 07 6200. B. Pre -Cut Tapered Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; Gemini Pre -Cut Crickets, Gemini One -Piece Drain Set, Gemini One -Piece Miter, and Gemini Tapered Edge Strip: www.atlasroofing.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer, compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering. D. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation THERMOPLASTIC (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING 12.137 075400-2 Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal washers. E. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. F. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives. G. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane. H. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. J. Walkway Pads: Suitable for maintenance traffic, contrasting color or otherwise visually distinctive from roof membrane. 1. Composition: Roofing membrane manufacturer's standard. 2. Surface Color: White or yellow. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 3.02 WOOD DECK PREPARATION A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler. 3.03 CONCRETE DECK PREPARATION A. Fill surface honeycomb and variations with latex filler. B. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. 3.04 METAL DECK PREPARATION A. Install preformed sound absorbing glass fiber insulation strips supplied by Section 05 3100 in acoustic deck flutes. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 VAPOR RETARDER AND INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge. 2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and seal to provide continuity of the air barrier plane. B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation. C. Attachment of Insulation: 1. Mechanically fasten first layer for distance from roof edge in accordance with Factory Mutual requirements. D. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 12 inch from joints of preceding layer. E. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. On metal deck, place boards perpendicular to flutes with insulation board ends bearing on deck flutes. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation THERMOPLASTIC (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING 12.137 075400-3 G. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. H. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. I. At roof drains, use factory- tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 24 inches. J. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.06 INSULATION COVER BOARD A. Install gypsum panels covering entire surface of roof insulation: 1. Lay with long side perpendicular to flutes; stagger end joints. 2. Place cover board with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding insulation layer. 3. Cut panels cleanly and accurately at roof breaks and protrusions to provide smooth surface. 3.07 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate of gal /square. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by heat welding, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane up a minimum of 6 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to reglets. 3. Insert flashing into reglets and secure. F. At metal edge assemblies, extend membrane under base of fascia and to the outside face of the wall. G. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. H. Install roofing expansion joints where indicated. Make joints watertight. I. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. J. Install walkway pads in accordance with approved layout. 3.08 ROOF EDGE METAL TRIM A. Install perimeter fascia assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Secure metal trim using concealed fasteners. C. Fit fascia covers in place overlapping splice plates at butt joints. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation THERMOPLASTIC (TPO) MEMBRANE ROOFING 12.137 075400-4 SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and trim. B. Reglets and accessories. C. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers. B. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic (TPO) Membrane Roofing: Roofing system and related metal trim. C. Section 07 9100 -Preformed Joint Seals. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2010. B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2011. C. ANSI / SPRI ES -1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010. G. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012)e1. H. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 inches long in size illustrating metal profile and finish /color. D. LEED Submittal: use LEED Metal- Containing Product List and LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with five years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Metal -Era, Inc: www.metalera.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Components: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 12.137 076200-1 1. Wall Coping:.. 2. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full range. D. Assembly: 1. Factory weld corners. 2. Sizes: As indicated in Drawings. 3. Tolerances: E. Finish: 1. Finish: 2. Shop Finishing Method: 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. B. Pre - Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 24 gage (0.0276 inch thick) base metal, shop pre- coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; custom color to match approved sample. C. Aluminum Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.125 inch thick; mill finish. D. Pre - Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.040 inch thick; plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating of color as selected. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: Type - polyurethane specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. F. Reglets: Recessed type, galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape . 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 6 inches wide, interlocking with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material for splice plates under butt joints, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet -type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. 2.05 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 12.137 076200-2 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets and straps. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. F. Downspout Boots: Plastic. G. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with plastic wedges. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. E. Seal metal joints watertight. F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. G. Slope gutters 1 oz/sq ft1 /8 inch per foot minimum. H. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Seal connection watertight. I. Set splash pads under downspouts. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 12.137 076200-3 SECTION 07 6513 - FLEXIBLE FLASHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Self- adhesive flexible flashing membrane used at wall transitions and rough openings to help prevent water accumulation or intrusion into exterior wall assemblies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Through -wall flashings in masonry. B. Section 07 2700 - Air Barrier Membranes: Transition membranes installed as part of air barrier work. C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D. Section 07 9100 - Preformed Joint Seals: Compressible foam tape sealant. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of flexible flashings with door and window installation and air / moisture barrier membranes to ensure continuity of the sealed enclosure of the building. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on material characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate preparation of rough openings for subsequent installation of doors and windows. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate preparation requirements and special procedures for installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLEXIBLE FLASHING SYSTEM A. Performance Criteria: 1. Provide a complete system of flashings capable of protecting against water penetration into wall assembly around perimeter of rough openings in exterior walls. 2. Provide continuous air barrier connection around perimeter of rough openings in exterior walls. 3. Direct any water penetration to the exterior at or above the sill flashing. 4. Coordinate with perimeter sealant manufacturer; conduct compatibility testing. 2.02 MATERIALS A. PVC Flashing Membrane: Self- adhesive flexible flashing. 1. Material: PVC formulated with Elvaloy (tm) KEE manufactured by DuPont Company. 2. Thickness: 40 mil. 3. Pressure sensitive adhesive and release paper on back surface for "peel- and - stick" installation. 4. Product: Flex -Flash (tm) provided by Hohmann & Barnard,lnc.: www.h- b.com. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. EPDM Flashing Membrane: Self- adhesive flexible flashing. 1. Material: Uncured EPDM 2. Thickness: 40 mil. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FLEXIBLE FLASHING 12.137 076513-1 3. Pressure sensitive adhesive and release paper on back surface for "peel- and - stick" installation. 4. Product: EPRA -MAX (tm) EPDM Thru -Wall Flashing provided by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: www.h - b.com. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces as necessary to ensure satisfactory bond with flashing materials. B. Apply primer to substrate materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Provide for continuity with air / moisture barrier. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed flashings from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FLEXIBLE FLASHING 12.137 076513-2 SECTION 07 8100 -APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fireproofing of interior structural steel. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 3100 -Steel Decking. B. Section 05 5000 - Miscellaneous structural steel framing C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum board fireproofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. B. ASTM E605 - Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members; 1993 (Reapproved 2011). C. ASTM E736 - Standard Test Method For Cohesion /Adhesion of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members; 2000 (Reapproved 2011). D. ASTM E937 - Standard Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members; 1993 (Reapproved 2011). E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with placement of ceiling hanger tabs, mechanical component hangers, and electrical components. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations of use. C. Test Reports: Reports from reputable independent testing agencies for proposed products, indicating compliance with specified criteria, conducted under conditions similar to those on project, for: 1. Bond Strength. 2. Bond Impact. 3. Density. 4. Fire tests using substrate materials similar those on project. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sprayed -on fireproofing products meet or exceed requirements of contract documents. F. LEED Submittals 1. Submit appropriate form for Recycled content materials or Regional materials as specified in Section 01 3343. 2. Submit documentation of VOC content. Refer to Section 01 6116.01 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, and: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation APPLIED FIREPROOFING 12.137 078100-1 1. Having minimum five years of documented experience. 2. Approved by manufacturer. 1.07 MOCK -UP A. Construct mock -up, 10 square feet in size. B. Conform to project requirements for fire ratings. C. Locate where directed. D. Examine installation within one hour of application to determine variances from specified requirements due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity. E. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and method of application as necessary. Remove materials and re- construct mock -up. F. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate material and surrounding air is below 40 degrees F. B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during application and 24 hours afterward, to dry applied material. C. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 1. Include coverage for fireproofing to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking, spalling, separation, and blistering. 2. Reinstall or repair failures that occur within warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sprayed -On Fireproofing: 1. Carboline Company: www.carboline.com. 2. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. 3. Isolatek International Inc: www.isolatek.com. 4. Southwest Fireproofing Products Company: www.sfrm.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FIREPROOFING ASSEMBLIES A. Provide assemblies as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide UL fire -rated assemblies to hourly ratings as follows: 1. Interior beams: 1 hour. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material for Interior Applications: Manufacturer's standard factory mixed material, which when combined with water is capable of providing the indicated fire resistance, and conforming to the following requirements: 1. Composition: Portland- cement - based, not mineral fiber - based. 2. Bond Strength: 150 psf, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E736 when set and dry. 3. Dry Density: As required by fire resistance design. 4. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling or delamination, when tested in accordance with ASTM E760. 5. Corrosivity: No evidence of corrosion, when tested in accordance with ASTM E937. 6. Air Erosion Resistance: Weight loss of 0.025 g /sq ft, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E859 after 24 hours. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation APPLIED FIREPROOFING 12.137 078100-2 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread of 0 and maximum smoke developed of 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 8. Effect of Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination, when tested in accordance with ASTM E759. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Primer Adhesive: Of type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. B. Overcoat: As recommended by manufacturer of fireproofing material. C. Water: Clean, potable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive fireproofing. B. Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing are in place. C. Verify that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items that would interfere with application of fireproofing have not been installed. D. Verify that voids and cracks in substrate have been filled. Verify that projections have been removed where fireproofing will be exposed to view as a finish material. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform tests as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer in situations where adhesion of fireproofing to substrate is in question. B. Remove incompatible materials that could affect bond by scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or sandblasting. C. Prepare substrates to receive fireproofing in strict accordance with instructions of fireproofing manufacturer. D. Protect surfaces not scheduled for fireproofing and equipment from damage by overspray, fall -out, and dusting. E. Close off and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply fireproofing and overcoat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply fireproofing in thickness and density necessary to achieve required ratings, with uniform density and texture. C. Apply overcoat at the rate recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect the installed fireproofing after application and curing for integrity, prior to its concealment. Ensure that actual thicknesses, densities, and bond strengths meet requirements for specified ratings. B. Re- inspect the installed fireproofing for integrity of fire protection, after installation of subsequent Work. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debris. B. Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not required to be fireproofed. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation APPLIED FIREPROOFING 12.137 078100-3 SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire - resistance rated and smoke - resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification C. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. D. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2012. B. ASTM E814 -Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops; 2011a. C. SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics. D. LEED Report: Submit VOC content documentation for all non - preformed materials. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type. 2. Approved by firestopping manufacturer. 1.06 MOCK -UP A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project. 1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. 2. Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening, install minimum of 3 linear ft. B. Obtain approval of authority having jurisdiction before proceeding. C. If accepted, mock -up will represent minimum standard for the Work. D. If accepted, mock -up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock -ups not accepted. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRESTOPPING 12.137 078400-1 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. 2. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com /firestop. 3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. 4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. 5. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. B. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. C. Materials: Use any material meeting requirements. D. Firestopping Materials with Volatile Content: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. E. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use any system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest firestopping material leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Install labeling required by code. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRESTOPPING 12.137 078400-2 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRESTOPPING 12.137 078400-3 C. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 1/4x2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. E. LEED Submittal: use LEED General Product List, LEED General Product Submittal Summary, and refer to Section 01 6116 for further requirements F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate materials and products which were tested by sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion with sealants. Include interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance, and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation necessary for adhesion. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and surface preparation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturer, samples of materials and products that will contact and affect sealant installation and performance; test for compatibility and adhesion. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation JOINT SEALERS 12.137 079005-1 SECTION 07 9005 - JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Compressible foam tape sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 07 2700 - Air Barrier Membranes: Sealants required in conjunction with air barriers and vapor retarders: C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. D. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Sealants required in conjunction with roofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2012. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2012. E. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Mate rials-- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed - Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). F. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product List: Provide schedule of proposed sealants recommended by the manufacturer as being acceptable for use in the intended application and with the substrates with which it will come into contact. C. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 1/4x2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. E. LEED Submittal: use LEED General Product List, LEED General Product Submittal Summary, and refer to Section 01 6116 for further requirements F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate materials and products which were tested by sealant manufacturer for compatibility and adhesion with sealants. Include interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance, and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation necessary for adhesion. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and surface preparation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturer, samples of materials and products that will contact and affect sealant installation and performance; test for compatibility and adhesion. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation JOINT SEALERS 12.137 079005-1 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 2. Dow Corning Corp: www.dow.com. 3. Pecora Corp. 4. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc. 5. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Pecora Corp. 2. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc. 3. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc. C. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920): 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 2. Tremco, Inc. 3. Sherwin- Williams Company: www.sherwin- williams.com. D. Butyl Sealants: 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 2. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Pecora Corp. 2. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc. 3. Sherwin- Williams Company: www.sherwin- williams.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. F. Compressible Foam Tape Sealants: 1. Saint - Gobain Performance Plastics; Product - Norton(r) compressible foam tape: www.plastics.sint - gobain.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, TypeS, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses NT, M, G, A and O; single component, neutral curing. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation JOINT SEALERS 12.137 079005-2 d. Sealing under thresholds at exterior doors. e. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. E. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Product: "Dow Corning 786" Mildew- resistant silicone sealant manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. F. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations: 1. Product: " Tremco Acoustical Sealant" manufactured by Tremco Global Sealants. 2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only: a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. b. Sealant bead at perimeter of drywall panels. G. Interior Concrete Floor Joint Filler: Semi -rigid epoxy; ASTM D 638; multi- component. 1. Color: Medium Gray. 2. Shore A hardness: 90 -95. 3. Solids Content: 100 percent. 4. Products: a. "Joint -Loc 80" manufactured by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation. b. "MM -80 ", two - component epoxy joint filler manufactured by Metzger /McGuire: www.metzgermcguire.com. 5. Applications: a. Install to full depth of exposed saw -cut contraction joints in concrete floors. Use two pass method complying with manufacturer's instructions. Overfill joint leaving material "crowned" above floor surface. After curing, shave material flush with floor surface. H. Glazing Sealant: Silicone, ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G ; single or multi- component, neutral curing, non - sagging, non - staining, fungus resistant, non - bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 5. Applications: Use for: a. Nonstructural glazing of glass, metal and plastic. I. Compressible Foam Tape Sealant: PVC foam tape with pressure- sensitive adhesive on one face; weather resistant. 1. Medium density: Approximately 9 lb per cu ft. 2. Gage: 1/8 to 1/4 inch thick. 3. Width: As required for installation conditions. 4. Color: Gray. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation JOINT SEALERS 12.137 079005-3 5. Applications: Use where components are assembled to form a compression seal to: a. Seal the building envelope against air and water infiltration, b. Create a thermal break, and c. Reduce sound transmission. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Minimum Joint Width: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Joint Depth: 1/2 inch. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Compressible Foam Tape Sealant: Install continuously in single lengths; exposed edges recessed 1/8 inch minimum from face of adjoining surfaces. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation JOINT SEALERS 12.137 079005-4 SECTION 07 9505 - EXPANSION CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Expansion joint assemblies for floor, wall, ceiling and soffit surfaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Placement and grouting of joint assembly frames in floor block -outs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006. B. ASTM B 221 M -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide joint assembly profiles, profile dimensions, anchorage devices, available colors and finish. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint and splice locations, miters, layout of the work, affected adjacent construction, anchorage locations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rough -in sizes; provide templates for cast -in or placed frames or anchors; required tolerances for item placement. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Verify compliance with manufacturer's requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR WALL JOINTS A. Flush expansion joint assemblies with thermoplastic gasket locked into side frames. B. Manufacturer: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc.: <http: / /www.c- sgroup.com /> 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Standard flat wall cover: Use Model C/S FWF -100. 4. Corner wall cover: Use Model C/S FWFC -100. C. Coordinate with matching floor covers. 2.02 FLOOR JOINTS A. Flush expansion joint assemblies with thermoplastic gasket locked into side frames. B. Manufacturer: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc.: <http: / /www.c- sgroup.com /> 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Existing floors (1 and 2): Where existing cannot be reused, provide Model C/S GFPS- 100/200. 2.03 CEILING JOINTS FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Flush expansion joint assemblies with thermoplastic gasket. B. Manufacturer: 1. Construction Specialties, Inc.: <http: / /www.c- sgroup.com /> 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Flat ceiling covers installed between dual ceiling tees: Use Model FCF -100. 4. Corner ceiling covers: Use FCFC -100. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXPANSION CONTROL 12.137 079505-1 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Resilient Filler: Neoprene, exhibiting Shore A hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer. 1. Threaded Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Joint Covers: Aluminum cover plate, aluminum frame construction, retainers with resilient elastomeric filler strip, designed to permit plus or minus 50 percent joint movement with full recovery, flush mounted. B. Galvanize embedded ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. 1. Shop assemble components and package with anchors and fittings. 2. Provide joint components in single length wherever practical. Minimize site splicing. 2.06 FINISHES A. Aluminum Frames: Mill finish. B. Resilient Gaskets Exposed to View: Colors selected from manufacturer's available colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint preparation and dimensions are acceptable and in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding under Section 03 1000. 1. Provide templates and rough -in measurements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align work plumb and level, flush with adjacent surfaces. 1. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor joint surfaces. B. Provide strippable coating to protect finish surface. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXPANSION CONTROL 12.137 079505-2 SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire -rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 7100 -Door Hardware. B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09 9000- Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design- US DoJ Rev. Regulations for Titles II and III, Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661 -302.1 B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. D. BHMA Al 56.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. E. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992. F. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2006. G. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. H. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. I. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. J. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build -up under coverings; prevent corrosion. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12.137 081113-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Curries: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: a. Comply with 2010 ADAAG. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non - removable stops on non - secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA Al 56.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors : 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polyurethane. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Insulating Value: U -value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 or ASTM C 236. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. B. Interior Doors, Non - Fire - Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb. 3. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. C. Interior Doors, Fire - Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10B or NFPA 252 ( "neutral pressure "). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL. b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 3. Core: Carboard honeycomb or polyurethane foam. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. ANSI A250.8 Levels 1 and 2 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2 2. Galvanizing: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12.137 081113-2 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot - dipped zinc -iron alloy- coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non - Fire - Rated: Fully welded type. D. Interior Door Frames, Fire - Rated: Fully welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. E. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: as specified in Section 08 8000 . B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Astragals for Double Doors: 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating. 2. Do not install astragals that impede egress through the door. D. Grout for frames installed in masonry: Portland cement grout of maximum 4 -inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop - assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust - inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Asphaltic paint: Asphalt emulsion or other high - build, water - resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with asphaltic paint, prior to installation except in fire rated assemblies. B. Coat inside of fire rated frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with zinc -rich primer, prior to installation. C. Coat inside of exterior frames with asphaltic paint to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Grouting of frames in masonry construction: use hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. E. Coordinate installation of hardware. F. Coordinate installation of glazing. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12.137 081113-3 G. Touch up factory primer where damaged. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straightedge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12.137 081113-4 SECTION 08 1216 - ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior aluminum frames for wood doors; non - rated. B. Accessories, including fasteners and brackets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. E. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Stud - framed partition walls. F. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AA DAF -45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.; 2003. B. AAMA 609 - Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Anodized Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3323 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of frame; include information on fabrication methods. C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations of each opening type. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. D. Schedule of Door Hardware provided by Section 08 7100: Include manufacturer's catalogue cuts. E. Selection Samples: Complete set of color and finish options, using actual materials, for Architect's selection. F. LEED submittal: use LEED Metal- Containing Product List and LEED Metal- Containing Product Submittal Summary Form. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing components of the types specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with documented experience in installing components of the types specified. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum components in manufacturer's standard protective packaging, palleted, crated, or banded together. B. Inspect delivered components for damage and replace. Repaired components will not be accepted. C. Store components under cover in manufacturer's packaging until installation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 12.137 081216-1 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication with project schedule to avoid delays in the work. B. Do not begin installation of interior aluminum components until space has been enclosed and ambient thermal conditions are being maintained at levels consistent with final project requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The design of the project has been based on products manufactured by RACO Interior Products, Inc.: www.racointeriors.com. B. Alternate approved manufacturers include: 1. Wilson Partitions; www.wilsonpart.com C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063 -T5 or alloy 6463 -T5. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Door Frames: RACO Series 458 fixed throat, with 1 -1/2 inch snap -on trim profile. Provide frames sized to fit 4 -5/8 inch wall thickness or as otherwise indicated on the drawings, in profiles indicated, and constructed from materials as follows: 1. Frame Members: Extruded aluminum shapes, not less than 0.062 in thick, reinforced at hinge and strike locations. 2. Corner Brackets: Extruded aluminum, fastened with stainless steel screws. 3. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 in thick, removable snap -in type without exposed fasteners. 4. Glazing: Clear tempered glass specified in Section 08 8000. 5. Rough -in for Electrical Hardware Items: Provide unobstructed and protected raceway in framing system to allow easy installation of wire after framing is installed. B. Door Hardware: See Section 08 7100. 2.04 FINISHES A. Finish: Clear anodic coating; AAMA 611 AA- M12C22A31 Class II, minimum thickness 0.4 mil. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Door sizes scheduled are nominal; provide standard clearances as follows: 1. Hinge and Lock Stiles: 0.125 inch. 2. At Top Rail and Bottom Rail: 0.125 inch. B. Aluminum frames: Sizes and contours as indicated on drawings. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, non - magnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by manufacturer as non - corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high- strength aluminum units where feasible, otherwise, non - magnetic stainless steel or steel hot -dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Provide minimum 16 gauge steel reinforcements for all operating hardware locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 12.137 081216-2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required for project conditions. B. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. C. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and within specified tolerances. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact by using nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations. D. Install door hardware specified in Section 08 7100. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. B. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. B. Replace damaged or defective components that cannot be repaired to a condition indistinguishable from undamaged components. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES 12.137 081216-3 SECTION 08 1316 - TUBULAR ALUMINUM DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tubular aluminum doors; thermally broken. B. Aluminum framing for flush glazing of vision glass. C. Accessories, including fasteners and brackets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum- Framed Storefronts: Installation of aluminum entrance doors. C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design - US Dept of Justice Revised Regulations for Titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661 -302.1 B. AAMA 609 - Voluntary Guide Specification for Cleaning and Maintenance of Architectural Anodized Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. C. AAMA 701/702 - Voluntary Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. D. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2005. E. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. F. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. G. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. H. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of door and frame; include information on fabrication methods. C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations of each opening type, details at each wall type, schedule of openings, and locations and types of steel reinforcement utilized. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. D. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided under Section 08 7100, cross - referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing components of the types specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with documented experience in installing components of the types specified. C. Perform compatibility testing to ensure compatibility of primary sealant with flashing membrane. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TUBULAR ALUMINUM DOORS 12.137 081316-1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver aluminum components in manufacturer's standard protective packaging, palleted, crated, or banded together. B. Inspect delivered components for damage and replace. Repaired components will not be accepted. C. Store components under cover in manufacturer's packaging until installation. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication with project schedule to avoid delays in the work. B. Do not begin installation of interior aluminum components until space has been enclosed and ambient thermal conditions are being maintained at levels consistent with final project requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 2. Tubelite, Inc.: www.tubeliteinc.com.. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.vistawall.com. 4. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; www.wausauwindow.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 5005 -1-114, stretcher leveled. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063 -T5 or alloy 6463 -T5. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Tubular Aluminum Doors: Provide 2 inch thick glazed doors using materials as follows: 1. Framing: Extruded aluminum tubing, with interior surfaces thermally separated from exterior surfaces by dual glass fiber insulbar; 0.125 in minimum wall thickness; heavy -duty plated steel through bolts in rails. a. Stile width: Nominal 5 in. b. Bottom rail: 10 inches wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glazing: 1 in thick insulating units made up of clear, 1/4 in tempered glass. 3. Replaceable Weatherstripping: AAMA 701/702 wool pile. B. Aluminum Door Frame Components: Provide supplements frame components sized to fit curtainwall openings indicated on the drawings, in profiles indicated, and constructed from materials specified in other sections. 1. Frame Members: Extruded aluminum shapes, with interior surfaces thermally separated from exterior surfaces by dual glass fiber insulbar; not less than 0.125 in wall thickness, reinforced at hinge and strike locations. C. Door Hardware: See Section 08 7100. 1. For hardware specified in Section 08 7100: a. Receive hardware templates from hardware supplier. b. Install necessary reinforcements and prepare doors and framing for installation of specified hardware items. 2.04 FINISHES A. Finish: High Performance Organic Coating: Kynar /Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) complying with requirements of AAMA 2604; color as selected from manufacturer's full range by Architect. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Door and frame members: Accurately fitted to hairline joints. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TUBULAR ALUMINUM DOORS 12.137 081316-2 B. Door sizes shown are nominal; provide standard clearances as follows: 1. Hinge Stiles: 0.312 inch (continuous hinge). 2. Lock Stiles: 0.125 inch. 3. Between Meeting Stiles: 0.250 inch. 4. At Top Rail and Bottom Rail: 0.125 inch. C. Sizes and locations of lights: As indicated on drawings. D. Aluminum frames: Sizes and contours as indicated on drawings. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, non - magnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by manufacturer as non - corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high- strength aluminum units where feasible, otherwise, non - magnetic stainless steel or steel hot -dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Provide reinforcements at internal locations of all operable parts and hardware components. C. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphaltic mastic, compounded for 30 -mil thickness per coat. D. Electrical conduit: Provide electrical conduit in frames for all electric and magnetic locks, keeper switches, door position switches, door operators or other electric door hardware. 1. Raceways: Rigid metal conduit and intermediate conduit (IMC): a. Steel, galvanized inside and outside. Minimum 3/4" trade size conduit. 1/2" conduit may be used may be used incorporating wiring for one device. 2. Raceway fittings: a. For steel conduit: Galvanized or cadmium plated b. For rigid conduit and IMC: Galvanized steel threaded couplings. c. Locknuts and bushings: malleable iron PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. B. Verify that frames installed by other trades for installation of doors of this section are in strict accordance with recommendations and approved shop drawings and within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required for project conditions. B. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. C. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and within specified tolerances. C. Where aluminum surfaces contact metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact by painting dissimilar metal with heavy coating of bituminous paint. D. Hang doors and adjust hardware to achieve specified clearances and proper door operation. E. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TUBULAR ALUMINUM DOORS 12.137 081316-3 F. Install glass in glazing stops; set glazing stops and glazing gaskets flush with frame. 3.04 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609. B. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect products of this section from damage caused by subsequent construction until substantial completion. B. Replace damaged or defective components that cannot be repaired to a condition indistinguishable from undamaged components. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TUBULAR ALUMINUM DOORS 12.137 081316-4 SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non -fire rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 1216 - Aluminum Door Frames B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design- US DoJ Rev. Regulations for Titles II and III, Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661 -302.1 B. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012. C. WDMA I.S.1 -A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association; 2011. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 x 10 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FLUSH WOOD DOORS 12.137 081416-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 4. VT Industries, Inc: www.vtindustries.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1 -A. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5 -ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations . 2. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish . 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non -Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type structural composite lumber core (SCLC), plies and faces as indicated above. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Walnut, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, quarter sliced, slip veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. 3. Transoms: Continuous match to doors. B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 1. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface- mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with AWI /AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System - 9, UV Curable, Acrylated Epoxy, Polyester or Urethane. b. Stain: Custom, to match Architect's sample. c. Sheen: Satin. B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FLUSH WOOD DOORS 12.137 081416-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of- tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Factory- Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FLUSH WOOD DOORS 12.137 081416-3 SECTION 08 1433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. New wood doors, stile and rail design. B. Replacement wood stile and rail doors for existing openings. C. Panels of wood and glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames. B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. D. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing doors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI (QCP) - Quality Certification Program, www.awiqcp.org; current edition at www.awiqcp.org. B. AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate stile and rail core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. 2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality certification of completed work. 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS Grade or Grades specified. 2. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with quality standard specified. B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction, and joinery. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 12.137 081433-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Stile and Rail Wood Doors: 1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 2. Algoma Hardwoods; www.algomahardwoods.com 3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 4. Simpson Door Company; www.simpsondoor.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI /AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. B. Interior Doors: 1 -3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; solid lumber construction; mortised and tenoned joints. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL FACINGS A. Interior Doors: Wood veneer, matching species, matching cut, with matching grain, for transparent finish. B. Adhesive: Type II - water resistant. 2.04 DOOR CONSTRUCTION 2.05 SPECIES AND FINISHES A. Match existing wood species and finishes to existing -to- remain woodwork. B. If exact matches are not possible, submit alternate woods for consideration. C. Match finish profiles of door faces, stiles, and rails. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 1. Verify woods used in existing -to- remain woodwork and doors. 2. Verify face and trim profiles of existing. 3. Verify new work will be compatible with existing to remain work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWI /AWMAC Quality Standards requirements. B. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. D. Machine cut for hardware. E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. F. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit, clearance, and joinery tolerances. B. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 12.137 081433-2 B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 12.137 081433-3 SECTION 08 3313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - fire -rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware. B. Electric motor operation; wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings. C. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Power to disconnect. D. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit from electric circuit to operator and from operator to control station. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011. C. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of construction and finish. Include data on electrical operation. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two slats, 4 inches long illustrating shape, color and finish texture. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and installation, adjustment, and alignment procedures. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. G. LEED Submittal: Submit appropriate form for recycled content or Regional materials as specified in Section 01 3343. H. Project Record Documents: Include as -built electrical diagrams for electrical operation and connection to fire alarm system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Coiling Counter Doors: 1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc: www.alpinedoors.com. 2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com. 3. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com. 4. Wayne - Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne - dalton.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Coiling Counter Doors, Non - Fire - Rated: Aluminum slat curtain. 1. Mounting: Interior face mounted, barrel and hood ceiling recessed. 2. Nominal Slat Size: 1 -1/4 inches wide. 3. Slat Profile: Flat. 4. Finish: Factory powder coated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COILING COUNTER DOORS 12.137 083313-1 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Guides: Formed track; same material and finish unless otherwise indicated. 7. Hood: Manufacturer's standard;, finished to match curtain. 8. Operation: Electric motor. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with tube to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Aluminum Slats: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M), aluminum alloy Type 6063; minimum thickness 0.05 inch. B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets of same metal. 1. Aluminum Guides: Extruded aluminum channel, with wool pile runners along inside. C. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. D. Latching: Inside mounted, sliding deadbolt. E. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid - travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. 2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Electrically Operated Doors: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted. 2. Motor Enclosure: NEMA MG 1. 3. Motor Rating: As recommended by manufacturer; continuous duty. 4. Motor Voltage: 24 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. 5. Opening Speed: 6 inches per second. 6. Manual override in case of power failure. C. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN- STOP - CLOSE) momentary control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Recessed. D. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro- mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COILING COUNTER DOORS 12.137 083313-2 G. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. H. Install perimeter trim as indicated. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COILING COUNTER DOORS 12.137 083313-3 SECTION 08 3323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling doors , operating hardware, fire - rated, manual and automatic operation. B. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3343 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Support framing. C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. D. Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm interconnection. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. B. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. E. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. F. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details . B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. D. LEED Submittal: Submit appropriate form for recycled content or Regional materials as specified in Section 01 3343. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments required. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of openings and penetrations installed or constructed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc: www.cornelliron.com. 2. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com. 3. Wayne - Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne- dalton.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COILING DOORS A. Fire -Rated Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain; conform to NFPA 80. 1. 1 hour fire rating. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 12.137 083323-1 2. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. Single thickness, flat faced slats. 4. Nominal Slat Size: 2 inches wide x required length. 5. Finish: Primed. 6. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel. 7. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 8. Release Mechanism: Fire alarm system and local smoke detectors activated with automatically governed closing speed. 9. Mounting: Surface mounted. 10. Interior latch only. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats. 1. Slat Ends: Each slat fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. B. Steel Slats: Minimum 22 gage, ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, Grade 40. C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap -on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. D. Steel Guides: ASTM A36/A36M steel angles, size as indicated, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 123/A 123M. E. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Minimum 24 gage galvanized steel. F. Hardware: 1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep in locked or retracted position. 2. Latch Handle: Interior handle. G. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid - travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. 2.04 MANUAL OPERATION A. Manual Push -Up with Conventional Spring Release System: Provide lift handles on bottom bar and pole with hook. 1. Automatic closure shall be activated by fusible link or a local smoke /fire detector by means of a fail -safe releasing device. 2. Doors shall maintain a closing speed of not less than 6" (152 mm) nor more than 24" (610 mm) per second during automatic closing per NFPA 80. 3. Resetting of spring tension and mechanical dropouts by a trained door systems technician is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In addition, install fire -rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 12.137 083323-2 D. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. E. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. F. Complete wiring from fire alarm system. G. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 9005. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 12.137 083323-3 SECTION 08 4126 - FRAMELESS SWINGING GLASS DOORS AND SIDELIGHT PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fittings and hardware for interior frameless glass assemblies: 1. Fixed glass panels. 2. Swinging glass doors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 4000 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Supplementary supports. B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Tempered glass. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. B. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. D. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat - Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene at project site at least one week prior to scheduled beginning of construction activities of this section to review section requirements. 1. Require attendance by representatives of installer and other entities directly affecting, or affected by, construction activities of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each component in all -glass entrance assembly. C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, dimensions, identification of components, and interface with adjacent construction. 1. Include field measurements of openings. 2. Include elevations showing: a. Appearance of all -glass entrance layouts. b. Locations and identification of manufacturer - supplied door hardware and fittings. c. Locations and sizes of cut -outs and drilled holes for other door hardware. 3. Include details of: a. Requirements for support and bracing at openings. b. Installation details. c. Appearance of manufacturer - supplied door hardware and fittings. D. LEED Submittal: Submit appropriate form for Recycled content or Regional materials as specified in Section 01 3343. E. Certificates: Contractor's certification that installer of entrance assemblies meets specified qualifications. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For manufacturer - supplied operating hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five of experience installing entrance assemblies similar to those specified in this section. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FRAMELESS SWINGING GLASS DOORS AND SIDELIGHT PANELS 12.137 084126-1 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All -Glass Doors: 1. Avanti Systems USA, Inc: www.avantisystemsusa.com. 2. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions; Envison: www.trulite.com. 3. JE Berkowitz; www.jeberkowitz.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fittings and Hardware: 1. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc: www.crlaurence.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ASSEMBLIES A. All- glass, swinging doors and fixed glass sidelight panels: Factory fabricated assemblies consisting of frameless glass panels fastened with metal structural fittings in configuration indicated on the drawings. 1. Operational Loads: Designed to withstand door operation under normal traffic without damage, racking, sagging, or deflection. 2. Prepared for all specified hardware whether specified in this section or not. 3. Finished metal surfaces protected with strippable film. 4. Factory assembled to greatest extent practicable; may be disassembled to accommodate shipping constraints. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Exposed Fittings: Stainless steel, Number 4, satin polish finish. B. Fixed Glazed Panel Fittings: Sufficient to structurally support glazing and doors under specified loads; including but not limited to cover caps for door hardware, clamp fittings, and panel corner patches. C. Sidelight Fittings: 1. Rails: Match profile, material, and finish of rails specified for doors. 2. Provide top and bottom installation track for sidelite installation. D. Swinging Door Fittings: Continuous rail at top and bottom of door. 1. Rail Cross - Section: 1 -3/4 inches wide by 3 -1/2 inches high. 2. Rail Profile: Tapered flat. 2.04 DOOR HARDWARE A. Finish of Exposed Metals: Match finish of fittings. B. Swinging Door Hardware: Provided by fittings and hardware manufacturer: 1. Top Pivots: Free swinging door pivot with top door rail fitting. 2. Floor Mounted Closers: CRL 8530 a. Heavy weight for 40 inch wide doors. b. Hydraulically Adjustable hold -open. c. Size 3 - medium spring tension. d. Accessories: 1) Center -hung bottom pivots 2) Stainless steel cover plates 3. Push /Pulls - as specified in 08 7100 C. All Other Door Hardware: Specified in Section 08 7100. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FRAMELESS SWINGING GLASS DOORS AND SIDELIGHT PANELS 12.137 084126-2 2.05 MATERIALS A. Glass: Tempered float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality Q3, fully tempered in accordance with ASTM C1048, Kind FT, and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch minimum. 2. Color: Clear, Class 1. 3. Prepare glazing panels for indicated fittings and hardware before tempering. 4. Polish edges that will be exposed in finished work to bright flat polish. 5. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not permitted. B. Aluminum Components: Conforming to ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M), Alloy 6063, Temper T5. C. Stainless Steel Components: Conforming to ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Sealant: One -part silicone sealant, conforming to ASTM C920, clear. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are acceptable. B. Do not begin installation until substrates and openings have been properly prepared. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation of metal framing for openings is specified in Section 09 2116. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Tolerances: 1. Horizontal Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation from level, non - cumulative. 2. Vertical Components and Sight Lines: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet variation from plumb, non - cumulative. 3. Variation from Plane or Indicated Location: Not more than 1/16 inch. D. Installation of door hardware not supplied by entrance /storefront manufacturer is specified in Section 08 7100. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors to operate correctly, without binding to frame, sill, or adjacent doors. B. Adjust door hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like -new condition. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FRAMELESS SWINGING GLASS DOORS AND SIDELIGHT PANELS 12.137 084126 -3 SECTION 08 4413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum- framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and metal infill panels. B. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3433 - LEED Certification Procedures B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices. C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and adjacent construction. D. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Firestop at system junction with structure. E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials. F. Section 08 1316 - Tubular Aluminum Doors: Aluminum entrance doors installed in curtain wall framing. G. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2005. C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2011. D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011. E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. G. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2005. H. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). I. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). J. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glazing and infill, internal drainage details . C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 12.137 084413-1 D. Test Reports: Submit results of full -size mock -up testing. Reports of tests previously performed on the same design are acceptable. E. LEED Submittal: Submit appropriate form for Recycled content or Regional materials as specified in Section 01 3343. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazed curtainwall systems with minimum ten years of documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in installing aluminum glazed curtainwall systems with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Special Warranty: Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide 20 year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: See below under description of products. B. Manufacturer: Wausau Window and Wall Systems; Product SuperWall 6250 -SW: www.wausauwindow.com. C. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall: Other approved manufacturers: 1. EFCO, a Pella Company: www.efcocorp.com. 2. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 3. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com. 4. Tubelite, Inc: www.tubeliteinc.com. 5. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 CURTAIN WALL A. Aluminum- Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. B. Basis of Design: Wausau Window and Wall Systems; SuperWall 6250 -SW: www.wausauwindow.com. 1. Structural adhesive glazed 2- sides, with temporary glazing stops, and pressure plate and mullion cover 2- sides, where indicated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 12.137 084413-2 2. Vertical Mullion Face Width: 2 -1/2 inches. 3. Vertical Mullion Depth From Face to Back: 6 -3/4 inches. 4. Finish: Superior performance organic coating. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Touch -up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. c. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. 5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 6. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 7. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. 8. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. C. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with the following: a. Positive Design Wind Load: 29 Ibf /sq ft but not less than prescribed by code. b. Negative Design Wind Load: 31 Ibf /sq ft but not less than prescribed by code. c. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E330, using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum pressure. d. Member Deflection: For spans less than 13 feet 6 inches, limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, and maximum of 1/175 of span or 3/4 inch, whichever is less and with full recovery of glazing materials. e. Member Deflection: For spans over 13 feet 6 inches and less than 40 feet, limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, and maximum of 1/240 of span plus 1/4 inch, with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or deterioration of seals: a. Expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period. b. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing. c. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads. 3. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Limit working stress to 20 psi. D. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on indoor face when tested as follows: 1. Test Pressure Differential: 10 Ibf /sq ft. 2. Test Method: ASTM E331. E. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft /min /sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot pressure differential across assembly. F. Air Infiltration Performance Requirements: 1. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min /sq ft of wall area or less, measured in accordance with ASTM E283. 2. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 6.24 pounds per square inch. G. Thermal Performance Requirements: 1. Condensation Resistance Factor: 70, minimum, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503, using clear 1 inch thick sealed insulating glass. 2. Overall U -value Including Glazing: 0.30 Btu /(hr sq ft deg F), maximum. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 12.137 084413 -3 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Cross - Section: As indicated on drawings. 3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Structural Supporting Anchors Attached to Structural Steel: Design for bolted attachment. D. Structural Supporting Anchors Attached to Reinforced Concrete Members: Design for welded attachment to weld plates embedded in concrete. E. Fasteners: Stainless steel. F. Exposed Flashings: 0.040 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. G. Concealed Flashings: 0.028 inch thick aluminum. H. Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, same type as glazing adhesive. I. Perimeter Sealant: Silicone type specified in Section 07 9005. J. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. K. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000. 2.05 FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA- M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Coordinate installation of firestopping at each floor slab edge. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 12.137 084413-4 I. Pressure Plate Framing: Install glazing and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, using exterior dry glazing method. J. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005. K. Touch -up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non - cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch and minimum of 1/4 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre- finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 12.137 084413 -5 SECTION 08 5113 - ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extruded aluminum double -hung windows with operating sash. B. Factory glazing. C. Sill starters and head and jamb receptors. D. Insect screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02225 - Demolition: Removal of existing windows and preparation of masonry opening to receive work of this section. B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Rough openings, rough bucks, blocking, and shims. C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between window frame and adjacent construction. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials. E. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA /NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1997 with revisions contained in "reprinting" of 12/99. B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002. C. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1997. D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2002. E. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. F. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. G. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2002. H. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 1991 (Reapproved 1999). I. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. J. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. K. ASTM E 1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size windows to withstand the following load requirements, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330 using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads with 10 second duration of maximum load: 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 12.137 085113 -1 B. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.1 cu ft /min /sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 12.0 Ibf /sq ft. E. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly. F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring within system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, internal drainage details, and descriptions of hardware and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage locations, , and installation requirements. D. Certificates: Certify that windows meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of AAMA 101 Designation C -AW60. B. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in fabrication of commercial aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than five years of experience. 1.07 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW -10. B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a ten year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Custom Window; Product CW Series 9250: www.customwindow.com. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 12.137 085113 -2 B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 REPLACEMENT WINDOWS A. Windows: Tubular aluminum frame sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally broken, vision glass, infill panels, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Performance Requirements: AAMA /NWWDA 101/I.S.2 AW80. B. Double -Hung Type: 1. Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Sash Design: Mitered, corner blocked and crimped. 3. Provide screens. 4. Glazing: 1 inch insulating glass; clear; transparent. a. Bead glazed. 5. Aluminum Finish: High performance organic coating. 6. Interior Finish: High performance organic coating. 7. True divided lite muntin grid where indicated. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Frames: 3 -1/2 inch deep profile; thermally broken with interior portion of frame insulated from exterior portion; applied glass stops of snap -on type. B. Sill Receptor: 0.125 inch thick, extruded aluminum, thermally broken; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 1/4 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening . C. Head and Jamb Receptors: 0.125 inch thick, extruded aluminum, thermally broken; two piece style for inside installation of window units. D. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. E. Insect Screens: Woven aluminum mesh; 14/18 mesh size; charcoal finish. F. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve effective weather seal. G. Fasteners: Stainless steel. H. Insulated Glass Units : Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. 1. Outer pane of clear glass, and inner pane of clear glass. 2. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 3. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. I. Sealant and Backing Materials: Silicone type as specified in Section 07 9005. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper. C. Concealed Steel Items: Profiled to suit mullion sections; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Sash lock: Meeting rail locks. B. Balance: "Ultralift" Balances. C. Bottom sash lift rail: Manufacturer's standard type. D. Adjustable Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 12.137 085113 -3 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 12.137 085113 -4 C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view. E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware. F. Provide steel internal reinforcement in mullions as required to meet loading requirements. G. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. H. Assemble insect screen frames with mitered and reinforced corners. Secure wire mesh tautly in frame. Fit frame with four, spring loaded steel pin retainers. I. Double weatherstrip operable units. J. Factory glaze window units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive aluminum windows. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach sill starter, head and jamb receptors, and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials. F. Install operating hardware not pre - installed by manufacturer. G. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07 9005. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non - cumulative or 1/8 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. B. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ALUMINUM REPLACEMENT WINDOWS 12.137 085113 -4 SECTION 08 5123 - FIRE RATED STEEL WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory finished fire rated steel windows with fixed and operating sash. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between window frame and adjacent construction. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2011. B. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass . C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work; installation requirements; and D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing industrial windows specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 1. Include coverage for degradation of color finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Optimum Window; Product 7650 TSH: www.optimumwindow.com B. Other approved manufacturers: 1. Fyre -Tec; Product Series H925 Single Hung Window; www.fyre - tec.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE RATED STEEL WINDOWS 12.137 085123-1 2.02 STEEL WINDOWS A. Performance Requirements: 1. Fire rating: 3/4 hour tested in accordance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 257 2. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind acting normal to plane of window. 3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 of the longer dimension; with full recovery of glazing materials. 4. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cfm /min /sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283. 5. Vapor Seal: No failure of vapor seal at interior static pressure of 1 inch, at 72 degrees F, and 40 percent relative humidity. 6. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf /sq ft. 7. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: 1. Ceramic Glazing, listed by Underwriters Labratories for 3/4 hour fire rated assembly. a. Glass shall comply with CPSC 16 CFR and ANSI Z97.1 for safety glass b. Glazing shall be insulating glass units. 2. Color: Clear Transparent / Clear Transparent. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Arrange fasteners to conceal from view. B. Prepare components with reinforcement for operating hardware. C. Double weatherstrip operable units. D. Factory-glaze window units. 2.06 FINISHES A. Window Frames: Power Coat factory finish. 1. Factory- finished before forming. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Custom color. 3. Interior Surfaces: Custom color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install window frames and glass and glazing in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. D. Install operating hardware. E. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE RATED STEEL WINDOWS 12.137 085123-2 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove labels and visible markings. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit continuing construction activities near unprotected finish surfaces. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE RATED STEEL WINDOWS 12.137 085123-3 SECTION 08 5200 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated wood windows. B. Glazing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Rough opening framing. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back -up materials. C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Show component dimensions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and frame and molding profiles. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial wood windows with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Marvin Windows; Product Signature Products custom wood window. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD WINDOWS A. Windows: Wood frame and sash, factory fabricated and assembled. 1. Exterior Finish: Primed. 2. Interior Finish: Transparent finish, match existing woodwork. 3. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 4. Wood Species: Mahogany. 5. Frame and Sash Members: Mortise and tenon joints. Glue and steel pin joints to hairline fit, weather tight. 6. Weather Stop Flange: Continuous at perimeter of unit. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WOOD WINDOWS 12.137 085200-1 7. Clearances and Shim Spacing: Minimum required for installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. 8. Internal Drainage of Glazing Spaces to Exterior: Weep holes. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, uncoated, manufacturer's standard fill, with glass thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions. B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WOOD WINDOWS 12.137 085200-2 SECTION 08 6300 - METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum skylight framing system. B. Skylight glazing. C. Fasteners, anchors, reinforcement, and flashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood support curbs. B. Section 07 5413 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012. C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010. D. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012. E. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). F. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framed opening requirements and tolerances, spacing of all members, anticipated deflection under load, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint locations and details, and sizes and locations for field welding. 1. Show field measurements on shop drawings. D. Test Reports: Submit results of full -size mock -up testing. Reports of tests previously performed on the same design are acceptable. E. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Submit product data and calculations showing compliance with performance requirements. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, safety precautions, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with not fewer than ten years of documented experience. B. Field Measurements: Before beginning skylight fabrication, measure field conditions to assure proper fit of finished assembly. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 12.137 086300-1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or spray coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with the installation of roofing system and structural curb. B. Coordinate the work with the continuity of vapor retarder specified in Section 07 2500. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work, including leaks, discoloration, failure of seal at insulated glazing units, and excessive thermal or structural movement, within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal- Framed Skylights: 1. Acralight International Skylights; www.acralight.com. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com. 3. Wasco Skylights; www.wascoskylights.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS A. Metal Framed Skylights: Factory- fabricated, glazed. 1. Configuration: Custom size, pitched, extended pyramid. 2. Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and guttering system thermally separated from exterior pressure bar. 3. Glazing System: Pressure glazing bar system for sloped joints and structural adhesive glazing for horizontal joints. 4. Glazing: Insulating glass. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set: a. Concentrated load at any location on framing: 250 lb. b. Positive and negative live and dead loads required by building code. 2. Maximum allowable deflection of any glazing support member: 1/180 of span. 3. Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, dynamic loading and release of loads, creep of concrete structural members, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness. 4. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min /sq ft for glazed area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf in accordance with ASTM E283. 5. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf /sq ft. 6. Design and fabricate to prevent harmonic vibration, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063 -T5, 6063 -T6, or 6061 -T6 members complying with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). Minimum thickness 0.125 inch for structural members and 0.062 inch for non - structural members. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 12.137 086300-2 B. Formed Aluminum: Sheet material of alloy 5052, 5005, or 6061 -T5 or T6 complying with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). Minimum thickness: 0.125 inch for structural members and 0.062 inches for non - structural members. C. Internal Reinforcement: ASTM A36/A36M; Steel shapes as required for strength and mullion size limitations, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M. D. Glass: 1 -1/8 inch thick sealed insulated units, outer pane of 3/8 inch tinted transparent, tempered glass; inner pane of 1/4 inch obscure, laminated glass; 1/2 inch space of sealed air, metal edge frame. E. Glazing Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer of skylight system. F. Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, same type as glazing adhesive. G. Fasteners: Stainless steel. H. Flashings: 0.063 inch thick aluminum, same finish as system components; secured with concealed fastening method. I. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, exposed to view. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate skylight framing to configuration indicated on Drawings. B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with screw and spline. Make joints rigid, with connections that are flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. D. Drain to exterior any water entering exterior joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system. E. Prepare components to receive concealed anchorage devices. Ensure that fasteners and anchorage devices will be concealed upon completion of installation. 2.05 FINISHES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structural curb is ready to receive skylight system. Coordinate installation of roofing and other adjacent work to ensure weathertight construction. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set skylight structure plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or glazing panels. Anchor securely in place in accordance with approved shop drawings. C. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Install sill flashings. E. Mask adjacent surfaces, clean joint surfaces, and install backing and field - applied sealants in accordance with requirements of Section 07 9005. F. Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 6 feet. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. C. Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 6 feet. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 12.137 086300-3 SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE TO BE ISSUED BY ADDENDUM END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOOR HARDWARE 12.137 087100-1 SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 072700 - Air Barrier Membranes. B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back -up material. C. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. D. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum- Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer. E. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows. F. Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls. G. Section 08 8113 - Translucent Glazing Units. H. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010. C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2011. D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011). E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011 e1. G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat - Treated Flat Glass- -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2012. H. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1. I. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010. J. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009. K. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008. L. SIGMA TM -3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size of glass units, showing coloration and design. E. Certificates: Certify that insulated glass units meet or exceed specified requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZING 12.137 088000-1 F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fire -rated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES A. Type IG -1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing. 1. Application(s): All non -fire rated exterior glazing north of gridline E. 2. Outboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 3. Inboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch. B. Type IG -1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing north of gridline E. 2. Outboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 3. Inboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing. C. Type IG -2 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing. 1. Application(s): All exterior glazing south of gridline E. 2. Outboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. b. Coating: Low -E type. 1) Basis of design: Guardian SunGuard SuperNeutral 62 3. Inboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Tint: Clear. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Total Visible Light Transmittance: 68 percent, nominal. 6. Total Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 31 percent, nominal. 7. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing. D. Type IG -3 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Spandrel glazing. 1. Application: Exterior glazing where indicated. 2. Outboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZING 12.137 088000-2 a. Tint: Clear. 3. Inboard Lite: Heat - strengthened float glass, 1/4 inch thick. a. Tint: Clear. b. Opacifier: Ceramic frit, on #4 surface. c. Opacifier Color: As recommended by Manufacturer for best match to IG -2. 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing. E. Type ISG - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing: 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in exterior doors. b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Same as other vision glazing except use fully tempered float glass for both outboard and inboard lites. 3. Tint: Clear. F. FG - Fire - Protection -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: As indicated on drawings. 2. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in fire doors: 45 minutes except as specifically scheduled otherwise. b. Fire windows. c. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an hourly fire rating: 45 minutes except as specifically scheduled otherwise. 3. Fire Rating: As indicated on the drawings, and required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4. Type: Glass- ceramic safety glazing. 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 6. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating. G. Type SG - Single Safety Glazing: Non - fire - rated. 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations: a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire -rated walls and partitions. c. Glazed view windows and panels in partitions enclosing athletic activity rooms, except in fire -rated walls and partitions. d. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. e. Interior locations where other types of glazing are not scheduled nor indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch or as indicated on drawings. 5. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing. 2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures of 25 Ib /sq ft positive and negative. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZING 12.137 088000-3 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc - flatglass.com. 2. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com /na. 4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat - Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 2. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch thick, minimum. 3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered by the tong -less horizontal method. D. Fire - Resistance -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Resistance Rating: W -90, minimum. 2. Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek Warnock Hersey. 3. Safety Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II, where required. 4. Products: a. SAFTI FIRST, a division of O'Keeffe's Inc; SuperLite II -XL: www.safti.com. b. Vetrotech Saint - Gobain North America; Contraflam: www.vetrotechusa.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. E. Fire - Protection -Rated Glazing: 1. IBC Fire Protection Rating: D- H -T -90 or W -90, minimum. 2. Provide products listed by Underwriters Laboratories or Intertek Warnock Hersey. 3. Safety Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II. 2.04 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Locations: Exterior, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 3. Warm Edge Spacers: Flexible silicone foam, multi -layer vapor barrier film continuous at corners. a. Product: TriSeal(tm) Super Spacer(r) manufactured by Edgetech I.G. Inc.: www.superspacer.com. 4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 5. Fill interpane space with argon gas. 2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12 -1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non - skinning. B. Silicone Sealant : Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non - bleeding, non - staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZING 12.137 088000-4 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option I; selected from manufacturer's available colors. D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's glazing recommendations. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on glazing materials to attain full weathertight contact. D. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. E. Apply cap bead of silicone type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. 3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR /INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.05 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING) A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZING 12.137 088000-5 E. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.06 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.08 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GLAZING 12.137 088000-6 SECTION 09 0160 - REFINISHING TERRAZZO FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Abrasive polishing and resealing of existing portland cement terrazzo floors. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Installation of temporary dust partitions. B. Section 01 5721 - Indoor Air Quality Controls: Dust collection procedures and testing; LEED requirements. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the areas of floor refinishing with adjacent occupancy requirements. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. C. Scheduling: 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data for proposed products, including VOC content. C. Grinding and polishing equipment: Describe physical and performance characteristics of equipment proposed for use on this project. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application recommendations and conditions requiring special procedures. E. LEED Submittals: Indicate F. Maintenance Data: Provide information and recommendations for maintenance of final floor finish. G. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 2. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience; contractor member of The National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (NTMA). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Sealer: Colorless, non - yellowing, penetrating liquid type, pH of 7 to 10; not detrimental to portland cement terrazzo components. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Grinding and Polishing: Provide planetary head machinery, with small abrasive stone heads spinning within a large diameter rotating head, to polish terrazzo floor surface to original lustre removing existing surface coatings. Use 120 grit stones or equivalent diamond abrasive plates. B. Equip polishing equipment with vacuum system to automatically collect dust and grit produced as a result of dry polishing operations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that temporary dust partitions completely enclose the work area before starting grinding and polishing operations. Close area to construction traffic. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection of In -Place Conditions: Wall base materials. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REFINISHING TERRAZZO FLOORING 12.137 090160-1 3.03 FLOOR REFINISHING A. Polish terrazzo surface with power disc machine using fine grit abrasive to restore original surface luster of floor and remove surface coatings. Hand polish perimeter of floor areas adjacent to walls. B. Perform work in accordance with instructions and recommendations of NTMA. 3.04 CLEANING A. Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with NTMA instructions. Let dry. B. Immediately after terrazzo has dried, apply sealer in accordance with NTMA instructions and let dry. C. Seal and polish surfaces in accordance with NTMA instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished terrazzo surface from subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit construction traffic over unprotected floor surface. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Perform demonstration and train Owner's personnel in proper maintenance of the finished floor surface. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REFINISHING TERRAZZO FLOORING 12.137 090160-2 SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall and soffit framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Shaft wall system. E. Acoustic insulation. F. Cementitious backing board. G. Gypsum wallboard. H. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. D. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Top -of -wall assemblies at fire rated walls. E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. B. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). C. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2011 a. D. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw - Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2011. E. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2011. F. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2011. G. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self- Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007. H. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a. I. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non - Asbestos Fiber -Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; 2008b. J. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2011. K. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2012. L. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012. M. GA -216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010. N. GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2009. O. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012. P. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 12.137 092116 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, acoustic seals, and excessive heights of framing. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. E. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. F. LEED Submittals: 1. For gypsum wallboard, submit documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 2. For steel products, submit documentation of steel mill process, location of mill, and location of manufacture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA -600 for fire -rated assemblies. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA -216. B. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 7.5 Ibf /sq ft with maximum mid -span deflection of L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 40 -44 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 10 Ibf /sq ft with maximum mid -span deflection of L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45 -49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. D. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Fire Rated Partitions: ratings and construction as indicated. 2. Head of Fire Rated Partitions: products and assemblies that provide continuous fire rated assemblies. 3. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC IBC for the particular assembly; or 4. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA -600 for the particular assembly; or 5. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing - Non - structural, Connectors, and Accessories: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 12.137 092116 -2 1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. US Gypsum; www.usg.com 3. Custom Stud, Inc.: www.customstud.com. 4. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 5. MBA Building Supplies, Inc: www.mbastuds.com. 6. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com. B. Non - Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 7.5 psf. Minimum metal thickness: 20 gage (0.039 inch) unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754. 2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 5. Deflection Channels: proprietary or non - proprietary deep leg tracks with slotted holes. 6. Furring: Hat - shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. C. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 4000. D. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. 1. Acceptable Product: any fire tested assembly. E. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. F. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum -Based Board: 1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 4. Temple- Inland Inc: www.templeinland.com. 5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass- mat -faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper -faced board. 3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold- resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned. b. Mold- resistant board is required for interior vertical surfaces of exterior walls. 4. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire - Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 5. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Multi -Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. C. Tile Backing Board: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile, including tub and shower surrounds and shower ceilings. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 12.137 092116 -3 3. ANSI Cement -Based Board (vertical surfaces where specifically indicated): Non - gypsum- based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Glass- Mat -Faced Board (surfaces behind tile except as otherwise indicated): Coated glass mat water - resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C 1178. a. Fire - Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch. D. Ceiling Board: Special sag- resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. E. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends square cut. 1. Glass Mat Faced Type: Glass mat shaftliner gypsum panel or glass mat coreboard gypsum panel as defined in ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed mineral fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Glass fiber is an approved option. B. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide reveal edge for exposed panel edges at window sills. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self - piercing tapping type; cadmium - plated for exterior locations. E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. F. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power- driven fasteners at not more than 24 inches on center. 2. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements and as indicated on the drawings. B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 12.137 092116 -4 B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level soffit system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete, masonry, and terra cotta tile walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Horizontal. 2. Spacing: As permitted by standard. F. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA -600 requirements. G. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware, and handrails / guards. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. 3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 2. In non - fire -rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough -in boxes. 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non - Rated: Install gypsum board parallel to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Double -Layer Non - Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. D. Fire -Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. E. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and manufacturer's approved substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. F. Gypsum Board Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer of non -rated double -layer acoustical assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. G. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 12.137 092116 -5 B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.07 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound and finished with ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and fixed cabinetry. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 12.137 092116 -6 SECTION 09 2236.23 - METAL LATH PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lath for gypsum plaster. B. Furring for metal lath. C. Access panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2300 - Gypsum Plastering. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Interior metal stud framing and furring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C841 - Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring; 2003 (Reapproved 2008)e1. B. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2012. C. GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2009. D. NAAMM MUSFA 920 - Guide Specifications For Metal Lathing and Furring; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics, material limitations, and finish. C. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide components complying with requirements for fire rated assemblies specified in Section 09 2300 - Gypsum Plastering. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Lath: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation: www.amico - online.com. 2. Clark/ Dietrich Building System LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 3. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 4. Phillips Manufacturing Co.; www.phillipsmfg.com . 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 FRAMING AND LATH ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Maximum Deflection of Vertical Assemblies: 1:360 under lateral point load of 100 lbs. 2. Maximum Deflection of Horizontal Assemblies: 1:240 deflection under dead loads and wind uplift. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide components complying with requirements for fire rated assemblies specified in the section where the plaster finish is specified. 2.03 LATH A. Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self- furring. 1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified in ASTM C841 for framing spacing. 2. Weight: 2.5 Ib /sq yd. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL LATH 12.137 09 2236.23 - 1 3. Backed with treated paper. B. Ribbed Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; 3/8 inch thick. 1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified in ASTM C841 for framing spacing. 2. Weight: 3.4 Ib /sq yd. C. Glass -Fiber Lath: Open weave, self- furred, 1/8 inch thick glass fiber reinforcing lath, 39 inches wide and weighing 4.34 ounces per yard. D. Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch thick, expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch size; same finish as lath. E. Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 to 4 inch wide x 24 inch long; same finish as lath. F. Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness maximum possible lengths. 1. Material: Formed galvanized sheet steel, expanded metal flanges. 2. Casing Beads: Square edges. 3. Corner Beads: Radiused corners. 4. Base Screeds: Bevelled edges. 5. Expansion Joints: Accordion profile with factory- installed protective tape, 2 inch wide flanges. 6. Control Joints: Accordion profile with protective tape, 2 inch flanges. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Access Panels - Non -Fire Rated: Formed steel shop primed. B. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place, galvanized. C. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self - piercing tapping screws. D. Polyethylene Sheet: Clear, 6 mil thick. E. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application. C. Verify interior stud placement and construction meets the requirements for acceptable plaster wall framing. D. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install interior lath and furring in accordance with ASTM C841. B. Install lath and furring for fire -rated assemblies in accordance with the requirements of the indicated assembly. 3.03 WALL FURRING A. Install wall furring by directly attaching to substrate walls. B. Install furring channels horizontally; secure with fasteners on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. C. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, and not more than 4 inches away from floor and ceiling lines. 3.04 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL LATH 12.137 09 2236.23 - 2 B. Install control and expansion joints. 3.05 ACCESS PANELS A. Install access panels and rigidly secure in place. B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. 3.06 LATH INSTALLATION A. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. B. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. C. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1 -1/2 inches. D. Nest outside ribs of rib lath together. E. Attach metal lath to metal supports using tie wire at maximum 6 inches on center. F. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3 inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. G. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only. H. Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place. I. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place. J. Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches above ceiling line. K. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in place. L. Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Lines and Levels: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL LATH 12.137 09 2236.23 - 3 SECTION 09 2300 - GYPSUM PLASTERING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gypsum plaster over metal lath, masonry, and other solid surfaces. B. Gypsum plaster patching. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification B. Section 09 2216 - Non - Structural Metal Framing: Metal stud framing and furring for plaster. C. Section 09 2236.23 - Metal Lath: Metal lath, furring, and accessories for plaster base. D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud framing and furring for plaster. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C28/C28M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters; 2010. B. ASTM C35 - Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster; 2001 (Reapproved 2009). C. ASTM C61 /C61 M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Keene's Cement; 2000 (Reapproved 2011). D. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2003 (Reapproved 2009). E. ASTM C631 - Standard Specification for Bonding Compounds for Interior Gypsum Plastering; 2009. F. ASTM C841 - Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring; 2003 (Reapproved 2008)e1. G. ASTM C842 - Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster; 2005 (Reapproved 2010)e1. H. GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2009. I. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2012. J. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics, and limitations of products specified. C. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years of documented experience. 1.06 MOCK -UP A. Construct mock -up of interior wall, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating surface finish and texture. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is under 50 degrees F or over 80 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during and after installation of plaster. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM PLASTERING 12.137 092300-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Plaster: 1. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 2. USG: www.usg.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product requirements. 2.02 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Gypsum Neat Plaster: ASTM C28; unfibered. B. Ready -Mixed Gypsum Plaster: ASTM C28; mill -mixed type, requiring only the addition of water. For application to monolithic concrete, provide bonding type. C. Gypsum Keene's Cement: ASTM C61/C61M. D. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S; special finishing hydrated lime. E. Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C35; sand and lightweight aggregates. 1. Lightweight Aggregate: Vermiculite. F. Ready -Mixed Finishing Plaster: Gypsum /Lime putty type, ASTM C28; mixture of gauging plaster and lime. G. Ready -Mixed Finishing Plaster: Keene's cement/lime putty type; ASTM C61/C61 M and C 206. H. Plaster Crack Patching Compound: Gypsum plaster compound specially formulated for patching existing plaster. I. Aggregate for Finish Coats: As specified in ASTM C842. J. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect plaster. K. Bonding Agent: ASTM C631; type recommended for bonding plaster to concrete block and other masonry surfaces. L. Wood Lath: Provide and install new 1 -1/2 "x1/8" wood lath or match existing historic where the installation of new metal lath is not appropriate or practical. Reuse salvaged wood lath where practical. 2.03 METAL LATH AND FURRING A. Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.23. Use metal lath as plaster base at all locations. B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: Zinc, as specified in Section 09 2236.23. 2.04 PLASTER MIXES A. Over Metal Lath: Three -coat application, ready -mixed plaster, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Ready -Mixed Plaster Materials: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Finish Coat for Troweled Finish: Lime putty with gypsum gauging plaster, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM C842. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing conditions are satisfactory before starting work. B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this section. Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface. C. Grounds and Blocking: Verify items within walls for other sections of work have been installed. D. Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM PLASTERING 12.137 092300-2 E. Wood Lath: Verify lath is straight and surface is ready to receive work of this section. F. Mechanical and Electrical: Verify services within walls have been tested and approved. 3.02 SCOPE AND PREPARATION FOR PATCHING A. Contractor shall survey all areas where existing plaster is shown to remain and to be repaired, in order to verify extent of patch or repair. B. Cut out and remove existing interior plaster surfaces where needed to repair existing gypsum plaster, including plaster on walls and ceilings as required for installation of new work.. C. Repair and patching cracks, spalls, delaminations, breaks, losses, chips, holes or other defects in gypsum plaster surfaces. D. Provide new plaster to align with existing plaster at existing walls and ceilings. E. Plaster patching and new plaster ceilings shall match historic conditions of: plaster on wood lath, plaster on wire lath or plaster on wire lath over plaster on wood lath. F. Restoration of existing plaster shall be done in such manner as not to cause damage to contiguous work. G. Allowable Tolerances: All plaster repairs shall be keyed and feathered to exactly match and continue edges and contours of existing plaster work. Repairs shall be true and flat in connections with adjacent surfaces when checked with an 8 ft. straight edge; do not exceed 1/8 inch variation in 8 ft. for bow, warp, plumb, or level for flat and curved surfaces. H. C. Defects are defined as: 1. Plastering with defects of such character as will mar the appearance of finished Work, or which is otherwise defective, shall be rejected, removed and replaced. 2. All ridges, ledges and visual irregularities shall be rejected, removed and plaster replaced. 3. Any defects or irregularities of plaster restoration work telegraphing through paint shall be cause for rejection of the Work. The Contractor shall remove any subsequent work, remove and replace the defective or irregular plaster restoration work and have the subsequent work replaced by skilled workman in the appropriate trades. Cut out and replace all unbonded spots. Build in the work in others and do all cutting and patching of plaster in this connection. Where abutting other built -in materials, plaster shall be finished tightly against them and neatly trimmed unless otherwise indicated. Plaster thicknesses indicated shall be considered as a minimum; plaster shall be of such thickness required to plumb and square wall surfaces so that plaster is flush with adjacent surfaces. K. Replicate, repair and restore flat wall and ceiling plaster as indicated. L. Plaster repairs shall be executed edge to edge in long strips or large areas for each separate coat. Where breaks are necessary lap new work over adjoining work. M. Bring finished surfaces of plaster to true planes and when complete surface shall be clean, free from blisters, pits, discoloration, cracks or other defects. In all cases the plastering throughout is to be delivered clean and perfect in every respect. N. All preparation shall be done with compatible materials and methods that will not compromise the integrity o the plasters, and will not telegraph through finished surfaces. O. Remove all loose and flaking paint, wallpaper, spalled plaster, insect nests, spider webs and other foreign substances down to sound plaster. Sound adjacent wall areas to determine if additional plaster must be removed. P. Removal of Plaster: 1. Carefully remove existing damaged plaster not removed under demolition and wood lath and salvage the wood lath. Inspect wood lath in all existing plaster walls and partitions. 2. Remove plaster carefully without breaking or damaging wood lath. When lath is exposed, remove lath intact without pry marks, splitting or other damage. Do not damage the substrate or assembly to which later is attached. Remove fasteners from lath and MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM PLASTERING 12.137 092300-3 Substrate. Carefully extract fasteners to avoid splitting. Clean and salvage as much wood lath as is practical, removing all residue of plaster. Dress edges of plaster removal area to Remove loose bits of plaster. Prepare removal area for Re- installation of wood later and plaster work. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR GENERAL PLASTERING A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction. B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Thoroughly dampen surfaces before using acid solutions, solvent, or detergents to perform cleaning. Wash surface with clean water. C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and smooth faced masonry. D. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 3.05 PLASTERING A. Apply gypsum plaster in accordance with ASTM C842 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Thickness of Plaster including Finish Coat: 1. Three coat over metal lath: 5/8 inch minimum. 2. Three coat over wood lath: 5/8 inch minimum. 3. Direct to unit masonry: 5/8 inch. C. For Metal and Wood Lath Apply in Three (3) Coats: Scratch Coat, brown coat and finish coat. 1. Scratch Coats: Apply with sufficient material and pressure to form full bond with solid base materials. Scratch the surface to form a bond for the brown coat. 2. Brown Coats: Do not apply brown coat until after the scratch coat has hardened, and not less than 24 hours after application of the scratch coat. All joints in brown coat plaster shall be lap joints. After drying, all shrinkage cracks shall be cut out and filled with scratch coat plaster. D. Apply color tinted (if any) finish coat to prepared surfaces within 2 hours of plaster application. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Finish Texture: Trowel to a consistent and smooth finish. F. Perform work in panels to nearest natural break or between accessories. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean all existing plasterwork on the walls and ceilings of the same room included in the scope of patching work. B. Leave work areas clean from dust and debris. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GYPSUM PLASTERING 12.137 092300-4 SECTION 09 3000 - TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Ceramic trim. E. Non - ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternates: See Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for description of alternates affecting work under this section. B. This section describes a base bid floor tile product; refer to Section 09 6500 - Resilient Flooring for an alternate product. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108 Series /A118 Series /A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2012.1. 1. ANSI A108.1 a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 2. ANSI A108.1 b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 3. ANSI A108.1 c -Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile- Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2012.1. 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex - Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile- Setting and - Grouting Epoxy; 2012.1. 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 2012.1. 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar /Grout; 2012.1. 9. ANSI A108.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2012.1. 10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. 11. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior glue plywood) Latex - Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 12. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin -Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2012.1. 13. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. 14. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex - Portland Cement Mortar; 2012.1. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILING 12.137 093000-1 15. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2012.1. 16. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2012.1. B. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2012. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product List: Provide schedule of proposed bonding and grouting materials recommended by the manufacturer as being acceptable for use in the intended application and with the substrates with which it will come into contact. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Tile: 10 square feet of each size, color, and surface finish combination. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series /A118 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.08 MOCK -UP A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock -up. B. Construct tile mock -up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Minimum size of mock -up is indicated on the drawings. 2. Approved mock -up may remain as part of the Work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent -based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.11 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILING 12.137 093000-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Homogeneous porcelain tile; ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Basis of Design: P'zazz manufactured by Daltile. a. Size and Shape: 12" x 24" field, 6" x 24" trim, 2" x 2" Mosaic Accent b. Colors: As scheduled. 2. Basis of Design: Hanger manufactured by Viva Ceramica a. Size: 18" x 35" nom. field, 3" x 35" accent b. Colors: As scheduled 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. B. Non - Ceramic Trim: Brushed stainless steel, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open edges of wall tile. b. Open edges of floor tile. c. Wall corners, outside and inside. d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights. 2. Manufacturer: a. Schluter - Systems: www.schluter.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 SETTING MATERIALS 2.04 SETTING MATERIALS -WALL TILE A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik- us.com. 2. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. 3. Mapei Corporation: www.mapei.com. 4. H.B.Fuller /TEC: www.tecspecialty.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Ceramic Tile Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type 1, thinset bond type. 1. Provide manufacturer's ready -to -use, premium, 100 percent acrylic adhesive. 2. Color: White, non - staining formulation. 3. No mold growth when tested in accordance with ANSI 136.1, Type 1. 4. Suitable Substrates and Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions. a. CMU b. Cementitious backer board. c. Coated glass mat backer board. 5. Precautions: Verify suitability for application over moisture impervious back -up. C. Thin Set Mortar for Large Format Wall Tile: ANSI Al 18.11, acrylic latex modified, non -sag, bond type mortar. 1. Non -slip up to 6 Ibs per square foot. 2. Specifically recommended by manufacturer for bonding porcelain tile. 3. Color: White. 4. Precautions: Verify suitability for application over moisture impervious back -up. 5. Acceptable products: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILING 12.137 093000-3 a. StoneWall (tm) High Performance Non -Sag Mortar manufactured by Bostik, Inc. b. 3N1 (tm) Performance Mortar manufactured by TEC (tm). 2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS - FLOOR TILE A. Manufacturers: Bostik, Inc: www.bostik - us.com. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. H.B.Fuller / TEC: www.tecspecialty.com. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive , and water. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials for Thin -Set Installations: 1. Dry -Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex - Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Verify suitability for application over crack isolation membrane. 2.06 GROUTS A. Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7. 1. Verify compatibility with bonding materials. 2. Colors: As scheduled. 2.07 THIN -SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Uncoupling Membrane: 3/16 inch thick polyurethane matting with three - dimensional grid structure with dovetail shaped cavities and fleece webbing laminated to the underside to provide a mechanical bond to the substrate adhesive. 1. Product: Schluter (tm) -DITRA manufactured by Schluter Systems L.P. B. Waterproofing Membrane: Soft polyethylene sheet with fleece webbing laminated to both sides. 1. Product: Schluter (tm) -KERDI manufactured by Schluter Systems L.P.: www.schlutersystems.com. C. Crack Isolation Membrane: CPE sheet membrane, 30 mils thick, minimum; specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thin -set tile, and relieving stress in the tile resulting from horizontal movement in the substrate. High performance rated in accordance with ANSI Al 18.12. 1. Product: NobleSeal(r) CIS, manufactured by Noble Company: www.noblecompany.com. D. Waterproofing Membrane at Walls: Bonded thin -set sheet membrane for wet areas. 1. Material: Composite sheet PVC with polyester fabric laminated to both sides, 25 mils thick, minimum. Use manufacturer's sheet membrane adhesive. 2. Product: Wall Seal(tm) manufactured by Noble Company: www.noblecompany.com. E. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized. F. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. G. Tile Backer Board: As specified in Section 09 2116. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILING 12.137 093000-4 D. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor- mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry -set mortar to a feather edge. F. Install tile backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized roofing nails or corrosion - resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self- adhesive tape at all joints and corners with material used to set tiles. G. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through Al 08.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners neatly. Align floorjoints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non - ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry -set or latex - portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F122, with latex - portland cement grout. 3.05 INSTALLATION -WET AREA WALLS A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method B415, mortar bed floor, and W244, thin -set over cementitious backer unit walls. B. At bathtub /shower walls install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method B412, over cementitious backer units with waterproofing membrane. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILING 12.137 093000-5 C. Grout with standard grout as specified above. D. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type -silicone specified in Section 07 9005. 3.06 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive. B. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W245. C. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W202, thin -set with dry -set or latex - Portland cement bond coat. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILING 12.137 093000-6 SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 1300 - Fire - Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. B. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2007. B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2008. C. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling finishes, mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling, and control and expansion joints. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: USG: www.usg.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E1264, Class A. C. Acoustical Tile Type ATC1: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type IV, with the following characteristics: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 12.137 095100-1 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 3. Composition: Water felted. 4. Light Reflectance: 92 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 5. NRC Range: 0.65 to 0.75, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 20, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 7. Edge: (FLB) Reveal Edge. 8. Surface Color: White. 9. Product: Mars Clima Plus by USG Ceilings. 10. Suspension System: Exposed galvanized steel grid Type Donn(r) "DXT" - 9/16 inch, Centricitee D. Glass Fiber Acoustical PanelsType ATC2: Vinyl faced glass fiber, ASTM E1264 Type XI I, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 48 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Light Reflectance: 88 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 4. NRC Range:.90 to.95, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 20, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 6. Edge: (FL) Reveal Edge. 7. Surface Color: White. 8. Surface Pattern: Smooth. 9. Product: Halcyon Clima Plus by USG. 10. Suspension System: Exposed galvanized steel grid Type Donn(r) "DXT" - 9/16 inch, Centricitee E. Glass Fiber Acoustical PanelsType ATC3: Vinyl faced glass fiber, ASTM E1264 Type XI I, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 inches wide, length as indicated on drawings 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Light Reflectance: 88 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 4. NRC Range:.90 to.95, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 20, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 6. Edge: (FL) Reveal Edge. 7. Surface Color: White. 8. Surface Pattern: Smooth. 9. Product: Halcyon Clima Plus by USG. 10. Suspension System: Exposed galvanized steel grid Type Donn(r) "DXT" - 9/16 inch, Centricitee 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate -duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 9/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. Finish: White painted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 12.137 095100-2 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L- shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Open Edge Perimeter Molding: Compasso Elite manufactured by USG. 1. Height as indicated on drawings D. Touch -up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. 1. Provide control and expansion joints located as required by ASTM E580 / E580M if not otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. D. Install after major above - ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. K. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.03 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above - ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 2. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. G. Install hold -down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 12.137 095100-3 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 12.137 095100-4 SECTION 09 6105 - REPAIR AND REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD STRIP FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective repair and patching of existing wood strip flooring. B. Refinishing of existing wood strip flooring. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, substitutions and product options, delivery, storage, and handling. B. Section 01 16116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content. C. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the refinishing of existing wood floors with B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. C. Sequencing: Ensure that surface preparation and application of new finish materials are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. D. Scheduling: 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data for products required by this Section. 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate conditions requiring special procedures. 2. LEED Submittals: Indicate C. Maintenance Data: 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. C. Pre - Construction Testing: Verifiy type and characteristics of existing finish materials applied to wood flooring surfaces. 1.06 MOCK -UP A. Provide refinished wood floor mock -up, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, illustrating surface preparation and application of new finish materials. B. Locate where directed. 1. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH MATERIALS A. Wood Stain: Penetrating type; LEED VOC compliant. 1. Product: Selected by Contractor and approved by Architect. B. Clear Finish Materials: Sealer and clear finish, Comply with LEED VOC limits . 1. Products: Selected by Contractor and approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that wood strip flooring is sound and properly secured in place. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REPAIR AND REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD STRIP FLOORING 12.137 096105-1 B. Preapplication Testing: Test existing wood finish coatings for type and characteristics of finish materials prior to beginning stripping. 3.02 PATCHING AND REPAIR A. Patch existing wood plank flooring utilizing wood planks salvaged from areas scheduled for demolition. B. Install planks in lengths as long as possible. Weave new material into existing to make patched areas appear inconspicuous. C. Do not allow end joints to occur side by side; separate by at least two planks. Remove additional material from patched areas as required to accomplish this. D. Where possible, hide nail fasteners from view. E. Where nails can not be hidden, countersink nails and fill with finish manufacturer's recommended filler. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING A. Protection of In -Place Conditions: Cover adjacent wall and base to prevent damage during floor refinishing operations. B. Remove existing base shoe molding, nosings, and transition strips to allow for complete re- finishing. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove existing finish materials: Apply approved stripper in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; make multiple applications as necessary. Remove residue and dispose of collected waste off site. Clean stripped surfaces in preparation for finish sanding. 2. Sand floor surface smooth using progressively finer grit pads. Finish with 180 grit. Take precautions to contain dust. Remove dust by vacuum and tack. 3. Apply penetrating type stain to smooth sanded floor surface. Stain color: Cherry to match millwork and trim. D. Vacuum clean stained floor surface in preparation for application of clear finish materials. 3.04 APPLICATION OF FINISH MATERIALS A. Apply one coat of sealer and minimum two coats of approved clear finish materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply first coat, allow to dry, then buff lightly with steel wool to remove irregularities. Vacuum clean and wipe with damp cloth before applying succeeding coat. C. Lightly buff and clean surface before applying each succeeding coat. D. Apply final coat of finish. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean with damp cloth. B. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect refinished wood floors from subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REPAIR AND REFINISHING EXISTING WOOD STRIP FLOORING 12.137 096105-2 SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 7300 - Execution Requirements: Aggressive drying of concrete floor slabs. B. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. C. Section 07 2619 - Topical Moisture Vapor Mitigation: Surface preparation of concrete substrates for reduction of moisture vapor emission rate to acceptable limits. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor- Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1. B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011. C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004 (Reapproved 2010)e1. D. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012). E. ASTM F 2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using In -situ Probes; F. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate surface preparation required for satisfactory installation of work of this section. Based on actual field conditions, comply with requirements in Section 07 2619. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting 60 days prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers; review condition of floor substrate. C. Sequencing: Complete overhead work prior to start of the work of this section. D. Scheduling: Ensure that environmental and substrate conditions are suitable for satisfactory installation of floor finish materials specified. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan for sheet flooring installation. D. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub -floor is acceptable. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re- waxing. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RESILIENT FLOORING 12.137 096500-1 2. Extra Flooring Material: 100 square feet of each type and color. 3. Extra Wall Base: 100 linear feet of each type and color. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install floor coverings and adhesives when the moisture condition of concrete slab exceeds either of the following: 1. Moisture vapor emission rate of concrete slab exceeds 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours. 2. Relative humidity in the concrete slab exceeds 75 percent. B. Do not install floor coverings and adhesives any time the air temperature or concrete surface temperature is within 5 degrees above dewpoint. C. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 65 degrees F, but not less than 5 degrees F above dewpoint; do not allow relative humidity to elevate beyond 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Size: 12 x 24 inch. 4. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 5. Pattern: Marbleized. 6. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product Raffia: www.armstrong.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TP, rubber, thermoplastic; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Height: 4 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 8. Manufacturers: a. Roppe Corp; Product 4 inch no toe rubber base: www.roppe.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended and provided by flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Metal. D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RESILIENT FLOORING 12.137 096500-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive resilient base. D. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for pH and moisture emission rate in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results indicate moisture emission rate greater than 3 lb per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours. 1. Perform calcium chloride moisture test on slabs "at service temperature" and in accordance with ASTM F 1869 for each 500 sq ft of floor area. 2. Contractor may be required to perform in -situ relative humidity testing per ASTM F 2170. F. Verify that required floor- mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide mechanical dehumidification as required to correct unsatisfactory moisture conditions in concrete floor slabs. Refer to Section 07 2619 for additional requirements. B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. C. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. E. Grind concrete sub -floor to provide "open" flat surface suitable for installation of resilient flooring materials. 1. Use planetary head machinery with small grinding heads spinning within a large diameter rotating head. 2. Coarse grinding steps: Use abrasive pads with diamonds embedded in a metal matrix; provide a 150 -grit finish. F. Clean substrate: Perform light abrasive blasting of floor surfaces; vacuum residue. 1. Use floor scrubbing machine to remove grinding dust and debris; rinse thoroughly with fresh water and allow surface to dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. 1. Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws. 2. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RESILIENT FLOORING 12.137 096500-3 H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. I. Install feature strips and game markings where indicated. 3.04 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. 3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RESILIENT FLOORING 12.137 096500-4 SECTION 09 6813 - TILE CARPETING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Reclamation /Recycling of new carpet tile scrap. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009. B. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. C. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. D. CRI (GLC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints and layout of graphics inserts. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. E. Submit two, 6 inch long samples of edge strip. F. LEED Report: Submit data documenting VOC content of carpet tile and adhesives; copy of current CRI Approved Products Listing is acceptable. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. H. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain the substrate temperature and ambient air temperature at least 5 degrees F above the dew point. C. Do not install carpet tile when temperature is below 65 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide full box of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile : Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. C1 - "Dissolve Tile" 59566, manufactured by Shaw MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILE CARPETING 12.137 096813-1 a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: Ashen 66504. c. Installation Method: Brick Ashlar 2. C2 - "Ingrain Tile ", manufactured by Shaw a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: Quince 39504. c. Installation Method: Brick Ashlar 3. C3 - "Crossing Tile ", manufactured by Bolyu a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: CSG32 Tinsel. c. Installation Method: Brick Ashlar 4. C4 - "Color Choice Modular ", manufactured by Patcraft a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: Green Apple 00350. c. Installation Method: Random accent in C3 field. 5. C5 - "Hint Tile 5T024 ", manufactured by Shaw a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: Black Tea 22516. c. Installation Method: Monolithic 6. C6 - "Blend Tile" 5T025, manufactured by Shaw a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: Fustic Indigo 25516. c. Installation Method: Random accent in C5 field 7. C7 - "Technique Tile" 5T022, manufactured by Shaw a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. b. Color: Black Tea 22516. Pattern: Dissolve Tile. Installation Method: Monolithic B. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, color as selected. C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC of 50 g /L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. 1. Contact Adhesive: Recommended and provided by carpet tile manufacturer, releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for carpet tile installation by testing substrate moisture conditions and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILE CARPETING 12.137 096813-2 B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. D. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. E. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. F. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. G. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Install carpet tile in areas as in accordance with layout and schedule indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TILE CARPETING 12.137 096813 -3 SECTION 09 7200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and prime painting. B. Wall covering and borders. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3349.02 - LEED Prohibited Content Installer Certification B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. B. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). C. ASTM F793 - Standard Classification of Wallcovering by Use Characteristics; 2010a. D. FS L -P -1040 - Plastic Sheets and Strips (Polyvinyl Fluoride); Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision B, 1977. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout. D. Samples: Submit two samples of wall covering, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch -up, and repair of covered surfaces. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Wall Covering Materials: 25 linear feet of each color and pattern of wall covering; store where directed. G. LEED Submittal: Documentation of recycled content and location of manufacture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.06 MOCK -UP A. Provide panel, 3 panel drops wide, full height, illustrating installed wall covering and joint seaming technique. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock -up may remain as part of the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. WC -1 Knoll Textiles; Product Vector. B. WC -2 Wolf Gordon; Product Knightsbridge. C. WC -3 Wolf Gordon; Product Ribbon. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WALL COVERINGS 12.137 097200-1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Requirements for All Wall Coverings: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread /Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to surface texture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. C. Termination Trim: Extruded plastic, clear. D. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. E. Substrate Primer and Sealer: As recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 1. Comply with VOC limits set forth in 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. B. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch /ft. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra - sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth. E. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use wall covering in roll number sequence. C. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly. D. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. E. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. F. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. G. Apply wall covering to electrical wall plates prior to replacing. H. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. I. Install termination trim. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WALL COVERINGS 12.137 097200-2 SECTION 09 7500 - INTERIOR STONE FACING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior dimension stone wainscot panels, trim and base. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Marble Institute of America, MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual volume VII 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of stone facing with installation of adjacent finishes and utilities to be concealed within column enclosures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide information on stone facing system products to be provided including installation instructions and methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate Layout, thickness, jointing, anchoring details. D. Samples: Submit two stone material samples, 4 x 4 inch in size, illustrating character and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Marble: Imperial Danby . B. Material B: 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that 3.02 PREPARATION 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. See Section for installation of 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. 3.06 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR STONE FACING 12.137 097500-1 SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Elevator pit ladders. 3. Exposed surfaces of steel columns, joists, lintels and ledge angles. 4. All exposed ferrous metal fabrication not indicated to be factory finished. 5. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings. 6. Interior walls and bottom of soffits. 7. Interior ceilings of gypsum board or plaster. 8. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop - primed items. c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view, excluding that which is factory- finished. d. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. e. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items specified to be factory- finished; materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items. 6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones. 7. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 8. Ceramic and other tiles. 9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster and stucco. 10. Glass. 11. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated. 12. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3515 - LEED Certification Procedures: LEED rating system definition. B. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop - primed items. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-1 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2012. C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood -Base Materials; 2007. D. GreenSeal GS -11 - Paints; 1993. E. Green Seal Environmental Standards, GC -03, Anti - Corrosive Paints (1997). F. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Prepare schedule of paint coatings for application to specific substrates, and provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content and manufacturer's application recommendations. C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard, 5 x 8 inch in size. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS -11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification. F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. G. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch -up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 MOCK -UP A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock -up. B. Provide panel, 10 feet high by 8 feet wide, illustrating designated coating color, texture, and finish. C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, texture, and finish. D. Locate where directed. E. Mock -up may remain as part of the work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-2 B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. 1. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. 2. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55 degrees F unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 3. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 4. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid - height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Paints: 1. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 3. Diamond Vogel Paint: www.diamondvogel.com. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com. 5. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com. 6. Sherwin- Williams Company: www.sherwin- williams.com. C. Transparent Finishes: 1. Sherwin- Williams Company: www.sherwin- williams.com. 2. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.. D. Stains: 1. Sherwin- Williams Company: www.sherwin- williams.com. 2. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.. 4. DAP Products, Inc.; www.dap.com. 5. Pratt & Lambert Paints: www.prattandlambert.com.. E. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's highest quality product for type of coating specified. B. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field - catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-3 3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one -half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. C. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. D. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 6116. E. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2- ethylhexyl) phthalate, di -n -butyl phthalate, di -n -octyl phthalate, 1,2- dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1 - trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. F. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. G. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. 1. Definitions - MPI system of defining gloss. a. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals. Traditionally, Flat refers to G1 /G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6. b. Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows: 2. Gloss Level Description Units at 60 degrees Units at 85 degrees a. G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 maximum b. G2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35 c. G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35 d. G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 minimum e. G5 Semi -gloss 35 to 70 f. G6 Gloss 70 to 85 g. G7 High Gloss > 85 3. Gloss shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D523. H. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule 1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall /ceiling they are mounted on /under. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint WE -OP -2A - Wood, Opaque, High - performance Acrylic, 2 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi - gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel; 100% Acrylic Enamel. B. Ferrous metals, with rust - inhibitive primer: 1. Preparation as specified by top coat manufacturer. 2. One coat of primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 3. Semi -gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic enamel. C. Galvanized metal: 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. One coat of primer recommended by manufacturer. 3. Semi -Gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-4 2.04 OPAQUE PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint I -TR - Transparent Finish on Wood, Unless Otherwise Indicated: B. Wood trim and millwork items specifically scheduled to receive opaque finish: 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. First coat: Vinyl acrylic enamel undercoater recommended by top coat manufacturer. 3. Semi -gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic. C. Particleboard, Mechanical and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Intumescent Latex; 2 coats. 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Flat: Two coats of PPG Speedhide Intumescent Latex Paint. 3. Color: White. D. Concrete and concrete masonry: 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. First coat: 100 percent acrylic, high build (8 -12 mil dft) surfacer /filler recommended by top coat manufacturer. 3. Semi -gloss finish: Two coats 100 percent acrylic. 4. Gloss finish: Two coats acrylic epoxy (water- based). E. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. 3. Semi - gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. F. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: 1. Touch -up with alkyd primer. 2. Semi - gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. G. Paint MgI -OP -3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi - gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel. H. Gypsum board / plaster surfaces of partition walls, bulkheads and soffits: 1. Preparation for Level 5 surface appearance: Spray apply high build coating of acrylic latex based Surfacer /Primer: a. Coordinate with requirements in Section 09 2116. 2. One coat of primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 3. Eggshell finish: Two coats of 100 percent acrylic. 4. Semi -gloss finish: Two coats of 100 percent acrylic. I. Gypsum Board Surfaces of Walls, Bulkheads and Soffits, Opaque, Scuff Resistant, 3 coat: 1. Coating Manufacturer: Master Coating Technologies; www.scuffmaster.com. 2. Product: Waterbased Polyurethane - Fortified - Eggshell scrub resistant finish. a. Surface preparation: Follow manufacturer's recommendations. b. Primer: One coat of Scuffmaster Primemaster(tm) Primer /Sealer. c. Eggshell Finish: Two coats of Scuffmaster(r) ScrubTough(tm) Interior Performance Paint with Microban(r) Protection; follow manufacturer's recommendations. Gypsum board / plaster surfaces of walls finished with Vinyl- Coated Wall Covering: 1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer. 2. Comply with wall covering manufacturer's instructions. 3. Wall covering primer: One coat of acrylic, pre - wallcovering primer. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean -up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop - applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. D. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. E. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra - sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. H. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri- sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. I. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. J. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. K. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. L. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC -PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC -SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC -SP 1 (solvent cleaning). M. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. N. Shop- Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re -prime entire shop - primed item. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-6 O. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. P. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. Q. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. R. Wood Doors to be Field- Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer. S. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. G. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. H. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. I. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. J. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. K. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 22 0553 and Section 26 0553 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Paint equipment exposed to view, in occupied areas, to match adjacent wall color. C. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PAINTING AND COATING 12.137 099000-7 Touch -up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 PAINTING AND COATING 1• •I11 :, SECTION 10 1101 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Markerboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4 -American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, tackboard, tackboard surface covering, trim, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details. D. Samples: Submit color charts for selection of color and texture of tackboard surface covering and trim. E. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. F. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal . 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Visual Display Boards: 1. Clarus glassboards: www.clarusglassboards.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Markerboards: Magnetic Glass. 1. Product: Glassboard Float, manufactured by Clarus Glassboards. 2. Color: White. 3. Height: As indicated on drawings. 4. Length: As indicated on drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick. B. Mounting Brackets: Concealed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install with bottom of perimeter frame at 30 inches above finished floor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 12.137 101101 -1 C. Secure units level and plumb. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 12.137 101101 -2 SECTION 10 2113.13 - METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 10 2800 - 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design- US DoJ Rev. Regulations for Titles II and III, Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661 -302.1 B. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2011. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Toilet Compartments: 1. General Partitions Mfg. Corp: www.generalpartitions.com. 2. Global Steel Products Corp: www.globalpartitions.com. 3. Metpar Corp: www.metpar.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Hot - dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Steel Sheet for Porcelain Enameling: ASTM A424, Type I, Commercial Steel. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Powder coated steel, floor- mounted head rail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges; corners made with corner clips or mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Panel Faces: 20 gage. 2. Door Faces: 20 gage. 3. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage. 4. Reinforcement: 12 gage. 5. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 12.137 10 2113.13 - 1 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 12.137 10 2113.13 - 2 C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out - swinging. 4. Height: 58 inch. D. Pilasters: 1 -1/4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. E. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with three panel brackets, and floor -to- ceiling vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1 -5/8 inch size, with anti -grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Satin stainless steel. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. E. Hardware: Satin chrome plated non - ferrous cast metal: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Nylon bearings. 3. Sliding door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 4. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 5. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 6. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 2.05 FINISHING A. Powder Coated Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats powder coat enamel. B. Color: Single color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built -in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch -up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 12.137 10 2113.13 - 2 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 12.137 10 2113.13 - 3 SECTION 10 2813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for public toilet rooms and utility rooms. B. Grab bars. C. Electric hand dryers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 10 2113.13 - Metal Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2007a. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. C. ASTM B 456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2003. D. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006. E. GSA CID A -A -3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration; 1996. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products listed are made by Bobrick. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 2. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 or 316. D. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID A -A -3002. E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper - proof, security type. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TOILET ACCESSORIES 12.137 102813-1 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome /Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. 2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Owner furnished; Contractor installed. B. Toilet Paper Dispenser: surface- mounted, stainless steel unit with pivot hinge, tumbler lock. 1. Product: B -3699 manufactured by Bobrick. C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck - mounted on vanity, with polyethylene container concealed below deck; piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish; chrome - plated deck escutcheon. 1. Product: B -82216 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror. 1. Size: As indicated in Drawings. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish. 3. Backing: Full- mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1 -1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1 -1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. 1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings. F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface- mounted, self - closing door, locking bottom panel with full - length stainless steel piano -type hinge, removable receptacle. 1. Product: B -254 manufactured by Bobrick, wall mounted. 2. Product: B -354 manufactured by Bobrick, toilet partition mounted 2.05 ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS A. Electric Hand Dryer: 1. Drying Time: 15 seconds. 2. Voltage: 120 volts. 3. Sensor Delay -On: 0.6 second. 4. Sensor Delay -Off: 2 seconds. 5. Cover Finish: White painted aluminum. 6. Dryer Mounting Height: 7. Manufacturers: a. Excel Dryer; Product XLerator Model XL -SB: www.exceldryer.com. b. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.06 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Combination Utility Shelf /Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2 inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements areas indicated on drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TOILET ACCESSORIES 12.137 102813-2 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on drawings, and as follows: END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TOILET ACCESSORIES 12.137 102813-3 SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 21 1200 - Fire - Suppression Standpipes: Cabinet enclosure for extinguishers and hose valve connections . 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013. B. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design- US DoJ Rev. Regulations for Titles II and III, Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as adopted by Iowa State Building Code 661 -302.1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions and rough -in measurements for recessed cabinets. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re- certification requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories: 1. Ansul, Inc.: www.ansul.com. 2. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 4. Potter - Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Fire Hose Valve Cabinets 1. Same manufacturers as fire extinguisher cabinets 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever affords the greatest degree of life safety. B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class 4A- 60B:C. 2. Size 10 lbs. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi - recessed type. 1. Exterior nominal dimensions of 13 inch wide x 27 inch high x 6 inch deep. 2. Trim: Returned to wall surface, rolled edge with 2 -1/2 inch projection, 1 -3/4 inch wide face. C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 12.137 104400-1 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 12.137 104400-2 D. Door Glazing: Full Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre -drill for anchors. F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish. G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. 2.04 FIRE DEPARTMENT VALVE CABINETS A. Cabinets 1. Provide units to match fire extinguisher cabinets in type, style, material, and color. 2. Size cabinets to suit content and conditions. 3. Coordinate with standpipe design documents. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome - plated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 28 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers in cabinets and on wall brackets as indicated. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 12.137 104400-2 SECTION 10 5617 - WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shelf standards, brackets, and accessories. B. Shelves. C. See drawings for locations and configurations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking in walls for attachment of standards. B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Blocking in metal stud walls for attachment of standards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA LD 3 - High- Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Shelf Standards and Brackets: 1. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Shelves: 1. Fabricated as indicated on the drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Heavy Duty Shelf Standards: Double- slotted channel standards for brackets adjustable in 1 inch increments along entire length of standard, drilled and countersunk for screws. 1. Acceptable Product: K &V 85. 2. Load Capacity: Recommended by manufacturer for loading of 300 to 680 pounds per pair of standards. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Lengths: As indicated on drawings. 5. Finish: Powder - coated, white; provide screws with matching heads. 6. Brackets: Double tab type, locking into slots; size to suit shelves; same finish as standards. 7. Bracket Quantity: Provide one bracket for each 12 inches of standard length. B. Laminate Faced Shelves: Particleboard or medium density fiberboard covered with high pressure decorative laminate on both sides. 1. Edge Finish: Matching laminate, all four edges. 2. Substrate Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 12.137 105617-1 3. Length: As indicated on drawings. 4. Laminate: NEMA LD 3 Type HGL, 0.032 inch nominal. 5. Laminate Color and Pattern: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 6. Shelf Quantity: Provide one shelf for each 12 inches of length of standard, per pair of standards, unless otherwise indicated. C. Wood Shelves: Hardwood veneer plywood with matching solid wood glued edges on all four edges. 1. Species and Cut: as indicated. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal. 3. Finish: Polyurethane varnish. 4. Shelf Quantity: Provide one shelf for each 12 inches of length of standard, per pair of standards, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fasteners: Screws as recommended by manufacturer for intended application or as otherwise required by project conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount standards to solid backing capable of supporting intended loads. C. Install brackets, shelving, and accessories. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WALL MOUNTED STANDARDS AND SHELVING 12.137 105617-2 SECTION 10 5626 - HIGH DENSITY MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. High density, mobile storage shelving system on support rails; mechanically assisted manual operation. B. Leveling and grouting of floor mounted support rails. 1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3323 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive data for each type of shelving, track and accessories specified. C. Shop Drawings: Provide installation layout, and details showing components, assemblies, connections and attachments. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate conditions requiring special procedures. E. Operation and Maintenance Data. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in OWNER's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by manufacturer. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HIGH DENSITY, MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEM A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Aurora Storage: <http: / /www.aurorastorage.com /> B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers 1. SpaceSaver 2. Kardex C. System Description: Storage units mounted on track - guided carriages forming a compact storage system. Manual operation. 1. Components: Cold- formed sheet steel Shelf Units. a. Overall Height: 6 ft. b. Quantity and layout: As indicated on drawings 2. Low Profile Track 2.02 MATERIALS A. Non - Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; comply with storage unit manufacturer's requirements. 1. Compressive strength: a. 4500 psi at one hour. b. 8000 psi at seven days. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that room dimensions areas indicated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HIGH DENSITY MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEM 12.137 105626-1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Abrasive blast clean concrete floor surface to remove surface contaminates. 1. Locate and position floor rails in accordance with dimensions on final shop drawings. 2. Installation tolerances for installed rails: a. Maximum variation from level: 1/32 inch in 10 feet. b. Maximum variation from level between adjacent (parallel) rails: 1/16 inch (perpendicular to rails) B. Place cementitious underlayment between installed rails in accordance with contract documents and requirements in Section 03 5400. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carriages and shelving units in accordance with contract documents and manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verfy that installed shelving units are plumb and in alignment. If necessary, correct in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces. Remove unused materials and debris from site. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HIGH DENSITY MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEM 12.137 105626-2 SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually- operated roller shades and accessories for sun /glare control and room darkening. B. Motorized interior, room darkening roller shades. C. Shade accessories. D. Control systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 2300 - Alternates: Descriptions of items, administrative requirements. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Alternates: See Section 01 2300 - Alternates, for description of alternates affecting this section. 1. Provide shades at clerestory windows of classrooms added by Alternate No.1. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of motorized shades with size, location and installation of electrical connections and control switches. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. C. Sequencing: Ensure that electrical connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, descriptive literature, installation instructions, detail sheets, and specifications for each type system specified. C. Samples for Verification: One 12 x 12 inch sample of each shade fabric selected. D. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and interface with other products. 1. Room schedule including field- verified dimensions of each opening to receive window shade systems. 2. Indicate System Series, operator, fabric selection, and mounting type. 3. Indicate control type. 4. Wiring diagrams. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original cartons. B. Individually package and mark shades with room number and opening number. C. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. D. Store and handle shades to prevent damage to fabrics, finishes, and operators prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Electronic motorized shades: 1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc; Product - "Sivoia QS" Roller Shades: www.lutron.com. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers: a. Draper, Inc.; Product - "Motorized FlexShade System ": www.draperinc.com. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12.137 122413-1 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Provide all window shade systems from a single manufacturer. 2.02 ROLLER SHADES A. Manually- Operated Shades: 1. Roller Tube: Manufacturer's recommended diameter; ceiling mounting brackets. 2. Bead /Chain Operation: Bi- directional, wrap spring clutch made of high- strength fiberglass- reinforced polyester and high carbon steel. a. Continuous loop, certified No. 10 metal bead chain in appropriate length. B. Motorized Shades: Sivioa QS roller 100 series with ultra - quiet, precision - controlled Electronic Drive Unit contained within head tube, controlling shade movement. 1. Electronic Drive Unit: Powered through centralized power panel. 2. Power Panels: 120 V, UL Listed. a. Panels provide centralized power terminals for up to 10 drive units, and include independent circuit breaker protection for each Drive Unit. b. Panels provide diagnostic LED status indicators to signal that power and control wiring for Drive Units is correct and functioning. 2.03 FABRICS A. Fabric for Sun /Glare Control: "SheerShade" PVC /dual -sided fiberglass, 3 percent open. 1. Color: White, SXL2 -WW. 2. Fabric Roll Width: 98 inches. 3. Location: All manual shades. B. Fabric for Room Darkening: Fiberglass blackout fabric; washable, flame retardant, 0 percent openness. 1. Color: White, BN- 903 -0. 2. Fabric Roll Width: Maximum practical widths for multiple adjacent window units. 3. Locations: All motorized shades. 2.04 CONTROLS A. Wall Mounted Controls: 1. Type: Wall mounted keypads; Architectural style, stainless steel. 2. Button Controls: a. Open - Fully opens shade. b. Close - Fully closes shade. c. Raise /Lower - adjusts shade up and down by pressing and holding either button. 3. Provide one keypad in each room with shades; low voltage control wiring between keypad and centralized power panel; power panel provides power to multiple electronic drive units. B. Provide for remote operation by time clock to fully open shades in the morning and fully close shades in the afternoon /evening. C. Provide low voltage control wiring between remote contact closure and centralized power panel. 2.05 COMPONENTS A. Mounting Brackets: Stamped steel, custom fabricated as required for ceiling mounting. B. Roller Idler Assembly for Manual Shades: Clutch operated rollers incorporating high- strength fiberglass- reinforced polyester gudgeon, which snaps -locks into mounting bracket. C. Top Roller Box and End Caps for Motorized Shades: Four - sided, interlocking box and cover custom - extruded of 6063 -T5 aluminum, 0.062 inch minimum wall; electrostatic finish. 1. Size: As required to enclose shade 2. Size: 5 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12.137 122413-2 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install window shade systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. B. Assume responsibility for all field dimensions and mounting surfaces. C. Adjust window shade systems for proper operation. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Perform demonstration and train Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance of the roller shade systems in accordance with requirements in Section 01 7900. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Provide motorized shades at all exterior windows of Rooms 158, 159, 160, 211, 311, 411, 507, 602, 606, and 611. Provide motorized shades at interior windows of Room 149. B. Provide manual shades at exterior windows of Rooms 204, 207, 208, 240, 241, 242, 243, 305, 307, 308, 405, 407, 408, 505, 509, and 511. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12.137 122413-3 SECTION 12 3600 - COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork. B. Wall -hung counters and vanity tops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 064100 -Architectural Wood Casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2009. B. ANSI Z124.3 - American National Standard for Plastic Lavatories; 2005. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2012. D. AWI /AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. E. ISSFA -2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; 2001 (2007). F. NEMA LD 3 - High- Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. F. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. G. LEED Report: Submit for wood products made from sustainably harvested wood, salvaged and reused wood, wood fabricated from recovered timber, and locally- sourced wood, as specified in Section 01 3515 - LEED Requirements. H. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. I. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COUNTERTOPS 12.137 123600-1 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI /AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. NSF approved for food contact where installed with the possibility of food contact. c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear Grade requirements for wear resistance. d. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. e. Surface Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line. f. Manufacturers: 1) Formica Corporation : www.formica.com. 2) Panolam Industries International, Inc \Nevamar : www.nevamar.com. 3) Pionite: www.pionite.com. 4) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 5) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. 3. Fabricate in accordance with AWI /AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Custom Grade. C. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/4 inch, minimum. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA -2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non - porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. NSF approved for food contact. c. Sinks and Bowls: Integral castings; minimum 3/4 inch wall thickness; comply with ANSI Z124.3. d. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. e. Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line. f. Manufacturers: 1) Dupont: www.corian.com. 2) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com. 3) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 4. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. 5. Skirts: As indicated on drawings. D. Simulated Stone Countertops 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch (2 cm). 2. Weight: 10 lb per sf (2 cm) 3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1 -1/2 inch thick; radiused edge . MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COUNTERTOPS 12.137 123600-2 4. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. 5. Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line. 6. Acceptable products: a. SileStone (tm) from Cosentino USA, Inc.: www.silestone.com. b. Zodiaq (tm) Quartz Surfaces from DuPont: www.zodiaq.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood -Based Components: 1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A -C veneer grade, minimum 5 -ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines. C. Particleboard for Plastic Laminate Substrate: ANSI A208.1 Grade 2 -M -2, 45 pcf minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch thick; without added urea formaldehyde. 1. Acceptable Products: a. CollinsPine FreeForm (tm) panels manufactured by The Collins Companies: www.collinswood.com. b. Temstock -Free (tm) panels manufactured by Temple- Inland, Inc.: www.templeinland.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. D. Phenolic Backer: NEMA LD3; heavy gage neutral colored backing sheet for balanced construction of plastic laminate tops. E. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. F. Steel Wall Brackets: 14 gage steel; 18 inch vertical leg by 24 inch horizontal leg with flanges predrilled for fasteners. G. Joint Sealant: Mildew- resistant silicone sealant, as selected for condition. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate in accordance with standards governing fabrication quality that are specified in Section 06 4100. B. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. C. Provide back /end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. E. Wall- Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COUNTERTOPS 12.137 123600-3 C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch. C. Attach solid surface countertops in accordance with manufacturer's installation details and recommendations. D. Seal joint between back /end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum. B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum. C. Field Joints: 0.032 inch wide, maximum. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COUNTERTOPS 12.137 123600-4 SECTION 12 4813 - RECESSED ENTRANCE FLOOR GRID PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stainless steel entrance floor gratings. B. Recessed mat frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of walk -off surface, component dimensions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate overall layout dimensions. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating pattern, color, finish, edging . E. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor opening for mats are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mats: Verify size of floor area before cutting mats. B. Vacuum clean floor substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install frames to achieve flush plane with finished floor surface. B. Install walk -off mats in floor recess flush with finish floor after cleaning of finished floor surface. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RECESSED ENTRANCE FLOOR GRID 12.137 124813-1 SECTION 14 2110 - GEARLESS TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Complete passenger elevator systems. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GEARLESS TRACTION ELEVATORS 12.137 142110-1 SECTION 21 0010 - FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the fire suppression contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Water Based Fire Suppression Systems 2. Demolition of Fire Suppression Systems B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning fire suppression systems. C. Drawings for fire suppression work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Fire Suppression Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. International Building Code 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 5. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 6. Local Utility Company Requirements 7. Local Codes, all trades 8. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 11. Iowa Administrative Codes 12. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professional of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-1 C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REG ULA TORY AGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and local utility companies. Contractor shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the fire suppression work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. 1.05 FIRE SUPPRESSION DRAWINGS A. The fire suppression drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine all construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B. Drawings for piping are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of piping and equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough -ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of the contractor's failure to make this inspection. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-2 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors, shall be called to the attention of the Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Design Professional and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the painting contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in finished areas of the building, Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B. Piping and sleeves passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and pipe or sleeve shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. Where piping and sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. C. Existing Structure: 1. Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-3 1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for fire suppression work and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care shall be taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. B. Backfill about the structure shall be placed, when practical, as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit. Backfill shall be in accordance with Division 31 Specifications. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish to Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Design Professional for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: Notes: 1. Hydraulic calculations. 2. All certifications and test results required by NFPA. F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-4 CERTIFICATE OTHER SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M OF DEMON- (SEE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL STRATION NOTES 21 1000 Water Based Fire X X X X 1,2 Suppression System Notes: 1. Hydraulic calculations. 2. All certifications and test results required by NFPA. F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-4 G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 8. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.14 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the fire suppression installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O &M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-5 Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands -on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hours Presented By Others Present Remarks (Note 1) 21 1000 Water Based Fire 8 Contractor Protection System 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owner's discretion during the first year of occupancy. D. Contractor shall submit to Design Professional a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-6 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 signature date signature date FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 21 0010-7 1. 15 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the contractor and /or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.17 GUARANTEE A. The entire fire suppression system including all sub - systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.19 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non - hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. B. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. B. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-8 1.21 ACCESS DOORS A. When Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non - accessible architectural construction, Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC -211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam - and - studs. 1.22 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment. Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Pads to be a minimum of 4" in height unless noted otherwise. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer's recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use 3000 -psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12" O.C. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 21 0010 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE SUPPRESSION GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 21 0010-9 SECTION 21 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 21 0010 - Fire Suppression General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Sleeves 2. Escutcheons 3. Fire Stopping 4. Guards 5. Demolition PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 DEMOLITION MATERIALS A. All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site by him, unless otherwise specified. 2.02 SLEEVES A. Sleeves passing through non -load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2 -1/2" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. G. For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts (Link -Seal or equal). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 12.137 21 0500-1 2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around pipe; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve with set screws or other approved devices. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Piping and sleeves passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor, pipe, and sleeve, shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. General: 1. Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 2. Contractor shall remove existing equipment and piping not necessary for additions or existing portions of building as indicated on drawings and /or specified herein. To include all abandoned equipment and piping back to point of origin. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for the cutting and capping of all existing services before any work is commenced by the General Contractor. B. Work by Others: Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general, the following will be performed by others: 1. General Contractor will remove any floors, walls and ceilings, neatly patch, match, complete and finish all affected surfaces. 2. Electrical Contractor will disconnect all electrical services and remove abandoned conduit back to point of origin. C. Existing Conditions: 1. If any piping serving existing fixtures or equipment which are to remain are disturbed by operations under this Contract, Contractor shall provide pipe and insulation required to reestablish continuity of such piping systems. 2. Contractor shall arrange for General Contractor to repair, patch and paint all construction, with material necessary to match surrounding material, which is necessary due to removal of equipment and piping. 3. Contractor shall furnish all required labor and material where required to extend new work to connect to similar work where new addition adjoins existing building and for extension of existing system. Connection shall be made in a suitable manner. D. Owner's Right of Salvage: The Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. 3.02 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. END OF SECTION 21 0500 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 12.137 21 0500-2 SECTION 21 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 21 0010 - Fire Protection General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of fire protection identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and /or specified in other Division -21 sections. B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Painted identification materials 2. Plastic pipe markers 3. Plastic tape 4. Valve tags C. Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division -21 sections. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for fire protection system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 -1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, system or zone (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut -off and similar special uses, by special "flags ", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division -21 sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials: 1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. 3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION 12.137 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 -1 C. Plastic Pipe Markers: General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed flexible or semi - rigid, permanent, color- coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap -on application of pre- tensioned semi -rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. C. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 -1/2 ". Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full -band or narrow strip -type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1 -1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 ". C. Strapped -to -pipe (or insulation) application of semi -rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. 4. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre - printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Design Professional in cases of variance with names as shown or specified. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic. D. Plastic Tape: General: Manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure- sensitive (self- adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. a. Width: Provide 1 -1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6 ", 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. b. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E. Valve Tags: Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp- engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. a. Provide 2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7/16" white embossed sequenced numbers. Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S -hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION 12.137 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 -2 F. Name Plates: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. 2. Lettering: a. Large Equipment: 1 1/2" lettering as appropriate. b. Small Equipment: 3/4" lettering as appropriate. 3. Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in fire protection identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation /maintenance of fire protection systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Fire Pump, Standpipe F12). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install identification after completion of covering and painting if any. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B. Piping System Identification: 1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on all fire protection piping, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Stenciled markers, including color -coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. C. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color -coded painting of piping is provided. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non - concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors /ceilings, or enter non - accessible enclosures. C. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. d. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION 12.137 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 -3 e. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. f. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. C. Valve Identification: General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in fire protection piping system; exclude check valves, List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. E. Equipment Identification: General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including fire pumps, fire pump controllers, zone control valves, and specialty system valves where applicable (i.e. dry valve or preaction system). 2. Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as designated by Owner. Provide identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate a. For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive fixed name plates. b. Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering. END OF SECTION 21 0553 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE PROTECTION 12.137 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 0553 -4 SECTION 21 1000 — WATER -BASED FIRE SUPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 21 0010 - Fire Suppression General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of fire suppression work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Applications of fire suppression systems include the following: 1. Sprinkler systems. 2. Standpipe systems. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI /NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems ", and ANSI /NFPA 24, "Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtences ", where applicable. B. UL Labeling: Provide fire sprinkler piping products which have been approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. C. Local Fire Marshal Regulations: Comply with governing regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. D. All fire suppression work shall be performed by a qualified sprinkler contractor with at least three years experience that has obtained current certification in the State of Iowa under the Fire Extinguishing System Contractor Certification program. During the installation, a minimum of one person with at least three years sprinkler experience shall be present. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for fire suppression systems, materials and products. B. Piping Shop Drawing and Hydraulic Calculations: The Contractor shall prepare a complete set of detailed working drawings and hydraulic calculations showing all equipment, fire service lines, risers, piping and heads. These drawings and calculations shall be approved in writing or stamped approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor is responsible for any fees associated with the review and approval of the fire protection layout drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations by the State Fire Marshal's office. Contractor is also responsible for completion of the required fire extinguishing system submittal form to the SFM. This form is available from the State at the following website: htt:llwww.ds. state, ia. uslfmlbuildinq/forms.shtml. C. Certificate of Installation: Submit certification upon completion of fire suppression piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with ANSI /NFPA 13 (Factory Mutual) and also that system is operational, complete and has no defects. (Submit all documentation as required by Factory Mutual). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Automatic Sprinklers 1. Reliable Sprinkler Corporation. 2. Tyco. 3. Viking Corp. B. Backflow Preventers 1. Watts 2. Apollo Valves 3. Febco C. Gate Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts D. Bronze Body Butterfly Valves 1. Nibco 2. Milwaukee E. Butterfly and Swing Check Valves 1. Victaulic 2. Gruvlok by Anvil International 3. Kennedy 4. Milwaukee 5. Nibco F. Ball Valves 1. Watts B -6000 Series 2. Milwaukee BA- 100 /BA -150 3. Nibco T -580 Series 4. Apollo 77C Series G. Dry Type System (including valve, air pressure maintenance and low pressure horn device) 1. Viking Corp. 2. Reliable H. Grooved Piping Systems 1. Gruvlok by Anvil International 2. Victaulic I. Water Flow Indicators, Outdoor Alarm Bells, and Supervisory Switches 1. Potter - Roemer / Potter Electric 2. System Sensor MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-2 2.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPECIALTIES A. General: Provide fire suppression specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections. 1. Water Flow Indicators: Provide vane type water flow detectors. 2. Outdoor Alarm Bell: Provide electric alarm bell in accordance with NFPA 13. Coordinate installation with Electrical Contractor. 3. Supervisory Switches: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. 4. Low Air Pressure Horn: Provide low air pressure horn as indicated. 5. Air Pressure Maintenance Device, Dry -Pipe System: Provide air pressure maintenance device for dry-pipe standpipe piping as recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Automatic Sprinklers: a. Provide automatic sprinklers of type indicated on drawings, and in accordance with the following listing. Provide fusible links for 165 degrees F (74 degrees C), ordinary temperature, except where intermediate or high temperature rated sprinklers are required per NFPA 13 or as indicated on the plans. 1) Upright 2) Concealed Pendent with Flat Cover Plate 3) Pendant 4) Standard Dry -Type Pendent 5) Standard Dry -Type Upright 6) Dry-Type Concealed Pendent with Flat Cover Plate b. Finish: Painted white for concealed pendent, cast brass for upright pendent, white for recessed pendent or provide finish as indicated on the plans. 7. Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrench: Furnish steel, baked red enameled, sprinkler box with capacity to store 10 sprinklers and wrench sized to sprinklers. B. Fire Department Connection: Provide fire department connection iron swing check valve, 175 psi rated working pressure, of size and end type indicated. 2.03 VALVES A. Butterfly - 1/4" to 2" Milwaukee Butterball BB2 Series B. Ball - 2" to 3" Victaulic Series 727 C. Butterfly - 4" to 8" Victaulic Series 705 (Normally Open Valves) or Series 707C (Normally Closed Valves) D. Gate - 2 -1/2" and larger, iron body O.S. &Y., Powell Fig. 1797 E. Check - 2 -1/2" to 3 ", Central Model 90, 4" to 8" Victaulic Series 710 2.04 DRY PIPE SYSTEM A. Furnish and install where shown on plans a dry type system complete with a dry valve and pneumatic supervision of the automatic sprinkler system. Supervisory pressure must be relieved from the sprinkler system before the dry valve will open to fill the system with water. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-3 B. The dry valve shall be the quick opening, differential type flood valve with a rolling diaphragm clapper. The valve shall be held closed by system water pressure trapped in the priming chamber so that the outlet chamber and system piping remain dry. When the releasing system operates, pressure is released from the priming chamber and the clapper opens to allow water to flow into the system piping. The valve shall be equal to a Viking Model F -1 and, as a minimum, shall have the following features: 1. Field replaceable diaphragms and rubber seated clapper assembly. 2. Shall be designed to be self resetting without opening the valve. 3. Shall be approved for use with pneumatic and /or electric release systems. C. The dry pipe system shall be furnished complete with the following (as a minimum): Dry valve. 2. Dry valve conventional trim. a. Priming valve (normally open). b. Strainer. C. Spring loaded check valve. d. Alarm test valve (normally closed). e. Auxiliary drain valve (normally closed). f. Drip check valve. g. Drain check valve. h. Alarm shut -off valve (normally open). i. Pressure operated relief valve (P.O.R.V). j. Emergency release. k. Priming pressure water gauge and valve. I. Water supply pressure gauge and valve. M. Drain cup. n. Flow test valve (normally closed). Water flow alarm equipment. a. Alarm pressure switch with two sets of independently adjustable contacts. b. Water motor alarm (strainer required). C. Strainer. d. Electric alarm bell. 4. Riser. a. Water supply control valve. b. Check valve. Supervisory air supply a. System pressure gauge and valve. b. Check valve. C. Air pressure supervisory switch with two sets of independently adjustable contacts. 6. Air supply. a. Air compressor (3/4 Hp). b. Refrigerated Air Dryer. Accelerators. a. Provide accelerators as dictated by system volume and NFPA 13. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-4 2.05 PIPE MATERIALS Material A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) DR18 ANSI /AWWA C900 or C905 With tracer wire B. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A795 C. Black steel pipe, Schedule 10, ASTM A795 D. Galvanized Steel Pipe Schedule 40, ASTM A795. 2.06 PIPE FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: Service Underground water service main. Wet systems. Wet systems. Dry and preaction systems. 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Malleable iron fittings, 125 pound standard flat band water pattern. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Standard radius weld fittings and weld neck or slip - on flanges, same material and strength as pipe. 3. Mechanical grooved and roll - groove steel piping system and fittings: may be used as approved by code for black steel, stainless steel and galvanized steel. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 JOINTS A. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Make joints using Teflon tape applied to male threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full size of bore. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI - B31.3 "Code for Power Piping." 3. Mechanical grooved and roll - groove pipe couplings: Grooved couplings may be used as approved by code for black steel and galvanized steel piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.08 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1 -1/2 ", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2 -1/2" and over use flanged unions. For steel pipe use black or galvanized malleable iron unions, to conform to pipe with ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. Long runs, at intervals of 80 feet. 2. In by -pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 3. In connections to equipment. 4. Where indicated on drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the general construction, plumbing, heating, ventilating, and electrical work and to use the information to avoid conflicts in space allocation with the other trades. Do not place pipes over electrical equipment. B. In the case of an interference occurring during construction, Contractor shall rework and reinstall piping and equipment in order to make space available for another contractor's equipment without additional cost to the Owner. C. Contractor shall work closely with the ceiling system installers and install sprinkler head drops before ceiling tiles are installed, and return to job after or during ceiling tile installation for installation of sprinkler heads. D. Heads shall be located in center of ceiling tiles or as directed by Design Professional. 3.02 FIRE SUPRESSION SPECIALTIES A. General: Install fire suppression specialties as indicated, and in accordance with ANSI /NFPA 13. B. Provide wire guards for all exposed sprinkler heads installed in gymnasiums, below ductwork in mechanical rooms, in electrical rooms, in telecommunication rooms, and as noted per the plans. 3.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Install backflow preventers where required per local code and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Backflow preventers to be installed accessible for testing, installing contractor shall provide testing by a certified backflow assembly tester at time of installation as required by Code. 3.04 VALVES A. Install valves as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Install sectional valves in inlet piping at bottom of each riser and in loops as indicated. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. Mount supervisory switches on each sectional valve. B. Install valves in equipment rooms to provide easy access to valve. Each valve installed 8' -0" above the floor shall be provided with chain operator. Bottom of chain operator shall be 7' -0" above floor. C. Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for vertical operation. D. Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally Closed (N.C.) valves shall be provided as required for intended system operation. For all supervised valves, the off - normal signal shall be initiated during the first two revolutions of the hand wheel or during one -fifth of the travel distance of the valve control apparatus from its normal position. 3.05 PIPING A. General: Comply with requirements of ANSI /NFPA 13 for installation of fire sprinkler piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire sprinkler piping complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-6 B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other mechanical items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. Install drain piping at low points of fire sprinkler piping. D. Install valved hose connections of sizes indicated, or 3/4" size if not otherwise indicated, on sprinkler at ends of branch lines and cross mains at locations where indicated. E. Install air vents at high points of sprinkler piping. F. Hangers and supports: Comply with NFPA for hanger materials 1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. 2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. 3.06 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead -in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI /NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged sprinklers. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested. B. Dry -Pipe Testing: Test dry-pipe hydrostatically except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50 psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential dry -valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with ANSI /NFPA standards for "little or no leakage ", and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.08 EXTRA STOCK A. General: For each style and temperature range required, furnish additional sprinkler heads, amounting to 1 unit for every 100 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each. END OF SECTION 21 1000 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 12.137 21 1000-7 SECTION 22 0010 - PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the plumbing contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Waste and Vent Systems 2. Hot and Cold Water Distribution System 3. Plumbing Fixtures 4. Water Heating Systems 5. Sanitary Sewer 6. Piping Insulation 7. Natural Gas System B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning plumbing systems. C. Drawings for plumbing work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Mechanical Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. International Building Code 4. International Fire Code 5. National Electric Code (NEC) 6. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 7. Local Utility Company Requirements 8. Local Codes, all trades 9. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 11. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 12. Iowa Administrative Codes 13. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-1 B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professional of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REG ULA TORY AGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction and local utility companies. Contractor shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to Design Professional prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the plumbing work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. D. Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. 1.05 PLUMBING DRAWINGS A. The plumbing drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B. Drawings are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of piping and equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough -ins and the exact routing of piping so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-2 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by Design Professional and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in finished areas of the building, Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B. Piping and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and pipe and /or sleeve shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. Where piping and sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-3 C. Existing Structure: 1. Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. 1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for sanitary sewers, storm sewers, water piping, gas piping, etc., and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care shall be taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. B. Backfill about the structure shall be placed, when practical, as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit. Backfill shall be in accordance with Division 31 Specifications. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Design Professional for review. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-4 E. Submit required information on the following items: F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-5 CERTIFICATE OTHER SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M OF SYSTEM (SEE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL DEMON- NOTES) STRATION 220516 Expansion Fittings and X Loops for Plumbing Piping 220519 Meters and Gages for X Plumbing Piping 220523 General Duty Valves for X Plumbing Piping 220548 Vibration Controls for X Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220553 Plumbing Identification X 220700 Plumbing Insulation X 221116 Domestic Water Piping X 221123 Domestic Water Pumps X X X 221316 Sanitary Waste Piping X 223300 Electric Domestic Water X X X Heaters 224000 Plumbing Fixtures X X 224500 Emergency Plumbing X X Fixtures 224700 Drinking Fountains and X X Water Coolers F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-5 B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 8. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.14 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Tests Required: Piping shall be tested and proved tight under the following static pressures. Pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. System Domestic Water Piping Systems Soil, Waste, Drainage Piping Below Grade Soil, Waste, Drainage Piping Above Grade Gas Piping Pressure Refer to Section 22 1116 - Domestic Water Piping. 10 feet waterhead or fill to top of vent outlet above roof. Fill piping with water to top of vent outlet above roof, or 10 feet waterhead. 10 psi air pressure, liquid soap test around all joints. TESTING NOTE: All rubber gasket joints for cast iron soil pipe and fittings should be properly restrained if test pressures exceed 10 feet of head. B. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. Contractor shall submit a report to Design Professional citing dates, times, pressures, and results of all tests performed. 1.15 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the plumbing installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-6 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O &M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. Plumbing Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands -on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: These sessions shall include hands -on demonstrations of system wide start -up, operation in all possible modes, shut -down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hours Presented By Others Present Remarks (Note 1) 220010 Plumbing System 8 Contractor Note 2 (Excluding Equipment) 223300 Water Heaters 4 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 223400 221123 Plumbing Pumps 1 2 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owner's discretion during the first year of occupancy. 2. System training shall include, but not be limited to, valve locations, system routing, and air /water flow patterns, system start-up/shut-down/emergency procedures. E. Contractor shall submit to Design Professional a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-7 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that Contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 signature date signature date PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 220010-8 1. 16 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of Contractor and /or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The entire plumbing system including all sub - systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.19 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non - hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. B. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20 CLEANING A. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. B. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. C. Before being placed in service, all domestic water distribution systems, including those for cold water and hot water shall be chlorinated as required per Section 22 1116 - Domestic Water Piping. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-9 1.21 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Electrical work and equipment provided by Contractor shall include the following: Starters and disconnects for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 2. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of plumbing equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. All control wiring in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring for plumbing equipment, including services for motors and equipment furnished by the plumbing contractor. Motor and equipment locations are shown on the electrical drawings. C. Electrical Contractor shall make final connections for all motors and equipment furnished by the plumbing contractor. D. Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the plumbing contractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the equipment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. E. Contractor shall consult with Electrical Contractor prior to conduit rough -in and shall verify with him the exact locations for rough -ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall provide Electrical Contractor a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by him. These schedules will be used for sizing services, disconnects, fuses, starters and overload protection. 1.22 ACCESS DOORS A. When Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non - accessible architectural construction, Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC -211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam - and - studs. 1.23 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. 1.24 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment. Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Pads to be a minimum of 4" in height unless noted otherwise. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-10 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer's recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use 3000 -psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12" O.C. END OF SECTION 22 0010 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 220010-11 SECTION 22 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Demolition 2. Sleeves 3. Escutcheons 4. Fire Stopping 5. Guards PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 DEMOLITION MATERIALS A. All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site by him, unless otherwise specified. 2.02 SLEEVES A. Sleeves passing through non -load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2 -1/2" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. G. For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts (Link -Seal or equal). Waterproofing of pipe penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 12.137 220500-1 2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and pipe, sleeve, and /or duct shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. General: Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 2. Contractor shall remove existing equipment and piping not necessary for additions or existing portions of building as indicated on drawings and /or specified herein. To include all abandoned equipment and piping back to point of origin. Contractor shall be responsible for the cutting and capping of all existing services before any work is commenced by the General Contractor. B. Work by Others: Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general, the following will be performed by others: General Contractor will remove any floors, walls and ceilings, neatly patch, match, complete and finish all affected surfaces. 2. Electrical Contractor will disconnect all electrical services and remove abandoned conduit back to point of origin. C. Existing Conditions: If any piping serving existing fixtures or equipment which are to remain are disturbed by operations under this Contract, Contractor shall provide pipe and insulation required to reestablish continuity of such piping systems. 2. Contractor shall arrange for General Contractor to repair, patch and paint all construction, with material necessary to match surrounding material, which is necessary due to removal of equipment and piping. Contractor shall furnish all required labor and material where required to extend new work to connect to similar work where new addition adjoins existing building and for extension of existing system. Connection shall be made in a suitable manner. D. Owner's Right of Salvage: The Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 12.137 220500-2 3.02 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. 3.04 GUARDS A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 48 ". Guard to be galvanized sheet not less than 26 gauge. END OF SECTION 22 0500 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 12.137 220500-3 SECTION 22 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general - purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for all motors provided. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with NEMA MG1 unless noted otherwise. B. Motor type: Minimum 1.15 service factor; rated at 90 deg. C. ambient temperature (Class B insulation) with 40 deg. C. temperature rise. C. Multiple speed motors: Multiple windings. D. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMA MG1. E. Peak instantaneous current: Maximum 130% of full -load. F. All motors shall be provided as required for motor orientation within equipment. G. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulations. H. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torques. I. Motor Enclosures: 1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. Motors located outdoors to be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy - sealed type. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 12.137 FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513-1 3. Thoroughly clean and paint the enclosures at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. J. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER A. Capacitor start motors starting torque shall be three times full load torque and starting current shall be less than five times full load current. B. Pull -up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. D. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor - start/capacitor -run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. E. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. F. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 22 0513 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 12.137 FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513-2 SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install meters and gauges as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts showing complete descriptive data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thermometers 1. Weiss A- 78 -23'/ (Base Specification) 2. Taylor 3. Weksler 4. U.S. Gauge 5. Trerice B. Gauges (For Water) 1. Weiss Series LF45 -2 (Base Specification) 2. Dwyer 3. Taylor 4. Weksler 5. U.S. Gauge 6. Trerice 2.02 THERMOMETERS A. 9" "Adjust- Angle" industrial thermometer, complete with double thick glass front, red reading, separable socket and arranged so the unit can be set at any required angle front to back or left to right during or after installation. Range 30 -180 deg. F for domestic hot water. 2.03 GAUGES A. Weiss Series 4" liquid filled compound pressure- vacuum gauge with snubber, stainless steel case, white dial, 1/4" male NPT. Range 30" vacuum to 100 lb. pressure for water. Note: For outside applications use silicon filled gauge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install thermometers in discharge and return piping at water heaters and at other points as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Install gauge for each pump, mounted on 1/4" galvanized steel pipe manifold connected to the suction and discharge of the pump, with the needle valves in the manifold on each side of the gauge, so that the gauge may be opened to either the suction or discharge pressure. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 220519-1 3.03 Install gauges at pressure reducing valves and at other points as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 22 0519 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 220519-2 SECTION 22 0523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install valves as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include physical dimensions, construction materials, and pressure and temperature ratings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gate Valves, Globe Valves, and Check Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts B. Lugged Body Butterfly Valves 1. Nibco 2. ABZ 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts C. Ball Valves 1. Watts B -6000 Series 2. Milwaukee BA- 100 /BA -150 3. Nibco T -580 Series 4. Apollo 77C Series D. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Balancing Valves 1. Taco 2. Bell & Gossett 3. Wheatley 4. Armstrong 5. Flow Design Inc. (Flow Set) 6. Griswold E. All valves of same type shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified in this section or on the drawings. F. Model numbers in valve schedule based on Nibco, unless noted otherwise. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 220523-1 2.02 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Gate valves shall have solid tapered wedge, except where otherwise specified. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. B. Check Valves: Horizontal swing type with bronze seat and composition of bronze disc as approved; body of same material, pressure rating, screwed or flanged and finish as adjoining globe or gate valve. C. Ball Valves 4" and smaller: Bronze two -piece standard port with chrome plated ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, vinyl insulated lever handle. 1. Full port for valves 2 -1/2" and smaller. 2. Standard port for valves 3" and larger. D. Domestic hot water recirculation balancing valves: Bell & Gossett Model CB "Circuit Setter" or equal. 1. Ball type valve with bronze body /brass ball construction, glass and carbon fitted TFE seat rings, extended readout ports with integral check valves and gasketed caps, drain port, calibrated nameplate and position indicator, memory stops, and NPT connectors, rated for 300 psig at 250 °F. 2. Valves to seal leak -tight at maximum rated working pressure. 3. Valves to be selected for 5 ft. pressure drop at full open setting and design water flow. E. Butterfly Valves 3" and Larger: Cast iron body with aluminum bronze disc, EPDM or BUNA N seat, 416 stainless steel stem body with extended neck. 2.03 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Furnish valves as per the following schedule: Service Building domestic and industrial water, before and after meter Domestic hot and cold water pressures up to 200 psi Domestic hot water recirculation valves PART 3 - EXECUTION Valve type Gate - 2" and larger, Clow — epoxy coated, resilient seated, full port OS &Y Ball - 2 -1/2" and smaller, Apollo 77C Ball - 3" and 4 ", Apollo 70 Butterfly — 3" and larger, N200 235/245 Check - 2" and smaller, 413 2 -1/2" and larger, 918 All sizes — Bell & Gossett Model CB circuit setter. 3.01 Install valves as indicated on the drawings and as called for in other sections. 3.02 Install valves in equipment rooms to provide easy access to valve. Each valve installed 8' -0" above the floor shall be provided with chain operator. Bottom of chain operator shall be 7' -0" above floor. 3.03 Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for vertical operation. END OF SECTION 22 0523 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 220523-2 SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and seals as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of supports, anchors and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical- Piping Clamps. 3. Hanger -Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments. 5. Saddles and Shields. 6. Miscellaneous Materials. 7. Anchors. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing and mechanical codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports, anchors and seals. B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. C. ANSI Compliance: All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for Pressure Piping B31.1.0 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Grinnell: 1. Anvil International 2. B -Line 3. Elcen 4. Unistrut Building Systems B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. C. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected equipment. D. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps. E. Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-1 F. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. G. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. H. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. I. Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. J. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. K. Where concrete inserts are used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORT A. Hanger rods for steel and copper pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal Pipe Minimum Rod Size, in. Maximum Span, ft. Diameter, in. up to 1 10 3/8 1-1/2 10 3/8 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 11 1/2 3 12 1/2 3-1/2 13 1/2 4 14 5/8 5 16 5/8 6 17 3/4 8 19 7/8 10 22 7/8 12 23 7/8 For 1/2 in. copper tube, 8 ft. spacing of hangers is recommended. B. Hanger rods for PVC pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal Pipe Minimum Rod Size, in. Maximum Span, ft. Diameter, in. 1-1/2 4 3/8 2 4 3/8 3 4 1/2 4 4 5/8 5 4 5/8 6 4 3/4 8-12 4 7/8 C. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe with one hanger for each pipe length. Locate hangers within 18" of hub orjoint. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-2 D. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. E. When two or more pipes are to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles or channels and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required spacing to support the particular group of pipes. F. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls; use welded steel brackets, Fig 194 for loads up to 750 Ibs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1,500 Ibs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. G. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use malleable iron one -hole clamp, Fig. 126 for pipes up to 3 ". For pipes larger than 3 ", use steel channel strut pipe rack. H. Where pipes are to be supported from floor, use unistrut pipe stand with post base. Unformed concrete will not be permitted. 3.02 INSTALLATION - VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Support vertical steel and copper pipe at every other floor line. B. Support vertical cast iron soil pipe at every floor line. C. In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on concrete or block pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. D. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 3.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. For horizontal steel pipe, use adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. 260, for pipes up to 30 ". B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper plated adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. CT -65. C. When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of 1/2" axially as indicated on the drawing, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. D. For glass piping, provide padded pipe clamps and padded hangers as per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140 and 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146, may be used wherever possible. Contractor may at his option cut and thread rod on the job site. B. Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. C. Hangers shall be supported from appropriate structural members. In no case shall hangers be supported from ductwork, cable trays, piping, or other equipment. Existing hangers and supports shall not be used as supports for new hangers unless specifically designed as such, or additional loadings have been confirmed to be acceptable for existing supports. 3.05 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete; use black carbon steel concrete inserts, Fig. 285 for loads up to 400 Ibs., Fig. 281 for loads up to 1200 Ibs. or suitable drilled inserts equal to Ramset/Red Head - Trubolt wedge anchor, Ramset/Red Head Epcon system or Hilti Kwik Bolt II anchor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-3 B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C- clamps, Fig. 87, with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs.; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C- clamps, Fig. CT -88, with hardened cup point set screw, for loads up to 400 lbs. C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange pipe threaded, Fig. 128 for loads up to 480 lbs., Fig. 153 for loads up to 1270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange, Fig. CT -128R for loads up to 180 lbs. D. Under no circumstances shall hangers be attached to metal roof deck. 3.06 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION A. Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields or saddles for piping, Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 165A, 166A, or 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device. 3.07 ROOF MOUNTED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Roof mounted equipment, not specified to be mounted on roof curbs shall be installed on equipment mounting rails specifically designed for that purpose or as shown on plans. B. Roof mounted piping shall be mounted on a pipe support system equal to B -Line C -Port. END OF SECTION 22 0529 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-4 SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of plumbing identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and /or specified in other Division -22 sections. B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Painted identification materials 2. Plastic pipe markers 3. Plastic tape 4. Valve tags C. Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division -22 sections. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 -1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut -off and similar special uses, by special "flags ", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. B. Labeling Nomenclature: Submit list indicating system types with appropriate nomenclature to be provided on the pipe labels. Where possible, match to system labels on drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division -22 sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials: 1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 220553-1 Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed flexible or semi - rigid, permanent, color- coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap -on application of pre- tensioned semi -rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. C. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 -1/2 ". Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full -band or narrow strip -type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1 -1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 ". C. Strapped -to -pipe (or insulation) application of semi -rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. 4. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre - printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Design Professional in cases of variance with names as shown or specified. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic. D. Plastic Tape: General: Manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure- sensitive (self- adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. a. Width: Provide 1 -1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6 ", 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. b. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E. Valve Tags: Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp- engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. a. Provide 2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7/16" white embossed sequenced numbers. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 220553-2 Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S -hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. F. Name Plates: General: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. 2. Lettering: a. Large Equipment: 1 1/2" lettering as appropriate. b. Small Equipment: 3/4" lettering as appropriate. Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in plumbing identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation /maintenance of plumbing systems and equipment. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1 H, Standpipe F12). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install identification after completion of covering and painting if any. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B. Access Door Identification: Provide stenciled or plastic - laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. C. Piping System Identification: General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Stenciled markers, including color -coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. C. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color -coded painting of piping is provided. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 220553-3 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non - concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors /ceilings, or enter non - accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. D. Valve Identification: General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory- fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn- watering hose bibs, and shut -off valves at plumbing fixtures and similar rough -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. E. Equipment Identification: General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including air handling units, terminal units, fans, pumps, boilers, heaters, control panels, heat exchangers, condensing units, and chillers. 2. Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as designated by Owner. Provide identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate a. For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive fixed name plates. b. Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering. END OF SECTION 22 0553 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 220553-4 SECTION 22 0700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to all hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, fittings and other surfaces as required by the drawings and this section. B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA -90A. Flame spread rating of not more than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50 as tested by ANSI /ASTM E84 (UL 723) (NFPA 255) method. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above. B. Installation of insulation materials shall be in accordance to the latest edition of MICA/NIAC National Commercial & Industrial Standards for the appropriate material application. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of plumbing insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each plumbing system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of plumbing insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. C. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and plumbing damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulating Materials 1. Owens /Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Armacell MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING INSULATION 12.137 220700-1 3. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4. CertainTeed Corp. 5. Knauf Fiber Glass 6. John's - Manville Corp. B. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Type 'A': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation and factory applied vapor barrier, all service jacket with pressure sensitive self - sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 0 to +850 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be at least 0.23 Btu -in /hr -sq.ft. -deg F @ 75 deg. F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning 25 ASJ /SSL. Where insulation is exposed to weather outdoors it shall be covered with an aluminum or stainless steel weatherproof jacket 0.016" thick and sealed. 2. Where insulation is exposed in indoor occupied space, it shall be covered with 30 mil PVC jacket equal to Johns Manville Zeston. B. Type 'B': Flexible elastomeric extruded pipe covering, 6 pound density, 0.27 K factor, water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Suitable for temperature from -40 deg. F to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armacell, AP Armaflex, joints sealed with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Exposed outdoor insulation to be finished with two coats of Armacell Armaflex finish. 2.03 FITTING INSULATION A. Type 'Al': Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, or with pre - molded fiberglass wired in place and covered with all- service jacket or low smoke PVC fitting covers. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, wired in place and covered with all- service jacket. B. Type 'B1': Fittings: Insulate fittings, valve bodies, strainer bodies, etc., with mitercut pipe insulation or sheet insulation of same material as pipe covering. 2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Type 'G': Rigid fiberglass insulation board with factory applied all service jacket. Suitable for operating temperatures of 0 to +850 deg. F. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning Series 700 with 25 ASJ facing. 2. Cut or miter insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. On round surfaces band insulation in place with 3/4" x 0.015" thick galvanized steel bands 18" on center. On flat or irregular surfaces impale insulation over welded pins on 12" centers and secure with speed washers. 3. Apply vapor seal ASJ pressure- sensitive patches at damaged areas. All insulation edges and butt joints are to be sealed with pressure- sensitive joint sealing tape to match the jacket. Apply in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Type `I': Flexible elastomeric insulation. Suitable for operating temperatures of -40 to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armacell Armaflex II Sheet Insulation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING INSULATION 12.137 220700-2 2. Cut insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. Insulation shall be installed using Armacell 520 Adhesive. Exposed outdoor insulation shall be finished with two coats of Armacell Armaflex finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating materials supplier's recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, cuts and surfaces of insulation. 3.02 Do not insulate the following: A. Valve bonnets B. Unions in hot piping C. Hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinet. D. Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan. E. Preinsulated expansion joints 3.03 Inspect all piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. 3.04 Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided as required to prevent condensation. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between pipes and hangers. 3.05 Insulation at removable heads, manhole covers, strainer plugs, and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. * * * * * ** *NOTE: Not all services apply — refer to plans for scope of services. * * * * * * * * * * ** 3.06 INSULATION SCHEDULE Service Above Ground Piping Domestic cold water lines Domestic hot water, tempered water, and recirculating lines MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 Type Insulation and Thickness * Type A and Al: All pipe sizes - 1" thick Type B and B1: All pipe sizes - 1/2" thick Type A and Al: 1 1/4" and smaller— 1/2" thick 1 -1/2" and larger - 1 "thick Type B and B1: 1 1/4" and smaller— 1/2" thick 1 -1/2" and larger - 1 "thick PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-3 Horizontal and vertical portions of above grade storm piping, sump pump discharge lines. Underside of roof drain bodies Underground Piping Domestic hot water lines and recirculation lines Type A and Al: 1" thick for all pipe sizes Type G: 1" thick Type I: 3/4" thick Type B and B1: 3/4" thick all pipe sizes For piping exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 1/2" END OF SECTION 22 0700 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING INSULATION 12.137 220700-4 SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of domestic water piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Insulation of domestic water piping is specified in other Division -22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 3. Installation of valves for domestic water piping system is specified in other Division -22 sections and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping ". B. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install domestic water piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Plumbing Code ". C. IPC Compliance: Fabricate and install domestic water piping in accordance with the "International Plumbing Code ". D. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: Fabricate and install domestic water piping with Standard PDI- WH2O1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's material data and installation methods for each domestic water grooved and roll grooved piping system to be provided. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Backflow Preventers 1. Watts 2. Apollo Valves 3. Febco B. Water Hammer Arrestors 1. Ancon 2. Sioux Chief 3. Wade 4. Watts 5. Zurn MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12.137 221116-1 C. Grooved Piping Systems 1. Gruvlok by Anvil International 2. Victaulic D. Copper Pressure Seal Fittings 1. Viega Pro Press 2. NIBCO Press System 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with Uniform Plumbing Code and International Plumbing Code where applicable, base pressure rating on domestic water piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in domestic water piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Valves: Refer to Section 22 0523 - General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. D. Expansion Compensation: Refer to Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 22 0519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping. F. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. 2.03 PIPE. Material A. Cast iron water pipe, standard mechanical joint, asphalt coated, Class 150. ANSI A21.1, AWWA C106. B. Ductile iron pipe ANSI A21.5 ANSI /AWWA C151. C. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) DR18 ANSI /AWWA C900 or C905 With tracer wire D. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM B88. Type K Type L E. Brass pipe, Schedule 40, chromium plated. ASTM B43. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 Service Underground water service main 2" dia. and larger. Underground water service main, 4" dia. and larger. Underground water service main. Domestic water lines under building. Water service pipe 2" and smaller. Above ground domestic water lines. Exposed piping connections for plumbing fixtures. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116-2 2.04 FITTINGS: A. Cast iron water pipe: Class 250 ANSI A21.20, AWWA C110 -71, standard mechanical joint fittings. B. Copper water tube cast bronze or wrought copper: 1. Solder joint type. ANSI B16.18 and B16.22 -63. 2. Pressure Seal pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22. O -rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. Installation per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Mechanical grooved and roll - groove copper piping system and fittings: may be used as approved by code for copper piping. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Brass pipe: Cast bronze screwed, 125 pound, flat band water pattern, chromium plated, for chromium plated pipe. D. Mechanical grooved and roll - groove pipe coupling and fittings: Victaulic may be used as approved by Code for copper piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 JOINTS A. Copper water tube: 1. Use non - corrosive 95 -5 tin - antimony solder, cut pipe square, clean, ream and polish tube ends and inner surfaces of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. 2. Pressure Seal pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22. O -rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. 3. Mechanical grooved and roll grooved couplings: Grooved couplings may be used as approved by code for copper piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.06 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1 -1/2 ", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2 -1/2" and over use flanged unions. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. Long runs, at intervals of 80 feet. 2. In by -pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 3. In connections to equipment. 4. Where indicated on drawings. D. Dielectric unions shall be installed between any connection of copper pipe and ferrous piping or equipment. In grooved piping systems, provide Clearflo by Victaulic. 2.07 AIR VENTS A. Manual Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 17SR. B. Automatic Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 7 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12.137 221116-3 2.08 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Water hammer arrestors shall be piston type with seamless copper chamber, two O -ring piston and a 60 psi charge. Water hammer arrestors shall be sized, tested and certified in accordance with the Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI -WH201 and American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standard ASSE -1010. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which domestic water piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as per manufacturers' recommendations, Uniform and International Plumbing Codes, local code requirements and as required to meet system pressure and performance requirements. B. Valves 1. Refer to Section 22 0523 - General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. 3. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each domestic water equipment item and elsewhere as indicated. 5. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. D. Expansion Compensation Products: Refer to Section 22 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 22 0519 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping. F. Supports and Anchors: Refer to Section 22 0529 — Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. 3.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Install pipe for all domestic water and domestic water systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12.137 221116-4 D. Check all piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. F. Extend cold water and hot water piping to each fixture and other equipment requiring water supplies. G. Pitch pipes to accessible drainage point where unions, plugged tees or drainage valves shall be provided. H. Connect branch -feed piping to mains at horizontal centerline of mains; connect run -out piping to branches at horizontal centerline of branches. I. Pipes built into masonry or concrete construction shall be wrapped with tar paper or burlap to prevent bonding to the concrete. J. No pipe shall be located in an outside wall or other location where freezing is likely to occur. K. No pipe shall be in contact with, or attached to, a structural member in a manner that causes the transmission of noise to the structure. Block ends of runs to prevent movement due to water hammer. 3.04 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 22 1123 - Domestic Water Pumps, 22 3300 - Electric Domestic Water Heaters, 22 3400 - Fuel Fired Domestic Water Heaters, and 22 3500 - Domestic Water Heat Exchangers. B. General: Connect domestic water piping system to plumbing equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES A. Refer to Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures, 22 4500 - Emergency Plumbing Fixtures, and 22 4700 - Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers. B. General: Connect water piping system to plumbing fixtures as indicated, and comply with manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. C. Water supply to all fixtures and containers shall be so installed as to prevent back siphonage of polluted water into the water supply. All supplies shall be either above the flood rim of the fixture or separated from the drainage end by means of approved vacuum breakers. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Install backflow preventers where required per local code and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Backflow preventers to be installed accessible for testing, installing contractor shall provide testing by a certified backflow assembly tester at time of installation as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. Install air gap fitting and pipe to nearest floor drain. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Install water hammer arrestors as indicated on the drawings and as required per Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standard PDI- WH201. Water hammer arrestors to be installed in accessible locations where possible. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. General: Install plumbing specialties and valves as per manufacturer's installation instructions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12.137 221116-5 B. Provide unions, valves to units at each connection as required by inspection. 3.09 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. General: New water mains shall be subject to hydrostatic testing in accordance with AWWA C600 and other applicable AWWA Standards of latest revision and the following supplemental instructions. B. Supplemental Instructions: 1. After disinfection, all newly laid pipe or any valved section thereof shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 X the working pressure at the point of testing or 100 psig, whichever is greater. 2. The test procedures shall: a. Not exceed pipe or thrust restraint design pressures. b. Be of at least 4 -hour duration. C. Not exceed the rated pressure of the valves or hydrants. 3. Each valved section of pipe shall be filled with water slowly and the specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. 4. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and hydrants. 5. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings, valves or hydrants that are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or replaced with sound material and the test shall be repeated. 6. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section thereof, to maintain test pressure. 7. No pipe installation will be accepted where leakage is observed. 3.10 DISINFECTION A. General: Upon completion of a newly installed piping or when repairs to an existing pipe are made, the piping shall be disinfected according to instructions listed in AWWA C601, local codes, local utility requirements, and the following supplemental instructions. B. Repairs: Repairs to mains and plumbing shall be disinfected by swabbing with hypochlorite and flushing in accordance with AWWA C601. END OF SECTION 22 1116 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 12.137 221116-6 SECTION 22 1123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of plumbing pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: 1. In -line Circulators C. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work; not work of this section: 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Design, manufacturer and install pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps ". B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. C. ANSI /NSF 372 Certification: Domestic Water Pumps shall meet the requirements of ANSI /NSF 372 Certification, Drinking Water System Components, Lead Content. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start -up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Handle pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 12.137 221123-1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In -Line Circulators and Pumps 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Aurora 3. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 4. Grundfos 5. Taco, Inc. 2.02 IN -LINE CIRCULATORS A. General: Provide in -line circulator pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. In- line circulators shall be of either all bronze or stainless steel construction. B. Type: Horizontal mount, permanently lubricated, designed for 150 psi working pressure and 225 deg. F continuous water temperature. C. Construction: Cast bronze or stainless steel body with suction and discharge flanges. Steel shaft mounted on permanently lubricated, sealed ball- bearings. Water -tight seal fill mechanical carbon on silicon carbide face seals. D. Impeller: Composite construction, enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft. E. Motor: Non - overloading at any point on pump curve, drip - proof, permanently sealed ball bearings, resilient mounted construction, permanent split capacitor with thermal overload protection, single phase motors. F. Controls: Provide circulator with integral time clock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable with Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. General: Install plumbing pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access space around pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Support: Install in -line pumps, supported from piping system. See Section 22 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment for vibration isolation of piping system. D. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer for power wiring. 1. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 12.137 221123-2 E. Piping Connections: Refer to Division -22 Plumbing piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges and supports as indicated, including the following: 1. Strainer and shut -off valve in suction line. 2. Check valve, balancing /shut -off valve in discharge line. At contractor's option, an indicating type butterfly valve may be used in lieu of balancing cock and shut -off valve. 3. Compound gauge with turn cocks connected between pump suction and discharge. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative. B. Start -up: Lubricate pumps before start -up. Start -up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: Clean factory- finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch -up paint. END OF SECTION 22 1123 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 12.137 221123-3 SECTION 22 1316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of sanitary waste and vent piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install sanitary waste and vent piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Plumbing Code ". B. IPC Compliance: Fabricate and install sanitary waste and vent piping in accordance with the "International Plumbing Code ". C. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: Fabricate and install domestic water piping with Standard PDI- WH2O1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Floor Drains 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Jonespec 3. Josam 4. Wade 5. Watts 6. Zurn 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with International and Uniform Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in sanitary waste and vent piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 12.137 221316-1 2.03 PIPE: Material A. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, bell and spigot, asphalt coated, ASTM A74. B. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, no hub, asphalt coated CISPI 301 or ASTM A -888. C. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) Schedule 40, DWV, ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665. D. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM B88. Type K Type M E. Brass pipe, Schedule 40, chromium plated. ASTM B43. 2.04 FITTINGS: Service Below grade sanitary sewers under building. Above ground soil, waste, and vent. Below grade sanitary sewers, above ground soil, waste, and vent as permitted by local code. Above ground vent piping as permitted by local code. Underground condensate drain line. Above ground soil, waste, and vent up to and including 2 -1/2" diameter. Above ground condensate drain lines. As permitted by local code. Exposed piping connections for plumbing fixtures. A. Material and strength of fitting for cast iron sewer pipe, clay sewer pipe and concrete sewer pipe shall conform to pipe as per ASTM Standards. B. PVC pipe fittings (below grade sanitary sewer): Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of piping. C. PVC DWV pipe fittings: ASTM D2665 DWV Schedule 40 socket type. Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of tubing. Solvent cements as per ASTM 2564. D. Copper drainage tube: Cast bronze fittings, solder joint fittings. ANSI B16.23. E. Brass pipe: Cast bronze screwed, 125 pound, flat band water pattern, chromium plated, for chromium plated pipe. 2.05 JOINTS A. Vitrified clay and concrete pipe: Pipe manufacturer's standard preformed pre -set plastic or rubber joint, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Acceptable manufacturers: Amvit, Tylox or Kent. B. Cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe: Pack joints with oakum, fill with molten lead at one pouring, caulk solid flush with hub rim. If approved by Code, pre -set plastic or neoprene joint may be used, ASTM C 564. C. Cast iron no -hub pipe: Coupling assembly tightened by torque wrench, CISPI 310, ASTM C 564. D. PVC pipe fittings (below grade sanitary sewer): Listed compression type joints. E. PVC DWV pipe: Solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D2564. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 12.137 221316-2 F. Copper drainage tube: Use non - corrosive 50 -50 solder, cut pipe square, clean, ream and polish tube ends and inner surface of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. Use same method for copper refrigerant pipe, except use silver solder with 5% silver content, or equal strength brazing alloy. 2.06 VENTS A. Vents through the roof shall be cast iron long increasers beginning at 12" under the roof and extending at least above the highest possible water level on the roof but in no case less than 8 ". Size increases as follows: Vant gi7a Inrraaca Tn 1 -1/4" and 1 -1/2" 3" minimum 2" and 2 -1/2" 4" minimum 3" 5" 4" 6" B. Provide and install flashing for each vent through the roof. The flashing shall extend up around the pipe and be sealed to the pipe and shall extend over the roof deck at least one foot in each direction from the base. 2.07 FLOOR DRAINS A. Shall be of the style as called for in fixture schedule. B. Drains without integral traps shall have service class p- traps. 2.08 CLEANOUTS A. In floors of finished areas: cast iron caulking ferrule for soil pipe hub with brass countersunk plug and cast brass round flush access cover with polished top. B. In floors of unfinished areas: cast iron with tapered body for caulking into soil pipe hub, with brass countersunk plug. C. In walls of finished areas: cast brass raised head plug and round stainless steel cover plate with polished top and countersunk cover screw. Provide with caulking ferrule where installed in cast iron soil pipe. D. In walls of unfinished areas: cast brass raised head, iron pipe size male threads. Provide with caulking ferrule where installed in iron soil pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which sanitary waste and vent piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's recommendations, International and Uniform Plumbing Codes, local code requirements and as required to meet the intent of the documents. B. No soil or waste pipe shall be covered by earth or construction without first being proved free of leaks by a hydrostatic test of at least 10 feet head. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 12.137 221316-3 C. Install vents in practical alignment and supported with constant pitch back to the drainage system, concealed from finished spaces, unless shown or directed otherwise. D. Soil, waste and vent connections to fixtures shall be accurately located and concealed from finished spaces, unless indicated otherwise. E. Connections to horizontal branches shall be at 45 deg. angle using Wye or Tee -Wye. Connection to vertical stacks shall be with Sanitary Tee or Tee -Wye at 45 deg. 3.03 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Install pipe for all sanitary waste and vent systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Provide proper support to maintain uniform fall of 1/4" per foot for lines 3" and smaller and 1/8" per foot for lines 4" and larger. Protect all openings against the entrance of dirt. Where piping must cross footings, the piping shall cross under footings unless noted otherwise on the drawings. D. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. F. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. G. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. H. Equipment Connections 1. General: Connect sanitary waste and vent piping system to plumbing equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. Field Quality Control 1. Piping Tests: Test sanitary waste and vent piping in accordance with testing requirements of Division -22 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CLEANOUTS A. Provide a cleanout at the base of each stack where the sewer leaves the building and at other points where required by code and good practice. Cleanout spacing shall not exceed 50' -0" on long runs. Cleanouts shall be the same size as pipe up to and including 4" and 4" for 4" or larger pipes. Cleanouts for concealed pipes shall be set flush with floor and wall surfaces. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS A. Obtain exact finish floor levels from the General Contractor and set floor drain top rims accurately to proper level. Allow for proper slope towards drains. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 12.137 221316-4 3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES A. Refer to Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures, 22 4500 - Emergency Plumbing Fixtures, and 22 4700 - Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers. END OF SECTION 22 1316 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 12.137 221316-5 SECTION 22 1319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. B. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI Z358.1 - 1998 "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment," as applicable to the provision and installation of emergency fixtures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough -in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. B. Submit to General Contractor cut -out template for all sinks which are to be installed in countertops. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Grease Interceptors 1. Josam 2. Mifab 3. Wade 4. Watts PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install grease interceptor and make waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Grease interceptor shall be covered after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of construction. At the conclusion of work, the covering shall be removed and the lid properly cleaned at construction completion. END OF SECTION 22 1319 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 12.137 221319-1 SECTION 22 1413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of storm drainage piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Insulation of storm drainage piping is specified in other Division -22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install storm drainage piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Plumbing Code ". B. IPC Compliance: Fabricate and install storm drainage piping in accordance with the "International Plumbing Code ". C. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: Fabricate and install domestic water piping with Standard PDI- WH2O1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Site Drains and Roof Drains 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Jonespec 3. Josam 4. Wade 5. Zurn 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with International and Uniform Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in storm drainage piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 12.137 221413-1 2.03 PIPE: KAntarin A. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, bell and spigot, asphalt coated, ASTM A74. B. Cast iron soil pipe, service class, no hub, asphalt coated CISPI 301 or ASTM A -888. 2.04 FITTINGS: ..gamira Below grade storm sewers, above ground storm. Below grade storm sewers, above ground storm as permitted by local code. A. Material and strength of fitting for cast iron sewer pipe, clay sewer pipe and concrete sewer pipe shall conform to pipe as per ASTM Standards. B. PVC pipe fittings (below grade sanitary sewer): Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of piping. C. PVC DWV pipe fittings: ASTM D2665 DWV Schedule 40 socket type. Provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of tubing. Solvent cements as per ASTM 2564. 2.05 JOINTS A. Vitrified clay and concrete pipe: Pipe manufacturer's standard preformed pre -set plastic or rubber joint, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Acceptable manufacturers: Amvit, Tylox or Kent. B. Cast iron bell and spigot soil pipe: Pack joints with oakum, fill with molten lead at one pouring, caulk solid flush with hub rim. If approved by Code, pre -set plastic or neoprene joint may be used, ASTM C 564. C. Cast iron no -hub pipe: Coupling assembly tightened by torque wrench, CISPI 310, ASTM C 564. D. PVC pipe fittings (below grade sanitary sewer): Listed compression type joints. E. PVC DWV pipe: Solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D2564. 2.06 DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. General: Provide factory- fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with the installation requirements and governing regulations. B. Cleanout Plugs: Cast bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. 1. Nickel- Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated: a. Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non -slip scored or abrasive finish. 2. Cast Iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of pattern indicated: a. Pattern: Exposed flush type, standard non -slip scored or abrasive finish. C. Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron body adaptable to pipe with cast bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws. D. Flashing Flanges: Cast iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 12.137 221413-2 2.07 ROOF DRAINS A. General: Provide roof drains of size as indicated on drawings; and type, including features, as specified on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which storm drainage piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's recommendations, International and Uniform Plumbing Codes, and as required to meet the intent of the documents. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. D. Lay building storm drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements and other special installation requirements. Clear interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous materials as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Where piping must cross footings, the piping shall cross under footings unless noted otherwise on the drawings. E. Install storm water piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot (2 %) for piping 3" and smaller and 1/8" per foot (1 %) for piping 4" and larger. 3.03 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING A. Install pipe for all storm drainage systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. D. Check all piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Test storm drainage piping in accordance with testing requirements of Division -22 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 12.137 221413-3 3.05 INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE PIPING PRODUCTS A. Cleanouts: Install in conductor piping and building storm drain piping as indicated, as required by Uniform Plumbing Code; at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; at base of each conductor; and where the line leaves the building. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish. B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each cleanout passing through waterproof membrane. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS A. General: Install roof drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated. B. Coordinate flashing work required with the General Contractor and with work of roofing, waterproofing and adjoining substrate work. C. Install roof drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. E. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. END OF SECTION 22 1413 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 12.137 221413-4 SECTION 22 1516 - FACILITY NATURAL GAS AND COMPRESSED AIR PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of natural gas piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Installation of valves for natural gas piping system is specified in other Division -22 sections and is included as work of this section. B. Trenching and Backfill: Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with gas service piping is specified in applicable Division -22 sections, and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code ". B. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with local gas utility company requirements. C. UPC Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with IAPMO "Uniform Plumbing Code ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pressure Regulator: 1. Cashco 2. Fisher B. Gas Cocks 1. DeZurik Corp. 2. Apollo 3. NIBCO, Inc. 4. Powell (The Wm.) Co. 5. A.Y. McDonald C. Natural Gas and Compressed Air Outlets: 1. Fisher Hamilton/Water Saver MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY NATURAL GAS AND 12.137 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 221516 -1 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with NFPA 54 where applicable; base pressure rating on natural gas piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in natural gas piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. C. Valves: Refer to Section 22 05 23 — General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping. D. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. 2.03 PIPE: Material A. Black steel pipe Schedule 40, ASTM A120 B. High Density Polyethylene (PE), PE3408 ASTM D2837, ASTM D3035 2.04 FITTINGS: A. Steel Pipe: Service Interior natural gas and compressed air piping. Exterior below grade gas piping. 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Malleable iron fittings, 125 pound standard flat band water pattern. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Standard radius weld fittings and weld neck or slip - on flanges, same material and strength as pipe. B. Polyethylene pipe fittings (gas service): Heat fusion fittings, provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by manufacturer of piping. 2.05 JOINTS A. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Make joints using Teflon tape applied to male threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full size of bore. For fuel piping and lubricating oil piping, joint sealing material shall be resistant to petroleum products. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI - B31.3 "Code for Power Piping." B. Polyethylene pipe fittings (gas service): Heat fusion joints made in accordance with practices for the pipe service as recommended by manufacturer of piping. 2.06 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1 -1/2 ", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY NATURAL GAS AND 12.137 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 221516 -2 B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2 -1/2" and over use flanged unions. For steel pipe use black or galvanized malleable iron unions, to conform to pipe with ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. In by -pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 2. In connections to equipment. 3. Where indicated on drawings. 2.07 VALVES A. 2" and smaller: Two -piece full -port MSS SP -110, WOG (suitable for natural gas service), threaded ends. B. 2 1/2" to 6 ": Bronze plug valve MSS SP -78, WOG (suitable for natural gas service) with flanged ends. C. Meter Valve: Provide with tamper -proof operator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which natural gas piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as per manufacturer's recommendations, Uniform Plumbing Code, local code requirements, Utility Company requirements and as required to meet the intent of the document. B. Natural Gas Piping 1. Install pipe for all natural gas systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. 2. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other natural gas items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. 3. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. 4. Check all piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing pipes over electrical equipment. 5. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. 6. Piping up to 2" diameter shall be screwed, piping 2 -1/2" diameter and over shall be welded. Concealed gas piping shall be welded or otherwise installed as required per NFPA 54 and local code. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY NATURAL GAS AND 12.137 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 221516 -3 7. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and retain until continuing piping, or equipment connections are completed. 8. Install "Tee" fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped, at bottom of pipe risers. 9. Install piping with 1/64" per foot (1/8 %) downward slope in direction of flow. 10. Exposed outside pipe: Prime coat with appropriate lead oxide paint and apply finish enamel coat to match color of adjacent building material. C. Valves 1. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. 2. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more natural gas terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 3. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each natural gas equipment item, and on inlet of each natural gas terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Drain Valves: Install on each natural gas equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain natural gas piping system. D. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 22 0500 - Common Work Results for Plumbing. E. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 22 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping. F. Install specialties and accessories as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GAS SERVICE A. General: Arrange with utility company to provide gas service to indicated location with shutoff at terminus. Consult with utility as to extent of its work, costs, fees, and permits involved. Pay such costs and fees; obtain permits. B. Extend service pipe from utility's terminus to inside building wall, under utility's direction. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect gas piping to each gas -fired equipment item, with drip leg and shutoff gas cock. Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, and local utility company requirements. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect natural gas systems in accordance with requirements of Division -22 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, Section 22 0010 — Plumbing General Provisions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY NATURAL GAS AND 12.137 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 221516 -4 3.07 SPARE PARTS A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 2 valve wrenches for each type of gas valve installed, requiring same. END OF SECTION 22 1516 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FACILITY NATURAL GAS AND 12.137 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING 221516 -5 SECTION 22 3300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of plumbing equipment work is indicated on drawings and provisions of this section, including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section. B. Types of plumbing equipment required for project include the following: 1. Water Heaters 2. Expansion Tanks 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI /NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of plumbing equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's plumbing equipment specifications, installation and start -up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly marked. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Electric Water Heaters 1. A.O. Smith, Consumer Products Div. 2. Rheem -Ruud 3. State Industries B. Commercial Expansion Tanks 1. Bell & Gossett 2. Amtrol 3. Spiro Therm 4. Wessels 2.02 WATER HEATERS A. Electric Water Heaters 1. General: Provide electric water heaters of size and capacity as indicated on schedule. Comply with ANSI /ASHRAE /IES 90A for energy efficiency. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 12.137 223300-1 2. Heater: Working pressure of 150 psi; magnesium anode rod; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water. 3. Heating Elements: Heavy -duty, medium watt density, with incoloy sheath, thermostat stepped through magnetic contactors. 4. Safety Controls: Double pole, manual reset, high limit; probe -type electric low water cutoff; both factory wired. 5. Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate tank with vermin -proof glass fiber insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with bonderized undercoat and baked enamel finish. 6. Warranty: Furnish 3 year limited warranty for tank leakage. 7. Accessories: Provide brass drain valve; 3/4" temperature and pressure relief valve; ASME tank construction for 150 psi working pressure; and 4" x 6" handhole cleanout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WATER HEATERS A. Electric Water Heaters 1. General: Install electric water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. 2. Support: Set units on concrete pads, orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access. Level and plumb unit. 3. Electrical Supply: Furnish wiring diagram to Electrical Installer. Refer to Division 26 for wiring of units; not work of this section. 4. Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect recirculating water line to unit with shutoff valve, check valve and union. 5. Start -up: Start -up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's start -up instructions. Check and calibrate controls. 6. Pressure and Temperature Relief: Route pipe to nearest indirect sanitary drain. Pipe size to match relief connection size. END OF SECTION 22 3300 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 12.137 223300-2 SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. B. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough -in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. B. Submit to General Contractor cut -out template for all sinks which are to be installed in countertops. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vitreous China and Cast Iron Enameled Fixtures 1. American Standard 2. Crane 3. Eljer 4. Kohler 5. Zurn 6. Sloan B. Stainless Steel Sinks 1. Elkay 2. Just 3. Kohler C. Trim 1. American Standard 2. Chicago Faucet 3. Delta 4. Eljer 5. Elkay 6. Kohler 7. T & S Brass Works D. Flush Valves 1. Delany - Flushboy Series 2. Sloan - Royal Series 3. Zurn - Z- 6000XL MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES 12.137 224000-1 E. Carriers 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Jonespec 3. Josam 4. Wade 5. Watts 6. Zurn F. Fiberglass Tub and Shower Modules 1. Aqua Glass 2. Aquarius 3. Cedar Glass 4. Universal - Rundle 5. Crane G. Closet Seats 1. Beneke 2. Church 3. Olsonite 4. Sperzel 5. Comfort Seats H. Janitor Sinks 1. Fiat 2. Mustee I. Mixing Valves 1. Leonard 2. Powers 3. Symmons 4. Apollo 5. Lawler J. Garbage Disposals 1. In- Sink - Erator K. Wall Hydrants 1. Woodford 2.02 VITREOUS AND CAST IRON FIXTURES A. Vitreous ware shall be non - absorbant, even color, unwarped, two -fired vitreous china, grade "A" as rated by the Bureau of Standards. B. Enameled cast iron fixtures shall have the enamel fused with the iron to provide a hard acid - resisting enameled finish. C. Vitreous and enamel fixtures shall be white, except where other colors are called for in the schedule. D. Bath tubs shall have slip- resistant surface. E. Fiberglass, gel -coat fixtures shall incorporate Microban antimicrobial protection. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES 12.137 224000-2 2.03 STAINLESS STEEL SINKS A. Stainless steel sinks shall be fabricated from 18 gauge nickel- bearing type 302 stainless steel, with satin finish, sound deadening treatment and 3/16" drop down ledge. Provide with channel and pull down clips to ensure tight seal between sink and countertop. 2.04 TRIM A. Trim to include supply pipes, stop valves, faucets, tail pieces, strainers, waste and traps. Floor and wall plates shall be brass. Exposed trim shall be chrome plated. B. Stop valves shall be compression type with loose key control. C. P -trap shall be adjustable 18 gauge tubular brass. Where offset P -traps are required for handicapped accessible lavatories, offset and P -trap shall be insulated with Handi Lav -Guard by Truebro, or equal. When supply risers are exposed, they shall be insulated with Handi Lav -Guard by Truebro, or equal. D. Trim shall be considered "exposed" even when concealed behind base cabinets having doors E. Mixing valve, transformer, or piping under the counter shall be covered with Lav - Shield by Truebro or equal in areas where a cabinet does not cover them. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install fixtures and make water supply, waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Set fixtures in center of stalls, between partitions where required. Dimensions for spacing shall be verified with General Contractor. Fixtures in ADA accessible stalls shall be installed with the flush valve handle to the open side of the stall, where applicable. 3.03 Setting shall be absolutely tight and rigid on proper ground. Use Miracle Adhesive Corporation Tub -Caulk or approved equal pointing material under all setting surfaces. 3.04 Wall hung fixtures shall be securely hung. All wall hung fixtures shall have carriers unless other mounting means are approved by Design Professional. Mounting heights shall be as indicated on Architectural elevations, and in accordance with the requirements of the ADA. 3.05 Chair carriers shall be securely braced to construction and shall be concealed with feet concealed in floor. Where feet cannot be concealed in floor, provide stub feet. Carriers for urinals shall have thrust bolts at bottom. Carriers for lavatories and electric water coolers shall have mounting plate type hanger or concealed arms as required by the fixture schedule. Carriers shall be coordinated with plumbing fixtures. 3.06 Fixtures shall be covered after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of construction. At the conclusion of work, the covering shall be removed and the fixtures properly cleaned. 3.07 Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. 3.08 Joints of lavatories with counter and /or wall, sinks with wall, urinals with wall and water closets with wall and /or floor shall be caulked with transparent silicone caulk by Contractor. END OF SECTION 22 4000 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PLUMBING FIXTURES 12.137 224000-3 SECTION 22 4500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. B. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI Z358.1 - 1998 "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment," as applicable to the provision and installation of emergency fixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough -in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Emergency Fixtures 1. Bradley 2. Guardian 3. Haws PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install fixtures and make water supply, waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 Fixtures shall be covered after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of construction. At the conclusion of work, the covering shall be removed and the fixtures properly cleaned. 3.03 Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 22 4500 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 12.137 224500-1 SECTION 22 4700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 22 0010 - Plumbing General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation as required by the drawings and this section. B. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI /NSF 372 Certification: Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers shall meet the requirements of ANSI /NSF 372 Certification, Drinking Water System Components, Lead Content. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixture and rough -in dimensions, and construction material for each type of fixture, trim and accessory scheduled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Coolers 1. Elkay 2. Halsey Taylor 3. Haws 4. Oasis 5. Sunroc/Western 6. Acorn PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install fixtures and make water supply, waste and vent connections as indicated on the drawings 3.02 Setting shall be absolutely tight and rigid on proper ground. Use Miracle Adhesive Corporation Tub -Caulk or approved equal pointing material under all setting surfaces. 3.03 Fixtures shall be securely hung. All wall hung fixtures shall have carriers unless other mounting means are approved by Design Professional. 3.04 Fixtures shall be covered after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of construction. At the conclusion of work, the covering shall be removed and the fixtures properly cleaned. 3.05 Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Damaged fixtures shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 22 4700 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 12.137 224700-1 SECTION 23 0010 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the HVAC contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Piping Insulation 2. Ductwork for Air Distribution 3. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers and Dampers 4. Exhaust Fans and Ducts 5. Thermostats and Control Wiring 6. Insulation of Ducts and Plenums 7. Furnaces and Condensing Units and Refrigerant Piping 8. Air Handling Units 9. Hot Water Boiler 10. Water Chillers 11. Terminal Heating and Cooling Units 12. Hydronic Piping 13. Hydronic Pumps 14. Energy Recovery Units B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning HVAC systems. C. Drawings for HVAC work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. International Mechanical Code 2. Uniform Plumbing Code 3. International Building Code 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 5. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 6. Local Utility Company Requirements 7. Local Codes, all trades MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-1 8. Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 11. Iowa Administrative Codes 12. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professional of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. C. Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REG ULA TORY AGENCIES A. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the HVAC work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. 1.05 HVAC DRAWINGS A. The HVAC drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B. Drawings are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of ducts, piping and equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough -ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-2 B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by Design Professional and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in finished areas of the building, Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and pipe, sleeve, and /or duct shall be sealed with LIL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. Where piping, sleeves and ducts pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. C. Existing Structure: 1. Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-3 1.10 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for hydronic piping, gas piping, etc., and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care shall be taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. B. Backfill about the structure shall be placed, when practical, as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done only when directed. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit. Backfill shall be in accordance with Division 31 Specifications. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Design Professional for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-4 CERTIFICATE OTHER SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O & M OF DEMON- (SEE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL STRATION NOTES 230516 Expansion Fittings and X Loops for HVAC Piping 230519 Meters and Gauges for X HVAC Piping 230523 General Duty Valves for X HVAC Piping 230548 Vibration Controls for HVAC X Piping and Equipment 230553 1 HVAC Identification X MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-4 SPEC SECTION EQUIPMENT DETAIL DWGS PROD DATA SAMPLES INSTALL METHODS O & M MANUAL CERTIFICATE OF DEMON- STRATION OTHER (SEE NOTES) 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 1 230700 HVAC Insulation X 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC X X X X 232113 1Hydronic Piping: Expansion Tanks X X Air Separator X X Glycol Make -Up System X X Sys Fill Press Valve X X Air Vents X X Press &Temp Test Station X Auto Flow Ctrl Valve X Chem. Treat. Feeder X X Cool Tower Chem Treat X X Triple Duty Valve X X 232123 Hydronic Pumps X X X 23 3113 Metal Ducts X X 1 233300 Air Duct Accessories X X 233600 Air Terminal Units X X 233713 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles X 235100 Breeching, Chimneys & Stacks X 235216 Condensing Boilers X X X 236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units X X 236500 Cooling Towers X X X 237200 Air -to -Air Energy Recovery Equipment X X X 237313 Modular Indoor Central Station Air - Handling Units X X X 238126 Split System Air Conditioners X X 23 8146 Water Source Unitary Heat Pumps X X 238239 Unit Heaters X X NOTES: 1. Submit test reports as described in specification section. 2. Submit borehole log and record drawings. F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-5 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 8. Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.14 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Tests Required: Piping shall be tested and proved tight under the following static pressures. Pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. System Pressure Hydronic Piping 150 psi (water) Refrigeration Piping: Precharged Lines Charge and operate unit. Check for leaks with electronic leak detector. B. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. Contractor shall submit a report to Design Professional citing dates, times, pressures, and results of all tests performed. 1.15 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the HVAC installation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-6 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O &M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. HVAC Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands -on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: HVAC and Temperature Controls Contractors shall jointly conduct system operating training. These sessions shall include hands -on demonstrations of system wide start -up, operation in all possible modes, shut -down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hours Presented By Others Present Remarks (Note 1) 230010 HVAC System 8 Mech. Contractor Note 2 (Excluding Equipment) T.C. Contractor 232123 lHydronic Pumps 8 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 236500 Cooling Towers 4 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 23 34XX Fans 2 Contractor 237200 Air -to -Air Energy 16 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor Recovery Unit 237313 Air Handling Units 16 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 238146 Water Source Unitary 16 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor Heat Pump 238413 Humidifiers 4 Manufacturer's Representative Contractor 230900 Temperature Control 40 Manufacturer's Representative Note 3 System 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owner's discretion during the first year of occupancy. 2. System training shall include, but not be limited to, valve locations, system routing, and air /water flow patterns, system start -up /shut - down /emergency procedures. 3. Training shall occur in several sessions over the course of the first year of operation. A minimum of four separate dates are required for temperature controls, two dates for chillers. E. Contractor shall submit to Design Professional a certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-7 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that Contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 signature date signature date HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 230010-8 1. 16 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of Contractor and /or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.18 GUARANTEE A. The entire HVAC system including all sub - systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.19 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non - hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. B. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20 CLEANING A. Prior to assembly of pipe and piping components, all loose dirt, scale, oil, and other foreign matter on internal and exterior surfaces shall be removed by means consistent with good piping practices. During fabrication and assembly, slug and weld splatter shall be removed from both internal and external pipe joints by preening, chipping, and wire brushing. B. At the conclusion of the construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally. Prior to flushing erected piping surfaces, Contractor shall disconnect all instrumentation and equipment and open wide all valves. C. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-9 D. Heating and air conditioning equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and clean filters installed. 1.21 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Electrical work and equipment provided by HVAC Contractor shall include the following: 1. Starters and disconnects for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 2. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3. Electrical heating coils and similar elements in HVAC equipment. 4. All control wiring in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring for HVAC equipment, including services for motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. Motor and equipment locations are shown on the electrical drawings. C. Electrical Contractor shall make final connections for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor. D. Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVAC contractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the equipment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. E. Contractor shall consult with Electrical Contractor prior to conduit rough -in and shall verify with him the exact locations for rough -ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall provide Electrical Contractor a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by him. These schedules will be used for sizing services, disconnects, fuses, starters and overload protection. F. Refer to Division 23 Controls section for control system wiring. Control wiring shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. G. All conduit installed for control wiring shall be blue. Labeled conduit will not be accepted. H. Control wiring, where not exposed, may be installed without conduit. Wiring in ducts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. All exposed control wiring and wiring behind inaccessible construction (such as in walls and above drywall ceilings) shall be routed in blue conduit. All wall penetrations shall be sleeved with blue conduit. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. 1.22 ACCESS DOORS A. When HVAC Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non - accessible architectural construction, HVAC Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC -211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam - and - studs. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-10 1.23 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. B. Under no circumstances shall the building HVAC equipment be used for temporary heat, cooling or ventilation during construction prior to Owner acceptance of the building at substantial completion. 1.25 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment. Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Pads to be a minimum of 4" in height unless noted otherwise. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer's recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use 3000 -psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12" O.C. END OF SECTION 23 0010 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 230010-11 SECTION 23 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Demolition 2. Sleeves 3. Escutcheons 4. Fire Stopping 5. Guards PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DEMOLITION MATERIALS A. All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site by him, unless otherwise specified. 2.02 SLEEVES A. Sleeves passing through non -load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1. For pipes 2 -1/2" and smaller - 24 gauge 2. For pipes 3" to 6" - 22 gauge 3. For pipes over 6" - 20 gauge B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C. Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F. Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. G. For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts (Link -Seal or equal). Waterproofing of pipe penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 12.137 230500-1 2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and pipe, sleeve, and /or duct shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. General: Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 2. Contractor shall remove existing equipment and piping not necessary for additions or existing portions of building as indicated on drawings and /or specified herein. To include all abandoned equipment and piping back to point of origin. Contractor shall be responsible for the cutting and capping of all existing services before any work is commenced by the General Contractor. B. Work by Others: Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general, the following will be performed by others: General Contractor will remove any floors, walls and ceilings, neatly patch, match, complete and finish all affected surfaces. 2. Electrical Contractor will disconnect all electrical services and remove abandoned conduit back to point of origin. C. Existing Conditions: If any piping serving existing fixtures or equipment which are to remain are disturbed by operations under this Contract, Contractor shall provide pipe and insulation required to reestablish continuity of such piping systems. 2. Contractor shall arrange for General Contractor to repair, patch and paint all construction, with material necessary to match surrounding material, which is necessary due to removal of equipment and piping. Contractor shall furnish all required labor and material where required to extend new work to connect to similar work where new addition adjoins existing building and for extension of existing system. Connection shall be made in a suitable manner. D. Owner's Right of Salvage: The Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 12.137 230500-2 3.02 SLEEVES A. Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. 3.04 GUARDS A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 48 ". Guard to be galvanized sheet not less than 26 gauge. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 12.137 230500-3 SECTION 23 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Section includes general requirements for single -phase and polyphase, general - purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for all motors provided. B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with NEMA MG1 unless noted otherwise. B. Motor type: Minimum 1.15 service factor; rated at 40 deg. C. ambient temperature with 90 deg. C. temperature rise (Class B insulation). C. Multiple speed motors: Multiple windings. D. Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMA MG1. E. Peak instantaneous current: Maximum 130% of full -load. F. All motors shall be provided as required for motor orientation within equipment. G. Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulations. H. Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torques. I. Motor Enclosures: 1. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 2. Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. Motors located outdoors to be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy - sealed type. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 12.137 FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-1 3. Thoroughly clean and paint the enclosures at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. J. Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. 2.02 SINGLE PHASE POWER A. Capacitor start motors starting torque shall be three times full load torque and starting current shall be less than five times full load current. B. Pull -up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. D. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor - start/capacitor -run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. E. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. F. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.03 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1 -1/2 times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D. Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T- Frames of steel, aluminum or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter. I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti - friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L -10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V -belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 23 0513 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 12.137 FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513-2 SECTION 23 0516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install expansion joints and pump connections as required by the drawings and this section. B. Any expansion indicated per plans has been based on steel pipe. If Contractor should choose to use an alternate approved material, he shall be responsible for any resulting changes in expansion. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts and schedules for all mechanical joints and pump connectors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Expansion Compensation Products 1. Flexonics 2. Metraflex 3. Victaulic 4. Minnesota Flexible 5. Keflex 6. Twin City Hose 7. Tri -State Industries 2.02 HYDRONIC MAINS A. Mechanical Expansion Compensator for 2" diameter and smaller steel pipe: Externally pressurized, all metal stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shroud and end fittings, internal guides and internal anti - torque device. 150 psi minimum design pressure. Metraflex Model HP. B. Mechanical Expansion Compensator for 2" diameter and smaller copper pipe: Externally pressurized, all bronze with either stainless steel or bronze bellows, brass or copper shroud and end fittings, internal guides and internal anti - torque device. 150 psi minimum design pressure. Metraflex Model HPMF. C. Mechanical Expansion joint for 2 -1/2" diameter and larger: Self equalizing, ring controlled bellows, carbon steel shroud and end fittings, internal guides and internal anti - torque device. 300 psi design temperature. Metraflex Model MC. D. Mechanical Expansion Joints for Grooved Pipe: Typical installation shall be approved by submittal. E. Pipe Guides: Pre - insulated alignment guides, Keflex series CP. 2.03 PUMP CONNECTORS A. Pump Connectors to be braided type, corrugated hose with stainless steel, Metraflex Metra -Mini Series. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS 12.137 FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-1 B. In grooved piping systems, provide flexible couplings for first three (3) joints on each side of pump. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Provide for taking up expansion in hot water and steam mains and risers by means of installing loops, bends and mechanical expansion joints. 3.02 Use swing or swivel joints for connections from mains to risers and from risers to coils and equipment connections. Cold spring pipe during installation at points of bends or offsets. 3.03 Install anchoring as required for controlling expansion. Structural members for anchoring shall be firmly embedded or fastened into building members and shall withstand force of pipe expansion without straining building structure. 3.04 Where expansion joints and /or loops are installed, piping shall be properly guided and anchored as recommended by expansion joint manufacturer. For chilled water systems or two -pipe heating /cooling systems, all pipe alignment guides to be preinsulated by factory. Keflex Series CP. 3.05 Install pump connectors in suction and discharge lines for each base mounted pump. Pump connectors to be installed in straight line without offset. END OF SECTION 23 0516 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS 12.137 FOR HVAC PIPING 230516-2 SECTION 23 0519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install meters and gauges as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts showing complete descriptive data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Thermometers 1. Weiss 9VU335 (Base Specification) 2. Taylor 3. Weksler 4. U.S. Gauge 5. Trerice B. Gauges (For Water or Steam) 1. Weiss Series 4CTS (Base Specification) 2. Dwyer 3. Taylor 4. Weksler 5. U.S. Gauge 6. Trerice 2.02 THERMOMETERS A. 9" "Adjust- Angle" industrial thermometer complete with double thick glass front, red reading, separable socket and arranged so the unit can be set at any required angle front to back or left to right during or after installation. Range 30 -180 deg. F for hot water, 0 -120 deg. F for chilled water, and 0 -120 deg. F for heat pump water. 2.03 GAUGES A. Weiss Series 4" liquid filled compound pressure- vacuum gauge with snubber, stainless steel case, white dial, 1/4" male NPT. Range 30" vacuum to 100 lb. pressure for water, 30" vacuum to 30 lb. pressure for low pressure steam, 30" vacuum to 1 -1/2 times the system pressure for medium and high pressure steam. Note: For outside applications use silicon filled gauge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install thermometers in discharge and return piping at boilers, heat exchangers, and chillers, at each supply and return connection for large heating and cooling coils and at other points as indicated on the drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 230519-1 3.02 Install gauge for each pump, mounted on 1/4" galvanized steel pipe manifold connected to the suction and discharge of the pump, with the needle valves in the manifold on each side of the gauge, so that the gauge may be opened to either the suction or discharge pressure. 3.03 Install gauges on boiler and heat exchanger headers, at pressure reducing valves and at other points as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 23 0519 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 230519-2 SECTION 23 0523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install valves as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include physical dimensions, construction materials, and pressure and temperature ratings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Gate Valves, Globe Valves, and Check Valves 1. Nibco 2. Powell 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts 5. Apollo Valves B. Lugged Body Butterfly Valves 1. Nibco 2. ABZ 3. Milwaukee 4. Watts 5. Apollo Valves C. Grooved Body Butterfly and Swing Check Valves 1. Victaulic 2. Gruvlok by Anvil International 3. Milwaukee 4. Nibco D. Ball Valves 1. Watts B -6000 Series 2. Milwaukee BA- 100 /BA -150 3. Nibco T -600 Series 4. Apollo 77C Series E. Polypropylene and /or PVDF Ball Valves 1. R &G Sloan - PPRO -Seal 2. ASAHF 3. Enfield 4. ASAHI /American MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 230523-1 F. All valves of same type shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified in this section or on the drawings. G. Model numbers in valve schedule based on Nibco, unless noted otherwise. 2.02 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Gate valves shall have solid tapered wedge, except where otherwise specified. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. B. Globe valves shall have renewable composition discs as recommended by manufacturer for intended service, or renewable bevel seats and metal discs. Valves on steam service 4" and larger shall have 1/2" (minimum) bypass valve and piping. C. Check Valves: Horizontal swing type with bronze seat and composition of bronze disc as approved; body of same material, pressure rating, screwed or flanged and finish as adjoining globe or gate valve. D. Ball Valves 4" and smaller: Bronze two -piece standard port with chrome plated ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, vinyl insulated lever handle. 1. Full port for valves 2 -1/2" and smaller. 2. Standard port for valves 3" and larger. E. Butterfly Valves 3" and larger: Cast iron body with aluminum bronze disc, EPDM or BUNA N seat, 416 stainless steel stem body with extended neck. 2.03 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Furnish valves as per the following schedule: Camira Heat pump water, cooling /heating water, pressures up to 200 psi, temperatures from 40 deg. F to 250 deg. F. Valve type Ball - 2 -1/2" and smaller, Apollo 77C Ball - 3" and 4 ", Apollo 70 -100 Butterfly - 2 -1/2" and larger, N200 235/245 Check - 2" and smaller, 413 2 -1/2" and larger, 918 B. Valves installed on chilled water systems and two -pipe cooling /heating water systems to be provided with valve handle extensions and /or extended neck design to facilitate installation of insulation. C. Grooved Piping System: At Contractor's option, if mechanical grooved piping system is utilized, the butterfly valves for HVAC applications may be Victaulic Series VIC -300 and swing check valves for HVAC applications may be Victaulic Series 712 swing check valves, except in pump discharge. Check valves in pump discharge shall be as specified previously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install valves as indicated on the drawings and as called for in other sections. 3.02 Install valves in equipment rooms to provide easy access to valve. Each valve installed 8' -0" above the floor shall be provided with chain operator. Bottom of chain operator shall be 7' -0" above floor. 3.03 Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for vertical operation. END OF SECTION 23 0523 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 230523-2 SECTION 23 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and seals as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of supports, anchors and seals specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports. 2. Vertical- Piping Clamps. 3. Hanger -Rod Attachments. 4. Building Attachments. 5. Saddles and Shields. 6. Miscellaneous Materials. 7. Anchors. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing and mechanical codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports, anchors and seals. B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. C. ANSI Compliance: All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for Pressure Piping B31.1.0 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Grinnell: 1. Anvil International 2. B -Line 3. Elcen 4. Unistrut Building Systems 5. Grinnell B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. C. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected equipment. D. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps. E. Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-1 F. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. G. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. H. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. J. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. K. Where concrete inserts are used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORT A. Hanger rods for steel and copper pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal Pipe Minimum Rod Size, in. Maximum Span, ft. Diameter, in. up to 1 10 3/8 1-1/2 10 3/8 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 11 1/2 3 12 1/2 3-1/2 13 1/2 4 14 5/8 5 16 5/8 6 17 3/4 8 19 7/8 10 22 7/8 12 23 7/8 For 1/2 in. copper tube, 8 ft. spacing of hangers is recommended. B. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. C. When two or more pipes are to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles or channels and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required spacing to support the particular group of pipes. D. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls; use welded steel brackets, Fig 194 for loads up to 750 Ibs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1,500 Ibs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. E. Exterior refrigerant piping shall be supported with steel angle or steel channel strut supports as detailed on the drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-2 F. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use malleable iron one -hole clamp, Fig. 126 for pipes up to 3 ". For pipes larger than 3 ", use steel channel strut pipe rack. G. Where pipes are to be supported from floor, use unistrut pipe stand with post base. Unformed concrete will not be permitted. 3.02 INSTALLATION - VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A. Support vertical steel and copper pipe at every other floor line. B. In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on concrete or block pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. C. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 3.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. For horizontal steel pipe, use adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. 260, for pipes up to 30 ". B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper plated adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. CT -65. C. When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of 1/2" axially as indicated on the drawing, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. 3.04 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A. Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140 and 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146, may be used wherever possible. Contractor may at his option cut and thread rod on the job site. B. Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. C. Hangers shall be supported from appropriate structural members. In no case shall hangers be supported from ductwork, cable trays, piping, or other equipment. Existing hangers and supports shall not be used as supports for new hangers unless specifically designed as such, or additional loadings have been confirmed to be acceptable for existing supports. 3.05 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A. For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete; use black carbon steel concrete inserts, Fig. 285 for loads up to 400 lbs., Fig. 281 for loads up to 1200 lbs. or suitable drilled inserts equal to Ramset/Red Head - Trubolt wedge anchor, Ramset/Red Head Epcon system or Hilti Kwik Bolt II anchor. B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C- clamps, Fig. 87, with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs.; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C- clamps, Fig. CT -88, with hardened cup point set screw, for loads up to 400 lbs. C. For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange pipe threaded, Fig. 128 for loads up to 480 lbs., Fig. 153 for loads up to 1270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange, Fig. CT -128R for loads up to 180 lbs. D. Under no circumstances shall hangers be attached to metal roof deck. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-3 3.06 PIPE AND DUCT COVERING PROTECTION A. Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping and ductwork shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields or saddles for piping, Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 165A, 166A, or 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device. 3.07 ROOF MOUNTED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. Roof mounted equipment, not specified to be mounted on roof curbs shall be installed on equipment mounting rails specifically designed for that purpose or as shown on plans. B. Roof mounted piping and ductwork shall be mounted on a pipe support system equal to B -Line C- Port. END OF SECTION 23 0529 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 12.137 HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529-4 SECTION 23 0548 -VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Conditions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of vibration isolation work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and /or specified in other Division -23 sections. B. All HVAC equipment over one horsepower, unless otherwise noted shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators. C. Where isolator type and deflection are not shown, the related equipment shall be isolated in accordance with the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications, Chapter 47. D. Types of vibration isolation products specified in this section include the following: 1. Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Isolators. 2. Elastomeric Isolators. 3. Spring Isolators, Free Standing. 4. Spring Isolators, Vertically- Restrained. 5. Isolation Hangers. 6. Structural Steel Bases. 7. Flexible Duct Connectors. 8. Flexible Pipe Connectors. E. Vibration isolation products furnished as part of factory- fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections. F. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets and other work related to vibration isolation work. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years' successful experience in production of units similar to those required for project. 1. The materials and systems specified in this Section shall all be provided by the Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for required isolation and bases, and a tabulation of the design data including O.D., free and operating heights of the isolators. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Vibration Isolation Products 1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 230548-1 2. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. 4. Mason Industries B. The following item specifications apply to the corresponding Type numbers used in the Vibration Isolation Schedule. Model Numbers are based on Kinetics Noise Control. 2.02 ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS A. Type 1 Isolator: Model KIP -Q Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Noise and Vibration Isolation Pads, individually coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Pads shall be fine (.00018 in dia) bonded annealed glass fibers which have been stabilized during manufacture by overloading the material ten times. Pads shall have a constant natural frequency over the operating load range, and the stiffness shall increase proportionately with load applied. Pads shall be no taller than the shortest horizontal dimension. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform load surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads. Alternately, Model RD Neoprene Mounts, incorporating completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the supported unit, may be used. B. Type 1A Isolator: 5/8" thick neoprene molded pad, incorporating cross ribbed molding for vibration isolation. C. Type 2 Isolators: Model FDS Free - Standing, Unhoused Laterally Stable Steel Springs incorporating leveling bolts and 1/4" thick ribbed noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the spring shall have a lateral spring stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness, and shall be designed to provide 50% overload capacity. In capacities up to 5,000 lbs., springs shall be replaceable. In capacities over 5,000 lbs. springs shall be welded to the top and bottom load plate assemblies. D. Type 2H Hangers: Model SFH Combination Spring and Fiberglass Hangers, incorporating precompressed molded fiberglass noise and vibration isolation pads, coated with a moisture impervious elastomeric membrane in series with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. Springs shall be as specified for Type 2 Isolators, above. Isolators shall be designed for 50% overload capacity, and shall accommodate rod misalignment over a 30 degree arc. Brackets shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure. E. Type 3 Isolators: Model FLS, Free - Standing Laterally Stable Spring Isolators, similar to Model FDS, but shall incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short- circuiting. F. Type 4 Bases: No base required. Isolators may be attached directly to the supported equipment. G. Type 5 and Type 6 Bases: Model SFB and SBB Structural Steel Bases, designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. Bases shall be designed with isolator brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment. To assure adequate stiffness, the height of the members shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, or at least 6 inches. Where thinner sections are necessary, due to head room limitations, etc., the section modulus of the members selected shall equal or exceed the section modulus of wide flange steel members whose thickness is 8% of the longest span between isolators. H. Type 7 Bases: Model CIB Reinforced Concrete Inertia Bases, the steel members of which are designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. The concrete shall be poured into a welded steel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts, 1/2 inch diameter reinforcing bars on nominal 8 inch centers each way, and recessed isolator mounting brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment, but yet remain within the confines of the base. The thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, at least 6 inches, or as indicated on the drawings. Where inertia bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be wide enough to support piping elbows. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 230548-2 Type 8 Bases: Model ASR Isolation Rail System, consisting of two parallel aluminum rail systems with continuous neoprene air and water seal, incorporating steel spring isolators designed for one inch static deflection, all fabricated to be installed over the roof curb system, and provide continuous support for the isolated equipment. J. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Flexible neoprene or canvas connections of approved construction shall be provided in the ductwork adjacent to all air moving units. 2. High velocity ductwork, for a distance of 50 feet from high pressure fans, shall be isolated from the structure by means of Type 2 Hangers described herein. K. Flexible Piping Connectors: 1. Piping over one inch diameter and piping three supports away from rotating or reciprocating HVAC equipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators. 2. Suspended piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Hangers described herein. 3. Floor mounted piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Isolators (spring mounts) described herein. 4. Flexible members shall be incorporated in the piping adjacent to all reciprocating and /or rotating equipment and pumps. Flexible pipe connectors not required at in -line pump installations. 5. See Section 23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping for pump connector specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, including definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. General: Apply types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at locations shown or scheduled. Selection is Installer's option where more than one type is indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short- circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. B. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 230548-3 C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. E. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. F. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.04 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after completion of other related work (but before equipment startup), shall furnish written report to Contractor listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators. 2. Piping connections including flexible connections. 3. Ductwork Connections including provisions for flexible connections. 4. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors. B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to vibration isolation Installer. END OF SECTION 23 0548 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING 12.137 AND EQUIPMENT 230548-4 SECTION 23 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and /or specified in other Division -23 sections. B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Painted identification materials 2. Plastic pipe markers 3. Plastic tape 4. Valve tags C. Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division -23 sections. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 -1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut -off and similar special uses, by special "flags ", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. B. Labeling Nomenclature: Submit list indicating system types with appropriate nomenclature to be provided on the pipe labels. Where possible, match to system labels on drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division -23 sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. Painted Identification Materials: 1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray -can form and grade. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 230553-1 Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. C. Plastic Pipe Markers: General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed flexible or semi - rigid, permanent, color- coded, plastic -sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap -on application of pre- tensioned semi -rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. C. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 -1/2 ". Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full -band or narrow strip -type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1 -1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 ". C. Strapped -to -pipe (or insulation) application of semi -rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. 4. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre - printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Design Professional in cases of variance with names as shown or specified. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic. D. Plastic Tape: General: Manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure- sensitive (self- adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. a. Width: Provide 1 -1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6 ", 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. b. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E. Valve Tags: Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp- engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. a. Provide 2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7/16" white embossed sequenced numbers. Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S -hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 230553-2 F. Name Plates: 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. 2. Lettering: a. Large Equipment: 1 1/2" lettering as appropriate. b. Small Equipment: 3/4" lettering as appropriate. 3. Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in HVAC identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation /maintenance of HVAC systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1 H, Standpipe F12). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install identification after completion of covering and painting if any. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B. Ductwork Identification: 1. Access Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic - laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. C. Piping System Identification: 1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Stenciled markers, including color -coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. C. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color -coded painting of piping is provided. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non - concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 230553-3 b. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors /ceilings, or enter non - accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. D. Valve Identification: General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory- fabricated equipment units, and shut -off valves at terminal devices and similar rough -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. E. Equipment Identification: General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including air handling units, terminal units, fans, pumps, boilers, heaters, control panels, heat exchangers, condensing units, and chillers. 2. Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as designated by Owner. Provide identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate a. For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive fixed name plates. b. Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering. END OF SECTION 23 0553 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 230553-4 SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus of HVAC work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (including pulley changes as required) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents. B. Immediately after the draft balancing report is complete the balancing contractor, controls contractor, and mechanical contractor shall schedule a meeting with the Design Professional and the owner to discuss every item in the report page by page. All items that do not meet engineering requirements or could not physically be balanced as required shall be coordinated and resolved prior to this meeting. No payments for balancing shall be requested or made until this meeting is held. C. Component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section includes the following as applied to HVAC equipment: Air Systems: a. Heat Pumps b. Energy Recovery Units C. Air Handling Units d. VAV Boxes e. Ductwork Systems f. Diffusers and Grilles a. Fume Hoods 2. Water Systems a. Pumps b. Coils C. Boilers d. HVAC Piping Systems e. Domestic Hot Water Recirculating System D. The Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide a complete and operating HVAC system and shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1. Installing balancing dampers as required by the Drawings and Specifications and requested by the Testing and Balancing Contractor. 2. Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 3. Providing up -to -date set of Drawings and advising immediately of any changes made to the system during construction. 4. Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections, such as dampers, belts, etc., as required without undue delay. 5. Providing complete submittal information for all HVAC equipment, complete with pertinent engineering information. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 12.137 230593-1 B. ASHRAE - HVAC Applications Handbook: Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. (Most recent edition). C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Tester: A firm with at least 3 years of successful testing, adjusting and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project, who is not Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of project. B. TAB Agency Qualification: Current membership in AABC or certification by NEBB or SMACNA. C. Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy /calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. D. All testing and balancing contractors are to be approved by the Design Professional before bidding. The contractors approved to date are: 1. Precision Test and Balance Clive, Iowa (515) 288 -2332 2. Systems Management and Balancing Waukee, Iowa (515) 987 -2825 3. River Place Technologies East Moline, Illinois (309) 796 -0800 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. 1.06 PHASING A. The TAB contractor shall review the phasing indicated on sheet G -101. Testing and balancing reports should be submitted to the Engineer at the completion of each phase. These reports shall be compiled at the end of the project to be presented to the owner as one comprehensive report. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. TAB Agency Qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of company officers and job supervisor. Submit list of proposed test equipment and sample report format indicating all measurements to be taken. These shall be submitted to and reviewed by Design Professional prior to commencing work. B. The test - and - balance report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. All logs, data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by the balancing agency's certified test - and - balance engineer. C. Three (3) copies of the test - and - balance report are required and shall be submitted to Design Professional. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 12.137 230593-2 D. The report shall contain the required data in a format selected by Balancing Contractor. E. Report shall include the following information: (For all references to "design ", specific information from shop drawings shall be incorporated.) Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer and Model C. Supply, return and exhaust, air flow, design and actual d. Outside air flow, design and actual (where applicable) e. Inlet, discharge, and total static pressure, design and actual f. Fan RPM, design and actual g. Static pressure across the coil section with the face and bypass damper in both the face and bypass positions (where face and bypass dampers are provided). 2. V -Belt Drive a. Identification /location b. Required driven RPM C. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM 3. Duct Traverse: a. System zone /branch b. Duct size and area C. Velocity and airflow, design and actual d. Duct static pressure e. Air temperature and correction factor (if applicable) 4. Air Monitoring Station Data a. Identification /location b. System C. Size and area d. Velocity and airflow, design and actual 5. Air Terminal Unit Data: a. Identification /number and location b. Manufacturer and model C. Size d. Minimum static pressure, design and actual e. Maximum air flows, design and actual f. Minimum air flow, design and actual 6. Room Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Air terminal number b. Room number /location C. Terminal type and size d. Area factor e. Velocity, design and actual f. Air flow, design and actual g. Percent of design air flow Pump Data: a. Identification /number b. Manufacturer and model C. Impeller size d. Service e. Flow rate, pressure drop, BHP, design and actual f. Discharge suction and total pressure MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 12.137 230593-3 Shut off, discharge, suction and total pressures Central Station Cooling and Heating Coil Data: a. Identification /number b. Location and service C. Air flow, design and actual d. Entering and leaving air DB and WB temperatures, design and actual e. Water flow and pressure drop, design and actual f. Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual g. Air pressure drop, design and actual h. Differential pressure across balancing valves. Terminal Unit Heating and Cooling Coil Data a. Identification /number b. Manufacturer and model C. Entering and leaving DB temperature, design and actual d. Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual e. Water flow, design and actual f. Differential pressure across balancing valves. 10. Water Flow Measuring Station: a. Identification /station b. Manufacturer and model C. Location d. Size e. Flow rate and pressure drop, design and actual f. Station calibrated setting 11. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer (1/4 hp and larger only) b. HP /BHP, design and actual C. Phase, voltage, amperage; design and actual d. Service factor e. Starter size, rating, heater elements (as applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jibs, and similar purposes. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester. Before initiating balancing work, Contractor shall verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 12.137 230593-4 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Correct fan rotation. 7. Volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage has been minimized. 12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Correct pump rotation. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards. C. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Systems serving completed phases of the project will require TAB for such phases prior to partial final inspections. D. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of reports prior to partial final inspections. E. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards. Draft report shall be sent to Design Professional for review prior to issuance to Owner. F. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer. G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. H. Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for HVAC work. I. The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance the air system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): 1. Test, adjust and record all blower RPM at design requirements. 2. Make pitot tube transverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at all fans and blowers. 3. Test and record all system static pressures, suction and discharge. 4. Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of recirculated air. 5. Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of outside air. 6. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures (DB and WB); all air units. 7. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return. 8. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register within 10% design requirements. 9. In reading and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, include design velocity and final velocity, when required, and design CFM and final CFM after adjustments. 10. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. 11. Balance fume hoods for design flow rate /face velocity, including calibration of face velocity sensors. 12. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of all controllers to operate as specified, indicated and /or noted. 13. Flow Rate Tolerances: a. Applications which do not require differential pressure control: -10% to +10 %. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 12.137 230593-5 b. Applications which require differential pressure control: 1) Positive zones a) Supply air: 0 to +10% b) Exhaust and return air: 0 to -10% 2) Negative zones a) Supply air: 0 to -10% b) Exhaust and return air: 0 to +10% C. Minimum outside air: 0 to +10% The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance the water system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): Before setting pump capacities, check the following items: a. Automatic fill valve setting and strainer b. Expansion tank level C. Cleanliness of system water d. Make certain all pump strainers are clean e. Check air vents at coils and high points of system 2. Measure circulating pump capacities by differential pressure measurements, amperage and brake horsepower method using the pump manufacturer's capacity curve. Position all automatic valves, hand valves and balancing cocks for full flow through coils, convertors, etc. during pump adjustment. Use only calibrated test gauges for pump adjustment; the use of pressure gauges installed with the system will not be allowed. Adjust triple duty valve as required to provide minimum differential pressure required for most remote automatic flow control valve. 3. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. 4. Balance system with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. For coils with 3 -way control valves, set bypass balancing cock to provide total flow when control valve is in 100% bypass position equal to total flow when control valve is 100% open to coil. 5. Determine minimum differential pressure setpoint required to maintain flow at all water coils. Coordinate final setting with Temperature Control Contractor. 6. Coordinate the setting of controls to maintain coil water inlet design temperatures, with coil valves positioned for full flow through coil during adjustment. Balance individual water coils at full flow to maintain temperature differential specified. Mark settings of all balancing cocks at required positions. Do not use service or shut -off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. For automatic flow control valves: Record differential pressure and verify within operating range of valve. Flow Rate Tolerances: a. Heating water pumps and coils: -10% to +10% b. Chilled water and two -pipe system pumps and coils: -10% to +10% Unless noted otherwise balance all domestic hot water circulation valves to 0.5 gpm. K. Where balancer has a question regarding appropriate system configuration for balancing, balancer should contact Design Professional for clarification. END OF SECTION 23 0593 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 12.137 230593-6 SECTION 23 0700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to all hot and cold surfaces of piping, tanks, fittings and other surfaces as required by the drawings and this section. B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conditioned Space: an area inside the building which is heated and /or cooled. B. Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (e.g., ceiling plenums). C. Untempered Space: an area inside the building which is not conditioned and is not tempered (e.g., attic spaces). D. Exterior: An area outside the building (e.g., roof mounted items). 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA -90A. Flame spread rating of not more than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50 as tested by ANSI /ASTM E84 (UL 723) (NFPA 255) method. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above. B. Installation of insulation materials shall be in accordance to the latest edition of MICA/NIAC National Commercial & Industrial Standards for the appropriate material application. C. NFPA Compliance: Fire Barrier Duct Wrap systems shall meet requirements of NFPA 96 for grease duct application. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of HVAC insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each HVAC system requiring insulation. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of HVAC insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. C. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC INSULATION 12.137 230700-1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and HVAC damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulating Materials 1. Owens /Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Armacell. 3. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4. CertainTeed Corp. 5. Knauf Fiber Glass 6. John's - Manville Corp. B. Fire -stop Duct Wrap Systems 1. 3M Fire Master 2. Unifrax FyreWrap C. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Type 'A': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation and factory applied vapor barrier, all service jacket with pressure sensitive self - sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 0 to +850 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.23 Btu -in /hr -sq.ft. -deg F @ 75 deg. F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning 25 ASJ /SSL. Where insulation is exposed to weather outdoors it shall be covered with an aluminum or stainless steel weatherproof jacket 0.016" thick and sealed. 2. Where insulation is exposed in indoor occupied space, it shall be covered with 30 mil PVC jacket equal to Johns Manville Zeston. B. Type 'B': Flexible elastomeric extruded pipe covering, 6 pound density, 0.27 K factor, water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Suitable for temperature from -40 deg. F to +220 deg. F. Equal toArmacell, AP Armaflex, joints sealed with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Exposed outdoor insulation to be finished with two coats of ArmacellArmaflex finish. C. Type 'C': Preformed rigid hydrous calcium silicate insulation. Mechanically fastened by wiring in place using 16 gauge wire on 9" centers and covered with suitable jacketing for indoor or outdoor application. Suitable for operating temperatures +200 to +1200 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.42 Btu -in /hr -sq.ft. -deg F @ 200 deg. F mean temperature. Equal to Owens - Corning Kaylo asbestos -free pipe insulation. D. Type 'D': Preformed rigid cellular glass insulation with factory applied self sealing jacket. Suitable for operating temperatures -200 to +900 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.29 Btu -in /hr -sq.ft. -deg F @ 75 deg. F mean temperature. Equal to Pittsburgh Corning Foamglass with Pittwrap SS -II jacket. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC INSULATION 12.137 230700-2 E. Type 'E': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation, absorbent hydrophilic wicking - cloth, and factory applied vapor barrier, all service jacket with evaporation holes aligned with inner wicking fabric and pressure sensitive self - sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 35 to +350 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.23 Btu -in /hr -sq.ft. -deg F @ 75 deg. F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Knauf Fiber Glass PermaWick. 2.03 FITTING INSULATION A. Type 'Al': Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, or with pre - molded fiberglass wired in place and covered with all- service jacket or low smoke PVC fitting covers. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, wired in place and covered with all- service jacket. B. Type 'B1': Fittings: Insulate fittings, valve bodies, strainer bodies, etc., with mitercut pipe insulation or sheet insulation of same material as pipe covering. C. Type 'Cl': Fittings: Insulate fittings with mitered segments of pipe insulation of same material as pipe covering, wired in place and finished with a 1/4" layer of insulating cement. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as pipe covering, wired in place and finished with 1/4" layer of insulating cement. D. Type 'D1': Fittings: Insulate fittings with mitered segments of pipe insulation of same material as pipe covering, wired in place and covered with suitable jacketing for indoor or outdoor application. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of the same insulating material as pipe covering, wired in place, and covered with suitable jacketing for indoor or outdoor application. E. Type 'E1': Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, or with pre - molded fiberglass wired in place and covered. Wrap all fittings with PermaWick absorbent fabric and cover with appropriate all- service jacket or Proto PermaWick PVC jackets with factory punched evaporation holes. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, wired in place and covered with all- service jacket. Wrap all fittings with PermaWick absorbent fabric and cover with appropriate all surface jacket or Proto PermaWick PVC jackets with factory punched evaporation holes. 2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Type 'G': Rigid fiberglass insulation board with factory applied all service jacket. Suitable for operating temperatures of 0 to +850 deg. F. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning Series 700 with 25 ASJ facing. 2. Cut or miter insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. On round surfaces band insulation in place with 3/4" x 0.015" thick galvanized steel bands 18" on center. On flat or irregular surfaces impale insulation over welded pins on 12" centers and secure with speed washers. Apply vapor seal ASJ pressure- sensitive patches at damaged areas. All insulation edges and butt joints are to be sealed with pressure- sensitive joint sealing tape to match the jacket. Apply in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Type 'H': Rigid hydrous calcium silicate insulation. Suitable for operating temperatures of +200 to +1200 deg. F. Equal to Owens - Corning Kaylo asbestos free block insulation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC INSULATION 12.137 230700-3 2. Cut or miter insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. Insulation shall be held in place with 3/4" x 0.015" thick galvanized steel bands 18" on center. 3. Insulation shall be finished with 1/2" thickness of insulating cement, in two coats. C. Type `I': 1. Flexible elastomeric insulation. Suitable for operating temperatures of -40 to +220 deg. F. Equal to Armacell Armaflex II Sheet Insulation. 2. Cut insulation where necessary to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. Insulation shall be installed using Armstrong 520 Adhesive. 3. Exposed outdoor insulation shall be finished with two coats of Armacell Armaflex finish. 2.05 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct Covering: Certain -Teed Ultralite Duct Wrap with Foil Scrim Kraft vapor barrier facing, one (1) pound per cubic foot density. B. Fire -stop Duct Wrap System shall be of materials as follows 1. Type F1 Duct Covering: FyreWrap EZ 1.5 Duct Insulation, insulfrax thermal insulation, encapsulated with an aluminum foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim covering. Meeting requirements of ISO 6944, ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL723, ASTM E136, ASTM C411, ASTM D 6329 -03, and ASTM C518. 2. Type F2 Duct Covering: FyreWrap Elite 1.5 Duct Wrap, double -layer of 1.5" thick encapsulated wrap with aluminum foil fiberglass reinforced scrim covering meeting requirements of ASTM E -2336 for one and two hour rated commercial kitchen grease duct enclosure assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating materials supplier's recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, cuts and surfaces of insulation. B. All piping shall be insulated unless specifically noted otherwise. Piping not noted in the table below shall be insulated with thicknesses matching ASHRAE 90.1 based on the fluid temperatures. * * * * * ** *NOTE: Not all services apply — refer to plans for scope of services. * * * * * * * * * * ** 3.02 PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION Caniira Above Ground Piping Hot water heating lines, supply and return, condenser water for building heating MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 Insulation and Thickness * Type A and Al: 3" and smaller - 1" thick 4" and larger - 1 -1/2" thick Type C and Cl: 1" and smaller — 2 -1/2" thick 1-1/4" to 6" — 3" thick 8" and larger — 4" thick HVAC INSULATION 230700-4 Chilled water, heat pump water lines, evaporator water, ground water, well water Heat recovery piping Low pressure steam (up to 15 psig) Medium pressure steam (up to 60 psig) High pressure steam (over 60 psig) Steam condensate and pump discharge lines Condensate drain lines Heat exchangers condensate receivers, air separators MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 Type A and Al: All pipe sizes — 1" thick Type B and B1: All pipe sizes — 1" thick Type E and E1: All pipe sizes — 1" thick Type A and Al: All pipe sizes — 1" thick Type B and B1: All pipe sizes — 1" thick Type A and Al: 1 -1/4" and smaller - 1 -1/2" thick 1 -1/2" and larger - 2" thick Type C and Cl: 1 -1/4" and smaller — 2 -1/2" thick 1-1/2" to 6" — 3" thick 8" and larger — 4 -1/2" thick Type A and Al: 3/4" and smaller - 1 -1/2" thick 1" and larger - 3" thick Type C and Cl: 3/4" and smaller — 2-1/2" thick 1" to 1 -1/4" - 4" thick 1 -1/2" to 4" — 4 -1/2" thick 5" and larger — 5" thick Type A and Al: 3/4" and smaller - 2 -1/2" thick 1" to 3" - 3" thick 4" and larger — 4" thick Type C and Cl: 3/4" and smaller — 4" thick 1 " to 3" — 4-1/2" thick 4" and larger — 6" thick Type A and Al: 1 -1/4" and smaller - 1 -1/2" thick 1 -1/2" and larger - 2" thick Type C and Cl: 1 -1/4" and smaller — 2 -1/2" thick 1-1/2" to 6" — 3" thick 8" and larger — 4 -1/2" thick Type A and Al: 1" thick for all pipe sizes. Type G: 2" thick. Type H: 3 -1/2" thick HVAC INSULATION 230700-5 Refrigeration piping (except liquid lines) Type B and B1: 3/4" and smaller — 3/4" thick 1 " to 2" — 1 " thick 2 -1/2" and larger — 1 -1/2" thick Chiller evaporator Type I — 1" thick Chilled water or two -pipe system pump volutes Generator /Engine Exhaust Piping Type C and C1 2" thick for all pipe sizes Underground Piping Hot water heating lines, Type D and D1: supply and return 4" and smaller — 1 -1/2" thick 6" to 14" — 2" thick 16" to 18" — 2 -1/2" thick 20" to 24" — 3" thick Low pressure steam Type D and D1: 4" and smaller — 1 -1/2" thick 6" to 14" — 2" thick 16" to 18" — 2 -1/2" thick 20" to 24" — 3" thick Medium pressure steam Type D and D1: 4" and smaller — 1 -1/2" thick 6" to 14" — 2" thick 16" to 18" — 2 -1/2" thick 20" to 24" — 3" thick High pressure steam Type D and D1: 4" and smaller — 2-1/2" thick 6" to 8" — 4" thick 10" to 14" — 5 -1/2" thick 16" to 18" — 6" thick 20" to 24" — 7" thick Steam condensate and Type D and D1: pump discharge lines 4" and smaller — 1 -1/2" thick 6" to 14" — 2" thick 16" to 18" — 2 -1/2" thick 20" to 24" — 3" thick For piping exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 1/2" 3.03 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Do not insulate the following: 1. Valve bonnets 2. Unions in hot piping 3. TC valve operators 4. Hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinet. 5. Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan. 6. Heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space. 7. Condensate piping between steam trap and union. 8. Preinsulated expansion joints MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC INSULATION 12.137 230700-6 B. Inspect all piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. C. Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided as required to prevent condensation. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between pipes and hangers. D. Insulation at removable heads, manhole covers, strainer plugs, and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. 3.04 DUCT INSULATIONAPPLICATION A. Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered as scheduled on plans. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1 -1/2" covering. 3.05 DUCT COVERING INSTALLATION A. Inspect all ductwork and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. B. Covering shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to insure full thickness at corners. All insulation shall be adhered with edges tightly banded, and shall be adhered to duct with fire resistant adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces uniformly and firmly. C. In addition to the adhesive, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all ducts 18" or wider by means of grip nails and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapor barrier mastic and tape where the pins have pierced through. D. Insulation for "cold" ducts and accessories shall pass unbroken through hangers, sleeves, fire dampers, flexible connectors, reheat coils, etc. as required to prevent condensation. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for ducts connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between ducts and hangers. Insulation Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with equipment suppliers as required to ensure continuous covering of unlined equipment components, i.e. VAV terminal unit supply collar, fan coil unit discharge, etc. E. Insulation at all access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. 3.06 FIRE- BARRIER DUCT WRAP INSTALLATION A. Install duct wrap TYPE F2 fire stop system as required to comply with NFPA 96 requirements for grease duct application, duct wrap system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install duct wrap TYPE F1 fire stop system as required to comply with ASTM E119, ASTM E814, and all local and state codes to extend the fire -rated shafts or enclosures of supply, return, exhaust and outdoor air ductwork. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC INSULATION 12.137 230700-7 C. Type F1: Install duct wrap firestop system in direct contact with the duct that it encloses. Protect every portion of duct with no less than 1 layer as required for duct applications. Overlap both perimeter and longitudinal joints with a minimum of 3" per layer of material. D. Type F2: Install duct wrap firestop system in direct contact with the duct that it encloses. Protect every portion of duct with no less than 2 layers as required for grease duct applications. Overlap both perimeter and longitudinal joints with a minimum of 3" per layer of material. E. Type F2: Locate grease duct access doors at horizontal cleanouts as required by local codes. Protect with 3 layers of duct wrap firestop system material, each layer overlapping previous 1" on all sides and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All edges shall covered with aluminum tape. All layers shall fit tight and overlap previous layer as required by installation instructions. Duct wrap shall be locked in place by galvanized speed clips. F. Repair Procedure. 1. Repair damaged duct wrap firestop system material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove damaged section. Apply a new section of the same dimension. Place and fit ensuring same overlap that existed previously. Place banding around new duct wrap firestop system material and tension to sufficiently hold in place. If damage has penetrated to interior layer, remove affected sections and reinstall as specified in 3.03 A. END OF SECTION 23 0700 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HVAC INSULATION 12.137 230700-8 SECTION 23 0900 -INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete DDC system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. B. The DDC system shall be a complete system designed for use on Intranets and the Internet. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Primary controllers located in equipment rooms and shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure existing in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner's environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN. C. The DDC system work shall result in a complete, fully functional, commissioned DDC system that meets the intent of this specification and the sequences of operation. This work shall include, but not be limited to the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties and services. D. The control system shall be installed by competent control mechanics and electricians employed by DDC Contractor. DDC Contractor is responsible for all work performed by their subcontractors. E. Manage and coordinate the DDC system work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not impede or delay the work of associated trades. F. Provide support and coordination with Testing and Balancing (TAB) and Validation Contractors for all interfaces between controls and TAB /validation scope of work. Provide all devices, such as portable operator terminals for TAB use in completing TAB procedures. G. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this contract. When the DDC system is fully installed and operational, DDC Contractor and representatives of Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, DDC Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. H. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and /or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses. I. The control system shall be an open platform system that will allow products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be named the licensee holder of all software associated with any and all work on the project. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-1 1.03 WORK BY OTHERS A. The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated under the supervision of the DDC Contractor. 1. HVAC Piping Contractor Shall: a. Install automatic valves that are specified to be supplied by DDC Contractor. b. Install all pipe mounted DDC items including wells, paddle switches and differential pressure switches, including their isolation valves and associated tubing. 2. Sheet Metal Contractor Shall: a. Install all automatic dampers furnished by DDC Contractor. b. Provide necessary blank -off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than the duct size. C. Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. d. Provide access door or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. e. Install airflow measuring stations. 3. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor: a. The installation of all line voltage power wiring by Division 26. 1.04 ELECTRIC WIRING A. All electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the DDC system, as herein specified, shall be provided by DDC Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications. Line voltage wiring which is the responsibility of DDC Contractor includes but is not limited to: power for unit mounted controllers and line voltage control devices, freezestat wiring, line voltage thermostats, and motor starter interlocks as required by sequence of operation. B. All control wiring in finished spaces is to be routed concealed in walls or above ceilings unless specifically noted otherwise. Concealed control wiring, where accessible, may be installed without conduit. All concealed control wiring which is not accessible shall be routed in blue conduit. Control wiring in unfinished spaces may be routed exposed but shall be in blue conduit. Wiring in ducts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. C. Wiring shall comply with the requirements of local and national electrical codes. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. All bidders must be DDC Contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years. B. The DDC system shall be provided by a single source manufacturer offering a full line of controls. This system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the manufacturers local factory owned branch office or the manufacturers locally authorized representative. DDC Contractor shall have factory trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 48 hours upon receipt of request. C. Control system components shall be the manufacturer's latest standard of design at the time of bid and in conformance with the following applicable standards for products specified: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM. 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA. 4. Underwriters Laboratory, UL (UL 916). 5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156. 6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 7. Local building codes. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-2 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted for approval: 1. DDC Contractor shall submit schematic drawings for the entire control system for review and approval before work shall begin. Included in the submittal drawings shall be a one page diagram depicting the system architecture complete with a communications riser. Drawings shall include point -to -point wiring diagrams and must show all temperature controls, start -stop arrangement for each piece of equipment, equipment interlocks, wiring terminal numbers and any special connection information required for properly controlling the HVAC equipment. At a minimum, submit the following: a. DDC network architecture diagrams including all controllers and interconnections. b. Schematics, sequences and flow diagrams. C. Points schedule for each real point in the DDC, including: tag, point type, system name and display units. d. Detailed bill of material list for each controller, identifying quantity, part number, description, and optional features. e. Control damper schedule including a separate line for each damper and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: code number, fail position, damper type, damper operator, blade type, bearing type, seals, duct size, damper size, mounting, and actuator type. f. Control valve schedules including a separate line for each valve and a column for each of the valve attributes: code number, configuration, fail position, pipe size, valve size, body configuration, close off pressure, capacity, valve CV, calculated CV, design pressure, actual pressure, and actuator type. 2. The submittals shall include manufacturers catalog data describing each item of control equipment or component provided and installed for the project. 3. The submittals shall include a specification compliance analysis for review and approval before work shall begin. The compliance document shall address each paragraph of the specification by indicating COMPLY, EXCEED, or EXCEPTION. Do not indicate COMPLY unless the proposed system exactly meets the paragraph requirement. If EXCEED or EXCEPTION is indicated, then provide a clear and concise explanation of the variance from the specifications and the net effect this would have on the specified system performance. 1.07 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT A. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing agreement. Such license shall grant the use of all programs and application software to the Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect the manufacturers rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. B. The control system shall be an open system that will allow products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be named license holder of all software associated with any and all work on the project. In addition, the Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files, and application -level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and / or configured for use with NAC, FMCS Servers, and any related LAN /WAN Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. All required IDs and passwords for access to any component of software program shall be provided to the owner. The owner shall determine which organization to be named the SI organization ID ( "orgid ") of all software licenses. The Owner shall be free to direct the modifications of the "orgid" in any software license, regardless of the supplier, by BuildingLogiX Inc. 1.08 PRE - PROGRAMMING DESIGN REVIEW MEETING A. Prior to starting programming, a design review meeting shall be scheduled with the Design Professional. The agenda of this meeting will be to discuss the design intent, review all systems requiring control, and answer any questions the Temperature Controls Contractor may have. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: Trane Controls — Halverson Trane, Des Moines B. All control equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2.02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A. The complete electronic DDC system shall be comprised of the following levels of control devices. 1. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) as provided shall be based on the Niagara Framework (or "Niagara "), a Java -based framework developed by BuildingLogiX and installed by Halvorson Trane. Niagara provides an open automation infrastructure that integrates diverse systems and devices (regardless of manufacturer, communication standard or software) into a unified platform that can be easily managed in real time over the Internet using a standard Web Browser. Systems not developed on the Niagara Framework platform are unacceptable. 2. Network Area Controller(s) (NAC) are used for high level global programming functions and system networking. The NAC shall connect to the owner's local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally in each building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard Web browsers, via the Internet and /or local area network 3. Local Controllers are for control of large primary HVAC systems such as air handling systems, heating hot water systems and chilled water systems. 4. Zone Controllers are dedicated for specific equipment such as VAV boxes, fan coils, and heat pump controls. 5. Network thermostats dedicated to specific equipment such as VAV boxes, fan coils, or heat pumps, etc. 6. Field devices include but are not limited to electronic sensors, valves, actuators, switches, relays, and transducers. 2.03 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES A. The system shall provide a peer -to -peer networked, stand - alone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate BACnet MS/TP, LonWorks technology, and LonWorks protocol in one open, interoperable system. B. The supplied computer software shall employ object- oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file and a resource file for the device. C. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true "peer -to- peer" communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring "polling" by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable. For Niagara systems the following settings are required; 1. Station Compatibility In = ALL 2. Station Compatibility Out = ALL 3. Tool Compatibility In = ALL 4. Tool Compatibility = ALL MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-4 2.04 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Complete workstation minimum requirements: 0 L 1. Hard drive or equal high -speed data storage. 2. Removable high -speed data storage and export device(s) such as Read/Write CD ROM or equal. 3. Full color, flat screen monitor, minimum 17 inches diagonal screen, minimum 1280 x 1024 resolution, 0.26 or better dot pitch and minimum 72 Hz refresh rate. 4. Printers shall be appropriate for the functional requirements and duty of the application. General: The web based DDC operator interface shall be user friendly, readily understood and shall make maximum use of colors, graphics, icons, embedded images, animation, text based information and data visualization techniques to enhance and simplify the use and understanding of the DDC system by authorized users at the OI. 1. User access to the DDC system shall be protected by a flexible and Owner redefinable software -based password access protection. Password protection shall be multi -level and partitionable to accommodate the varied access requirements of the different user groups. Provide the means to define unique access privileges for each individual authorized user. Also provide the means to establish general password groups to which an individual will then be assigned. Once assigned to the group each individual will assume all the capabilities and restrictions of that group. Provide the means to on -line manage password access control under the control of a master password. 2. The operator interface shall be able to combine data from any and all of the system components in a single web browser window. This shall include historical data stored on a server. 3. The operator interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: a. User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution b. Monitoring and reporting C. Alarm, non - normal, and return to normal condition annunciation d. Selective operator override and other control actions e. Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reporting f. DDC internal performance supervision and diagnostics g. On -line access to user HELP menus h. On -line access to current DDC as -built records and documentation i. Means for the controlled re- programming, re- configuration of DDC operation and for the manipulation of DDC database information in compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for individual DDC applications. 4. Provide DDC reports and displays making maximized use of simple English language descriptions and readily understood acronyms, abbreviations and the like to assist user understanding and interpretation. All text naming conventions shall be consistent in their use and application throughout the DDC. Web Interface 1. The system shall be capable of supporting clients using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer TM. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) are not acceptable. 2. The web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the graphical user interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. 3. The web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: a. User log -on identification and password shall be required. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-5 b. Graphical screens developed for the operator interface shall be the same screens used for the web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the OI shall be supported by the web browser interface. C. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a web page. HTML editing of the web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. d. Real -time values displayed on a web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual "refresh" of the web page. e. Users shall have administrator - defined access privileges. f. The system shall provide the capability to specify a users home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page links to other views, or pages in the system, shall be possible if allowed by the system administrator. g. Graphic screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link. D. Alarms: Alarms shall be routed directly from network controllers to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the OI software shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions: 1. Log date and time of alarm occurrence. 2. Generate a "pop -up" window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received. 3. Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm. 4. Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time /date stamp. 5. Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alpha- numeric pager. This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems which use e -mail and pagers as the exclusive means of annunciating alarms are not acceptable. 6. Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm. 7. The DDC shall annunciate diagnostic alarms, at a minimum, indicating system failures and non - normal operating conditions E. Reports: Reports shall be generated and directed to one or more of the following: Operator interface displays, printers, or archive at the user's option. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports: 1. All points in the DDC system. 2. All points in each DDC application. 3. All points currently in alarm in a DDC application. 4. All points locked out in a DDC application. 5. All DDC schedules. 6. All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks, etc. 7. DDC diagnostic and system status reports. F. Dynamic Color Graphics: The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of HVAC and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include: 1. An unlimited number of graphic displays shall be able to be generated and executed. 2. Graphics shall be based on Scalar Vector Graphic (SVG) technology. 3. Values of real time attributes displayed on the graphics shall be dynamic and updated on the displays. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-6 4. The graphic displays shall be able to display and provide animation based on real -time DDC data that is acquired, derived, or entered. 5. The user shall be able to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment directly from the graphic display. 6. Provide a graphic editing tool that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. It shall be possible to edit the graphics directly while they are on line, or at an off line location for later downloading to the controller. 7. DDC system shall be provided with a complete user expandable symbol library containing all of the basic symbols used to represent components of a typical DDC system. Implementing these symbols in a graphic shall involve dragging and dropping them from the library to the graphic. 8. The following list of graphics, at a minimum, shall be provided: a. Floor plans showing room numbers and temperature sensor locations are to be provided that will alarm when a room is off their respective zone temperature and set point. The floor plans shall also be linked to a screen to show the equipment serving that particular room /zone. b. Provide a graphic screen for each type of equipment connected to the DDC system. At a minimum, the following shall be visible from the OI: 1) Heat Pumps - discharge air temperature, zone temperature, set - point, fan, heating, cooling, alarm 2) VAV Boxes - discharge air temperature, zone temperature, set - point, airflow, damper position, reheat valve position 3) AHU - supply /return fans on /off /speed /status, dirty filter switch, outdoor air temperature, mixed air temperature, return air temperature, discharge air temperature, low limit alarm, heat /cool control valve, damper positions, static pressure 4) ERU - supply /return fans on /off /speed /status, dirty filter switch, outdoor air temp, return air temp, discharge air temp, low limit alarm, heat /cool control valve, damper positions, static pressure. 5) Boilers - supply /return water temperature, boiler enable /disable 6) Cooling Towers — fan on /off /speed /status, spray pump 7) Pumps - on /off /speed /status, differential pressure status G. Schedules: It shall be possible to configure and download from the operator interface schedules for any of the controllers on the network. 1. The system shall provide multiple schedule input forms for automatic DDC time -of -day scheduling and override scheduling of DDC operations. At a minimum, the following spreadsheet types shall be accommodated: a. Weekly schedules. b. Temporary override schedules. C. Special "Only active if today is a holiday" schedules. d. Monthly schedules. 2. Schedules shall be provided for each system or sub - system in the DDC system. Each schedule shall include all command able points residing within the system. Each point may have a unique schedule of operation relative to the system use schedule, allowing for sequential starting and control of equipment within the system. Scheduling and rescheduling of points shall be accomplished easily via the system schedule spreadsheets. 3. Monthly calendars for a 12 -month period shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user - selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the weekly schedules. H. Historical trending and data collection: Trend and store point history data for all DDC points and values as selected by the user. The trend data shall be stored in a manner that allows custom queries and reports using industry- standard software tools. At a minimum, provide the capability to perform statistical functions on the historical database: Trending shall have the capability of storing all the trended points for a minimum of one year. Average. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-7 2. Arithmetic mean. 3. Maximum /minimum values. 4. Range — difference between minimum and maximum values. 5. Standard deviation. 6. Sum of all values. 7. Variance. 2.05 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) A. The Systems Integrator shall supply Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices provided under Divisions 15 and 16. It is the responsibility of the HVAC contractor to coordinate with the Division 15 and 16 contractors to determine the quantity and type of devices. Each building shall have sufficient number of panels to support the number of controllers in each building, and cannot be shared from building to building. B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of BACnet MS/TP, LonWorks controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices C. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. One Ethernet Port — 10/100 Mbps 2. One RS -232 port 3. One BACnet MS/TP, LonWorks Interface Port — 78KB FTT -10A 4. One RS -485 ports 5. Battery Backup 6. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 7. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122 °F 8. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158 °F 9. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5% to 95% RH, non - condensing D. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC - compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it. E. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet /Internet. It shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet /Internet. It shall support a minimum of 32 simultaneous users. F. Event Alarm Notification and actions 1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. 2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial -up telephone connection, or wide -area network. 3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal C. To fault MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-8 4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. 5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object "runtime" and /or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control. G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. H. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: 1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day C. Recipient 3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message 4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): 1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 3. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.) 4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement. J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user. L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and /or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user. M. Provide a "query" feature to allow review of specific alarms by user - defined parameters. N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user. O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user. 2.06 LOCAL CONTROLLERS A. General: Each HVAC local controller shall be a stand -alone DDC controller. The local controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor -based controller installed at each HVAC system; i.e., air handling unit, heating boiler. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated network controller. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non - volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. All controllers with volatile memory shall have a battery for 72 hour database backup. Each controller shall be addressable by a workstation or a portable service tool. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-9 B. Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Application Specific Controller (B -ASC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B -SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Specific Controllers (B -ASC). C. Hardware Specifications 1. Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in RAM for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs. 2. Isolation: Control, communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. 3. Database: All field control databases shall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation. 4. Auto - Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto - calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. 5. Input /Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities: a. Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4 -20 Ma, 0 -5 VDC, etc.) and binary contact closures. b. Digital outputs may be latched or momentary contact type. C. Analog outputs shall have a 1 % resolution over total output span of 100 %. 6. Expandability: For larger controller (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output expansion through the use of plug -in modules. At least two 1/0 modules must be capable of being added to the base local controller. 7. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the controller shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start -up strategies as required. 8. Real Time Clock (RTC): All local controllers shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each local controller shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the NRC, which synchronizes all local controllers' real time clocks. D. Local Controller Software: Provide complete controller software to execute all HVAC system local loop controls functions. 1. Control Parameters: The software blocks in the local controller shall produce all of the necessary reverse acting and /or direct acting PI signals as required by the control sequence. The proportional and integral values which make up the PI output value shall be readable and modifiable, at the system workstation or the portable service tool to facilitate tuning of control loops. 2. Networking: Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the system controller for system networking. The local controller shall also provide the ability to download and upload configuration data, both locally at the controller and via the DDC communications network. 3. Programming Functions: Provide the following standard DDC loop programming functions: a. Control block programming b. PI or PID control C. Serial load staging d. Binary load staging e. Analog load staging f. Master - submaster routines g. Anti - windup for integrated loops 2.07 ZONE CONTROLLERS A. General: Each HVAC zone controller shall be a stand -alone DDC controller. The controller shall include all hardware and software required for communications with the system controller. Unless noted otherwise, an individual zone controller shall be dedicated for each zone terminal device. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-10 B. Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Advanced Application Specific Controller (B -ASC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B- SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Specific Controllers (B -ASC). C. Programs: The control program shall reside in the zone controller. The application program shall be maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in EEPROM. Controllers requiring local setting of potentiometers or dip switches are not acceptable. D. Stand - Alone: Controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host or share processing with a "master controller" shall not be acceptable. After a power failure the zone controller must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration. E. Communications: Communication to the system controller shall be 1200 -baud asynchronous. F. Input /Output: Each controller shall have a minimum of 8 inputs. Each input shall be usable as a discrete or 0 -5 volt analog or digital input. Inputs shall be individually electrically isolated from other inputs, outputs, communications, and power. All inputs shall feature an auto - calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. G. Each controller shall have a minimum of six digital outputs. Outputs shall be individually electrically isolated from the other outputs, inputs, communications and power. Controller shall be available with a minimum of two (2) analog outputs. H. Connections: All electrical connections shall be made to the combination terminal strip and base assembly. To insure long term reliability, all electrical terminations shall be screw type. I. The logic card, containing all active electrical components, shall be easily installable and removable from the wiring base, without the use of tools or the removal of any electrical wiring. Products that require disconnection of wiring from logic card before removal will be required to supply and install a quick disconnect type inter - connection. 2.08 FIELD DEVICES A. Temperature Sensors: All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of —30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 1. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box. Space sensor shall have a portable service tool jack. a. The sensor housing shall feature both a mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation. 2. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. 3. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non - corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. 4. Freezestat: Duct temperature sensor as described above with appropriate temperature range for the service. 5. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature unless otherwise specified. B. Humidity Sensors: Humidity sensors shall be of the solid -state type using a hydroscopic polymer or thin film capacitive sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Sensors shall be available for room, outside air or duct mounting, with a minimum range of 0% - 100% +/- 3 %. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-11 C. Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with accuracy of +/- 2% of range and non - repeatability of +/- 0.05% of range. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure without damage. 1. Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10" water column will be accurate to +/- 1 % using a solid -state sensing element. 2. Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to +/- 0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated. D. Current Sensors: Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in solid and split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. E. Measurement of three phase power shall be accomplished with a kW /kWH transducer. This device shall utilize direct current transformer inputs to calculate the instantaneous value (kW) and a pulsed output proportional to the energy usage (kWH). F. Control Valves: Valves shall be packless, modulating, electrically or magnetically actuated. These valves shall have true linear flow characteristics in relationship to valve opening. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified, and close off against the differential pressure conditions within the application. Valves should be sized to operate accurately and with stability from 10 to 100% of the maximum design flow. These valves shall carry a full (3) three year parts and labor warranty. This warranty shall cover all required maintenance and failures. In the event of a failure the valve and actuator shall be replaced and reinstalled, by DDC Contractor, at no cost to the building owner. 1. Terminal Unit Valves: Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop. Valve body shall be nickel plated brass, rated at 125 psig and shall have a control rangeability of 100 to 1. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed type with NPT fittings. Valves 2 -1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged. All two - position valves shall be full port valves. 2. Hot water valves shall be rated to 240 deg. F and 125 psig. Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi pressure drop. Valve body shall be cast iron with a chrome nickel steel seat and inner valve material. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed type with NPT fittings. Valves 2 -1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged. 3. Butterfly Valves: 2 -way and 3 -way butterfly valves shall be cast iron valve body, with stainless steel stem, and available with disc seal for bubble -tight shut off. G. Pressure Independent Control Valves: Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop. Valve body shall be cast iron, steel or bronze and rated for 150 psi working pressure. All internal parts shall be stainless steel, steel, Teflon, brass, or bronze. The flow through the valve shall not vary more than +/- 5% due to system pressure fluctuations. A flow tag shall be furnished with each valve. The rangeability of the control valves shall be a minimum of 100 to 1. H. Control Dampers: Motorized damper, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be furnished by DDC Contractor. Dampers are to be installed by HVAC Contractor under the supervision of DDC Contractor. All blank -off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of Sheet Metal Contractor. 1. Damper frames are to be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet steel mechanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel to eliminate noise as friction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals, and acetal or bronze bearings shall also be provided. 2. Damper blade width shall not exceed eight inches and the blade length shall not exceed 48 inches. Seals and 3/8 inch square steel zinc plated pins are required. 3. Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel blade for two position control. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-12 Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be electronic, and shall be direct coupled over the shaft, without the need for connecting linkage. 1. The actuator shall have electronic overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power - failure /safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 2. Actuators shall be available with spring return to the normal position when required. 3. Actuators shall have a position indicator for external indication of damper position. 4. Actuators shall have manual override capability without disconnecting damper linkage. Airflow Measuring Stations: Provide a thermal anemometer using instrument grade self heated thermistor sensors with thermistor temperature sensors. 1. The flow station shall operate over a range of 0 to 5,000 feet /min with an accuracy of +/- 2% over 500 feet/min and +/- 10 ft /min for reading less than 500 feet /min. 2. The output signal shall be linear with field selectable ranges including 0 -5 VDC, 0 -10VDC and 4 -20 mA. K. Water Flow Measuring Stations: Provide an insertion -type electromagnetic flow meter, Onicon model F -3500 or equal. 1. The flow station shall operate at + 1% of reading from 2 -20 ft /sec and + 0.02 ft/sec below 2 ft /sec. 2. The output signal shall be linear in either 0 -5 VDC, 0 -10 VDC, or 4 - 20 mA. 3. Unit shall be removable by hand without system shutdown or drain. 2.09 PORTABLE SERVICE TOOL A. General: Provide a minimum of one (1) portable service tool with the system to allow commissioning, adjustment, and diagnosis of the zone and local controllers. If different types of portable service tools are required for programming of zone controllers versus local controllers, provide one (1) of each type. All programming shall utilize English language descriptors. Manufacturers which utilize portable service tools which require the user to translate HEX decimal, binary, or numerical syntax shall provide one (1) laptop computer with the hardware and software required to meet the specified programming capabilities. B. The portable service tool shall have the following capabilities: 1. Readout of each input and output value. 2. Database programming of input and output definitions, setpoints, and control parameters. 3. Manual override of all digital outputs, analog outputs, and application modes (occupied /unoccupied /standby) and control modes (heating /cooling /deadband). 4. Download of all stored database parameters with a single keystroke for cloning typical controllers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following activities: 1. Coordination between Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local authorities and the design team. 2. Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout. 3. Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning for project coordination and as -built drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-13 3.02 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough -in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division -26 sections of these specifications. B. The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices. C. Number -code or color -code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. D. All line voltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this section, shall be provided by this section. 3.03 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Design Professional requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the system will be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time. B. Field Equipment Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end to end test such that: 1. All output channels shall be commanded (on /off, stop /start, adjust, etc.) and their operation verified. 2. All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3. All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value. 4. If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5. Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6. Selected time and setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. C. As -Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, Contractor shall submit as -built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "3" complete 11 x 17 as -built drawing sets to the Owner. As -built sets printed using high resolution laser printer may be provided on 8 -1/2" x 11" drawings. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2. An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3. An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall be shown where applicable. 4. A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform programming functions. 5. A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and all routines used by the system. 6. Flow charts of the overall system configuration. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-14 7. Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. 8. A copy of the warranty. 9. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 10. Recommended spare parts list. E. As -built drawings and sequence of operation to be provided on back of door at each control panel for field reference. F. Upon completion of project, DDC Contractor shall adjust and validate all thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators, relays, instruments and devices provided under this section in conjunction and coordinated with Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. 3.04 TRAINING A. Contractor shall provide to the Design Professional a training class outline prior to any scheduled training. B. Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians. Refer to Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions for minimum times. C. The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system to include as a minimum: 1. HVAC System overview. 2. Operation of Control System. 3. Function of each Component. 4. System Operating Procedures. 5. Programming Procedures. 6. Maintenance Procedures. 3.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty: The control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal use and service, with the exception of control valves with a five (5) year warranty. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts the system. 3.06 SPARES A. Provide one each of the following spare parts: 1. Room Sensor 2. Velocity Sensor 3. Zone Controller Board (one of each type) 4. Local Controller Board (one of each type) END OF SECTION 23 0900 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 12.137 230900-15 SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of hydronic piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. 2. Insulation of hydronic piping is specified in other Division -23 sections, and is included as work of this section. 3. Installation of valves for hydronic piping system is specified in other Division -23 sections and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping ". B. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with the "Uniform Mechanical Code ". C. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with the "International Mechanical Code ". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's material data and installation methods for each mechanical grooved and roll grooved piping system to be provided. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Grooved Piping Systems 1. Gruvlok by Anvil International 2. Victaulic MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -1 B. Copper Pressure -Seal Fittings 1. Viega Pro Press 2. NIBCO Press System C. Expansion tanks, air separator, system fill pressure valve, air vents and other hydronic accessories 1. Amtrol/Thrush 2. Bell & Gossett 3. Taco 4. Wheatley 5. Spirotherm 6. Armstrong 7. Patterson Pump D. Pressure & Temperature Test Stations 1. Peterson Equipment Co. 2. Flow Design (Autoflow) E. Automatic Flow Control Valves (for use of heat pumps) 1. Flow Design Inc. (Autoflow) 2. Griswold 3. Pro Hydronic Specialties 4. HCI Terminator F. Manual Balancing Valves (for use of water coils) 1. Taco 2. Bell & Gossett 3. Tour & Andersson 4. Armstrong 5. Flow Design Inc. (Flow Set) 6. HCI Terminator 7. Pro Hydronic Specialties G. Strainers 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H. Ch Flow Design Inc. (Autoflow) SF Equipment Griswold Pro Hydronic Specialties Keckley emical Treatment Feeder 1. Neptune 2. Wingert 3. General Treatment Products 4. HCI Terminator I. Cooling Tower Chemical Treatment 1. Ecolab J. Glycol Make -Up Package 1. Wessels 2. General Treatment Products 3. JL Wingert MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -2 K. Glycol 1. Dow Chemical 2 Houghton Chemical L. Triple Duty Valve 1. Amtrol /Thrush 2. Bell & Gossett 3. Taco 4. Armstrong 5. Paco 6. Patterson Pump M. Heat Pump Hose Kits (including strainers and automatic flow control valves) 1. Flow Design Inc. (Autoflow) 2. Griswold 3. Hays 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ASME B31.9 "Code For Building Services Piping" where applicable, base pressure rating on hydronic piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in hydronic piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Valves: Refer to Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. D. Expansion Compensation: Refer to Section 23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 23 0519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping. F. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. 2.03 PIPE: Material Service A. Copper water tube, hard temper, ASTM B88. Type L Type M B. Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A120* * ASTM A120 is for normal use only. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 Heating water. Chilled water. Heat pump water. Above ground condensate drain lines. As permitted by local code. Heat pump water. Heating water. Chilled water. HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 -3 2.04 FITTINGS: A. Copper water tube cast bronze or wrought copper: 1. Solder joint type. ANSI B16.18 and B16.22 -63. 2. Pressure -Seal pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22. O -rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. Installation per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Mechanical grooved and roll - groove copper piping system and fittings: may be used as approved by code for copper piping. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Malleable iron fittings, 125 pound standard flat band water pattern. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Standard radius weld fittings and weld neck or slip - on flanges, same material and strength as pipe. 3. Mechanical grooved and roll - groove steel piping system and fittings: May be used as approved by code for black steel, stainless steel and galvanized steel. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 JOINTS A. Copper water tube: 1. Use non - corrosive 95 -5 tin - antimony solder, cut pipe square, clean, ream and polish tube ends and inner surfaces of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. 2. Pressure -Seal pipe joining system, copper press fittings, 1/2" to 4" in diameter. ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22. O -rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. 3. Mechanical grooved and roll grooved couplings: Grooved couplings may be used as approved by code for copper piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Steel Pipe: 1. Threaded pipe (2" dia and smaller): Make joints using Teflon tape applied to male threads only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full size of bore. For fuel piping and lubricating oil piping, joint sealing material shall be resistant to petroleum products. 2. Welded pipe (2 1/2" dia and larger): Welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI - B31.3 "Code for Power Piping." 3. Mechanical grooved and roll grooved couplings: Grooved couplings may be used as approved by code for black steel, stainless steel and galvanized steel piping. Gasket type to be used shall be appropriate for intended service. All components shall be by one manufacturer. System installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.06 NIPPLES AND UNIONS A. All nipples shall conform to size, weight and strength of adjoining pipe. When length of unthreaded portion of nipple is less than 1 -1/2 ", use extra strong nipple; do not use close nipples. B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions, for pipe 2 -1/2" and over use flanged unions. For steel pipe use black or galvanized malleable iron unions, to conform to pipe with ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -4 C. Install unions in the following locations so that a minimum amount of pipe need be disassembled: 1. Long runs, at intervals of 80 feet. 2. In by -pass around equipment, valves, and controls. 3. In connections to equipment. 4. Where indicated on drawings. D. Dielectric unions shall be installed between any connection of copper pipe and ferrous piping or equipment. In grooved piping systems, provide Clearflo by Victaulic. 2.07 EXPANSION TANKS A. Furnish and install pre- charged steel expansion tanks as indicated on plans. Tanks shall have replaceable heavy duty Butyl rubber bladder, a 1" or 1 -1/2" NPT system connection, 3/4" NPT drain, and a .302 " -32 charging valve connection (standard tire valve) to facilitate the on -site charging of the tank to meet system requirements. The tank shall be fitted with lifting rings and a floor mounting skirt for vertical installation. The tank shall be constructed in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and stamped 125 PSI working pressure. 2.08 AIR SEPARATOR A. Furnish and install air separators as indicated on plans. B. The unit shall have an internal stainless steel air collector tube with 5/32" diameter perforations and 63% open area designed to direct accumulated air to an air vent via an NPT connection at top of unit. Air vent shall be Bell & Gossett Model 107A High Capacity Air Vent or approved equal. C. The unit shall have a removable galvanized steel system strainer with 3/16" diameter perforations and a free area of not less than five times the cross - sectional area of the connecting pipe. A blowdown connection shall be provided to facilitate routine cleaning of the strainer. Provide separate strainer if not integral with air separator. D. Air collection efficiency shall be 95% or better, the combined pressure drop through the air separator and strainer shall be less than 1 1/2 feet of water and velocity shall be less than four feet per second. Manufacturer shall furnish data sheet specifying air collection efficiency, pressure drop, and velocity at rated flow. 2.09 SYSTEM FILL PRESSURE VALVE A. Iron body, brass trim with field adjustable pressure setting. Bell & Gossett Model No. 12. 2.10 AIR VENTS A. Manual Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 17SR. B. Automatic Air Vents: Bell & Gossett Model No. 7. 2.11 PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS A. Supply and install in an accessible position, Peterson Equipment Company #110 "Pete's Plug ", or equal, 1/4" MPT fitting ( "110 -XL for insulated piping) to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" O. D. in the supply and return piping of all chillers, coils, fan coil units, heat exchangers, water pumps, and on all hot water and chilled water, supply and return mains. Fitting shall be solid brass with two (2) valve cores or Nordel (maximum 275 deg. F. at 500 PSI), fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket and shall be rated at 1000 PSIG. Single valve core or Neoprene valve core devices are unacceptable. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -5 B. Meters and Instruments - The installing contractor shall supply and present to the owner upon completion of testing, one Series 1500 -XL pressure and temperature test kit, consisting of a 0 -100 PSI, 0 -230 ft. of water pressure gauge with No. 500 gauge adapter attached, a 25 -125 deg. F. pocket testing thermometer, a 0 -220 deg. F. pocket testing thermometer, a No. 500 gauge adapter, and a protective carrying case. 2.12 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES (for use of heat pumps) A. General: Contractor shall install automatic pressure compensating flow control valves where indicated on the details on the drawings. Provide with integral ball valve equal to Autoflow Model AC. Valves shall have the capacities and pressure differential characteristics as indicated and conform to the following specifications: 1. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within +/- 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. 2. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self- contained, open- chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be passivated stainless steel. 3. The cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring - loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate and self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. 4. Valves shall provide control over a minimum range of 2 psig to 32 psig. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. 5. Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available. 6. All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsibility. 7. Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with two extended Pete's Plug temperature /pressure test ports. 8. Provide identification, both a metal identification tag, with chain, and a label on the valve for each installed valve. The identification shall provide zone identification, valve model number, rated flow in GPM and differential pressure range. 9. Valves installed on chilled water and two -pipe cooling /heating water systems to be provided with valve handle extension. 10. Provide replacement cartridges for up to 10% of units as required to adjust flow or pressure range during balancing. 2.13 MANUAL BALANCING VALVES (for use of water coils) A. Bell & Gossett Model CB "Circuit Setter" or equal. B. Construction: 1. 1/2" to 3" ball type valve with bronze body /brass ball construction, glass and carbon fitted TFE seat rings, extended readout ports with integral check valves and gasketed caps, drain port, calibrated nameplate and position indicator, memory stops, and NPT connectors, rated for 300 psig at 250 °F. 2. 4" to 8" plug type valve with heavy duty cast iron body, bronze seat, replaceable bronze disc with EPDM seal insert, stainless steel stem, readout ports with integral check valves MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -6 and gasketed caps, drain port, calibrated nameplate and position indicator, memory stops, and flanged connection rated for 175 psig at 250 °F. C. Valves to seal leak -tight at maximum rated working pressure. D. Valves to be selected for 5 ft. pressure drop at full open setting and design water flow. 2.14 STRAINERS A. Strainers shall be combination valve, Y- strainer and union with two extended temperature /pressure test ports and hose end drain valve with cap and chain. B. Strainers shall be equal to Autoflow Model YC as indicated on details and drawings. Y - strainers shall be 20 mesh stainless screen with removable cap. C. Valves: 1. Two inches and smaller: Ball valves (see Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). 2. Larger than two inches: Butterfly valves (see Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). 2.15 SUPPLY AND RETURN HOSES A. All hoses shall be a minimum of 12inches in length and equipped with swivel end connections at terminal unit. All end connections shall be crimped to meet stated pressure ratings. Serrated /slip fit connections are not acceptable. B. Hose materials shall be high quality polyethylene pipe insulation over a stainless steel braided inner core and withstand working pressure of 375 PSI (1/2 "), 300 PSI (3/4 "), 225 PSI (1 "), 200 PSI (1 -1/4 ") at 211 deg. F and 175 PSI (1 -1/2 ") and 150 PSI (2 ") at 200 deg. F. 2.16 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FEEDER A. General 1. Furnish and install a water treatment system including chemicals for the loop water system for the control of system corrosion. The water treatment equipment shall be installed by Contractor under the supervision of the water treatment company and shall be responsible for check -out and start -up of all water treatment equipment. Provide a written, certified report upon completion of startup. The system shall include the following: a. One 5 gallon bypass filter /feeder with strainer and 25 micron filter. Filter /feed shall be installed at a height for convenient access. The bypass feeder, 3/4" inlet and outlet gate valves, 1/2" drain valve, reducing tee, unions and nipples provided shall be suitable for use at 125 psig. b. Initial chemical treatment chemicals. 2. Provide one year of chemicals and service by a qualified, full -time representative of the water treatment company. 2.17 COOLING TOWER CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Furnish and install a water treatment system including chemicals for the cooling tower water system. The treatment system shall be meter initiated in the amount of chemical injection and cooling tower bleed -off shall be in proportion to the amount of makeup water entering the system. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -7 B. The water treatment equipment shall be installed by Contractor under the supervision of the water treatment company and shall also be responsible for check -out and start -up of all water treatment equipment. The system shall include the following: One 2 inch water meter Carlon, 2" JSJ200, equipped with an electrical contacting head. The electrical contacting head shall be of the micro - switch type. The closure of frequency shall be pre - selected such that the two interval timers shall have sufficient time to time out between cycles. 2. One dual sequence timer shall contain two interval timers each adjustable from 0 - 5 minutes and be of the automatic resetting type. The interval timers shall be field adjustable for simultaneous or sequential operation. Each interval timer shall have at least one set of normally open SPST contacts rated at 10 amps at 125 volts AC. The dual sequence timer, solid state dual timer Model LEP -DST, shall operate at 125 volts AC, 60 cycles. Both interval timers shall be mounted in a single enclosure. A 14 terminal barrier strip shall be included within the dual sequence timer for all external connections. The dual sequence timer shall be equipped with pilot lights to indicate power on, timing cycle in progress, push to test button, fuse and an on -off switch. One treatment chemical feed pump which shall be an electronic pulse, positive displacement type pump, PCP Model 10681 -11P. Output volume shall be adjustable while pump is in operation from 0 to a maximum capacity of 14 gallons per day. Adjustment shall be by means of two dial knobs; one for changing stroke length and the other for changing stroke frequency. The chemical metering pump shall be capable without a hydraulic- backed diaphragm of injecting chemicals against pressures of up to 100 psig. 4. To eliminate the need for a pressure relief valve, the pump shall automatically stop pulsing where discharge pressure exceeds pump pressure rating by not more than 35 %. The chemical metering pump housing shall be of chemical resistant glass fiber reinforced thermoplastic. All exposed fasteners shall be of stainless steel. The chemical metering pump valve shall be ball type with ceramic ball seating on a combination valve seat and seal ring. The valve seat and seal ring shall be renewable by replacing only the combination seat /seal ring which shall be made of Viton. Fittings and connections at the pump head shall be sized for 3/8" OD tubing. 6. Initial chemical treatment chemicals. C. Furnish and install all materials, chemicals and components required to passivate cooling tower in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include all costs associated with monitoring cooling tower water throughout duration of passivation as required by cooling tower manufacturer. Furnish passivation certificate to demonstrate compliance with manufacturer's requirements. 2.18 GLYCOL MAKE -UP SYSTEM A. Provide fully automated and autonomous glycol make -up package mounted on a sturdy steel frame with 1/2" system connection and factory preset 12 psig (field adjustable) discharge for each glycol system. B. Package shall be equal to Wessels Model GMP -13050 with the following features: 1. Low level cut -off and alarm arrangement including a 110V signal for remote alarm. 2. Isolation valves. 3. Strainer. 4. Pressure tank with pressure control. 5. Pressure reducing valve and gauge. 6. Translucent polyethylene solution container with lid designed to accommodate relief valve piping. 7. Magnetic starter. 8. 110V, 60 Hz motor and controls. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -8 C. Ethylene Glycol (for heat pump water and heating water of 1911 building) 1. The fluid shall be an industrially inhibited ethylene glycol (phosphate- based). Specifically excluded are automotive antifreezes or any formulation s containing silicates. 2. The fluid shall be dyed to facilitate leak detection. 3. The fluid shall be easily analyzed for glycol concentration and inhibitor level, and easily reinhibited using replacement inhibitor readily available from the fluid manufacturer. 4. For a system containing more than 250 gallons of fluid, annual analysis shall be provided free of charge by the fluid manufacturer. Manufacturer shall also market convenient analytical test aids for use by the operator of a smaller system. 5. The fluid shall pass ASTM D1384 (less than 0.5 mils penetration per year for all system metals). 6. Provide solution premixed with deionized water to maintain 30% concentration. 2.19 TRIPLE DUTY VALVE A. Furnish and install as shown on plans, a Triple Duty valve designed to perform the functions of a non -slam check valve, throttling valve, shut off valve, calibrated balancing valve and system flowmeter. The valve shall be of heavy -duty cast iron construction with standard 125 psig ANSI flanged connections, and rated for a maximum working pressure of 175 psig at 250 deg. F. The valve shall be fitted with an EPDM soft seat, replaceable bronze disc, stainless steel stem and chatter preventing spring. The valve design shall permit repacking under full system pressure. B. Each valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves (with integral check valve) for taking differential pressure readings across the orifice to accurately balance the system to specified design conditions. 2.20 HEAT PUMP HOSE KITS A. The heat pump hose kits shall include the following accessories, see plans: Automatic Flow Control Valves: a. General: Contractor shall install automatic pressure compensating flow control valves where indicated on the details on the drawings. Provide with integral ball valve equal to Autoflow Model AC. Valves shall have the capacities and pressure differential characteristics as indicated and conform to the following specifications: b. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within +/- 5% accuracy over an operating pressure differential of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self- contained, open - chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be passivated stainless steel. The cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring - loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate and self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -9 e. Valves shall provide control over a minimum range of 2 psig to 32 psig. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. f. Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available. g. All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsibility. h. Each automatic flow control valve shall be furnished with two Pete's Plug temperature /pressure test ports. Provide identification, both a metal identification tag, with chain, and a label on the valve for each installed valve. The identification shall provide zone identification, valve model number, rated flow in GPM and differential pressure range. Provide replacement cartridges for up to 10% of units as required to adjust flow or pressure range during balancing. 2. Strainers a. Strainers shall be combination valve, Y- strainer and union with two temperature /pressure test ports, one on either side of strainer, and hose end drain valve with cap and chain. b. Strainers shall be equal to Autoflow Model YC as indicated on details and drawings. Y - strainers shall be 20 mesh stainless screen with removable cap. C. Valves: 1) Two inches and smaller: Ball valves (see Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). 2) Larger than two inches: Butterfly valves (see Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping). 3. Supply and Return Hoses a. All hoses shall be a minimum of 12inches in length and equipped with swivel end connections at terminal unit. All end connections shall be crimped to meet stated pressure ratings. Serrated /slip fit connections are not acceptable. b. Hose materials shall be high quality polyethylene pipe insulation over a stainless steel braided inner core and withstand working pressure of 375 PSI (1/2 "), 300 PSI (3/4 "), 225 PSI (1 "), 200 PSI (1 -1/4 ") at 211 deg. F and 175 PSI (1 -1/2 ") and 150 PSI (2 ") at 200 deg. F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's recommendations, ASME B31.9 "Code for Building Services Piping ", and as required to meet the intent of the documents. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -10 B. Valves 1. Refer to Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. 3. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more hydronic terminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on inlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated. 5. Drain Valves: Install on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain hydronic piping system. 6. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. D. Expansion Compensation Products: Refer to Section 23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping. E. Meters and Gauges: Refer to Section 23 0519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping. F. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.03 HYDRONIC PIPING A. Install pipe for all hydronic systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. B. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other trades. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. C. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. D. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. E. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. F. Install automatic temperature control valves and other items as called for to be installed in piping and furnished by Section 23 0900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. G. Piping up to 2" diameter shall be screwed, piping 2 -1/2" diameter and over shall be welded. 3.04 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Air separator shall not be supported by piping; install pipe hanger at inlet and outlet. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -11 B. Install pressure reducing and fill valves as indicated and make cold water connection. Install fast fill by -pass line with globe valve. C. Install manual air vents for each terminal unit coil and at other points likely to entrap air. D. Maintain access to pressure and temperature test stations. E. Install backflow preventers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Installing Contractor shall provide testing by a certified backflow assembly tester at the time of installation as required by the Uniform Plumbing Code. Install air gap fitting and pipe to nearest floor drain. F. Replace up to 10% of automatic flow control cartridges as required to adjust flow or pressure range during balancing. Coordinate with TAB Contractor as required. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect hydronic piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Install shutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection. B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with valve and union on outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent on element in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing cocks behind valve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatic temperature control valve with unions between valve and element on supply line. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Test hydronic piping in accordance with testing requirements of Division -23 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning, Flushing and Inspecting: Clean, flush and inspect hydronic piping systems in accordance with requirements of Division -23 Basic Materials and Methods, Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions. B. Chemical Treatment: Refill hydronic piping systems, adding caustic soda to maintain ph of 8.0 to 8.5 and sodium sulfate in amount of 1/3 caustic soda or to maintain residual of 30- to 40 -ppm in system. Add trisodium phosphate to make hardness of 0 -ppm and residual of approximately 30 -ppm in system. Repeat measurements daily with system under full circulation and apply chemicals to adjust levels until no change is apparent. C. Chemical Treatment: Fill system with premixed glycol /deionized water heat transfer fluid of specified concentration. Install fluid in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor to provide a minimum of two weeks advanced notice so at Design Professional's option, Design Professional can witness filling of system. END OF SECTION 23 2113 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PIPING 12.137 232113 -12 SECTION 23 2123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of HVAC pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: 1. In -line Pumps 2. End Suction Base Mounted Pumps C. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work; not work of this section: 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Design, manufacturer and install HVAC pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps ". B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start -up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PUMPS 12.137 232123-1 B. Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pumps 1. Aurora 2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3. Taco, Inc. 4. Armstrong 5. Grundfos / Paco 6. Patterson Pump B. General: Provide factory tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. 2.02 IN -LINE PUMPS A. General: Provide in -line centrifugal pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. B. Type: Single- stage, close - coupled, vertical split case design, horizontal mount, permanently lubricated type, designed for 175 psi working pressure, and 225 deg. F continuous water temperature. Construction: Cast iron body with suction and discharge flanges, gauge (suction and discharge), vent and drain ports. Solid steel shaft with bronze shaft - sleeve, mounted on permanently lubricated, sealed ball- bearings. Internally flushed, carbon, mechanical seals. The pump internals shall be capable of being services without disturbing piping connections. C. Impeller: Cast bronze, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking capscrew or nut. D. Coupling: A flexible type coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor. E. Motor: Motors through 1 HP shall be resilient mounted, motors over 1.5 HP shall be rigid mounted. Motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and maintenance free. Motors shall be non - overloading at any point on the pump curve and shall meet NEMA specifications. F. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. 2.03 BASE MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS A. General: Install Base Mounted End - Suction Pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. B. Type: Base mounted, single stage, end suction design with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing assembly without disturbing piping connections. Pumps shall be designed for 175 psi working pressure, and 225 deg. F continuous water temperature. C. Construction: Class 30 cast iron body with integrally -cast pedestal support feet, suction and discharge flanges, gauge (suction and discharge), vent and drain ports. Solid steel shaft with bronze shaft - sleeve, mounted on heavy -duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Internally flushed, carbon, mechanical seals. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. D. Impeller: Cast bronze, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking stainless steel cap screw or nut. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PUMPS 12.137 232123-2 E. Coupling: A flexible type, center drop -out design coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor. Pumps for variable speed application shall have suitable coupling design for application. Coupling shield shall be OSHA complaint and include an inspection window. F. Motor: Motors shall have heavy -duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Motors shall be non - overloading at any point on the pump curve Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned by Contractor after installation. G. Base: Structural steel or fabricated steel channel with fully enclosed sides and ends, and securely welded cross members. Grouting area shall be fully opened. H. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. I. Suction Diffuser: Provide at each base mounted pump a Suction Diffuser of size and type noted on drawings. Units shall consist of angle type cast iron body with steel straightening vanes and steel combination Diffuser Strainer - Orifice Cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh bronze strainer which shall be removed after system start -up. Orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head and shall have a free area equal to five times cross section area of pump suction opening. Straightening vanes shall extend the full length of the orifice cylinder and shall be replaceable. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable with Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A. General: Install HVAC pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B. Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C. Support: Install in -line pumps, supported from piping system. See Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment for vibration isolation of piping system. 2. Support: Grout base mounted pumps to housekeeping pads with non - shrinking grout in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Level pumps as required prior to grouting. D. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer for power wiring. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PUMPS 12.137 232123-3 E. Piping Connections: Refer to Division -23 HVAC piping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges and supports as indicated, including the following: 1. Flexible connector in suction and discharge line of base mounted pumps. 2. Shut -off valve in suction line. 3. Check valve, balancing /shut -off valve in discharge line. At Contractor's option, an indicating type butterfly valve may be used in lieu of balancing cock and shut -off valve. 4. Compound gauge with turn cocks connected between pump suction and discharge. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative. B. Start -up: Lubricate pumps before start -up. Start -up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: Clean factory- finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch -up paint. END OF SECTION 23 2123 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HYDRONIC PUMPS 12.137 232123-4 SECTION 23 2300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1. Extent of refrigerant piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. a. Refrigerant suction line piping between compressors and cooling coils. b. Refrigerant liquid line piping between liquid receivers and cooling coils. 2. Insulation of refrigerant piping is specified in other Division -23 sections, and is included as work of this section. 3. Installation of valves for refrigerant piping system is specified in other Division -23 sections and is included as work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping ", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 psig. B. Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration ". C. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigeration piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Mechanical Code ". D. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigeration piping in accordance with "International Mechanical Code ". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 "Code for Refrigeration Piping" where applicable, base pressure rating on refrigeration piping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in refrigeration piping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Valves: Refer to Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. C. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section - 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. D. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REFRIGERANT PIPING 12.137 232300-1 2.02 PIPE: Material Service A. Copper refrigeration tube, hard Refrigerant lines. temper. Type L -ACR. ASTM B88. 2.03 FITTINGS: A. Copper refrigerant tubes: 1. 3/4" and Smaller: Cast copper -alloy for flared copper tubes. 2. 7/8" through 4 1/8': Wrought- copper, solder joints. 2.04 JOINTS A. Copper refrigerant tube: 1. 3/4" and Smaller: Flared. 2. 7/8" through 4 1/8': Soldered, silver -lead solder, ANSI /ASTM B 32, Grade 96 TS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturer's recommendations, ANSI B31.5 "Code for Refrigerant Piping" and as required to meet the intent of the documents. B. Refrigerant Piping 1. Install pipe for all refrigerant systems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. 2. Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other refrigerant items. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. 3. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage. Pitch piping in direction of oil return to compressor. 4. Check all piping for interference with other trades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. 5. Where rough -in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough -in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing -in. 6. Where refrigeration piping is buried, encase piping and insulation loosely in schedule 40 PVC and ventilate PVC pipe to allow vapor line to see outside air temperature. Ensure PVC pipe is free draining to prevent water buildup. Provide a riser trap and slope refrigeration line to trap. Where buried lengths exceed 25', provide a 90 minute timer wired parallel with thermostat control to operate unit every 90 minutes to maintain safe slugging levels. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REFRIGERANT PIPING 12.137 232300-2 C. Valves 1. Refer to Section 23 0523 - General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. D. Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. E. Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. F. Install specialties and accessories as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes and standards. G. Equipment Connections 1. General: Connect refrigerant piping system to refrigerant equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. H. Field Quality Control 1. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, test refrigerant piping with electronic leak detector. System must be entirely leak -free. 2. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 23 2300 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation REFRIGERANT PIPING 12.137 232300-3 SECTION 23 3113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and erect low pressure ductwork as required by the drawings and this section. B. Low pressure ductwork shall apply to the following 1. Supply: Downstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pressure. 2. Return: Upstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pressure. 3. Exhaust: Upstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pressure. 4. Transfer & Combustion: Less than 1" static pressure. 5. Outdoor & Relief: Upstream /Downstream of unit, less than 1" static pressure. 6. Laundry Vent: Downstream of dryer, less than 1" static pressure. C. High velocity ductwork shall apply to the following: 1. Supply & Ventilation: Upstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 2. Return: Downstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 3. Exhaust: Downstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conditioned Space: An area inside the building which is heated and /or cooled. B. Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (e.g., ceiling plenums). C. Untempered Space: an area inside the building which is not conditioned and is not tempered (e.g., attic spaces). D. Exterior: An area outside the building (e.g., roof mounted items). 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Duct and plenum construction, metal gauges, reinforcing, methods of supporting and hanging and other sheet metal work as called for shall be in accordance with the following standards: 1. "SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards ", Second Edition 1995, by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B. Low pressure ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. Supply & Relief - Rectangular ...........................1" positive Supply & Relief — Round .... ............................... 2" positive Return & Outdoor - Rectangular .......................1" negative Return & Outdoor - Round . ............................... 2" negative Exhaust, Rectangular ........... .............................1" negative Exhaust, Round ................... .............................2" negative Transfer & Combustion Air — Rectangular ........ 1 " positive Transfer & Combustion Air — Round ................. 2" positive Laundry Vent — Round .... .............................1" positive MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -1 C. High velocity ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Supply & Ventilation - Rectangular .................... 4" positive Supply & Ventilation - Round .............................4" positive Return - Rectangular .......... ............................... 4" negative Return - Round ..................... .............................4" negative Exhaust - Rectangular ........ ............................... 4" negative Exhaust - Round ................. ............................... 4" negative D. NFPA Compliance: All liner and covering materials shall have maximum UL Flame Spread Index of 25, and maximum Smoke Developed Index of 50, and shall meet all requirements of NFPA -90A. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit 1/4 scale shop fabrication shop drawings. 2. Submit shop drawings of elbows and fittings showing static pressure loss charted for air quantities involved in each. B. Two copies of duct leak testing results. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL 181: Factory -Made Duct Materials and Air Duct Connections. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect shop- fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. 1. Stored materials subject to rejection due to damage. B. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. All sheet metal work shall be constructed of prime quality resquared tight coat galvanized steel, except where other type material is specified. Manufacturer's name and U.S. gauge number shall appear on each sheet. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -2 B. Duct Lining Materials 1. Certain -Teed 2. Owens Corning Fiberglass 3. Johns - Manville 4. PPG 5. Knauf 2.02 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK— LOW VELOCITY A. General: Provide factory- fabricated or shop fabricated duct and fittings. B C D Materials: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI /ASTM A527, lockforming quality, with ANSI /ASTM A525, G90 zinc coatings, mill phosphatized. Gauge: Comply with code requirements for minimum gauge thickness for various sizes. Fittings: 1. Construct branches, bends, and elbows with centerline radius of not less than duct 1.0 times the width (diameter), where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on drawings, square elbows with air turns shall be used. 2. Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall be minimum 1:3. 3. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh Lock or snaplock equal per SMACNA. Lateral seams shall be slip drive or standing. Slip seams and sheet metal screws not permitted. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK —HIGH VELOCITY A. Single -Wall Ducts: Spiral- wound, zinc - coated steel with individual formed steel tees and elbows. 1 2 Single -Wall Round Duct Gauges: Duct Diameter (Inches Up to 8 9 to 22 23 to 36 37 to 50 51 to 60 61 and Over Minimum USS Gauge Spiral Lock Seam 26 24 22 20 18 16 Single -Wall Oval Duct Gauges, Factory -Made with Spiral Lock Seams: Maximum Width Minimum in Inches USS Gauge Reinforcement Longitudinal Centers Up to 10 24 None 11 to 20 22 4 foot centers 21 to 40 18 2 x 2 x 1/8 angle 2.5 foot centers 41 to 72 16 2 x 2 x 3/16 angle 2 foot centers B. Flexible Ductwork, Insulated: Suitable for -20 °F to 220 °F temperature range and minimum 12 inches w.c. working pressure. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Flexmaster: Type 3 b. Genflex: IHPL (1 -1/2" thick insulation) C. Thermaflex: M -KC (1 -1/2" thick insulation) MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -3 2. Inner Liner: Glass fiber, PVC coating, factory - clinched in cold - rolled galvanized steel spiral, or with spiral wire permanently bonded to fabric, UL listed, complying with NFPA 90. 3. Outer Jacket: 1 -1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. fibrous glass, with flame- resistant PVC vapor barrier. C. Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket equal to United McGill AOBXFDDC. D. Fabrication 1. Directional Change: a. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius minimum 1.0 times width of duct on center line. 2. Size Change: a. Increase and decrease duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 150, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3. Seams and Joints: In accordance with SMACNA standards. a. Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. b. Where spiral ductwork is exposed, assemble duct to duct joints with spiral seam following continuous helicoid pattern across joints. 2.04 DOUBLE -WALL, SPIRAL ROUND /OVAL, INSULATED A. General: Provide factory fabricated double -wall, spiral round /oval, insulated ductwork and fittings of dimensions as indicated on the drawings. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Semco Incorporated 2. Steelcraft Corp. 3. United Sheet Metal Division, United McGill Corp. 4. Norlock C. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ANSI /ASTM A653. Finish shall be galvanized coating. D. Construction: 1. Outer Casing: Round spiral lock seam or flat oval construction. 2. Inner duct: Minimum 0.028 inch perforated galvanized steel with 23% open area perforations. 3. Insulation: 1 inch thick fiberglass, thermal conductivity of 0.27 Btu /h /sq. ft. /F /inch. E. Fittings: Equal to duct construction. 1. Construct branches, bends, and elbows with centerline radius of not less than 1.0 times the duct width (diameter). Where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on the drawings, square elbows with air turns shall be used. 2. Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall not exceed 15 deg, unless noted on the drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -4 F. Joints: All field joints shall be made with a 2" slip -fit or slip coupling. All flanges shall be factory installed. G. All branch connections in exposed areas shall be made with taps mounted on spiral duct. Taps on rolled duct bodies will not be allowed. 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL EXHAUST DUCTS — LOW VELOCITY A. General: Fabricate all exhaust ducts and supports of ASTM A167, Type 304L, 16 gauge, stainless steel. Welded construction to be in accordance with ANSI /AWS standard D9.1 -90. 2.06 STAINLESS STEEL EXHAUST DUCTS — HIGH VELOCITY A. General: Fabricate all exhaust ducts and supports of ASTM A167, Type 304L stainless steel, minimum 16 gauge construction. B. Construct branches, bends, and elbows with center line radius if not less than 1 1/2 times duct width (diameter). C. Slopes for transitions shall be minimum 1:3. D. All joints, constructions and fittings shall be welded in accordance with ANSI /AWS Standard D 9.1 -90. 2.07 PLENUMS A. Plenums shall be fabricated of same material as duct connecting to plenum; shall be two metal gauges heavier than gauge of largest duct connecting to plenum. 2.08 DUCT SEALING — LOW VELOCITY A. All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32 -14 or DuctMate ProSeal. Apply and install joint sealer per manufacturer's recommendations. In general, apply to male end of coupling and /or interior of female fitting. After connection, brush sealant over the assembled joint and screws with a 2" to 3" wide band. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. B. Alternate Sealing System: 1. Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. 2. The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. 3. The standard Ductmate System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate -JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. C. Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class C. 2.09 DUCT SEALING - HIGH VELOCITY A. All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32 -14 or Ductmate ProSeal. Apply and install joint sealer per manufacturer's recommendations. In general, apply to male end of coupling and /or interior of female fitting. After connection, brush sealant over the assembled joint and screws with a 2" to 3" wide band. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -5 B. Alternate Sealing System: Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. 2. The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. The standard Ductmate System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate -JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. C. Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class A. 2.10 DUCT LINER A. Lining materials shall be Type 'A' Duct Liner, Certain -Teed Coated Ultralite 150, one and one half (1 1/2) pounds per cubic foot density. B. Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or covered as scheduled on plans. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1 -1/2" covering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight and quiet systems, capable of performing each indicated service. 1. Install each run with minimum joints. 2. Align ductwork accurately at connections and with internal surfaces smooth. 3. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and prevent buckling and vibration. B. Ducts shall be installed following essentially lines indicated on drawings, install offsets, angles and transitions as may be required to avoid interferences with other work. Maintain full capacity of ducts at offsets, angles and transitions except where drawings indicate use of reducing or increasing transitions. General: Each duct section shall be rigidly supported from structure. Attach hangers to structure with expansion plugs, concrete inserts, beam clamps or other approved means. Rubber in -shear isolators shall be installed in hangers for all ducts in equipment rooms, to prevent vibration transmission to the structure. C. Install hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards general locations: Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, clinch collar branch connections and the first branch elbows after nested splits. 2. Locate hangers of duct penetrating walls or partitions as though the walls will contribute no support to the duct. Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct. 4. Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than, equal to, but not greater than the specified maximums. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -6 Install hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install additional hangers at maximum allowable intervals or less measured along the heel lines of the elbows. 6. Provide a set of hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal radius elbows. Install one or more supplementary hangers, as necessary, along the inside and outside arcs of large radius elbows of any angle whenever the lengths of these arcs exceed the maximum hanger spacing length for that particular size duct. 7. Provide at least one set of hangers for short duct branches 3 feet or less in length. 8. Provide each duct riser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the shaft opening at each floor. One pair of supports may be used to support more than one duct riser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropriately and proper additional supplementary steel is used at the extra risers. 9. Support duct risers, located between floors that are more than 15 feet high, at each floor and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate supports on very high floors should not exceed 12 feet. Intermediate hangers may be supported from an adjacent wall or hung by rods from supports on the floor above. 10. Provide one or more sets of hangers for equipment in duct runs such as heating coils, heat pumps, etc., as recommended by their manufacturers. D. Locate duct hangers approximately: 1. 2 to 24 inches from flexible connections of fans. 2. 2 to 24 inches from the outlets or flexible connects of VAV control units or mixing boxes. 3. 12 to 36 inches from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 4. 2 to 12 inches from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5. 2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints. 6. 0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the lower elbow of short vertical offsets made with vaned square elbows. The width refers to the dimension of the elbow in the plane of the turn. 7. 0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the bottom and top elbows of vaned square elbow offsets over 8 feet high. One - eighth of the arc in from the ends of bottom and top radius elbows of vertical offsets longer than 8 feet. Short vertical offsets require hangers at the bottom elbow. Likewise, sloping offsets need at least one set of hangers at their lower radius elbow. 6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are the same as specified hanger intervals. 10. 6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by ducts. E. Maximum permitted hanger spacing: Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet may have their hangers spaced up to 8 feet apart. 2. Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 square feet may have their hangers spaced not more than 6 feet apart. Ducts with areas over 10 square feet may have their hangers located up to 4 feet apart. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -7 F. Provide and install locking manual volume dampers in all duct systems as required for controlling air volumes to trunk ducts, branch ducts, outlets and inlets. Provide and install additional volume dampers as required by Testing and Balancing Contractor for balancing of system. G. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct linings. H. Install as indicated on the drawings all duct mounted equipment as specified in other sections. I. Install eccentric reducers with tops of both duct sizes flush to maintain maximum ceiling space below ducts. J. Install underslab ductwork per manufacturers recommendations K. Openings: 1. Provide in ductwork to accommodate access doors, temperature control components and fire dampers. 2. Install access panels for inspection and servicing of all duct mounted equipment: reheat coils, sound attenuators, motorized dampers, smoke and fire dampers. 3. Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap, with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. 4. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation materials inside metal collar. L. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. M. Connections: 1. Connect duct to equipment with flexible fabric, sheet metal clips, screws and washers. 2. At each point where ducts pass through partitions, provide sleeve with space between duct and sleeve packed with insulation and sealed. N. Where ducts pass through fire -rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, seal openings in accordance with Specification Section 23 0500 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.02 DUCT LINER APPLICATION A. Apply duct liner with coated or surface designed to be exposed facing the air stream and adhered with 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. When width exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24 ", additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners spaced 12" maximum centers. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of traverse joints. Coat all exposed joints and edges of traverse joints with a fire retardant adhesive. B. Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct lining. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean ductwork internally, as it is installed, of dust and debris. 2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or where ductwork is to be painted. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -8 B. Temporary Closure: 1. At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering until time connections are to be completed. 3.04 DUCT LEAK TESTING — HIGH VELOCITY A. Tappable and Fume Hood Exhaust Ducts: 1. Testing shall be done before any exterior insulation is applied. 2. Fume hood and tappable exhaust ducts are intended to be virtually without leakage within the building. 3. Each exhaust system shall be capped at all inlet points and at the point of discharge to atmosphere. Fans, dampers and flexible connections shall be included in the testing. 4. Each duct system shall be pressurized to 7 inch water column and shall exhibit a leakage rate of less than 4 cfm regardless of system size or design flow rate. 5. Where several ducts discharge into a large collection duct, the collection duct and each individual exhaust duct may be treated as separate duct systems. B. HVAC Supply and Exhaust Ducts: 1. The system shall be leak tested at the design operating pressure with a total leakage not to exceed 2% of the total design cfm for the system. 2. Carefully seal off all openings (except one for connecting the test equipment) to the riser or run -out section to be tested. 3. Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer of the duct seal to allow for adequate cure time for sealer. 4. Connect test blower, calibrated orifice tube and manometers to the system in accordance with the test equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 5. When the specified test pressure is reached, allow the blower to run for one minute to make sure that the pressure is stabilized. 6. When the pressure is holding steady, measure the air flowing through the orifice tube assembly. 3.05 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE— LOW VELOCITY AIR SYSTEM HVAC Supply, Return General Exhaust Laundry Vent Kitchen Exhaust, Fume Hood Exhaust Underslab Ductwork MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 MATERIAL Steel, Galvanized Aluminum Steel, Stainless, Welded Steel, Galvanized PCD coated METAL DUCTS 233113 -9 3.06 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE — HIGH VELOCITY AIR SYSTFM HVAC Supply Return and General Exhaust Main Exhaust Ducts Kitchen Exhaust Ducts Fume Hood Exhaust Ducts MATFRIAI Steel, Galvanized Stainless Steel, Welded END OF SECTION 23 3113 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation METAL DUCTS 12.137 233113 -10 SECTION 23 3300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of duct accessories is indicated on drawings and by the requirements of this section. B. Types of duct accessories required for project include the following: 1. Fire and Smoke Dampers 2. Sound Attenuators 3. Louvers 4. Volume Dampers /Regulators 5. Flexible Ducts 6. Access Doors 7. Control Dampers 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association ( SMACNA) "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide ". B. Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of duct accessories, except as otherwise indicated. C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers ". D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI /NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems ", pertaining to installation of duct accessories. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for each type of duct accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings for each type of duct accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, and method of fastening or support. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory; include this data in Maintenance Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible ductwork equal to one of the following: 1. Semco 2. Wiremold 3. Thermaflex 4. Valuflex MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 12.137 233300-1 B. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Pottorff 3. Ruskin Manufacturing Co. 4. Leader Industries 5. Greenheck 6. Safe -air / Dowco 2.02 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fire Dampers Sleeves shall be of the length required and shall be of the thickness required by UL 555. Construct frame of 20 gauge galvanized steel. Provide fusible link rated at 160 -165 degrees F (71 -74 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated. All duct mounted fire dampers to be Style B for rectangular ductwork and Style CR /CO for round and oval ductwork such that damper curtain is located outside of airstream. Style types are based on Ruskin fire dampers. 2. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features: a. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type. b. Blade Material: 24 gauge galvanized steel. B. Combination Fire /Smoke Dampers Frame shall be a minimum of 16 gage galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel reinforced at corners. The blades shall be airfoil type, single piece galvanized steel, 14 gage minimum equivalent construction. Blade action shall be opposed. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in the frame. Galvanized bearings shall not be acceptable. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip fastened seals not acceptable) and shall be designed to withstand a minimum of 450 deg. F. Jamb seals shall be non - corrosive stainless steel flexible metal compression type to further ensure smoke management. 2. Each combination fire /smoke damper shall be classified for use for fire resistance ratings of less than 3 hours, in accordance with UL standard 555, and shall further be classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems in accordance with the latest version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers, required by this specification. Testing and UL qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL 555S shall be leakage Class II (10 cfm /ft. at 1" w.g.). As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (to open and close) under HVAC system operating conditions, with pressures of at least 4" w.g. in the closed position, and 2,000 fpm air velocity in the open position. 4. In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 350 deg. F. Appropriate 120V electric actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Manufacturer shall provide factory assembled sleeve of 17" minimum length (contractor to verify requirement). Factory supplied caulked sleeve shall be 20 gage for dampers through 84" wide and 18 gage above 84" wide. Damper and actuator assembly shall be factory cycled 10 times to assure operation. Dampers shall be Ruskin Model FSD 36 or approved equal, exact model to be determined by the nature of the installation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 12.137 233300-2 Each combination fire /smoke damper shall become equipped with a controlled 7 to 15 second heat - actuated release device. The device shall close and lock the fire /smoke damper during test, smoke detection, power failure or fire conditions through actuator closure springs. To prevent duct and HVAC component damage, the damper shall at all times be connected to the actuator for controlled closure in not less than 7 seconds and no more than 15 seconds. Instantaneous damper closure is unacceptable. Damper shall be automatic resettable after test, smoke detection or power failure conditions. After exposure to high temperature or fire, the damper must be inspected prior to reset to ensure proper operation. Release temperatures are 165 deg. F. 6. Blade Position Indicator: Each damper shall be equipped with Ruskin SP100 Switch Package or equal. a. The Switch Package shall include two position indicator switches linked directly to the damper blade to provide the capability of remotely indicating damper blade position. b. Provide with remote mounted position indicating light. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS A. Manual Volume Dampers: Fabricated of same material as ducts, two metal gauges heavier than duct and hammered 1" all around, mounted on 3/8" square rod with saw slot position indicator. 1. Provide end bearings with gasket - Young Regulator Co. Model 666 -FD or equal by Elgin. B. Manual Volume Damper Regulators: 1. Accessible areas: Provide locking position regulator with gasket and handle - Young Regulator Co. Model 403 -FD or equal by Elgin. 2. Inaccessible areas: Provide concealed manual volume damper regulators with cover plate and gear assembly - Young Regulator Co. Model 315 or equal by Elgin. C. Air Turns: Elgin "Air -Tite" or equal shop fabricated. D. Flexible Duct Connection: 30 ounce woven glass fiber, double neoprene coated, fire retardant, waterproof and air tight, suitable for temperatures to 250 deg. F, UL approved. Ventfabric, Inc. "Ventglass ". E. Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 22 gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket and two Young Regulator Company No. 1330 latches, or equal by Elgin. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible duct shall be factory pre - insulated, consisting of vinyl coated spring steel wire helix bonded to vinyl coated fiberglass mesh screen, having one (1) inch nominal fiberglass insulation and vinyl impregnated closely woven fiberglass vapor barrier. Basis of Design: Semco, Type Al. B. Composite assembly shall meet Class I requirements of NFPA -90A and shall be UL listed for flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50. Assembly shall meet the requirements of UL -181. C. Where flexible duct is allowed, it shall be connected to metal ducts, terminal units and diffusers with Panduit, Tylon or equal tool installed nylon clamps. D. Maximum length of flexible duct connections from metal duct to terminal units and grilles, registers and diffusers shall be not greater than 72 ". All duct turns greater than 45 deg. shall be rigid elbows. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 12.137 233300-3 E. Wherever ductwork is routed exposed, flexible ductwork is not acceptable. All exposed ductwork to be rigid. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which duct accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C. Install all fire and smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct accessories properly with other work. E. Field Quality Control: Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. END OF SECTION 23 3300 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 12.137 233300-4 SECTION 23 3416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of centrifugal HVAC fan work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of centrifugal fans required for this project include the following: 1. In -line Cabinet Fans C. Vibration isolation required for air distribution equipment is specified in other Division -23 sections, and is included as work of this section. D. Refer to Division -26 sections for power work required in conjunction with air distribution equipment; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. AMCA Compliance: Provide air distribution equipment bearing the Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Certified Ratings Seal. B. UL Compliance: Provide air distribution equipment electrical components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Deliver centrifugal fans with factory - installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components in factory- fabricated protective containers. B. Handle centrifugal fans carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to centrifugal fan manufacturer. C. Store air distribution equipment in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. D. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include physical dimensions, fabrication details, materials, fan curves, sound ratings, motor size and electrical characteristics and required brake horsepower for specified operating conditions. 1.06 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 12.137 233416-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In -line Cabinet Fans 1. Greenheck 2. Carnes 3. PennBarry 4. Loren Cook Co. 5. Twin City Fan & Blower 2.02 IN -LINE CABINET FANS A. General: Provide duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans of the centrifugal, belt driven in- line type. B. Ratings: All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for air performance. C. Casing: The fan housing shall be of the rectangular design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include rectangular duct mounting collars. A hinged or removable panel shall be provided in the fan cabinet of sufficient size to permit access for service to all of the fan's internal components without dismantling the cabinet. D. Fan: The fan wheel shall be of the galvanized steel, forward curved, centrifugal type. Wheels shall be dynamically and statically balanced. E. Motor: Heavy duty type with permanently sealed ball bearings. The wheel shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted in permanently sealed pillow block bearings. F. Drives: For belt drive units a drive shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. The motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. G. Accessories: 1. Insulated Housing 2. Disconnect switches 3. Spring Vibration Isolators PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which centrifugal fans are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Install centrifugal fans where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and electrical work as necessary to interface installation of centrifugal fans with other work. C. Install units with vibration isolators or isolation bases, complying with Division -23, Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 12.137 233416-2 3.03 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Ensure centrifugal fans are wired properly, with rotation in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. B. Provide positive electrical equipment and motor grounding. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of centrifugal fans, and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.05 BALANCING A. Refer to Division 23, Section 23 0593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC of fan systems; not work of this section. 3.06 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to owner, with receipt, 1 spare set of belts for each belt driven equipment item. END OF SECTION 23 3416 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 12.137 233416-3 SECTION 23 3600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install air terminal units as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 TERMINAL UNITS A. Air Terminal units shall include the following: 1. VAV Boxes 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and /or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment, to include color charts, dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the air terminal units. B. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. VAV Boxes 1. Carnes 2. Titus 3. E.H. Price 4. Metal Aire 5. Krueger 2.02 VAV BOXES A. General: Ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for connection to single, medium pressure duct, central air systems, with hot water, heating coils and air flow measuring station. Direct digital controls and actuation to be provided by DDC Controls Contractor. B. Casing: Welded 26 -gauge galvanized steel. Provided with round stub inlet duct connection and S and drive outlet duct connection. Hanger holes to be provided on four corners for installation. Leak rate not greater than two percent at 0.5 -inch wg. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TERMINAL UNITS 12.137 233600-1 C. Lining: Non - porous, foil -faced sealed liner which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Insulation shall be fibrous glass insulation, 4.0 lb/cu ft density. All cut edges shall be sealed from air stream using mechanically bonded metal barrier strips. Design basis is Price AFPM aluminum foil with perforated metal liner. D. Control Damper: Locate air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Construct from extruded aluminum or 20 gauge galvanized steel components. Key damper blades into shaft with nylon fitted pivot points. 2. Air volume control damper shall be factory calibrated assembly consisting of damper and damper shaft extension for connection to externally mounted control actuator. Leakage rate not greater than 2% of nominal CFM at 1 ". E. Air Flow Sensor: Eight point flow sensing ring capable of sensing true airflow to within +/- 10 percent regardless of inlet duct connection. Sensor includes pressure taps on inlet cone of air valve to provide the velocity signal for volume regulator and to measure airflow through the valve when used in conjunction with calibration chart provided on unit. F. Automatic Flow Controller: To be a thermostatically reset velocity controller which provides constant delivery air control within +/- 5 percent of rated flow down to 25 percent of unit rated cfm, independent of changes in system static pressure, with 1 -1/2 diameters of straight duct at the unit inlet. Control to within +/- 10 percent to be obtained with any inlet duct connection. Factory calibrated, field adjustable setpoints shall be provided to set maximum and minimum cfm. G. Reheat Coils (where applicable for supply air units): Coils shall have capacities and ratings as scheduled on the drawings. Coils shall consist of seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Maximum working pressure 125 psig and test pressure of 300 psig. H. Provide terminal unit with control enclosure. I. For supply air units, VAV terminal unit with reheat coil and upstream access door shall be provided complete as package by the manufacturer for installation by HVAC Contractor. Access door shall be insulated and shall have cam locks or snap latches; screw fasteners and non - insulated doors are not acceptable. Access doors shall be a minimum of 4" x 6 -1/2 ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install units and make duct and piping connection as indicated on drawings 3.02 Install shut -off cocks, balancing cocks, air vents, control valves and devices as required for complete installation. 3.03 Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory- mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. A. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. 3.04 Suspend active chilled beam from the building structure. Attach support to the mounting bracket support points fitted to the lower plate of the primary air plenum. 3.05 Provide duct access upstream and downstream of VAV terminal unit reheat coils. Downstream access door shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor and shall be 2" smaller than duct dimension or minimum of 6" x 6 ". Contractor shall coordinate installation of VAV terminal unit with other trades to maintain service access to unit controls and access doors. Where failure to do so results in blocked access door(s), Contractor shall provide access door(s) in the side of the unit. END OF SECTION 23 3600 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TERMINAL UNITS 12.137 233600-2 SECTION 23 3713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for the installation of grilles, registers and diffusers as per the schedules on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts for each type of device to be used. B. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static - pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Carnes 2. Titus 3. E.H. Price 4. Metal Aire 5. Krueger 2.02 Diffusers, registers, and grilles shall be of the type and style as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install wall mounted grilles and registers plumb and level and flush to surface. Locations may be altered slightly, as acceptable to the Design Professional, so as to fit masonry portions of the structure. 3.02 In grid panel type ceilings, lay -in metal pan, acoustical, etc., grilles, registers and diffusers shall be located in the center of the panel. 3.03 Coordinate locations of ceiling diffusers and registers with Design Professional's reflected ceiling plan. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Design Professional for determination of final location. 3.04 Adjust blow pattern as indicated on plans and as scheduled, prior to balancing. END OF SECTION 23 3713 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 12.137 233713-1 SECTION 23 5100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of breeching and smokepipe work is indicated on drawings, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of breeching and smokepipe required for project specified in this section, and listed on schedule located on drawings, include the following: 1. Type B double wall gas vents. 2. Positive pressure piping. 3. Boiler breeching and stack. 4. Double wall gas venting system with AL 294C alloy. C. Applications for breeching and smokepipe include the following: 1. Flues from gas -fired boilers. D. Refer to Division -23 fuel- burning equipment sections for draft hoods associated with atmospheric fuel- burning equipment; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with ANSI /NFPA 211 "Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances" for construction and installation requirements of breeching and smokepipe. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to breeching and smokepipe; provide products which have been UL- listed and labeled. C. Double wall gas venting system with AL 294C alloy shall be tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories to UL 1738, the venting standard for positive pressure and condensing appliances. It shall also be tested and listed to portions of UL 441 and UL 103 for natural draft gas appliances. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop fabrication shop drawings. Include shop drawings of elbows and fittings showing dimensional and performance data. B. Submit manufacture data on materials, fittings and joint construction, and installation for breeching and smokepipe. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Type B Double Wall Gas Vents 1. American Metal Products Co. 2. General Products Co., Inc. 3. Hart & Cooley Manufacturing Co. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 12.137 235100-1 4. Selkirk Metalbestos 5. Metal -Fab, Inc. B. Positive Pressure Piping 1. Selkirk Metalbestos 2. American Metal Products C. Double Wall Gas Venting System 1. Heat Fab, Inc. 2.02 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS A. 13 L General: Provide double wall gas vents, UL- listed for Type B, consisting of double wall metal construction pipe sections and fittings and accessories required for complete installation. Materials: Construct inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, both of the following minimum thickness: Size Inner Pipe Outer Pipe Round sizes up to 6" 0.012" 28 ga. Round sizes 7" to 18" 0.014" 28 ga. Oval sizes up to 4" 0.012" 28 ga. Oval sizes 5" to 6" 0.014" 28 ga. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory items as indicated, for complete installation. 2.03 POSITIVE PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEM A. This factory-built chimney shall be laboratory tested and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for use with building heating equipment burning gas, solid or liquid fuels as described in NFPA 211, which produce exhausted flue gases at a temperature not exceeding 1400 deg. F. under continuous operating conditions. B. Materials: The double wall stack shall have as outer jacket of aluminum coated steel .025" thick in 6 inches through 24" diameters and .034" thick for larger diameters. There shall be a minimum 1" air space between the walls. The inner gas carrying pipe shall be type 304 stainless steel for gas and #2 fuel oil or type 316 stainless steel for coal #4 and #6 oil or any other solid fuels. The inner liner shall be .035" nominal thickness for all diameters. 2.04 DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTING SYSTEM WITHAL 294C ALLOY A. This factory-built chimney shall be laboratory tested and listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., for use with building heating equipment burning natural gas. The flue shall feature an inner liner wall of AL 294C a patented alloy of the Allegheny Ludlum Corp. tested to the corrosion requirements of UL 1738. B. The system shall feature a patented external locking ring and tab joining system which eliminates internal protruding, low -alloy fasteners that could corrode when in contact with acidic condensate. The ring and tab mechanism, together with 100% welded seams shall insure the integrity of the interior smooth -wall design, minimizing turbulence and flow resistance. There shall be no corrugation on straight pieces where condensation could collect. The system shall be pressure tight and listed for 1.5 inches of we when installed with the factory- recommended sealant. The joining system shall require no drilling or special tools. The outer wall shall be to type 430 stainless steel to create an insulating air space of approximately 1/4" and provide added stability for free - standing applications. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 12.137 235100-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF TYPE B GAS VENTS A. General: Install Type B double wall gas vents in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintain UL- listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as indicated for complete installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF POSITIVE PRESSURE PIPING A. When the breeching and chimney is installed according to the manufacturers' installation instructions and the limits of its listing, it shall comply with national safety standards and building codes. B. Inner pipe joints shall be sealed by use of V Bands and RTV Silicone Sealant for flue gas temperatures up to 600 deg. F.; above this temperature joints shall be sealed with V Bands and High temperature Joint Cement as outlined in the installation instructions and supplied by the manufacturer. C. Stacks extending above roof surfaces must terminate as required by local code, or as required in NFPA 211. D. All parts exposed to the outer atmosphere should be protected by a minimum of one base coat and one finish coat of paint, such as series 4200 - 4300 Heat Resistant paint manufactured by Rust- O -Leum Corp., or equivalent. Paint to be supplied and applied by installing contractor. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTING SYSTEM WITHAL 294C ALLOY A. General: Install double wall gas venting system with AL 29 -4C alloy in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Maintain UL- listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as indicated for complete installation. END OF SECTION 23 5100 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 12.137 235100-3 SECTION 23 5216 - CONDENSING BOILERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of gas -fired boiler work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of gas -fired boiler specified in this section include the following: 1. High efficiency modular gas -fired boilers. C. Refer to other Division -23 sections for concrete pads, piping, specialties, pumps, breechings, etc., required external to boilers for installation; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division -26 sections for field- installed power wiring required for gas -fired boilers; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. NFPA Compliance: Install gas -fired boilers in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code 54 "National Fuel Gas Code ". 2. ASME Compliance: a. Construct gas -fired boilers in accordance with American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. b. Install gas -fired boilers in accordance with ASME- CSD -1, Controls and Safety Devices for automatically fired boilers. 3. UL Labels: Provide gas -fired boiler ancillary electrical components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 4. Iowa Administrative Code: Install gas -fired boilers in accordance with Chapter 46, Installation of Stearn Heating Boilers Hot Water Heating Boilers and Hot Water Supply Boilers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed and operating), furnished specialties and accessories and installation and start -up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for final installation of boilers and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory - installed and portions to be field- installed. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONDENSING BOILERS 12.137 235216-1 C. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Handle boiler and equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new. B. Store boiler and equipment in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. High Efficiency Modular Gas -fired Boilers 1. Aerco 2.02 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS -FIRED BOILERS A. General: Provide as indicated, factory assembled and tested packaged gas -fired boilers, of capacity, performance and sizing as scheduled. Provide design certified by AGA, heating capacities based on standard test procedures prescribed by DOE, and constructed in accordance with requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME CSD -1. B. Condensing fire -tube, counter -flow design incorporating a helical fire tube assembly. Assembly shall be self - supporting, baffle free and design to resist thermal shock. Heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped with 150 psi rating. C. Full modulating burner, with 15:1 [20:1] firing rate turn -down, direct vented, sealed combustion unit. D. UL Listed factory - packaged burner controls, including interrupted spark ignition and rectification type flame sensor. Controls shall include a LCD display for monitoring sensors and interlocks. F. Factory packaged gas train including modulating control valve and automatic safety shut -off valve. Unit shall have maximum operating pressure of 2.0 psi and minimum operating pressure of 5.3" wc. E. Safety controls shall include electric low -water cutoff probe, dual over temperature protection including manual reset and remote fault alarm contacts. Boiler controls shall meet ASME Section IV and CSD -1 requirements. G. Single point electrical connection, 120 volt, single phase. H. The boiler shall be controlled by a factory packaged controller which shall modulate the boiler firing rate in response to a remote Heating Hot Water Temperature input and setpoint from the Building DDC system. The boiler controller shall register alarm faults and firing rate to Building DDC. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONDENSING BOILERS 12.137 235216-2 I. Accessories: 1. ASME Pressure Relief Valve: 75 psi 2. Combustion Air Piping: Schedule 40 PVC. 3. Exhaust Flue Piping: Heat -Fab Saf -T Vent, singe wall AL 294C stainless steel. UL- listed for direct vent appliances. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which boiler is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BOILER A. General: Comply with boiler manufacturer's instructions for installation, except as otherwise indicated. B. Comply with installation requirements of local and state boiler codes, and applicable provisions of NFPA and ASME boiler code standards. C. Install boilers on 4" high concrete pad where indicated, maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over top of boilers. D. Install boiler trim not installed at factory. E. Connect water and fuel piping and breeching as indicated. F. Furnish to Electrical Installer, manufacturer's wiring diagram and electrical requirements for installation of field- wiring required for power to boilers; not work of this section. G. Flush and clean boilers upon completion of installation, in accordance with manufacturer's start -up instructions. H. Start -up boiler, in accordance with manufacturer's start -up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. I. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping in accordance with applicable sections of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Provide services for manufacturer's technical representative to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of boiler. B. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7 day notice to Contractor and Design Professional of training date. END OF SECTION 23 5216 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONDENSING BOILERS 12.137 235216-3 SECTION 23 6200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSOR UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of condensing unit work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of condensing units in this section include the following: 1. Air - cooled condensing units. C. Refer to other Division -23 sections for piping, refrigeration specialties, etc., required external to condensing units for installation; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division -26 sections for field- installed power wiring required for condensing units; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ARI Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for condensing units in accordance with Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air - Conditioning Equipment" and ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air - Conditioning Equipment ". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of condensing units in accordance with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air - Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard ANSI /ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration ". 3. UL Compliance: Provide condensing units which are listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and have UL label affixed. B. Warranty: 1. Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor. 2. Provide five year warranty on compressor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points and installation and start -up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. D. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 12.137 236200-1 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged condensing units or components; replace with new. B. Store condensing units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Air - cooled Condensing Units 1. Lennox Industries, Inc. (units up to 15 tons) 2. Trane Company 3. McQuay International 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide factory- assembled and tested air - cooled condensing units as indicated, consisting of compressor, condenser coil, fan, motor, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls. Provide capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled. 2.03 UNITS FROM 7 -112 TO 15 TONS (CU -1) A. Casing: 1. Casing shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel. 2. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather resistant baked enamel finish. 3. Unit surfaces shall be tested 500 hours in salt spray test. 4. Units shall have removable end panels which allow access to all major components and controls. B. Compressors: 1. 10 - 20 Tons: a. Dual direct drive scroll compressors. b. Unit shall include oil pump, crank case heater, temperature and current overloads, internal spring isolation, and external high and low pressure cutout devices. C. Refrigerant Circuits: 1. 10 - 20 Tons: Dual Refrigerant Circuits. 2. Each refrigerant circuit shall have the following: a. Integral subcooling circuit. b. Filter dryer. C. Liquid and suction line service valves and gauge port. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 12.137 236200-2 D. Condenser: 1. Condenser coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Condensers shall be factory leak tested at 450 psig air pressure underwater. 2. Provide with direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced vertical discharge fins. 3. Motors shall have permanently lubricated ball or sleeve bearings and thermal overload protection. E. Provide the following: 1. Factory wired controls. 2. Anti -short cycle times. 3. Low ambient operation to 0 °F. 4. Hot gas bypass lite. 5. Time delay relay. 6. Condenser coil guard. 7. Non -fused disconnect. 2.04 UNITS FROM 20 TO 60 -TONS (CU -2) A. Casing: 1. Casings shall be constructed of a 14 -gauge welded galvanized steel frame. Panels and access doors shall be 14 and 16 -gauge galvanized steel. 2. The unit surface shall be phosphatized and finished with air -dry paint which shall exceed 500 consecutive hour salt spray resistance in accordance with ASTM B117. 3. Provide units with factory - installed decorative louvered grills to protect the condenser coils. B. Compressor: 1. Compressors shall be scroll type. 2. Unit shall include centrifugal oil pump, inlet dirt separator, journal bearings, oil sight glass, oil charging valve and solid internal suspension. C. Condenser: 1. Condenser coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing with an integral subcooler. Condensers shall be factory leak tested at 450 psig air pressure underwater. 2. Provide with direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced vertical discharge fans. 3. Three -phase motors shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and thermal overload protection. D. Refrigerant Circuits and Capacity Modulation: 40 through 60 -ton sizes shall be two circuits with four capacity steps. Each circuit shall be fed by two compressors piped in parallel. E. Provide with the following accessories: 1. Low ambient controls to allow operation down to 0 °F. 2. Hot gas by -pass. 3. Non -fused disconnect. 4. Multi -step, demand oriented microprocessor -based discharge air controller, equal to Honeywell W71 00A, including discharge air sensor (VAV applications only). 5. Coil frost protection controls (VAV applications only). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 12.137 236200-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which condensing units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Contractor. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDENSING UNITS A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Support: Install ground mounted units on 4" thick reinforced concrete pad, 4" larger on each side than condensing unit. Anchor unit to pad using inserts or anchor bolts. C. Electrical: Furnish electrical field- wiring diagrams to Electrical Contractor for power wiring to condensing units. D. Air - Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit; run piping so as to not interfere with access to unit. 1. Install furnished field- mounted accessories. 2. Refrigerant piping shall be insulated in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 0700 — HVAC Insulation. 3. All control wiring shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor. 4. Install flexible piping connection for units mounted on spring isolators. E. Start up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start -up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of condensing units. END OF SECTION 23 6200 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS 12.137 236200-4 SECTION 23 6500 - COOLING TOWERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of factory- fabricated cooling tower work is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section, including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section. B. Types of factory- fabricated cooling towers required for project include the following: Forced -draft, centrifugal fan, counterflow, closed circuit cooler. C. Refer to Division -26 sections for power wiring to factory- fabricated cooling towers; not work of this section. D. Refer to Division 23, Section 23 0548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment for vibration isolation work required in conjunction with factory- fabricated cooling towers; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Provide manufacturer's certification of tower cooling capacity, based on factory performance tests, and provide performance curve plotting Leaving -Water Temperature (LINT) against Wet -Bulb Temperature (WBT). B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of factory- fabricated cooling towers, which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories and comply with NEMA Standards. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (ANSI /NFPA 70) as applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical components of factory- fabricated cooling towers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, including rated capacities, pressure drop, fan performance data, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), installation and start -up instructions, and rating curves with selected points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for motors and control components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each cooling tower. Include "trouble- shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 236500-1 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Closed Circuit Coolers 1. Baltimore Air Coil 2. Evapco 3. 1 meco 2.02 FACTORY - FABRICATED COOLING TOWERS A. General Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, factory - assembled Closed Circuit Cooler of counterflow blow- through design, with single side air entry. Closed Circuit Cooler shall have the fan assemblies built into the pan, with all moving parts factory mounted and aligned. 2. All Steel components shall be made from hot -dip galvanized steel, with all edges given a protective coat of zinc -rich compound. In addition, all steel panels and structural members shall be protected with a thermosetting hybrid polymer coating. B. Capacity: The Closed Circuit Cooler shall have a capacity as indicated on the schedule. C. Pan /Fan Section: The combination pan /fan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge hot -dip galvanized steel. All principal panels shall be formed with double -brake flanges providing maximum strength and rigidity and more reliable sealing at watertight joints. The fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of maintenance. D. Fans: The forwardly curved centrifugal fans shall be dynamically balanced. Fan housing shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry, and continuous, four -sided discharge cowls with splash diverter flanges shall extend into the pan to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from entering the fans. Fans shall be mounted on a steel fan shaft supported by heavy -duty, grease - packed, self - aligning, relubricatable ball bearings with cast iron housings. Extended lubrication lines shall be included. E. Fan Motor and Drive: Drip proof ball bearing fan motor(s) with 1.15 service factor shall be furnished. Motors shall be suitable for outdoor service. Each motor shall be located in a protective enclosure on an easily adjusted heavy -duty motor base. V -belt fan drive(s) shall be designed for not less than 150% of motor nameplate horsepower. Drive and all moving parts shall be protected by removable hot -dip galvanized screens and panels. F. Coil Section: The heat transfer section of the closed circuit cooler(s) shall be encased with hot -dip galvanized steel panels and the section(s) shall be removable from the pan. All principal panels shall be formed with double -brake flanges for maximum strength and rigidity, and more reliable sealing at watertight joints. The cooler coil shall be all prime surface steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, tested by an encircling eddy current system and also at 350 psig air pressure under water. The coil shall be designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of the fluid. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 236500-2 G. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed uniformly over the coils at a flow rate of not less than 4.5 gpm per square foot of coil cross section to ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times. The distribution system shall consist of large diameter, non -clog plastic distribution nozzles spaced across the coil face area in schedule 40 PVC spray branches by snap -in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning or flushing. H. Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of PVC and be removable in easily handled sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction with a hooked leaving edge, and shall direct discharge air away from the fans. I. Vibration Cutout Switch: Electronic remote reset vibration cutout switch shall be includedand shall be set to trip at a point so as not to cause damage to the cooling tower. Wiring (110V) shall be by the installing contractor, J. Remote Sump: The remote sump shall be constructed of heavy gauge hot - dipped galvanized steel, with all edges given a protective coat of zinc -rich compound. In addition, hot -dip galvanized components shall be protected with a thermosetting hybrid polymer coating. The remote sump shall be provided knock -down for access into the space. 1. Water Level Control: The electric water level control (EWLC) system shall consist of solid state controls including all necessary relays and contacts to achieve the specified sequence of operation, stainless steel water level sensing electrodes with brass holder, and all necessary stainless steel mounting hardware. 2. Tank Covers: Heavy gauge hot - dipped galvanized steel tank covers with handles shall be included. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with cooling tower manufacturer's instructions for installation, except as otherwise indicated. B. Examine conditions under which cooling towers are to be installed. Correct all unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the work. C. Level units to a tolerance of 1/8" in 10'0 ", in both directions. D. Mount cooling tower on base using 5/8" minimum anchor bolts. E. Install gaskets or sealants between cooling -tower cells. F. Connect supply and return lines to cooling towers with union or flanged connections. G. Install flexible connections on supply, return, and water make -up lines. H. Connect water make -up line to automatic fill valve with 3 -valve bypass. I. Connect bleed line as recommended by manufacturer. J. Connect drain and overflow as indicated, run full size to drain. K. Furnish electrical wiring diagrams to Electrical Installer for installation of power wiring; not work of this section. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 236500-3 3.02 START -UP A. General: Clean tower thoroughly. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for filling and start -up of operation, but not less than the following: 1. Verify lubrication of rotating parts; lubricate as needed. 2. Verify fan rotation direction. 3. Verify that motor amperage is in accordance with manufacturer's data. 4. Adjust water level control for proper operating level. 5. Adjust bleed valve for indicated percentage of circulated water volume. 6. Passivate cooling tower in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. See Division 23 Section 23 2113 — Hydronic Piping for additional requirements. END OF SECTION 23 6500 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 236500-4 SECTION 23 6500.1 - COOLING TOWER CHEMICAL TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of cooling tower chemical treatment is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this section, including schedules and equipment lists associated with either drawings or this section. B. Refer to Division -26 sections for power wiring to factory- fabricated cooling towers; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. LIL Compliance: Provide chemical treatment system which is designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with LIL requirements. B. Warranty: 1. The manufacturer of the above specified equipment shall guarantee equipment of its manufacture, and bearing its identification to be free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of 24 months for electronics and 12 months for mechanical parts from date of delivery from the factory or authorized distributor under normal use and service and otherwise when such equipment is used in accordance with instructions furnished by the manufacturer and for the purposes disclosed in writing at the time of purchase, if any. 2. In the event a component fails to perform as specified and having been returned to the manufacturer transportation charges prepaid, and is proven defective in service during the warranty period, the manufacturer shall repair or replace the defective part. Replaceable elastomeric parts and glass components are expendable and are not covered by any warranty. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Data sheets and catalog literature for a micro - processor based bleed, feed, and dual biocide cooling tower conductivity controller and electrode. B. Shop Drawings: Interconnection and dimensional drawings. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for motors and control components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for the chemical treatment. Include "trouble- shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Cooling Tower Chemical Treatment EcoLab MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 23 6500.1 -1 2.02 BLEED, FEED AND COOLING TOWER CONDUCTIVITY CONTROLLER A. The bleed, feed and dual biocide cooling tower conductivity control system shall consist of a control module that provides on /off conductivity control, inhibitor chemical feed, two biocide chemical feeds and a conductivity electrode that provides measurement of the conductivity, as well as a temperature measurement for automatic compensation for errors due to temperature fluctuations. B. Control Module: 1. The enclosure shall be polycarbonate, NEMA 4X, lockable hinged door with clear window. 2. Power: 110 -120 VAC, 60Hz, 10A. 3. Inputs: Conductivity: 0 to 10,000 pS /cm. Temperature: 10 K Thermistor No Flow Interlock: Isolated dry contact closure (reed switch) Water meter contactor: Isolated dry contact closure (reed switch). 4. Outputs: Control (on /off): Four internally powered relays, 10 A (resistive), 1/8 HP @ 120VAC or 6 A (resistive), 1/8 HP @ 240 VAC. Alarm: One internally powered relay, 10 A (resistive), 1/8 HP @ 120 VAC or 6 A (resistive), 1/8 HP @ 240 VAC. 5. Software features: Control relay shall feature adjustable control direction and dead band. Chemical feed shall be selectable from bleed and feed, feed as a percentage of bleed, feed as a percentage of time, and feed based on a water meter contactor input. Biocide feed shall be selectable from up to 10 times per day, a weekly cycle, a two week cycle, or a 28 day cycle. A self test shall be available to verify the integrity of the control module's sensor input circuitry. Manual activation of the relays shall be easily accomplished via the keypad. A maximum output on -time shall be available on the bleed and feed relays to prevent runaway control. C. Sensor: 1. Operating Principle: The conductivity sensor shall be driven with a low voltage AC signal, and the return signal voltage will vary with the conductivity of the intervening solution. The 10 K ohm temperature signal shall also be delivered to the control module, in order to automatically compensate for sensor errors due to temperature fluctuations. 2. Materials of construction: PVC, Glass filled polypropylene, FKM and graphite. 3. Process connections: For in -line sensors, 3/" NPT Female. 4. Temperature range: 0 — 60 degrees C. 5. Pressure range: 0 — 150 psig. D. Controller and Sensor Performance: 1. Range: 0 — 10,000 pS /cm. 2. Accuracy: From 10- 10,000 pS /cm ± 1 % of reading; from 0 -10 pS /cm± 20% of reading. 3. Resolution: ± 1 pS /cm. 4. Maximum separation between the controller and thesensor shall be 250 feet. E. Indication: Graphic User Interface. A 2 line x 16 character backlit LCD display shall indicate the process value, a bar graph of the process value relative to set points, and the status of outputs and alarms. Four LED lamps shall indicate the on /off status of the control outputs. F. Equipment: 1. The bleed, feed and dual biocide cooling tower conductivity controller shall be a Walchem WCT310 series or approved equal. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 23 6500.1 -2 2.03 OPERATOR FUNCTIONS A. Calibration: 1. The conductivity electrode calibration shall be a one point calibration, utilizing a solution of a known conductivity. 2. All set points shall be set through the 8 button keypad. 3. An access code shall be available to protect all set points and calibrations, while allowing the user to view any set point. B. All set points shall be set through the 8 button keypad. C. An access code shall be available to protect all set points and calibrations, while allowing the user to view any set point. 2.04 CONTROL MODULE FUNCTION DETAIL A. The conductivity control output shall be on /off control with adjustable dead band. B. The conductivity control direction shall be selected via the keypad. C. The inhibitor chemical feed output shall be on /off control with four choices of feed modes. D. The bleed and feed relays shall have limit timers to prevent runaway control. E. The biocide programs shall provide a conductivity based prebleed prior to the biocide addition, and a time based lockout of the bleed after the biocide addition. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with cooling tower manufacturer's instructions for installation, except as otherwise indicated. B. The sensor shall be installed in a location where it will always remain immersed in the sample. C. The sensor shall be installed in a location where there is good solution movement and where it will respond rapidly to conductivity changes. D. The sensor cable shall be routed such that it is separated from any AC voltage by at least 6 inches. E. If the sensor cable needs to be extended beyond the standard 10 feet, then 24 AWG, 2 twisted pair, shielded cable shall be utilized. F. The sample line shall be tapped from the discharge side of the cooling tower recirculation pump, and returned to either the cooling tower sump or the suction side of the recirculation pump. 3.02 RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Provide solenoid valve for bleed control. B. Provide metering pumps for chemical feed, EWB15F1 -VC or equal. C. Provide water meter contactor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 23 6500.1 -3 3.03 SPARE PARTS A. 102369 Fuse, 0.125A, 250 VAC B. 103363 Fuse, 0.063 A, 250 VAC C. 102370 Fuse, 5A, 250 VAC D. 102432 Fuse, 10 A, 125 VAC END OF SECTION 23 6500.1 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COOLING TOWERS 12.137 23 6500.1 -4 SECTION 23 7200 -AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of energy recovery units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work: Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on energy recovery units. Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory - installed by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: UL Compliance: Provide energy recovery units which are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with UL requirements. 2. ARI Compliance: Units shall have certified ratings complying with ARI Standard 1060. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, fan curves with selection points clearly indicated and installation and start -up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to heat recovery equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. D. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Handle energy recovery units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged energy recovery units or components; replace with new. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 12.137 237200-1 B. Store energy recovery units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading energy recovery units, and moving them to final location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Energy Recovery Units 1. Venmar 2. Semco 3. Innovent 4. Modine Atherion 2.02 ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU -1 AND ERU -2) A. General: Packaged outdoor energy recovery ventilator consisting of an enthalpy wheel, wheel drive system, ventilation air fan, exhaust air fan, indirect fired heating and integral dx cooling coils, necessary dampers, temperature sensors and controls. B. Unit Cabinet 1. Cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with galvanized frame. 2. Unit shall include grey, baked on, polyester pre - painted galvanized steel package. 3. Unit shall have no screw penetrations on the roof. Construction shall be airtight and prevent water leaks. 4. Unit shall have lifting and forklift holes in the unit base for rigging or lifting to mounting location. 5. Cabinet shall be insulated throughout with a minimum 1" [25mm] foil faced fire retardant material. 6. Main access panel(s) shall be removable with screw fasteners to provide access to all components. 7. Enthalpy wheel shall be easily removable from the unit. 8. Dampers a. The outside air and exhaust air dampers shall include an insulated motorized damper. Dampers shall be provided with an extruded EPDM gasketing on the leading edges of the damper blades. 9. Provide weather hoods for the outdoor air intake and the exhaust air outlet. 10. Refer to plans for duct connections. 11. Internal Protection a. Unit cabinet shall be lined with a galvanized liner to provide a readily cleanable surface and to act as a vapor barrier and protect insulation from degradation. C. Operating Characteristics Unit shall be capable of providing a constant volume of air at a specified external static pressure at all fan operating speeds. D. Blowers 1. Fan ratings are based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. 2. Fans must be selected to operate on a stable, efficient part of the fan curve when delivering air quantities scheduled against static of the system. 3. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced and tested prior to shipment. 4. Fan discharges shall be as noted in the equipment schedule. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 12.137 237200-2 5. Unit shall be equipped with forward- curved, DWDI supply and exhaust fans. Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and finished off with a corrosion resistant coating. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft. Fans shall have pillow block bearings. Fan drives shall be designed for a 1.3 service factor. Fan shall be equipped with adjustable motor sheave (for motors up to 10 HP). Drives are factory- mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment completed before unit start -up. Fan discharges shall be connected to outside wall of unit with flexible duct collar. Fans shall be provided with internal rubber -in -sheer vibration isolation mounts. 6. Unit shall come equipped with open spring blower isolation for forward- curved DWDI fans. E. Motors 1. Motors shall be continuous duty and matched to the fan loads. Motors shall have ODP (Open Drip Proof) enclosures, shall include motor starters and overload protection. 2. Motors shall meet EPAC regulations for efficiency. 3. Motor selection must include a 15% service factor. 4. Energy wheel drive motor shall have internal overload protection. F. Electrical Requirements 1. Unit shall have single -point power connection available. 2. All unit safety controls shall be factory mounted and wired, requiring only field installation of remote sensing devices and wiring to unit mounted terminals. 3. VFDs shall accept 0 -10 VDC field supplied input signal for fan control. G. Enthalpy Wheel 1. Enthalpy wheel substrate should be of pure aluminum foil as to allow quick and efficient uptake of thermal energy, provide sufficient mass for optimum heat transfer and give maximum sensible heat recovery at low rotational speeds. 2. Energy recovery performance for the wheel shall be certified by AHRI to AHRI Standard 1060. Wheels tested in independent labs and rated in accordance to AHRI Standard 1060 without AHRI certification are not acceptable. 3. Enthalpy wheel shall conform to the requirements of NFPA -90A and have documented proof of smoke development of no more than 50 and flame spread of no more than 25. 4. Enthalpy drive system shall not have any take -up pulley and shall require no field adjustments by employing minimal stretch, non - adjustable drive belts. 5. Enthalpy wheel cassette shall be complete with face seal and perimeter seal to minimize EATR (Exhaust Air Transfer Ratio) when tested in accordance to AHRI Standard 1060. EATR values must be certified to AHRI. 6. Enthalpy wheel shall be self cleaned by two counter flow airstreams and come equipped in a slide out cassette for easy removal for maintenance. 7. Enthalpy wheel shall be cleanable with low pressure air or vacuum without degrading the latent performance and shall allow dry particles up to 800 microns to pass freely to prevent clogging of the media. 8. Enthalpy wheel comes equipped with permanently sealed ball bearings with 200,000 hour L -10 life. 9. Unit shall come equipped with an aluminum energy recovery wheel, 8" wheel depth, 10. comes with purge. VSD (Variable Speed Drive) Frost Prevention a. Unit shall be equipped with the necessary sensors and controls using 0 -10 VDC to vary the energy wheel speed down to 2 RPM to maintain continuous ventilation and to prevent frost from forming on the enthalpy wheel and to allow for continuous ventilation. H. Filtration Angle filter racks for outdoor air and exhaust air designed to hold 4" pleated throw -away filters. Provide with full size access door. Unit shall include 4" MERV 7 Medium Efficiency Filters. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 12.137 237200-3 2. Control device and contacts shall be included to provide a 24 VAC signal when filters require replacing. Controls: 1. A recessed integral electrical control compartment shall be furnished on the side of the unit. The compartment shall be constructed to NEMA 3R requirements, provided with a hinged access door. All components, except those not mounted directly in the unit, shall be factory- mounted and wired to a labeled terminal strip. All components and wiring shall be identified using printed self- adhesive labels, consistent with the numbering used in the wiring diagrams. Electro- Mechanical Controls (EMC) components shall include, but are not limited to, single -point connection power distribution block, sub and control circuit fuses or circuit breakers, control transformers, motor starters and overloads for single speed operation. 2. All service connectors shall be quick disconnect type. 3. Unit circuitry shall allow the following operational characteristics: a. dry contacts for occupancy control. b. variable fan speed input (if equipped). C. unoccupied recirc contacts (if equipped). 4. Fost Control: a. VSD Frost Prevention With Unoccupied Recirculation: Unit shall be equipped with the necessary sensors and controls using 0 -10 VDC to vary the energy wheel speed down to 2 RPM to prevent frost from forming on the enthalpy wheel and to allow for continuous ventilation. Unit shall be equipped with the necessary dampers and control interface to allow supply fan recirculation during unoccupied times. Heating 5. Sensor Contacts: a. Control device and contacts shall be included to provide a 24 VAC signal when filters require replacing. b. Unit shall come equipped with a wheel rotation sensor. A 24 VAC signal will be provided if the enthalpy wheel fails. 6. Free Cooling: a. Unit shall come equipped with a factory installed thermostat (drybulb) to control free cooling. Heating: Ilndirect Gas Heat (ERU -1 ONLY): a. Unit shall come equipped with a fully assembled, factory- installed and tested, indirect gas -fired heating section, integral to the unit. The gas section shall be ETL approved for indoor or outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Provide capability for powered flue gas exhaust and threaded gas piping connection through side of unit. b. Gas burners shall be in -shot type constructed of aluminized steel body and sintered metal flame holder with integral carryover plenum. C. Gas burner controls shall include ignition control with 6000 volt igniter with pre - purge and flame rod detection, roll out switch and air proving switch. Gas valves and regulators supplied with burner. d. Heat exchanger shall be tubular type, constructed of heavy gauge, type 304 SS tubes. Tubes shall be produced to ASTM A249 construction standards for heat exchanger application. Tubes shall employ integral formed - dimple restrictors to eliminate noise associated with expansion and contraction of internal baffles during heating cycles and to provide for unobstructed drainage of condensate. All metal sheeting used in the construction of the heating module will be heavy gauge 304 SS. e. Gas -fired heating section shall be designed for a minimum Natural Gas pressure of 5" w.c. and maximum of 13.5" w.c. Gas -fired heating section shall be designed for a minimum Propane (LP) Gas pressure of 11" w.c. and maximum of 13.5" w.c. For higher gas pressures, as per the schedule, a separate high pressure regulator with full internal relief shall be field supplied and installed. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 12.137 237200-4 Gas control shall be 4:1 full modulation with 2 speed powered flue gas exhaust. On outdoor units, the heater control enclosure shall be provided with a louvered intake panel for combustion air intake and the induced draft fan exhauster shall be extended to the side of the cabinet and provided with a round collar vent termination, diameter as scheduled. 1. A vent hood and birdscreen shall be supplied on the exterior of the unit on the vent termination for combustion exhaust. 2. An insulated exhaust stack with cap extending above the unit by a minimum of 12" shall be provided on the exterior of the unit. 3. The vent termination or exhaust stack shall be extended as outlined in the schedule and shall be field supplied and installed. K. Cooling: 1. Integrated Direct Expansion (Dx) (ERU -1 ONLY) a. Unit shall come equipped with an integrated direct expansion (Dx) evaporative cooling coil having copper tubes that are mechanically expanded into aluminum fins with a heavy gauge galvanized frame. Coils shall be tested in accordance with AHRI 410, capacities to be as per the schedule. b. Units shall be equipped with an integrated air cooled condenser compressor section. Refrigerant circuits shall include externally equalized thermostatic expansion valve. Safety controls shall be auto reset on low and manually reset on high pressure sides. Condenser coil shall have copper tubes that are mechanically expanded into aluminum fins with a heavy gauge galvanized frame. Coils shall be tested in accordance with AHRI 410. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, direct drive with steel blades, statically and dynamically balanced and permanently lubricated with built -in thermal overload protection. Fan blades shall be protected by heavy gauge plated steel wire guards. 1. Refrigeration system shall incorporate dual circuits with the primary compressor being Variable Refrigerant Control. C. Unit shall be charged with R410a refrigerant, factory run and leak tested with all necessary controls for operation. d. Unit shall include refrigerant high and low pressure gauge connections. e. Unit shall include refrigerant suction and discharge valves. f. Unit shall include a hot gas reheat coil mounted with separation and downstream from the direct expansion cooling coil. Hot gas reheat coil shall be with copper tubes that are mechanically expanded into aluminum fins with a heavy gauge galvanized frame. Coils shall be tested in accordance with AHRI 410. 1. Hot gas reheat shall be equipped with modulating control 2. Drain Pan: a. Cooling coils shall be equipped with a welded stainless steel, dual sloped condensate drain pan with a 1 -1/4" NPT drain connection. Drain connection shall terminate on the side of the cabinet. Drain trap shall be field supplied and installed. L. Roof Curbs: Unit shall include insulated roof curbs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which energy recovery units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS A. General: Install energy recovery units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 12.137 237200-5 B. Chilled /Heating Water Piping: Refer to Division 23, Section 23 500 - HVAC Water Treatment Connect supply and return piping to unit. Provide flexible pipe connectors. C. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory- mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. D. Ductwork (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 3113 — Metal Ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. E. Start -up of energy recovery units shall be in accordance with manufacturer's start -up instructions and shall be performed by Factory authorized technicians. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. F. Condensate Drain: Extend to nearest floor drain and elbow into drain. Condensate waste shall be trapped at drain pan, with screwed cleanout plug in low point of trap. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of energy recovery units. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each energy recovery unit: 1. One replacement belt for unit. 2. One set of spare supply and exhaust filters. END OF SECTION 23 7200 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AIR TO AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 12.137 237200-6 SECTION 23 7313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install air handling units as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. ARI Compliance: Units shall have certified ratings complying with ARI Standard 430. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall consist of drawings and /or catalog cuts giving dimensions, arrangement, construction materials, fan performance curves, coil capacity, horsepower, electrical characteristics and installation instructions. B. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Air Handling Units 1. McQuay International - Vision 2. Trane Company — M Series 3. York International - Solution 2.02 GENERAL A. Units shall be factory built and assembled with arrangements as indicated on the drawings. B. Units shall have capacities, ratings and performance as scheduled. 2.03 CASINGS A. Unit casings shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel reinforced with steel angle framework as required for smooth operation for pressure rating. Casings shall be sectionalized with separate fan and coil sections. Units casing shall be of double -wall construction. B. Casing insulation shall be spray- injected foam. Casing panel shall be a minimum of R -13. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION 12.137 AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-1 C. Fan sections shall have perforated, galvanized inner liners. Perforated panel shall be a minimum of R -11. D. Casings shall have hinged panels to provide access to all internal components. All access doors shall have a minimum clear opening dimension of 10 ". E. IAQ drain pans shall be provided under the complete coil section and double pitched to the drain connection to promote positive drainage. Drain pans shall be double -wall insulated. 2.04 FANS A. Fans shall be double width, double inlet centrifugal type. B. Fan housings shall be die - formed with streamlined inlets and side sheets. Bearings shall be grease lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours average life. C. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and factory run tested, in the unit. D. Fan and motor assembly shall be internally isolated from unit casing with factory mounted spring isolators. Fan scroll shall be attached to the unit by a flexible canvas duct. 2.05 COILS A. Coils shall be furnished for heating and /or cooling media as scheduled on the drawings. B. Coils shall be aluminum fin, copper tube type. Fins shall have drawn, belled collars bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. Coil casings shall be galvanized steel. C. Hot water heating coils shall be of the metering type with metering orifices in the supply header to insure equal distribution of water to each tube. D. Cooling coils shall be completely drainable, and shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. 2.06 MOTORS AND DRIVES A. Motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency, normal torque, 40 deg. C rise, splash proof, of horsepower rating and electrical characteristics as scheduled on the drawings. Motors shall be suitable for use with variable frequency drives. B. Drives shall be rated at 1.25 times the motor horsepower rating. Drives up to and including 40 horsepower shall be adjustable speed drives (don't use on over 50 HP) for adjustment within plus or minus 10% of specified RPM. Units shall be furnished with approved drive guards. C. Motor shall be mounted on an adjustable mount, suitable for adjusting belt tension and drive alignment. 2.07 FILTER MODULES A. Filter modules shall be furnished with face area and performance as scheduled on drawings. Modules shall consist of side - access filter racks, access doors, and filter blank -offs. Filter module requirements shall be coordinated with filter media specified in separate section. B. 4" Cartridge Filters: Provide Gasketted side - access filter racks suitable to support 4" deep high efficiency cartridge type filters with 7/8" headers. Filters to be MERV -11. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION 12.137 AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-2 2.08 FILTER MIXING BOXES A. Combination filter mixing boxes shall have parallel damper blades for internal merging of airstreams. Leaving side shall have bolt holes compatible with unit and other accessories. Mixing box shall be designed to hold 2" pleated throw -away filters. Provide with full size access door. Dampers shall be low leak type construction with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals, mechanically locked into the blade edge, on both the outdoor air and return air. Leakage shall not exceed 5 cfm /sf at one -inch wg. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500. 2.09 INLET DAMPER A. Provide low leak type dampers with metal compressible jamb seals and extruded vinyl blade edge seals. Leakage shall not exceed five cfm per square foot at one -inch wg. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install units and make piping and duct connections as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 For units with water heating and /or cooling coils, install balancing cock, pressure and temperature test stations and shut off valve in return lines. In supply line, install shut off valve, and automatic control valve. Install flexible piping connectors at steam coil connections. 3.03 Extend condensate drain line to nearest floor drain and elbow into drain. Condensate waste shall be trapped at drain pan, with screwed cleanout plug in low point of trap. Multiple condensate discharges shall be trapped separately, as close to the unit as possible. The effective trap seal shall be two (2) times the suction pressure of the fan in inches for draw through units, but not less than three (3) inches. 3.04 Provide equipment base rail or housekeeping pad as required to maintain required height for installation of all piping and ductwork connections to unit including condensate traps. 3.05 Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air handling system. If system is designed to include pre - filters and after - filters, provide only pre - filters. Install new filters at completion of air handling system and prior to testing, adjusting and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed. END OF SECTION 23 7313 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION 12.137 AIR HANDLING UNITS 237313-3 SECTION 23 8146 -WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of water source heat pump work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of water source heat pumps specified in this section include the following: 1. Water to air heat pumps. 2. Water to water heat pumps C. Refer to Division -26 sections for the following work: Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on water source heat pumps. Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory - installed by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: UL Compliance: Provide water source heat pumps which are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with UL requirements. B. Warranty: 1. Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor and heating elements. 2. Provide five year warranty on compressor and heating elements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, fan curves with selection points clearly indicated and installation and start -up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to packaged heating and cooling equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. D. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 12.137 238146-1 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Handle water source heat pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged water source heat pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store water source heat pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading water source heat pumps and moving them to final location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Source Heat Pump Units 1. Water Furnace 2. Climate Master 3. Florida Heat Pump 2.02 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMP UNITS A. General The water - source heating /cooling units shall be either suspended type with horizontal air inlet and discharge or floor mounted vertical units or floor mounted console type with horizontal air inlet and up -flow air discharge. Units shall be ARI -ISO Standard 13256 (GLHP conditions; 77 deg. F summer, 32 deg. F winter) performance certified and listed by a nationally recognized safety testing laboratory or agency, such as ETL Testing Laboratory, Underwriters' Laboratories or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). Each unit shall be computer run - tested at the factory, and shipped in a corrugated box. 2. Units shall have performance and configuration as shown and scheduled on plans. The water - source units shall be designed to operate with entering liquid temperatures between 25 deg. F and 110 deg. F. B. Casing and Cabinet The cabinet shall be fabricated from heavy -gauge galvanized steel. The return and supply air sections shall be insulated with 1/2" thick, 2 lb. density, coated mat glass fiber with edges sealed or tucked under flanges to prevent the introduction of glass fibers into the discharge air. 2. Horizontal and Vertical Units: Provide unit with supply and return duct flanges. Vertical Console Units: Finished cabinet with beige textured epoxy powder coating. Units shall have low horizontal return air with top discharge supply air through an aluminum grille. The top of the cabinet and grille shall be horizontally sloped. 4. Vibration Isolation: Heat pump compressor and water coil shall be isolated from the cabinet and building structure by means of rubber vibration isolators. Refer to vibration isolation section for isolation hanger requirements. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 12.137 238146-2 C. Refrigerant Circuit All water source heat pumps shall contain a sealed HFC 410A refrigerant circuit consisting of a scroll compressor including internal and external vibration isolator mountings. Compressor shall use PSC type motors with overloads. Each circuit shall include the hermetic motor - compressor assembly, reversing valve of hermetic construction with easily replaced external electric solenoid coil (energized only during the heating season), water -to- refrigerant heat exchanger, air -to- refrigerant heat exchanger, capillary expansion device to meter refrigerant flow between the air and water coils, and all interconnecting refrigerant tubing. 2. Water -to- refrigerant heat exchanger shall be coaxial tube -in -tube type with water flowing through inner - serpentine copper coils suitable for 300 psig working pressure, and arranged so that air is not trapped in the coil. All heat pump units shall be supplied with integral safety controls to include a high pressure refrigerant cut -out switch and freezestat for low water temperature protection. The low water temperature protection device shall be of direct sensing type, immersed in the leaving water side of the water -to- refrigerant heat exchanger for accurate temperature sensing with or without water flow. 4. The refrigerant -to -air heat exchanger shall be constructed of 3/8" seamless staggered copper tubes with .006" thick corrugated aluminum fins, 12 or 14 fins per inch and circuited for optimum performance. D. Fans Fans shall be centrifugal, direct -drive type, with ECM2 type with soft start and shall maintain constant CFM over operating static range. If fan is not available with ECM2 type motor, then provide PSC type multi speed motor with internal overload protection and high power factor for maximum efficiency. 2. Fan wheels and housing shall be of galvanized steel construction, removable from unit for repair and /or replacement. Fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced and selected for quiet operation. E. Piping: Fans, motors, and housings shall be isolated from cabinet and chassis by rubber vibration isolators. Supply and return water connections shall be copper threaded fittings. All water piping shall be insulated to prevent condensation at low liquid temperatures. 2. A polyvinyl hose stubbed out from the chassis is provided for condensate drain attachment. The drains must be externally trapped. F. Controls and Electrical Each heat pump shall be factory wired for single point electrical connections for compressor, fan, and controls. Heat pumps shall have control voltage transformer. All control components shall be mounted within a control panel within the unit cabinet complete with an electrical control circuit to include the high pressure and the low water temperature protection devices and night setback relays. Units shall be provided for utilization with remote wall mounted thermostats and shall contain 24V relays for proper operation of compressor, fan and reversing valve components. 2. Heat pumps shall have microprocessor -based controllers with the following features: a. Compressor Lock -out Relay b. Anti Short Cycle Protection C. High and Low Pressure Switch d. Fan Speed Control e. Freeze stat to protect against low water flow f. Condensate Overflow Alarm and Shutdown g. Water Valve Operation MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 12.137 238146-3 G. Provide the following accessories as required. See schedule on plans: 1. Filter Rack, 1" and MERV 8 filter. Provide with units as scheduled on plans. 2. Motorized 2 way 2 position water valve: quick opening, slow closing. 3. Reheat (hot gas or condenser water) and controls for dehumidification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which water source heat pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMPS A. General: Install water source heat pumps in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory- mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. C. Ductwork (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 3113 - Metal Ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. D. Refrigerant Piping (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping. Connect liquid and suction piping to unit as indicated. E. Loop Water Piping (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping and Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment. Connect supply and return piping to unit as indicated. F. Vibration Isolation (if applicable): Refer to Division 23, Section 23 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Provide vibration isolation for unit as indicated. G. Drain Piping (if applicable): Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. H. Start -up water source heat pumps in accordance with manufacturer's start -up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of water source heat pumps. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each water source heat pump: 1. One set filters for each unit. END OF SECTION 23 8146 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WATER SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 12.137 238146-4 SECTION 23 8239 - UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install unit heaters as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 UNIT HEATERS A. Unit heaters shall include the following: 1. Hydronic /Steam Unit Heaters 2. Electric Unit Heaters and Cabinet Unit Heaters 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and /or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment, to include color charts, dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the terminal units. B. Phasing: The contractor shall review with the equipment provider the phasing of the project. In general equipment should not be order until the phase that is needed. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hydronic Unit Heaters and Cabinet Unit Heaters 1. Airtherm 2. Trane 3. McQuay 4. Modine 5. Vulcan 6. Standard 7. Sterling 8. Ted Reed Thermal 9. Dunham Bush 10. Rittling 2.02 HYDRONIC UNIT HEATERS AND CABINET UNIT HEATERS A. Units shall have capacities and ratings and shall be of arrangement as scheduled on the drawings. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT HEATERS 12.137 238239-1 B. Units shall be furnished complete with coils, enclosures, drain pans, fans and motors as required to make complete functioning units. C. Units to be installed in finished areas to be furnished with bonderized, phosphatized, flow- coated baked -on primer with spray applied baked -on enamels in color as selected by Design Professional. D. Coils shall consist of seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Maximum working pressure 125 psig and test pressure of 300 psig. E. Motors for unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters shall be totally enclosed, Class 'B' insulation, with built -in overload protection, and shall be prewired to terminal strip in factory mounted junction box. F. Motors for cabinet unit heaters shall be brushless DC Electrically Commutated Motors (ECM) factory programmed and run tested in assembled units. 1. Motors shall have integral thermal overload protection with a maximum ambient operating temperature of 104F and shall be permanently lubricated. 2. Provide motor controller with contacts to receive 0 -10V DC input from the Building Automation System for control of the motor speed. G. Filters for cabinet unit heaters shall have 1" thick woven glass replaceable media, and permanent aluminum frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install units and make duct and piping connection as indicated on drawings 3.02 Install shut -off cocks, balancing cocks, air vents, control valves and devices as required for complete installation. 3.03 Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory- mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. A. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. END OF SECTION 23 8239 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation UNIT HEATERS 12.137 238239-2 SECTION 26 0010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work shall include furnishing of all systems, equipment and material specified in this division and as called for on the electrical drawings, to include supervision, operations, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start -up and tests for the complete electrical installation. B. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. C. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Fire Protection Association 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 4. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 5. InternationalBuilding Code 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act 7. Iowa Administrative Code 8. NECA Standards 9. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) 10. City of Iowa City Ordinances B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professional of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REG ULA TORY AGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local utility companies. He shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to Design Professional prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the electrical work including State of Iowa Electrical Inspections. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. D. Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010-1 1.05 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only. Contractor shall examine construction drawings to become familiar with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B. Drawings for the electrical work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough -ins and the exact routing of conduits and raceway so as to best fit the layout of the work. D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as couplings, pull or splice boxes may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications or where they are required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside conduit to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -2 C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of the Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Design Professional and his decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. Refer to Division 09 for painting protection. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the contractor to work in areas previously finished by the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Electrical Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B. Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and pipe, sleeve, and /or duct shall be sealed with LIL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. Where piping, sleeves and ducts pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. C. New structure: 1. Contractor will coordinate the placing of openings and lintels in the new structure as required for the installation of the electrical work with the General Contractor. 2. Contractor shall furnish to General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that proper size openings are provided. When additional cutting and patching is required due to Contractor's failure to coordinate this work, Contractor shall make arrangements for the cutting, patching, and painting required. D. Existing Structure: 1. Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. E. Conduits and wireways passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall /floor and conduits, sleeves and /or wireways, shall be sealed with LIL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall /floor. Where conduits, sleeves and /or wireways pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -3 F. For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and conduit shall be sealed with modular mechanical rubber links tightened with bolts as made by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne, Michigan 48184. Waterproofing of conduit penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. 1.10 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Design Professional. Where more than one unit is required of the same system, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Design Professional for review. E. Submit required information on the following items: CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM OTHER SPEC DETAIL PROD INSTALL O&M DEMON- (SEE SECTION EQUIPMENT DWGS DATA SAMPLES METHODS MANUAL STRATION NOTES) 260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems X 200923 Lighting Control System X X X X 262416 Panelboards X 262726 Wiring Devices X 262726 Occupancy Sensors X X X 262815 Motor and Service Disconnects X 262913 Motor Starters X 262923 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers X X X 263353 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply X X X X X 265100 Interior Lighting X 265100 Emergency Inverter X X X X MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -4 F. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Items to be included shall be those listed in shop drawing section. 1.13 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. B. Contractor shall test the electrical grounding system resistance in accordance with Specification Section 26 0526 — Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems and submit a report to Design Professional stating the results. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -5 C. Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Owner instruction shall be provided for the following systems: Sections Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented By Others Present Remarks 262200 Electrical Dist. System 4 Contractor 262413 262416 262419 262815 262823 26 2913 Motor Controls 2 Contractor 262419 26 2726 Building Lighting Controls 2 Contractor 26 5100 I nverter System 2 REMARKS: 1. Perform complete system test at time of instruction. 2. Contractor shall be present for the initial 4 hour session. 3. Owner could have up to 20 in attendance. 4. Total of 40 hours to be divided into several sessions over the first 6 months of warranty period. 5. Any unused hours shall be used at Owner's discretion during the first year of occupancy. D. Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional a certificate signed by the Owner stating the date, time, and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -6 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: E Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: signature date signature date MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -7 1. 14 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier, manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to Design Professional at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, Design Professional will approve it in an addendum. Design Professional will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specified item. B Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers, who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and /or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.16 GUARANTEE A. The entire electrical system including all sub - systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.17 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. A Contract Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by the Owner and Contractor, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Contract Change Order. B. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -8 C. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. A Change Order in excess of $300.00 shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized in behalf of the Owner. 1.18 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non - hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. B. When all the electrical work is complete Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.19 ACCESS DOORS A. When the Electrical Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non - accessible architectural construction, the Electrical Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC -211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B. Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C. Construction: 1. Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2. Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4. Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam - and - studs. 1.20 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Specification Division 1 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. 1.21 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment. Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Pads to be a minimum of 4" in height unless noted otherwise. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer's recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010 -9 6. Use 3000 -psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12" O.C. END OF SECTION 26 0010 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 260010-10 SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section includes the following: 1. Demolition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site unless otherwise specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C. Existing Electrical Services: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. D. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 12.137 260500-1 E. Existing Communications System: Maintain existing system in service. Unless noted otherwise, all work associated with telephone system to be by Owner's Telecommunications Supplier. Contractor to coordinate timing and extent of demolition required. F. Existing Services to Cellular Transmitters: Maintain two existing systems in service. Separate electrical services are located in the main electrical room. Do not disrupt power to transmitters without coordinating with Owner and Vendor. Protect communications cables and pathways through building throughout construction. 3.04 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section. B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. K. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. 3.05 FLUORESCENT LAMP AND BALLAST DISPOSAL A. Unless noted otherwise, all existing fluorescent lamps and ballasts within light fixtures to be removed shall be assumed to contain mercury and PCB's respectively. These items need to be disposed of by a mercury and PCB Disposal Contractor, who shall be a subcontractor to Electrical Contractor. This Disposal Contractor shall have all local, state, and federal authorization for handling, transporting, and processing these materials. Disposal Contractor shall have pollution insurance and shall generate a Certificate of Disposal. Ballasts and all contaminated materials shall be incinerated. Lamps shall be recycled. B. Acceptable Disposal Contractors Subject to compliance with requirements, provide services from one of the following: a. A -tec Recycling, Inc. b. ALTA Resource Management Services, Inc. C. Full Circle Ballast Recyclers d. Midwest Lamp Recycling, Inc. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 12.137 260500-2 3.06 WORK BY OTHERS A. Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Electrical Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general, the following will be performed by others: 1. General Contractor will remove any bases, floor fill, wall work and footings; neatly patch, match, complete and finish all affected surfaces. 2. Mechanical Contractor will disconnect all mechanical services and remove pipe back to behind finish surfaces, close and cap ends of pipe. 3.07 OWNER'S RIGHT OF SALVAGE A. Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 26 0500 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 12.137 260500-3 SECTION 26 0519 - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install all wiring systems. B. This section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for general wiring systems of 600 volts and less. Wiring for a higher voltage rating, if required, shall be as specified in other sections or called for on the drawings. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wire, cable and connectors. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards pertaining to wire, cable and connectors. C. UL Labels: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors which have been UL- listed and labeled. D. NEMA /ICEA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA /Insulated Cable Engineers Association standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of wire and cable. E. ANSI /ASTM: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI /ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable. F. The materials used for wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE A. All wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of not less than 98% conductivity and shall be insulated to 600 V. Conductor sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, conductor sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B. Minimum size conductors shall be #12 AWG for power and lighting. C. Type of wire and cable for various applications shall be as follows: 1. Type THWN, or XHHW (75 deg. C) - use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations. 2. Type THHN, or XHHW (90 deg. C) - use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in dry locations only. Use where lighting branch circuit conductors are routed through fluorescent fixture channels. 3. Type MTW, wet and dry locations - use for low voltage signal and control circuits operating at 25 volts or less. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 12.137 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1 4. Type OF - use where permitted by other sections or by the drawings for underground burial branch circuits. D. For all vibration type installations (i.e. motors, etc), provide stranded type conductors. 2.02 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through #8 AWG, conductors #6 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color coded with one -half inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. Colors shall be assigned to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch circuit distribution. When necessary to use tape, use colored tape on black wire. Do not use colored tape on colored wire. 1 ,?ni,?nRV v Phase 'A' Conductor Black Phase 'B' Conductor Red Phase 'C' Conductor Blue Neutral Conductor White Grounding Conductor Green 2.03 CONNECTORS A. In -line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller, use 3M Co. "Scotchlock" vinyl insulated spring connectors, or equal Ideal "wingnut" or Thomas & Betts. Wago wire nuts are also acceptable. B. Connectors for conductors No. 6 and larger shall be of compression or split -bolt types, National Electric, Thomas & Betts, Blackburn or Burndy mechanical connectors. Fill connector voids with electrical insulation putty, follow with 3 -M Scotch tape #33, minimum 2 layers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Wire shall not be installed in the conduit system until the building is enclosed and masonry work is completed. B. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wiring. Pull mouse through conduits prior to pulling conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All cable for major feeders shall be continuous from origin to termination, unless otherwise indicated. B. Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessible junction boxes. C. All power feeder cable shall be pulled with the use of approved pulling compound or powder. Compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot damage raceway. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 12.137 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 -2 E. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. F. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. G. The continuity of circuit conductors shall not be dependant on service connections such as lamp holders, receptacles, etc., where the removal of such devices would interrupt the continuity. H. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system. I. All branch circuits shall have dedicated neutrals. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energizing system, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 0519 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 12.137 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 -3 SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and shall comply with NEC. B. Applications of grounding work in this section include the following: 1. Underground metal piping. 2. Underground metal water piping. 3. Underground metal structures. 4. Metal building frames. 5. Grounding electrodes. 6. Grounding plates. 7. Grounding rods. 8. Counterpoise loops. 9. Separately derived systems. 10. Service equipment. 11. Enclosures. 12. Equipment. C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electrical grounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL- listed and labeled. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding. C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Materials and Components 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables /wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods /electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2. Raceways: Provide raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings complying with Division 26, Section 26 0533 — Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-1 Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. 4. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications. B. Grounding Rods Ground Rods: a. Solid copper, 3/4" dia. x 10' for service entrance. b. Solid copper, 5/8" dia. x 8' for other applications. 2. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat - shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials and bonding straps as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. C. Install bonding jumpers with ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass water meters. D. Install clamp -on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. E. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system sized as required by the NEC. F. Isolated Grounding (IG) conductors shall be green colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. G. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. H. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding system, test ground resistance with earth test megger. Results shall be submitted to the Design Professional on a report form similar to that which follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 EARTH RESISTANCE FIELD REPORT PROJECT: JOB NUMBER: PAGE OWNER: DATE OF TEST: CONDITIONS: TEST LOCATION: TEST METHODS: TEST INSTRUMENT: SOIL RESISTIVITY /TYPE: COMMENTS (If applicable) TESTING RESULTS: Earth Resistance Testing: Description of systems tested Test No. A) B) C) D) E) COMPLETED BY: COMPANY: COPY TO: Resistance to earth MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-3 B. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 3 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 3 ohms or less by driving additional ground rods or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod. 1. Retest to demonstrate compliance. C. Medium Voltage System Grounds: 1. Test entire ground system for satisfactory continuity. 2. Subject completed system to megger test at each pull point, each building, and at switchyard to ensure ground does not exceed 5 ohms. 3. Tests may be accomplished by Triangulation Method. END OF SECTION 26 0526 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-4 SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, labor and supervision as necessary to provide hangers and supports for conduit, fixtures and equipment. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. B. ANSI /NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI /NEMA Std. Pub. No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies ". C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting. D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL- listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. B. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non - armored type electrical cables in risers; construct for rigid metal conduit; type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. C. U- Channel Strut Systems: Provide U- channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16 -guage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U- channel: 1. Fixture hangers. 2. Channel hangers. 3. End caps. 4. Beam clamps. 5. Wiring stud. 6. Thinwall conduit clamps. 7. Rigid conduit clamps. 8. Conduit hangers. 9. U- bolts. D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel systems of one of the following: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc. 2. Thomas & Betts, Superstrut MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-1 3. Unistrut Div.; Tyco International 4. Globestrut PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C. Conduit hangers and support devices shall be approved type for the method of supporting required. All hangers and supports shall have galvanized finish or other approved corrosion resistance finish. In general, hangers and supports shall be as follows: 1. Where single or multiple run of conduit is routed on surface of structure; use conduit clamps mounted on U- channel strut so as to maintain not less than 1" clearance between conduit and structure. 2. Where single run of conduit is suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamp suspended by 3/8" steel drop rod. 3. Where multiple parallel runs of conduit are suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamps uniformly spaced and supported on trapeze hangers fabricated of U- channel strut, suspended by not less than two steel drop rods. 4. Where circuit voltage is above 600 volts, conduit clamps shall be provided with insulating bushings of dielectric strength as required. 5. Where conduit is buried in concrete floor topping; anchor conduit to structural floor with one hole jiffy clamps. 6. Maximum hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with NEC. D. Hangers and supports shall be anchored to structure as follows: 1. Hangers and supports anchored to poured concrete, use malleable iron or steel concrete inserts attached to concrete forms. 2. Hangers or supports anchored to precast concrete, use self - drilling expansion shields. Expansion shields may be used where concrete inserts have been missed or additional support is required in poured concrete. 3. Hanger or supports anchored to structural steel, use beam clamps and /or steel channels as required by structural system. 4. Hangers or supports anchored to metal deck, use spring clips or approved welding pins. Maximum permissible load on each hanger shall not exceed 50 pounds. 5. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls. 6. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. E. The following is not permitted: 1. Attaching supports and hangers to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-2 2. Use of powder- actuated anchors. Drilling of structural steel members. F. Fixtures on plastered or acoustical ceilings shall not be supported directly on ceiling tile. Provide metal bar hangers or U- channel strut attached to ceiling supports. G. Where disconnect switches and panels cannot be mounted on wall, provide support racks fabricated of structural steel or U- channel strut. H. Provide concrete bases and pads for transformers, switchgear, free standing panels, generators, outdoor lighting poles and other equipment requiring bases, except where drawings indicate that such bases and pads are to be furnished by the General Contractor. Furnish all equipment anchor bolts and installation for their proper and accurate location. All concrete work and reinforcing shall comply with General Specifications. END OF SECTION 26 0529 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529-3 SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete conduit systems. B. Conduit systems shall be provided for all wiring, except where the drawings or other sections of the specifications indicate that certain wiring may be installed in cable trays, surface raceway, underfloor raceway, wireways and /or auxiliary gutters. C. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Intermediate metal conduit. 4. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Rigid metal conduit. 6. Rigid non - metallic conduit. 7. Surface metal raceways. 8. Overhead metal raceways. 9. Underfloor metal raceways. D. Provide factory painted red conduit for fire alarm system. E. Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install electrical boxes and fittings as required by drawings and specifications. F. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Floor boxes. G. Telecommunications Raceway Requirements: 1. The term "telecommunications" includes all low voltage technology systems including voice and data, access control, video surveillance, intrusion detection, audio video, paging, intercom, nurse call, school bells and /or clock systems. The term does not include fire alarm system, which is addressed separately in the plans and specifications. 2. Contractor shall provide and install telecommunications boxes and conduits, including wall sleeves unless otherwise noted. 3. Below grade building entrance conduits within the building footprint shall be schedule 40 electrical PVC unless otherwise noted. Long sweep ninety degree elbows for under building footprint conduits shall be fiberglass sweeps with PVC schedule 40 conduit connectors built into the ends of the sweeps. Sweeps of 4" diameter shall be 36" minimum radius. 4. Below grade conduits for low voltage system cabling are not acceptable unless specifically directed. Below grade entrance conduits and floor boxes in slab on grade are exceptions to this rule. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-1 5. Underground conduits outside the building footprint shall be continuous orange HDPE (high density polyethylene) with 1250 pound braided mule tape used as pull string unless otherwise noted. Round pull string or other rope is not acceptable for pulling due to risk of raceway damage. HDPE manufacturer approved water proof couplers shall be used for conduit type transition. HDPE to HDPE connection shall be hot fusion splice. 6. HDPE shall be minimum schedule 40 wall thickness for 2" diameter and smaller. The wall thickness shall be minimum SDR 11 for sizes larger than 2" diameter. 7. All below grade conduits shall be plugged at each end during construction to keep water, mud, rodents, etc., out. 8. All below grade entrance conduits shall be plugged on each end with removable mechanical plugs to keep water from entering the building for the life of the building. These plugs shall be installed inside the building above slab, and also at the first hand - hole outside the building (or where the conduits terminate underground). These plugs shall also seal around the utility entrance cables, including in and around all sub -ducts for a complete water tight seal. These mechanical plugs shall be as found on www.innerduct.com or engineer approved equivalent. Coordinate with the utility to determine size of cables for the plug inserts required. This work shall be completed before the Owner occupies the building. 9. All below grade exterior conduits shall have a tracer wire with adequate slack loop at each end for owner to conveniently connect and trace. All tracer wires shall protrude from closed hand holes so tracing may be accomplished without lifting the hand hole lid. 10. Interior building, above grade conduits and sleeves shall be EMT unless otherwise noted. PVC is never acceptable above grade. 11. All interior conduits shall have bushings installed during conduit installation. Completed individual installations shall have bushings installed same business day. 12. All interior conduits shall have pull strings, except sleeves which are less than 4' long. EMT conduits shall receive standard round cable pull string (multi- strand plastic twine type). 13. Minimum interior conduit size for all information jacks (voice data cabling) shall be 1" unless otherwise noted. 14. Minimum interior conduit size for video surveillance, intrusion detection, audio video, paging, intercom, nurse call, school bells and /or clock systems shall be 3/4" unless otherwise noted. 15. Access control system conduit sizes at the door location shall be per the access control detail found on the drawings. The conduit from the door location to the access control head end which contains all conductors needed for all access control functions at that door (may be individual conductors but is often one large composite cable) shall be minimum 3/4 ". 16. Boxes for all low voltage systems in stud walls shall be metallic 4 "x4 "x2.125" with 0.5" mud ring unless otherwise noted. 17. Boxes in stud walls for information jacks shall receive single gang mud rings unless otherwise noted. 18. Boxes in masonry walls shall be minimum 2.5" deep for all low voltage systems. 19. Boxes in masonry walls for information jacks shall be single gang unless otherwise noted. 20. Wiremold surface raceway for all low voltage systems shall be minimum V2400 unless noted otherwise. 21. Wiremold surface boxes for all low voltage shall be minimum 2.5" deep unless otherwise noted. 22. Wiremold surface boxes for information jacks shall be single gang unless otherwise noted. 23. Conduits inside walls which feed the low voltage side of dual compartment Wiremold shall be minimum 1.25" 24. Contractor shall provide and install hand holes for cable pulling in buried raceway at a maximum interval of 500'. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL- listed and labeled. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. D. The materials used in the fabrication of the raceway system shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. E. NEC compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. F. UL Compliance: Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL- listed and labeled. G. ANSI /NEMA Standards Compliance: Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet -steel outlet boxes, covers and box supports. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of raceway required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with requirements for the following: 1. Overhead metal raceways. 2. Underfloor metal raceway systems. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of raceway systems showing layout of raceways and fittings, spatial relationships to associated equipment, and adjoining raceways, if any. Show connections to electrical power panels and feeders. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of floor box required. Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Conduit: Full weight, threaded, rigid steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by hot dip or electro galvanized process. Additional protection by electrostatically applied baked coating. Thread protective caps and couplings. Use for all feeders larger than 2 1/2" in size. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): May be used as approved by code where rigid conduit is specified, except shall not be used for conduit buried in earth fill. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Thin wall, electrically welded cold rolled steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by electro galvanized process. Baked clear elastic enamel coating in and out. Use for installations in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed. Size limited to 2 1/2" and smaller. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 E. Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro galvanized steel strip. Use for final connections to all motor operated equipment such as unit heaters, fans, air handling units, pumps, generators, generator enclosures and connections to dry type transformer, connections from junction boxes to lighting fixtures in accessible ceiling, and for wiring within casework and millwork. F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip, with water and oil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connection to equipment listed in paragraph "D" above when located in wet areas. G. PVC Conduit: Conduit shall be Carlon PV -Duit, Type 40, 90 deg.C. Conduit shall be composed of Polyvinyl Chloride and shall conform to NEMA Standards. Conduit, fittings and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer. May be used where installed in earth fill or in poured concrete walls, columns, floors, or under concrete slab. H. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Full weight, threaded, rigid aluminum conduit. Thread protective caps and couplings. I. MC cable will not be allowed. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Conduit Fittings: Threaded, galvanized malleable iron or heavy steel, water and concrete tight. Grounding type nylon insulated bushings for connectors at cabinets, boxes and gutters. B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings shall be standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows. Material shall be malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy. Iron or steel fittings shall be zinc or cadmium plated. Aluminum fittings shall not contain more than 0.4 percent copper. 2. Locknuts shall be of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure. 3. Bushings shall be of the metallic insulating type, and consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are not permitted. 4. Erickson -type couplings may be used to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete. 5. Sealing fittings shall be of the threaded cast iron type. Sealing fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. 6. Set screw fittings are not allowed. C. Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel, water and concrete tight. D. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Squeeze or screw type galvanized malleable iron or steel with nylon insulated throats. E. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel, with watertight gaskets, "O" ring and retainer, and nylon insulated throats. F. Condulet Fittings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be condulet type for all sharp turns, tees, etc. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-4 G. Observe National Electrical Code requirements for insulated bushings on 1 -1/4 inch and larger conduits. Double locknuts and fibre bushings with threads fully engaged are required. 1 -1/4 inch and larger EMT connectors, if used, must also accommodate insulated bushings with threads fully engaged. T & B "Insuline" or Appleton insulated throat connectors are acceptable in lieu of separate bushings. 2.03 WIREWAYS A. General: Provide electrical raceways of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses), number of channels, for each type service indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not necessarily limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold down straps, end caps, and other components and accessories as needed for complete system. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for electrical raceways. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Provide surface metal raceways of sizes and channels indicated on plans and constructed of galvanized steel with covers. Provide fittings indicated which match and mate with raceway. Finish with manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel paint. C. Underfloor Metal Raceways: Provide underfloor metal raceways of types and sizes indicated on plans. Provide fittings indicated which match and mate with raceway. Underfloor metal raceways pertain to header ducts, trench ducts and single and two level underfloor systems. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D Company b. Walker /Parkersburg Division C. Wiremold 2.04 WALL OUTLET BOXES A. General: Boxes shall be Raco, Steel City, Appleton or equal, catalog numbers based on Raco, unless otherwise indicated. In general, the type of boxes shall be as follows: 1. In Stud Walls: For single outlet use 4" square by 1 -1/2" deep box #192. Boxes to be provided with raised covers of depth as required for thickness of wall materials. 2. In Masonry and Poured Concrete Walls: Use 3 -3/4" high by 2 -1/2" and /or 3 -1/2" deep masonry boxes #691 through #699 and /or #960 through #969. 3. Surface Mounted Wall Outlets: Use 4" square by 1 -1/2" deep box #192 with raised cover. 4. Suspended Ceiling: Use octagon boxes, depth as required for application, securely fastened to structure. 5. Poured Concrete Ceiling Slabs: Use octagon concrete rings with back plates. 6. Switch Outlets in Door Jambs: Use partition boxes #426 and #427 for single and two gang switches. 7. Outlets Installed Outdoors or in Wet Locations: Use Bell Product 200 Series outlet box. 2.05 FLOOR OUTLET BOXES A. Floor Boxes: Provide stamped steel, epoxy coated specifically designed for on -grade use, fully adjustable floor boxes as indicated, complete with necessary plates, receptacle, adaptors and covers. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5 B. Floor boxes shall be provided with barrier to separate high and low potential voltages. C. Furnish electrical outlets with duplex receptacles per specification Section 26 2726 — Wiring Devices. D. Special outlets shall be furnished as called for on drawings. 2.06 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Construction, sizes and installation of pull and junction boxes shall comply with NEC, Article 370. B. Pull and junction boxes not specifically described in NEC, Article 370, shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel with screw or hinged covers, and equipped with corrosion resistant screws and hardware. C. Pull and junction boxes for installation in poured concrete floors shall be flush type, cast iron, with watertight gasketed covers. Boxes for installation in floors with tile or carpet floor covering shall have recessed covers to accommodate the floor covering. D. Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installation shall be raintight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAY A. In general, all horizontal runs of branch circuit conduit shall be installed in ceiling plenum. Conduit for convenience outlets, wall mounted fixtures and other wall outlets shall be routed overhead and dropped through wall to the outlet. Branch circuit conduit shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs except where conditions will not permit the conduit to be installed overhead. B. Feeder conduits to panelboards, motor control centers and other major loads may be installed in fill below concrete slabs on grade. C. Conduits that are run in fill below concrete slabs on grade shall be installed so as not to interfere with welded wire mesh (wwm), vapor barrier, or concrete placement. D. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms, and at connection to surface panels and free standing equipment, and as otherwise noted. E. Exposed conduit and conduit concealed in ceiling space shall be routed in lines parallel to building construction. F. All conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings shall be routed so as not to interfere with tile panel removals with 4'0" to 6'0" flexible conduit drops from an independent junction box, accessible from below the ceiling, to ceiling mounted equipment. G. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2" trade size except all home runs to panels shall be minimum 3/4 ". Where specified size is not called for on drawings or in the specifications, conduit shall be sized per NEC. H. Install the conduit system mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to all cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Conduit shall enter and be secured to all cabinets and boxes in such a manner that all parts of the system will have electrical continuity. I. Installation of PVC conduit shall comply with the NEC with regard to grounding. J. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade unless noted otherwise. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS QY11*191II&^'. K. Unless noted otherwise, all flush mounted panelboard enclosures shall have three 3/4" and one 1 -1/4" empty conduits stubbed out to an accessible area. L. Support conduit raceway systems in accordance with requirements as set forth in the National Electric Code. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire /cable and raceway installation work. 3.03 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Outlet boxes shall be installed for all fixtures, switches, receptacles and other devices. B. Approximate locations of outlets are shown on the plans, but each outlet location as shown shall be checked by Contractor before installing the outlet box. C. Wall boxes installed flush in common wall shall not be back -to -back or through -wall type. Boxes located on opposite sides of a common wall that are closely connected by conduit shall have the conduit openings plugged with duct seal. D. Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. E. Outlet boxes shall be installed plumb and square with wall face and with front of box or cover located within 1/8" of face of finish wall. Boxes in masonry shall be set with bottom of the box tight to the masonry unit. 3.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Install pull boxes, junction boxes and auxiliary wiring gutters where indicated on drawings and where required to facilitate installation of the wiring. B. For concealed conduit, install boxes flush with ceiling or wall, with covers accessible and easily removable. Where flush boxes are installed in finish ceilings or walls, provide cover which shall exceed the box face dimensions by a sufficient amount to allow no gap between box and finished material. C. Boxes shall not be located in finished, occupied rooms, without prior approval of Design Professional. END OF SECTION 26 0533 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation RACEWAYS AND BOXES 12.137 FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-7 SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall provide identification for wiring systems and equipment as called for in this section. B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following: 1. Conduit color banding. 2. Buried cable warnings. 3. Cable conductor identification. 4. Operational instructions and warnings. 5. Danger signs. 6. Equipment /system identification signs. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical marking and labeling identification systems. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. B. Color -Coded Conduit Markers 1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre - printed, flexible or semi - rigid, permanent, plastic -sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap -on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage, panel and circuit of conductor(s) in conduit. 2. Colors: a. 120/208 volt: gray b. Fire alarm: *red C. UPS: blue * Factory painted. 3. For conduits above ceilings, spray painting of boxes and portions of conduit is acceptable in lieu of banding. For 120/208 volt branch circuits, mark circuit numbers on all junction /pull boxes. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12.137 260553-1 C. Cable /Conductor Identification Bands General: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl -cloth self- adhesive cable /conductor markers of wrap- around type; either pre- numbered plastic coated type, or write -on type with clear plastic self- adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification. D. Self- Adhesive Tape for Receptacles and Wiremold General: Provide manufacturer's standard self adhesive or pressure- sensitive, pre - printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application. E. Engraved Plastic- Laminate Signs General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in sizes and thickness indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. a. Thickness: 1/16 ", for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" lengths; 1/8" for larger units. b. Fasteners: Self- tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. B. Conduit Identification Conduit above accessible ceiling spaces shall be identified per 2.01 B. 2. Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical piping which is identified by a color -coded method, apply color -coded identification on electrical conduit in a manner similar to piping identification. Identify junction and pullboxes of systems with stencil lettering for panel and circuit numbers or system type. C. Underground Cable /Conduit Identification General: During back - filling /top /soiling of each exterior underground electrical, signal or communication cable or conduit, install continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 ", install a single line marker. D. Cable /Conductor Identification General: Apply cable /conductor identification on each cable and conductor in each box /enclosure /cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication /signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as color -coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents and similar previously established identification for project electrical work. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12.137 260553-2 E. Operational Identification and Warnings General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self- adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes. F. Equipment /System Identification General: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication /signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self - explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1 -1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work. a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access panel /doors to electrical facilities. C. Major electrical switchgear. d. Motor control centers, disconnects & starters. e. Fire alarm master station. 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate. END OF SECTION 26 0553 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12.137 260553-3 SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 00 10 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. B. Coordinate installation with 23 09 00 — Instrumentation and Control. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary for a complete operational lighting control system as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. B. LIL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which have been LIL- listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general- and specific- purpose wiring devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's name and product data literature for each lighting control component required. B. For occupancy sensors and related components, submit Manufacturer's device layout, product data and project specific wiring diagrams. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The control system designated on the drawings and plans and herein specified shall be guaranteed to be free from original defects in both material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years. This warranty shall become effective starting the date of project substantial completion. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-1 1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Lighting control system for manual and automatic control of interior lighting systems. Space Control — Provide occupancy /vacancy sensors with Manual -ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands -free operation is desirable and Automatic -ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual -ON occupancy /vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line -of -sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner - mounted sensors and Manual -ON switches. 2. Task Lighting / Plug Loads — Provide automatic shut off of non - essential plug loads and task lighting in all spaces except toilet rooms and storerooms. Provide Automatic -ON of plug loads whenever spaces are occupied. For spaces with multiple occupants a single shut off consistent with the overhead lighting may be used for the area. 3. Daylit Areas — All luminaries within 15' of windows (the daylit zone) shall be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones. Luminaires closest to the daylight aperture shall be controlled separately from luminaires farther from the daylight aperture, within the daylight zone. 4. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) level that initiate dimming shall be programmed to be not less than 125% of the nighttime maintained designed illumination levels. 5. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full -on prior to dimming. B. Additional controls. Provide occupancy /vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants or where line -of -sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner - mounted with manual -on switches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design product: WattStopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM) or subject to compliance with specified requirements of this section, one of the following: 1. WattStopper Digital Lighting Management (DLM) 2. Lutron Eco System 2.02 SINGLE /DUAL RELAY WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Passive Infrared: Manual -ON, Automatic -OFF passive infrared (PIR) wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square -foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area controlled; WattStopper model numbers PIN-100, PW -200, PIN-103, PW -203. B. Ultrasonic: Manual -ON, Automatic -OFF ultrasonic wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square -foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area controlled; WattStopper model numbers UW- 100, UW -200. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-2 C. Dual Technology: Manual -ON, Automatic -OFF dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square -foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper model numbers DW -100, DW -200, DW -103, DW -203. 2.03 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM A. Description: Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the system which accommodates the square -foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters. B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following: Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables: a. Sensitivity — 0 -100% in 10% increments b. Time delay — 1 -30 minutes in 1 minute increments C. Test mode — Five second time delay d. Detection technology — PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and /or re- activation. e. Walk- through mode f. Load parameters including Auto /Manual -ON, blink warning, and daylight enable /disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network. 2. Two -way infrared (I R) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls. 3. Device Status LEDs including: a. PIR Detection b. Ultrasonic detection C. Configuration mode d. Load binding 4. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools. 5. Manual override of controlled loads. C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings. D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology local lighting control network. No additional configuration will be required. E. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC 2.04 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES AND DIMMERS A. Description: Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features: Two -way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls. 2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttors and /or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-3 3. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. 4. Blue Load /Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics: a. Bi -level LED b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch C. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active 5. Dimming switches shall include seven bi -level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps. B. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology local lighting control network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi -way switching. C. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: 1. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa). 2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only. 3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. 4. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours. 5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch. 6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads. D. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW -101, LMSW -102, LMSW -103, LMSW -104, LMSW -105, LMSW -108, LMDM -101. 2.05 ROOM CONTROLLERS A. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features: 1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy- efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. 2. Simple replacement — Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off - the -shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup. 3. Device Status LEDs to indicate: a. Data transmission b. Device has power C. Status for each load d. Configuration status 4. Plenum rated 5. Manual override and LED indication for each load MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-4 6. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) 7. Zero cross circuitry for each load. B. On /Off Room Controllers shall include 1. One or two relay configuration 2. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy -based control of plug loads within the space. a. One relay configuration only b. Automatic -ON /OFF configuration 3. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC -101, LMRC -102, LMPL -101 C. On /Off /Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include: 1. Real time current monitoring 2. One, two or three relay configuration 3. One 0 -10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. 4. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: a. Establish preset level for each load from 0 -100% b. Set high and low trim for each load C. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours 5. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy -based control of plug loads within the space. a. One relay configuration only b. Automatic -ON /OFF configuration 4. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC -211, LRMC -212, LRMC -213, LMPL -201, LMRC- 311, LM RC -312, LM RC -313. 2.06 DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring. B. Digital photosensors include the following features: An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers. 2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1- 10,000 footcandles (fc). 3. The capability of switching one - third, one -half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-5 4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a deadband or a separation between the "ON Setpoint" and the "OFF Setpoint" that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off. 5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a user - selectable minimum level. 6. Optional programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy. 7. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and /or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls. 8. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission. 9. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding. 10. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF. 11. An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox. C. Closed loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: 1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone. 2. Automatic self - calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. 3. Automatically establishes setpoints following self - calibration. 4. A sliding setpoint control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a "Day Setpoint" and the "Night Setpoint" to prevent the lights from cycling. 5. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS -400. D. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: 1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room. 2. Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. 3. A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a " Setpoint" to be maintained during operation. 4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS -500. 2.07 CONFIGURATIONS TOOLS A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a LISB interface. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-6 B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include: Two -way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR- enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet. 2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu - driven operation. 3. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches. 4. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors. 5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s)on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. 6. Adjust or fine -tune daylighting settings established during auto - commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls. C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT -100, LMCI- 100 /LMCS -100 2.08 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit — A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON /OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include: 1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz., 20 amp ballast rating 2. Push to test button 3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface B. WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU -100, ELCU -200. C. Where dimmed fixture are connected to an emergency lighting control unit, provide an additional relay to force 0 -10V control to go to 100% light output. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install components as indicated on the drawings and as called for below. B. Contractor shall purchase from manufacturer cable lengths with the RJ45 jacks or make their own. C. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre - installation meeting with the manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. E. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions unless otherwise indicated. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-7 F. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings. 1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant leaves area. 2. Adjust lighting system to provide maximum lighting levels as indicated on the drawings. 3.02 FACTORY COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the lighting control(s) installation, the lighting control system (all sensors and control equipment) shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble -free occupancy -based lighting control system. UI shall witness the commissioning. The electrical contractor shall modify sensor locations and wiring as directed by the factory technician as required achieve required functionality. C. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the Manufacturer, Owner and Engineer with ten working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the lighting control system fine tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the Owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors. D. The project will be constructed in multiple phases. Multiple testing and checkout events will be required. E. Re- commissioning. After 30 days from occupancy recalibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner's requirements. Provide a detailed report of recommissioning activity. F. Provide written or computer - generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including room by room description. Report to include: 1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints. 2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.) 3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.) 3.03 TRAINING A. Provide two (2) two -hour training sessions for the Owner. 3.04 SPARE PARTS A. Spare Parts: Provide the following list of spare equipment to Owner to match equipment used in project. 1. Digital Lighting Management Occupancy Sensor — quantity: 4 2. Digital Lighting Management Photo Sensor — quantity: 2 3. Digital Lighting Management Single Room 0 — 10V Controller — quantity: 4 4. Emergency transfer relay — quantity: 4 5. Digital Lighting Management Control Cables — quantity: 5, length: 25' 6. Digital Wall Switch - Quantity: 4 7. Digital Wall Dimmer - Quantity: 1 8. Handheld programmer — Quantity 1 END OF SECTION 26 0923 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS 12.137 260923-8 SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install lighting panelboards and distribution panelboards as specified in this section and as called for on the drawings. B. Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following: 1. Lighting and appliance panelboards. 2. Power distribution panelboards. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to panelboards and accessories, and enclosures; provide units which have been UL- listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets and cutout boxes. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt maximum) ", Pub. No. 1, "Panel boards ", and installation portion of Pub. No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less ". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground -fault circuit interrupters and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (specification based on Square D): 1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Cutler Hammer MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PANELBOARDS 12.137 262416-1 2.02 PANELBOARDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. 1. All Multi- Section Panels: Same dimensions. 2. Provide two keys for each panel. 3. Provide copper ground bar. 4. All panels shall have a designed short circuit rating label. B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breakers shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bussing shall be distributed phase sequence type. 2. The bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. The rigidity and gauge of steel to comply with UL Standard 50 cabinets. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition to connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboards. 3. If ground -fault interrupting breakers (GFI), switched neutral or other special types of breakers require additional pole spaces, size of panel shall be increased accordingly to give the scheduled numbers of poles for spare breakers and blank spaces. 4. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler -type locks with catches and spring - loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim ring clamps which shall be completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. A circuitry directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. 5. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for conductor specified. 6. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule. Series connected interrupting ratings are not acceptable. This short circuit current rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted on the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of applying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. Bus Bar: Copper. Provide two 1 "C and three 3/4 "C stubs out of all flush mounted panelboards to accessible ceiling space. Panelboards shall have door -in -door covers. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PANELBOARDS 12.137 262416 -2 C. Power Distribution Panelboards; Circuit Breaker Type: Panelboards to be used for main circuit distribution and power circuit distribution shall be similar to lighting panelboards with the following additions: a. Cabinet doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three -point latch and vault lock. End walls shall be removable. b. Main lugs or main breakers shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. C. When required, panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment. d. Bus Bar: Copper. 2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. B. Circuit Breakers - Branch Circuit Panelboards: Branch circuit breakers up to 150 amperes shall be Square D Type QOB, Q1 or equal. Breakers shall be bolt -on type toggle action with quick -make, quick -break mechanism. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between on and off when the breaker is tripped and by a highly visible red tripped circuit indicator. All multi -pole breakers shall be single- operated handle, internal common trip. Breakers having handle ties but not factory labeled "common trip" will be rejected. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking. Tandem or "piggyback" breakers providing two circuits from one pole space are prohibited. C. Circuit Breakers - Distribution Panelboards: Molded case circuit breakers shall be rated 15 through 2500 amperes. Breakers covered under this specification may be applied in switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, combination motor starter, busway plug -in units or individual enclosures. 2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have overcenter, trip -free, toggle -type operating mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action and positive handle indication. Two and three -pole breakers shall be common trip. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Units shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connection at either end. Operating handles shall assume a center position when tripped. All breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C. A button shall be provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. Breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper /aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical screw type lugs. 2.04 FUSES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time /current and peak let- through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PANELBOARDS 12.137 262416-3 B. Main Service Feeders and Branch Circuits: For switch rating over 600 amperes: Hi -Cap, Type KRP -C with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS. For switch rating 600 amperes or less: Low peak current limiting fuses, Type LPN(S) -R, with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS. C. Motors Above One (1) Horsepower: For fuse rating 600 amperes or less, dual element time delay, Type FRN(S) -R, with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS. Size fuses per Article 430 of the National Electric Code. D. Motors One (1) Horsepower or Less: Single phase 150 volts or less, Fustat fuses for motor running protection sizes. Single phase or three phase over 150 volts, Fustron fuses for motor running protection, with interrupting rating of 100,000 RMS. Size fuses per Article 430 of the National Electric Code. E. Fuses for all feeders, branch circuits, motors and other equipment shall be selected in types and ratings in accordance with NEC to provide a coordinated system of overcurrent protection, thus in case of a fault or harmful overload, only the fuses nearest the fault or overload will open. F. Provide one spare set of three (3) of each size and type of fuse used on project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Securely anchor panelboards to structure and make feeder and branch circuit connections as indicated in specifications and on the drawings. C. Each panelboard directory shall be typewritten to identify the load fed by each circuit. Spare breakers and circuits to be left blank with circuit breaker in off position. END OF SECTION 26 2416 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation PANELBOARDS 12.137 262416 -4 SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install wiring devices as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide electrical wiring devices which have been UL- listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general- and specific- purpose wiring devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's name and product data literature for each type of wiring device required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES A. All switches and receptacles shall be "specification grade ", side and back wired, except where higher grade is called for on the plans. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Hubbell, Inc.: 1. Hubbell, Inc. 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton B. Color of switches, receptacles and coverplates shall be determined at the time of shop drawing review. Receptacles connected to the UPS system shall be blue. C. Wall switches shall be as follows: 1. Single pole toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120 -277 volt, #1221 series. 2. Double pole toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120 -277 volt, #1222 series. 3. Three -way toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120 -277 volt #1223 series. 4. Four -way toggle light switch - 20 amp, 120 -277 volt, #1224 series. 5. Double -pole double -throw center off light switch - 20 amp, 277 volt, #1386 series. 6. Momentary contact switch - 15 amp, 120 -277 volt, #1556 series. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WIRING DEVICES 12.137 262726-1 D. Receptacles shall be as follows: 1. Duplex receptacles - 2 pole, 3 wire grounding type, back and side wired, 20 amp, 125 volt, NEMA 5 -20R (unless noted otherwise on drawings). Face material shall be thermoplastic. Acceptable manufacturer's catalog numbers: P &S 5362, Hubbell 5352, Leviton 5352. Wherever a duplex receptacle is shown outdoors, provide Hubbell 5362_WR or equivalent. 2. Receptacles for power and special purpose outlets shall have characteristics and NEMA configurations as per electrical symbols listed on drawings. 3. Ground fault interrupting receptacles (GFI) shall be duplex with test and reset buttons, equal to Hubbell GF5352 series. 4. Surge suppression outlets indicated as TVSS on drawings shall be equal to Hubbell 5352 -IS. 5. Tamper resistant type duplex receptacles where required shall be 20 amp, 125 volt, NEMA 5 -20R equal to Hubbell BR 20 series with the following additional requirements: a. Shall permit current to flow only while a standard plug is in the proper position in the receptacle. b. Screws exposed while the wall plates are in place shall be the tamperproof type. C. Shall be installed where indicated on plans. 6. Isolated ground type duplex receptacles shall be orange in color, equal to Hubbell IG 5362 (for 20 amp, 125 volt) or as designated on plans for special purpose ratings. 7. Combination isolated ground and surge suppression outlets shall be equal to Hubbell IG 53521S. 8. All receptacles connected to UPS circuits shall be as specified in 2.01 above, except shall have "blue" bodies. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Cover Plates: 1. Stainless steel, smooth metal, Type 302. 2. Provide plates for all switches, receptacles, TV outlets, other outlets and blank plates for unused outlets. 3. Plates for surface outlets shall be of the raised cover type utilizing 4" square boxes. 4. Outlets Installed Outdoors or in Wet Locations: a. Weather Proof Flip Cover ( "WP "): Weatherproof device covers shall consist of cast metal cover plate and cap over each opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a spring hinged flap. The weatherproof integrity shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or hospital grade attachment plug caps are inserted. Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight manner. 1) Horizontally mounted devices shall have cover plate aligned for same mounting, equal to Hubbell CWP series. 2) Vertically mounted devices shall have cover plate aligned for same mounting, equal to Hubbell WP series. b. Weather Proof Cord and Plug Cover ( "WPD "): Intermatic WP1020 outdoor outlet covers. Covers to be made of clear, UV stabilized polycarbonate, hinged at the top with a securing tab at the bottom. Gaskets shall be provided to mount between outlet boxes and cover /base assemblies. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WIRING DEVICES 12.137 262726-2 2.03 DIMMERS A. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Solid -state dimmer capable of controlling 120 VAC incandescent or quartz halogen lighting intensity over complete range from zero to full light intensity. Unit shall contain torodial filter to eliminate noise and RFI (Radio Frequency Interference). Unit shall be voltage compensated. Dimmer control shall be linear slide or rotary with integral On /Off switch. Dimmers for low voltage fixtures shall be UL listed to control transformer - supplied incandescent low voltage lamps. Verify compatibility with electronic or magnetic transformers. B. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Provide single -pole, semi - conductor modular type AC dimmers for fluorescent fixtures with 60 hertz, wattage and voltage as indicated, and with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise and interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low end dimming; and with anodized heat sinks. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 2. Prescolite Controls 3. Lithonia Control Systems 4. Lightolier Controls 5. Honeywell Controls 2.04 PLUG -IN STRIP RECEPTACLE UNITS 1. Gauge of steel shall be not less than 0.040 inch steel for base and cover. Nominal dimension shall be as follows: a. Wiremold G3000 Series: 1 -1/2 by 2 -3/4 inches with inside cross sectional area not less than 3.5 square inches. b. Wiremold G4000 Series: 1 -3/4 by 4 -3/4 inches with inside cross sectional area not less than 7.5 square inches. 2. Thoroughly clean, phosphatize and paint the enclosures at the factory with primer and the manufacturer's standard baked enamel or lacquer finish. B. Receptacles shall be duplex, type per paragraph "RECEPTACLES" in this section. Device cover plates shall be the manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant finish and shall not exceed the dimensions of the enclosure. C. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, spacing of the receptacles along the strip shall be 24 inches on centers. D. Wires within the strips shall be not less than #12 AWG copper, with 600 volt ratings. E. Installation fittings shall be designed for the strips being installed including bends, offsets, device brackets, inside couplings, wire clips, and elbows. F. Bond the strips to the conduit systems for their branch supply circuits. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold Company 2. Hubbell Inc. 2.05 POKE - THROUGH ASSEMBLY DEVICES A. Provide factory - assembled poke- through assembly devices, with power -rated 15 amp, 125 volts, single pole, 3 wire grounding, duplex NEMA type 5 -15R receptacles; capable of maintaining a fire stop equivalent to rating of floor. Construct for installation in concrete floor 3" thick, with center tube, fire stop wafers, spreader plate, service fitting base plate, and 4- 11/16" conduit box. Provide floor service fitting base with alignment adjusting screws. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WIRING DEVICES 12.137 262726-3 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell, Inc. 2. Wiremold PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices as indicated on the drawings and as called for below. B. In masonry walls, switches and receptacle heights shall be adjusted as required so outlets are at nearest mortar joint to specified height. C. Where light switches are located adjacent to doors, they shall be installed on "knob" side of door, unless indicated otherwise. D. Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top receptacle is switched; the remaining receptacle shall be unswitched. E. All GFI type receptacles shall be installed where GFI notation is shown on plans. No downstream protection of receptacles will be allowed from load side of other GFI type receptacles. F. Prior to roughing -in outlet boxes, Contractor shall verify from general construction drawings, door swings, type of wall finishes and locations for counters and work benches. END OF SECTION 26 2726 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation WIRING DEVICES 12.137 262726-4 SECTION 26 2815 - MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. In general, disconnect switches are indicated on the drawings, and it shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install all disconnect switches for equipment and motors furnished by him, and for equipment and motors furnished by others. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have been UL- listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No. KS 1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Bussman 2. General Electric 3. ITE 4. Square D Co. 5. Cutler Hammer 2.02 DISCONNECTS A. All disconnects shall be heavy duty type unless noted otherwise. B. Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors larger than 1/2 horsepower, for integral horsepower motors, and for equipment of similar capacity shall break all ungrounded conductors and shall be quick -make, quick -break with interlocking covers. C. Disconnects installed indoors shall have NEMA 1 enclosures, disconnects installed outdoors or in wet locations shall have raintight NEMA 3R enclosures. D. All disconnects shall be of the fuse type, except where drawings indicate non -fuse type (N.F.). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 12.137 262815-1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Install disconnect switches used with motor - driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 26 2815 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 12.137 262815-2 SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide circuit breakers, fuses and motor overload relays and install in disconnect switches and motor starters as required for proper overcurrent protection for service feeders, branch feeders, branch circuits, motors, transformers and other equipment requiring protection. B. Overcurrent protection shall be provided for each conductor and all equipment to open the circuit if the current reaches a value that will cause an excessive or dangerous temperature in conductors or conductor insulation. Circuit breakers shall have frame and trip ratings as scheduled on drawings. C. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following: 1. Circuit breakers 2. Fuses 3. Overload relays 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489, "Molded -Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures ", and UL 198D, "High- Interrupting- Capacity Class K Fuses ". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std. Pub. Nos. AB 1, AB 2, and SG 3 pertaining to molded -case and low voltage power -type circuit breakers. D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining to low voltage cartridge fuses. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including: amperes, voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitations, internal inductive and non - inductive loads, time - current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Circuit Breakers a. General Electric Co. b. Square D Co. C. Cutler Hammer MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 12.137 262816-1 2. Fuses a. Bussmann Div.; McGraw - Edison Co. b. CEFCO C. Gould Shawmut d. Littelfuse B. All similar products shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. B. Circuit Breakers - Branch Circuit Panelboards: Branch circuit breakers up to 150 amperes shall be Square D Type QOB, Q1 or equal. Breakers shall be bolt -on type toggle action with quick -make, quick -break mechanism. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between on and off when the breaker is tripped and by a highly visible red tripped circuit indicator. All multi -pole breakers shall be single- operated handle, internal common trip. Breakers having handle ties but not factory labeled "common trip" will be rejected. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking. Tandem or "piggyback" breakers providing two circuits from one pole space are prohibited. C. Circuit Breakers - Distribution Panelboards: Molded case circuit breakers shall be rated 15 through 2500 amperes. Breakers covered under this specification may be applied in switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, combination motor starter, busway plug -in units or individual enclosures. 2. Molded case circuit breakers shall have overcenter, trip -free, toggle -type operating mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action and positive handle indication. Two and three -pole breakers shall be common trip. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Units shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connection at either end. Operating handles shall assume a center position when tripped. All breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C. A button shall be provided on the cover for mechanically tripping the circuit breaker. Breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper /aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical screw type lugs. 2.03 FUSES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time /current and peak let- through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 12.137 262816-2 B. Main Service Feeders and Branch Circuits: For switch rating over 600 amperes: Hi -Cap, Type KRP -C with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS. For switch rating 600 amperes or less: Low peak current limiting fuses, Type LPN(S) -R, with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS. C. Motors Above One (1) Horsepower: For fuse rating 600 amperes or less, dual element time delay, Type FRN(S) -R, with interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS. Size fuses per Article 430 of the National Electric Code. D. Motors One (1) Horsepower or Less: Single phase 150 volts or less, Fustat fuses for motor running protection sizes. Single phase or three phase over 150 volts, Fustron fuses for motor running protection, with interrupting rating of 100,000 RMS. Size fuses per Article 430 of the National Electric Code. E. Fuses for all feeders, branch circuits, motors and other equipment shall be selected in types and ratings in accordance with NEC to provide a coordinated system of overcurrent protection, thus in case of a fault or harmful overload, only the fuses nearest the fault or overload will open. F. Provide one spare set of three (3) of each size and type of fuse used on project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF 0VERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. END OF SECTION 26 2816 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 12.137 262816-3 SECTION 26 2913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of motor starters in this section include the following: Magnetic Combination 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to wiring methods, construction and installation of motor starters. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 508, "Electric Industrial Control Equipment ", pertaining to electrical motor starters. Provide units which have been UL- listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to motor controllers /starters and enclosures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated motors, and connections to electrical power panels and feeders. 1. Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, running overcurrent protection, branch circuit overcurrent protection, wiring diagrams, starting characteristics, interlocking, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type and rating of motor starter): 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Allen - Bradley 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Where more than one type of equipment meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 12.137 262913-1 B. Magnetic Starters with Solid State Overloads: Provide full voltage alternating current magnetic starters of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with solid state overload relays. Trip current rating will be established by selection of overload relay and shall be adjustable (3 to 1 current range). The overload shall be self - powered, provide phase loss and phase unbalance protection, and be ambient insensitive. It will also be available in Trip Class 10 or 20 and have a mechanical test function. Electrical interlocks as required for the control sequences indicated; enclosure of NEMA type suitable for environmental conditions where installed; control transformer within each enclosure where required to provide 120 volt control voltage; manual reset on the door of each enclosure; selector switches, pilot lights, push buttons and other devices and accessories as shown on the drawings or otherwise required. B. Combination Starters: Provide full - voltage alternating- current combination starters, consisting of starters and disconnect switches mounted in common enclosures of types, sizes, ratings, and NEMA sizes indicated. Equip starters with features as described in B above. Operating handle for disconnect switch mechanism shall indicate and control switch position with enclosure door open or closed; capable of being locked in OFF position and mechanically interlocked to prevent opening unless switch within the enclosure is open. Construct and mount starters and disconnect switches in single NEMA type enclosure suitable for environmental conditions where installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other work including motor and electrical wiring /cabling work, as necessary to interface installation of motor starters with other work. C. Install fuses in fusible disconnects. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Subsequent to wire /cable hook -up, energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct malfunctioning units. END OF SECTION 26 2913 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 12.137 262913 -2 SECTION 26 2923 - VARIABLE - FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Variable speed AC motor controllers and all power wiring. Control wiring and system control components by others. B. Variable speed AC motor controllers shall be of the "Variable /Adjustable Frequency" or "Inverter" type drives based on solid state electronics. The adjustable frequency AC drive shall convert 3 phase, 60 Hertz input power to an adjustable AC frequency and voltage 3 phase output for controlling the speed of any NEMA MG 1 Design B squirrel cage induction motor. The adjustable frequency drive shall have the following basic design: 1. Converter - Converter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of a diode rectifier and capacitor assembly which will first convert, then filter and maintain a fixed DC voltage source from the fixed voltage and frequency input. 2. Inverter - Inverter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of power semiconductors for generation of a sine -coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform. 3. Regulator - Regulator shall consist of a modular assembly. The regulator shall be fully digital and incorporate a microprocessor to control all inverter, converter, and external interface functions. 4. Interface - Interface shall consist of terminal strips for all input and output signals. C. All control instrument components shall be electronic and of industrial control quality and furnished with variable speed motor controllers complete as outlined in these specifications and drawings. D. The variable speed motor controller supplier shall provide all necessary factory and /or field labor for complete calibration and adjustment of the adjustable frequency drives and control components, and shall be responsible for setting all control set points, operating sequences, and alarming systems within the specified control systems to produce the overall system performance as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall include but not be limited to drawings and /or catalog cuts giving physical dimensions, wiring diagrams (control and power diagrams), construction materials, capacities, ratings, control sequencing, manufacturers recommended installation instructions, and any other pertinent information. B. Provide operating and maintenance manuals. C. Provide recommended spare parts list and prices. Also, the address of the manufacturer's closest parts stocking location shall be provided. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VARIABLE - FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 12.137 262923-1 D. Include manufacturer's standard product warranty (for not less than a one year period) for replacement of materials and equipment. 1.04 START -UP SERVICE A. The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide start up service and commissioning. B. Contractor shall coordinate controller parameters with other contractors. 1.05 TRAINING A. The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide eight (8) hours of on -site training for the Owner's personnel advising of the proper methods of maintenance and operation of the controller. B. Additional training time as deemed necessary by the Owner's authorized representative may be obtained from the supplier on a negotiated basis with the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The variable speed AC motor controllers shall meet all requirements of this section. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. Toshiba /Houston 2. ABB 3. Danfoss 3. Square D 1. Cutler Hammer 2. General Electric 2.02 CONTROLLERS A. General: For the purpose of this Part, the word "controller" shall mean variable speed AC motor controller. B. The controller shall be mounted in a NEMA ventilated enclosure appropriate for environment. The enclosure size shall be adequate to dissipate the heat generated by the controller within the limits of the specified environmental operating conditions. The door shall be hinged, secured with latch. "Bolt -on" doors are not acceptable. C. Ambient service temperature rating shall be from 0 11C to 40 11C for normal operating conditions. The controller shall operate at less than 90% relative humidity non - condensing. The controller shall operate at an altitude less than 1000 meters (3300 feet) above sea level. D. Input power rating shall be 3 Phase, 480 Volts +/- 10 %, 60 Hertz +/- 3 %. E. The controller shall have a door interlocked incoming AC disconnect with external operator handle which is capable of being locked in the "off' position. The disconnect shall shutdown all input power to both the drive and the bypass circuitry. F. The controller shall have the input fused internally with standard fuses. G. Controller shall have an output frequency range of 6 to 66 Hertz and a 11:1 speed range. The frequency regulation shall be +/- .5% of maximum frequency. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VARIABLE - FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 12.137 262923-2 H. The controller shall provide thermal overload relays on the inverter output for motor protection for each motor controlled. The controller shall maintain power factor to .95 or greater throughout its speed range for each motor controlled. J. The controller shall have as a minimum the following protective features: 1. Short circuit protection. 2. Under /over voltage protection. 3. Automatic restarting after a power outage or momentary overvoltage. 4. Ground fault protection, but there shall be no automatic restart into ground fault. 5. Overcurrent protection. 6. Supply voltage phase loss protection. 7. Over temperature protection. 8. Start into rotating motor protection. The controller shall catch a spinning load without tripping. K. The controller shall be rated for 100% continuous current. The controller shall be capable of providing 110% of rated current for a minimum period of one minute. The controller shall have adjustable current limit. The controller shall have current limited stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, and run conditions. L. The controller shall have process follower inputs for 4 -20 mA. Provide bias and gain adjustments for the follower. M. The controller shall provide adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration control, each separately adjustable. The ramp time shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 30 seconds. Longer ramp times shall be optionally available. N. The controller shall provide maximum and minimum frequency control, each separately adjustable. O. Where noted on the schedule, the controller shall have internal manually operated bypass circuitry for direct line motor operation. Provide an inverter /line selector switch on the front panel to transfer the motor from the adjustable speed drive to the power line, or from the line to the inverter at zero speed. Motor protection and other safety devices shall be operative in both inverter and line modes. P. The controller shall have a motor contactor at the inverter output. The controller shall also have two contactor bypasses. Q. Fault indicators shall indicate the following fault conditions: 1. Overcurrent. 2. Short circuit. 3. Undervoltage. 4. Overvoltage. 5. Overtemperature. 6. Regulator function error. 7. Ground fault. In addition to the fault indicators, the controller shall provide normally open Form C fault contacts to allow remote monitoring of drive conditions. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VARIABLE - FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 12.137 262923-3 R. The controller shall have as a minimum the following operator controls mounted on the front panel: 1. Manual /Auto selector. 2. Start /Stop switch. 3. Inverter /Line switch. 4. Speed potentiometer. 5. Fault reset. 6. Speed Indicator. S. The controller shall provide adjustable carrier frequency. T. The controller shall have an internal line reactor and EMI /RFI filters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLERS A. Install controllers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other work including motor and HVAC controls work, as necessary to interface installation of controllers with other work. C. The controllers shall be mounted and installed on the mechanical equipment room walls whenever possible. When the controllers cannot be wall mounted, the controllers shall be installed on four inch housekeeping pads. Installation of units directly on the floor will not be acceptable. D. Each controller shall have a dedicated raceway for the input power feeder, output power feeder and controls. Raceway shall be separated by at least 6" from other controller feeders and controls raceway. A. Manual /Auto System Operation 1. Selector switch in MANUAL mode - operation shall be from the door mounted potentiometer and the system shall be operable from 0 -100% on the potentiometer operating between the minimum and maximum speeds as set in the inverter. 2. Selector switch in AUTO mode - operation shall be from the input follower signal, with output speed being proportional to the input signal. A remote set of Form C start /stop contacts (furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor) shall control the inverter. B. Start /Stop 1. Switch used to initiate command to start or stop the drive; operates in manual mode. C. Inverter /Line 1. Selector switch in the LINE mode shall disconnect the adjustable frequency system and bypass for direct across - the -line motor operation to the 3 phase, 60 Hertz supply. 2. Selector switch in the INVERTER mode shall disconnect the 3 phase, 60 Hertz supply and the system shall operate in the mode as established by the inverter Manual /Auto switch. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VARIABLE - FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 12.137 262923-4 D. Automatic Restart 1. In the event of a loss of supply line power, or an overvoltage /undervoltage condition of more than 5 %, or in the event of a shutdown signal from the temperature control or fire detection system, the system shall shut down. When line power is restored, the system shall automatically restart after a time delay, providing the start contact is a maintained contact in the closed position and all external interlocks are satisfied. 2. For motors started frequently, the system shall provide start at almost zero RPM and gradually increase to required speed. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Subsequent to wire /cable hook -up, energize controllers and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct malfunctioning units. END OF SECTION 26 2923 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation VARIABLE - FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 12.137 262923-5 SECTION 26 3353 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDES A. Rectifier /charger. B. I nverter. C. Static transfer switch. D. Maintenance bypass switch. E. Batteries and accessories. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 01 7823 - Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.04 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, NEMA: 1. Comply with NEMA standards for types of enclosures. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 3300 - Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show accurately scaled UPS equipment layout and its relation to associated equipment. 2. Show connections to normal and standby electrical power feeders. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. National Electrical Code, NEC (2011): 1. Comply with NEC /NFPA No. 70, for wiring methods, materials and installation of electrical equipment. B. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL: 1. Components listed and labeled by UL. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGEAND HANDLING A. Deliver UPS equipment with factory - installed shipping skids; package accessories in factory- fabricated fiberboard containers. B. Store UPS in clean, dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 12.137 263353-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. UPS System: 1. Emerson Electric Co. 2. ESB /Exide Power Systems Div. 3. International Power Machines Corp. 4. Liebert Corp. 2.02 CHARACTERISTICS A. Provide UPS consisting of rectifier /charger, inverter, static transfer switch, maintenance switch; with associated instruments, indicators and controls for UPS to operate as independent unit mounted on front of UPS cabinet. 2.03 MODES OF OPERATION A. Normal: The input converter and output inverter operate in an online manner to regulate power continuously to the critical load. The input and output converters are capable of full battery recharge while simultaneously providing regulated power to the load for all line and load conditions within the range of the UPS specifications. B. Battery: Upon failure of the AC input source, the critical load continues being supplied by the output inverter, which derives its power from the battery system. There is no interruption in power to the critical load during both transfers to battery operation and retransfers from battery to normal operation. C. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the input converter and output inverter simultaneously recharge the battery and provide regulated power to the critical load. D. Automatic Bypass: The automatic bypass is used to provide transfer of critical load from the Inverter output to the bypass source. In the event of an emergency, this transfer is an automatic function. E. Manual Bypass: The system is equipped with an internal make - before -break two -pole switch to isolate the UPS electrically from the input and output during preventive maintenance, module upgrades, or limited frame service. The manual bypass is also considered a partial "wrap- around" bypass, configured to wrap around the power modules (rectifier, battery charger, inverter) and battery modules in the same manner as the automatic bypass while still supplying surge and EMI filtering and overcurrent protection. There is a positional sensor supplied to alert users that the UPS is in manual bypass. F. External Service Bypass Panel (SBP): The maintenance service bypass cabinet provides power to the critical load bus from the bypass source during times when maintenance or service of the UPS frame is required or when removal of the frame is desired. The SBP provides a mechanical means of complete isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The SBP is constructed in a freestanding, rack - mounted or wall- mounted NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise stated in this specification. It is designed for either three -phase input or single phase input with a "no break" transfer between bypass and UPS power. G. Charging: Upon restoration of the AC input source, the UPS simultaneously recharges the battery and provides regulated power to the critical load. 1. The battery charging keeps the DC bus float voltage of +/137v, +/ -1 %. 2. The intelligent battery management system contains a temperature monitoring circuit that regulates the battery- charging current to optimize battery life. 3. The battery- charging circuit remains active when in bypass and online states. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 12.137 263353-2 H. Bypass: As part of the UPS, a system automatic bypass switch is provided. The system automatic bypass provides a break ( <11 ms) transfer of the critical load from the Inverter output to the automatic bypass input source during times when maintenance is required or when the inverter cannot support the critical bus. Such times may be due to prolonged or severe overloads, or UPS failure. The additional manual bypass switch has a no -break transfer of critical loads from Inverter output to the manual bypass switch, which will correspondingly engage the automatic bypass switch, driving it into bypass position. The UPS will constantly monitor the output current, as well as the bypass source voltage, and inhibit potentially unsuccessful transfers to automatic bypass from taking place. The design of the automatic bypass switch power path consists of a heavy duty electromechanical bypass contactor with a continuous duty rating up to 100 A. 1. Automatic Transfers: An automatic transfer of load to bypass takes place whenever the load on the critical bus exceeds the overload rating of the UPS. Automatic transfers of the critical load from bypass back to normal operation take place when the overload condition is removed from the critical bus output of the system. Automatic transfers of load to bypass also take place if for any reason the UPS cannot support the critical bus. 2. Manual Transfers: Manually initiated transfers to and from bypass are initiated through the UPS display interface or by engaging the manual bypass switch on the front of the unit. 3. Overloads: The automatic bypass is rated for and capable of handling overloads equal to or less than 100 A continuously; actual current will be limited by the upstream circuit breaker protection. For instantaneous overloads caused by inrush current from magnetic devices or from short- circuit conditions, the automatic bypass is capable of sustaining overloads of 1000% of the continuous rating system capacity for sub -cycle fault clearing. 4. Modular: The automatic bypass switch is of a modular design and easily field- replaceable by certified technicians. 2.04 INPUT POWER CONVERTER A. General: The input power converters of the system are housed within the parallel- connected, removable power modules. The converters constantly control the power imported from the mains input of the system to provide the necessary UPS power for precise regulation of the DC bus voltage, battery charging and Main Inverter- regulated output power. B. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: The input current THDi will be held to 6% or less at full system load, while providing conditioned power to the critical load bus and charging the batteries under steady -state operating conditions. This is true while the UPS is supporting loads of both a linear or nonlinear type. This will be accomplished with no additional filters, magnetic devices, or other components. C. Input Current Limit: 1. The input converter controls and limits the input current draw from utility to 150% of the UPS output. During conditions where input current limit is active, the UPS is able to support 100% load, charge batteries at 10% of the UPS output rating, and provide voltage regulation with mains deviation of up to +/ -20% of the nominal input voltage. 2. In cases where the source voltage to the UPS is nominal and the applied UPS load is equal to or less than 100% of UPS capacity, input current will not exceed 130% of UPS output current, while providing full battery recharge power and importing necessary power for system losses. D. Redundancy: The UPS is configured with redundant input converters, each with semiconductor fusing, and logic- controlled contactors to remove a failed module from the input bus. E. Charging: 1. The battery charging will keep the DC bus float voltage of +/137v, +/ -1 %. 2. The battery- charging circuit contains a temperature monitoring circuit, which regulates the battery- charging current to optimize battery life. 3. The battery- charging circuit remains active when in automatic bypass and in normal operation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 12.137 263353-3 F. Back -feed Protection: The logic controlled contactor also provides the back -feed protection required by UL1778. 2.05 OUTPUT INVERTER A. General: The UPS output inverter constantly recreates the UPS output voltage waveform by converting the DC bus voltage to AC voltage through a set of IGBT- driven bidirectional power converters. In both normal operation and battery operation, the output inverters create an output voltage independent of the mains input voltage. Input voltage anomalies such as brown -outs, spikes, surges, sags, and outages will not affect the amplitude or sinusoidal nature of the recreated output voltage sine wave of the output inverters. B. Overload Capability: The output power converters are capable of 200% for short- circuit clearing. Steady -state overload conditions of up to 130% of system capacity (N +1) will be sustained by the inverter continuously in normal and battery operation. If overloads persist past the outlined limitation, the critical load will be switched to the automatic bypass output of the UPS, which is based upon the rating of 100 A. C. Output Contactor: The output power stage (inverter) is equipped with an output mechanical contactor to provide physical isolation of the inverter from the critical bus. With this feature a failed inverter will be removed from the critical bus. D. Battery Protection: The inverter is provided with monitoring and control circuits to limit the level of discharge on the battery system. E. Redundancy: The UPS is configured with redundant output inverters, each with semiconductor fusing, and logic- controlled relays to remove a failed component from the critical bus. 2.06 DISPLAYAND CONTROLS A. Control Logic: The UPS is controlled by two fully redundant, user - replaceable, hot - swappable intelligence modules. These modules have separate, optically - isolated, communication paths to the power modules and the automatic bypass contactor. Logic power for the control modules is derived from internal regulated power supplies, each having a separate AC and DC input and output. The communication of the control modules is of Inter IC Communication (IIC). B. Display Unit: A microprocessor - controlled display unit is located on a hinged door in the front of the system. The display unit consists of an alphanumeric display with backlight, an alarm LED, and a keypad consisting of pushbutton switches. C. Metered Data: The following metered data is available on the alphanumeric display: 1. Year, month, day, hour, minute, and second of occurring events 2. Source Input Voltage 3. Output AC voltage 4. Output AC current 5. Input Frequency 6. Battery voltage 7. Internal temperature D. Event log: The display unit allows the user to display a time- and date - stamped log of the 64 most recent status and alarm events. 2.07 BATTERIES A. The UPS battery is of modular construction consisting of user - replaceable, hot - swappable, fused battery modules. Each battery module is monitored for voltage and temperature for use by the UPS battery diagnostic and battery charger circuitry. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 12.137 263353-4 B. The batteries are of the valve - regulated lead acid (VRLA) type. C. The UPS incorporates a battery management system to continuously monitor the health of each removable battery module as well as external battery modules installed in extended run battery cabinets. This system notifies the user if a failed or weak battery module is found. D. Additional battery modules may be added to increase runtime by utilizing up to seven extended run battery cabinets. These cabinets will be hot - pluggable, allowing for easy and quick installation without the need for electrical wiring, electrician, or powering down of the UPS. The battery modules are monitored by each individual frame and this information passed upstream to the main intelligence modules. E. Battery modules have an embedded EEprom that supplies the serial number as well as some diagnostic information to the user to help in the local, network, or out -of -band management of these modules. F. Each UPS Battery Module has a built in DC disconnect switch for transportation and to disconnect the battery module completely from the internal bus while installed in the UPS system. 2.08 SERVICE BYPASS PANEL (SBP) A. The service bypass panel provides power to the critical load from the bypass source, during times where maintenance or service of the UPS is required. The SBP provides a mechanical means of complete isolation of the UPS from the electrical wiring of the installation. The SBP is constructed in a free - standing, rack - mounted or wall- mounted NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise stated in this specification. 2.09 SOFTWAREAND CONNECTIVITY A. Network Management Card: The Network Management Card is connected to the UPS via the RS232 serial port on the standard communication interface board. B. Unattended Shutdown: The UPS, in conjunction with the Network Management Card, is capable of gracefully shutting down one or more operating systems during the time when the UPS is on battery mode. The UPS is also capable of using an RS232 port to communicate with the host computer by means of serial communications to gracefully shut down one or more operating systems during an on -battery situation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install UPS equipment where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices, to ensure that UPS equipment complies with specifications and serves designed purposes. B. Comply with NEC and NEMA's Standard of Installation for general electrical installation practices. C. Provide positive equipment ground for UPS equipment. 3.02 FACTORY - ASSISTED STARTUP A. Factory- trained service personnel will perform the following inspections, test procedures, and on- site training. B. On -Site Operational Training: During the factory assisted start -up, operational training for site personnel includes key pad operation, LED indicators, start -up and shutdown procedures, maintenance bypass and AC disconnect operation, and alarm information MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 12.137 263353-5 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and adjust unit on site. B. On completion of installation of UPS equipment and after building circuitry has been energized with normal power source, test UPS to demonstrate capability and compliance with specifications. Test results shall be documented, signed and dated. C. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at site; then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 26 3353 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 12.137 263353-6 SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide lighting fixtures, accessories, labor and supervision necessary to install complete lighting system as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following: 1. Fluorescent 2. LED 3. Exit Signs 4. Emergency 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction in building lighting fixtures. B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std. Pub Nos. LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment. C. ANSI /IES Compliance: Comply with ANSI 132.1 pertaining to lighting fixtures. D. UL Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures which have been UL- listed and labeled. E. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent -lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on interior building lighting fixtures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Shop drawing booklet shall include lamp and ballast data sheets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers shall be as listed in the schedules on the drawings. 2.02 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fluorescent fixture housing shall be die formed of cold rolled steel. Construction shall provide an approved method of locking lens or shielding in place. Enamel finish for light reflectance shall have a hardness between H and 3H. Before enamel is applied, the metal shall be cleaned and prepared by "Bonderizing" or an approved equal process. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-1 B. All plastic lenses for fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% virgin acrylic, not less than 1/8" nominal thickness. Lens shall have straight flat prism surfaces with maximum .080 penetration. C. Temperature around ballast and in fixture housing shall not exceed 90 deg.0 with ambient room temperature of 27 deg.C. D. Electronic Ballast: Instant start; UL listed; sound rated A or better; Class P; capable of operating standard or energy- saving lamps at 20 KHz or greater, with voltage rating matching branch circuit voltage; with characteristics as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Discrete Electronic b. Universal Lighting Technologies C. Magnatek Triad d. Osram - Sylvania Quicktronic 2. FCC certified, part 15, subpart J, for electromagnetic interference. 3. Transient protected to withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587, categories A and B. 4. Input Current Third Harmonic Content: Maximum 20 %, minimum 10 %. 5. Minimum Power Factor: .94 6. Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.88; not adversely affecting lamp life. 7. Provide independent laboratory test report. 8. Warranty: Provide written 5 -year warranty against mechanical or electrical defects. E. Electronic Dimming Ballast: UL listed; sound rated A or better; Class P; capable of operating standard lamps at 20 Khz or greater, with voltage rating matching branch circuit voltage; with characteristics as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Lutron b. Osram - Sylvania C. Advance 2. Capable of dimming fluorescent lamps to 1 % light. 3. FCC certified, part 18, EMI /RFI. 4. Transient protected to withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587. 5. Input Current Third Harmonic Content: Maximum 20 %. 6. Minimum Power Factor: .90 full on, .80 low dim. 7. Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.90; not adversely affecting lamp life. 8. Provide independent laboratory test report. 9. Warranty: Provide written 3 -year warranty against mechanical or electrical defects. F. Compact Fluorescent Electronic Ballast: Instant start; flicker free, UL listed; sound rated A or better; Class P; capable of operating standard or energy- saving lamps at 20 KHz or greater, with voltage rating matching branch circuit voltage; with characteristics as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Magnetek b. Universal Lighting Technologies C. Advanced Ballast and Transformers d. Osram Sylvania 2. FCC certified, part 18C EMI /RFI. 3. Transient protected to withstand line transients as defined in IEEE Publication 587, categories A and B. 4. Input Current Third Harmonic Content: Maximum 15 %. 5. Minimum Power Factor: .95 6. Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.90; not adversely affecting lamp life. 7. Provide independent laboratory test report. 8. Warranty: Provide written 3 -year warranty against mechanical or electrical defects. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-2 G. Ballast for fluorescent fixtures controlled by dimmers shall be dimming type ballast as recommended by the dimmer manufacturer. H. Recessed fixtures in plaster ceilings shall be furnished with plaster frames. I. Prior to releasing order for fluorescent fixtures, Contractor shall verify the types of ceilings and suspension systems that have been approved for the project and shall order fixtures with flanges as required to fit in the approved ceilings. J. Light fixtures shall comply with NEC 2008, 410.130(G) for disconnecting means requirements. Provide disconnect internal to fixture. 2.03 FLUORESCENT BATTERY PACK UNIT A. General: Unit shall have a high temperature nickel - cadmium type battery, 120/277 VAC universal input, UL listed, 3 -year warranty, test switch. Acceptable manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements, as follows: 1. Bodine 2. Dual -Lite B. Tube and Long Biax Fixtures: Unit shall illuminate lamps to the lumen output designated on the light fixture schedule for 90 minutes. They shall be compatible with electronic, energy saving and dimming ballasts, and standard energy saving lamps. C. Compact Fluorescent Fixtures: Unit shall illuminate one lamp to 400 lumens (13 watt), 600 lumens (18 watt) and 750 lumens (26 watt) for 90 minutes. They shall be compatible with electronic and dimming ballasts and standard 2 -pin and 4 -pin lamps. 2.04 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES A. High- Intensity- Discharge -Lamp Ballasts: Provide high power factor HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and makes which properly match lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and impedances for which lamps are designed. Manufacturers to be Advance, Universal or Magnetek. 2.05 EXIT SIGNS A. Housing to be thermoplastic (cast aluminum) for wall, end or ceiling mounting. Illumination to be by long life, low watt LED lamps. Battery, where specified, to be maintenance free, sealed nickel - cadmium type and shall operate sign for 90 minutes after loss of power. 2.06 EMERGENCY FIXTURES A. Two - headed Units: Housing to be thermoplastic for wall or ceiling mounting. Illumination to be by fully adjustable glare -free heads with LED type lamps. Battery to be premium grade, pure lead, maintenance free battery and shall operate sign for 90 minutes after loss of power. 2.07 LAMPS A. Lamps shall be General Electric, North American Philips, Osram - Sylvania. B. Furnish lamps for all fixtures as per schedule on drawings. C. All incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt rated and fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type where applicable. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-3 2.08 SOLID STATE LIGHTING /LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LAMPS AND LUMINAIRES A. General: 1. Luminaire manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the manufacture and design of LED products and systems and no less than one hundred (100) North American installations. 2. All LED sources used in the LED luminaire shall be of proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers and shall have been fabricated after 2007. Acceptable LED lamp manufacturers unless otherwise noted are: a. Cree, Inc. b. Philips Lighting C. Nichia Corporation d. Norlux e. Opto Technology, Inc. f. Osram Optronic Semiconductors g. Samsung B. Replacement and Spares: 1. Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of the following: a. Manufacture will keep record of original bin for each LED module and have replacement modules from the same bin available for three (3) years after date of installation. b. Manufacturer will keep an inventory of replacement parts (source assembly, power and control components). C. Manufacturer's LED system will not become obsolete for ten (10) years: Manufacturer will provide exact replacement parts, or provide upgraded parts that are designed to fit into the original luminaire and provide equivalent distribution and lumen output to the original, without any negative consequences. 2. All parts of system shall replaceable in field. Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of the following: a. Manufacturer has in place a written recycling and re -use program, and will accept returned product and /or components for recycling or re -use. b. Manufacturer will properly dispose of non - recyclable components that are deemed harmful to the environment. C. Products and Components — Performance: 1. LED luminaires and components shall be LIL listed or LIL classified. 2. All LED components shall be mercury and lead -free. 3. LEDs shall comply with ANSI /NEMA /ANSLG C78.377 -2008 — Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. Color shall remain stable throughout the life of the lamp. 4. LEDs shall comply with IESNA LM -80 — Standards for Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting Products 5. LEDs shall have a minimum rated source life of 50,000 hours under normal operating conditions or as noted on the lighting fixture schedule. LED "rated source life" is defined as the time when a minimum of 70% of initial lumen output remains, as defined by IESNA LM -70. 6. Luminaire assembly shall include a method of dissipating heat so as to not degrade life of source, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED luminaire housing shall be designed to transfer heat from the LED board to the outside environment. Luminaire housing shall have no negative impact on life of components. 7. Manufacturer shall supply in writing a range of permissible operating temperatures in which system will perform optimally. 8. High power LED luminaires shall be thermally protected using one or more of the following thermal management techniques: metal core board, gap pad, and /or internal monitoring firmware MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-4 9. LEDs shall be adequately protected from moisture or dust in interior applications. 10. For wet and damp use, LED -based luminaires itself shall be sealed, rated, and tested for appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing or enclosure. Such protection shall have no negative impact on rated life of source or components, or if so, such reductions shall be explicitly brought to the attention of the designer. 11. All hardwired connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process. 12. The LED luminaire shall be operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels. LEDs shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current. 13. Manufacturer shall be able to provide supporting documentation of the product meeting third party regulatory compliance. 14. Manufacturer shall provide Luminaire Efficacy (Im /W), total luminous flux (lumens), luminous intensity (candelas) chromaticity coordinates, CCT and CRI. Optical performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data. Provide data in IES file format in accordance with IES LM -79 -2008, based on test results from an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. 2.09 LIGHTING INVERTER SYSTEM A. Inverter System shall be furnished to provide a reliable source of power, and shall operate during a utility line disturbance without any interruptions of power supplied to the load. The transfer from utility power to battery power shall utilize a no break (uninterruptible) system, pulse width modulated sine wave output. The system shall be capable of powering any combination of LED. Electronic fluorescent, incandescent or HID lighting. The system shall operate from 0 -100% loading, and be rated to deliver its full KVA /KW rating, at unity power factor, for a minimum of 90 minutes. Upon return of the normal AC utility line power, the system shall return to standby mode automatically and without any interruption of power supplied to the load. The system shall be capable of operating with the inrush loads of all specified light fixtures without failure. The charging system shall recharge the batteries within UL requirements. B. Code & Standards: The Inverter System shall be listed to meet the following standards: 1. UL 924 Standard for emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 2. Complies with NEC, OSHA and Life Safety Code C. Category and Type: Furnish and install a Inverter System that will supply the load scheduled @ unity power factor, for a period of 90 minutes (1.5 hours) upon interruption, brownout, or failure of the monitored AC utility line. D. Operation: The system's operation shall be fully automatic and utilize a linear transformer. The inverter shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design, and shall provide continuous power to the load at all times. During normal operation, the charger maintains the batteries at full capacity. The on -board microprocessors continuously monitor charger settings and system's overall readiness. The system's circuitry shall also include an automatic, multi -rate, software controlled charger able to recharge batteries per UL924 guidelines. The inverter section shall be off -line during standby operation to increase overall efficiency up to 98 %. Continuously running double conversion systems shall not be permitted. The automatic overload circuit protection shall shut down the system at 115% of its rated capacity, regardless of whether it is in normal or emergency operations. The system protection shall also include AC lockout, low battery voltage disconnect, AC input circuit breaker, DC input fuse and circuit breaker, and an AC output fuse. The system shall supply a digitally generated sinusoidal output waveform with less than 5% total harmonic distortion at rated linear load. E. Input Voltage: The available input voltage to the systems shall be 277, +10% to -15 %, single phase, with a frequency of 60Hz. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-5 F. Output Voltage: The available output voltage of the system shall be the same as the input voltage, 277 volts, +/- 5% single phase sine wave, with a frequency of 60Hz + 0.05Hz on inverter. The output voltage and frequency, when on utility power, shall be as supplied by the utility. G. System Diagnostics: System shall be supplied with intelligent multipurpose LED indicators to notify the user as to system changes or possible problems. The LED illumination pattern can be interpreted as to the system's condition; these include: 1. Normal standby operation 2. Inverter on (AC input interruption) 3. AC input interruption 4. Battery charger malfunction 5. Overload shutdown 6. Circuit breaker tripped 7. No load connected 8. Temperature probe malfunction 9. High temperature shutdown H. Battery Charger: The charger shall be software controlled, temperature compensated, three -step float type charger. The charger shall maintain the batteries fully charged during normal standby condition. Following a power failure the charger will start in constant current mode until battery voltage reaches Equalize. Equalize voltage will then be maintained until charging current drops to .5 amps or .3% of the battery amp /hour rating; battery voltage will then be allowed to drop down to float. Batteries: The batteries will provide sufficient power to maintain the output voltage of the inverter for a period of 1.5 hours, without dropping below 87.5% of nominal battery voltage. The batteries shall be Sealed Lead Calcium VRLA type, ten year life expectance, enclosed in a cabinet that permits easy maintenance without requiring removal. Batteries shall require no addition of water over the life of the battery. The case and cover shall be constructed of polypropylene, contain low- pressure LIL recognized safety release vents, and be non - gassing in normal use. Batteries shall have a10 -year design life expectancy at 77 °F (25 °C). Warranty: 1. The system shall be guaranteed, under normal and proper use, against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of two years from the date of substantial completion. 2. Sealed Lead Calcium VRLA, 10 -year life expectancy — one -year full replacement warranty plus an additional nine years pro -rata. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC), NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work. C. Coordinate fixture location with reflected ceiling plan. D. Recessed fixtures in removable ceilings shall be connected to the branch circuit with flexible conduit and branch circuit wire from an accessible junction box. Where fluorescent fixture housings are connected together, use 90 deg.0 wire for branch circuit feed through fixture channels. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-6 E. All fixtures shall be grounded. All lamp sockets shall be wired so that the outer shell is connected to the neutral grounded conductor. F. Fixtures recessed in furred ceiling shall be installed so that they can be removed from below the ceiling. G. Fixtures installed in plastered or acoustical tile shall not be supported directly on the ceiling material. Support fixtures with metal bar hangers or strut channels attached to the ceiling support system. H. For all dimmed light fixtures, "burn in" or "season" lamps prior to dimming as recommended by the lamp manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY LIGHT AND POWER SYSTEMS A. Install emergency light and power systems as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that ELP system equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA'S "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical installation practices. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including cables /wires, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, as appropriate to interface installation of emergency light and power systems work with other work. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of emergency light and power system equipment, and after building circuitry has been energized with normal power source, test ELP system to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 26 5100 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING 12.137 265100-7 SECTION 26 8239 — ELECTRIC HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install unit heaters as required by the drawings and this section. 1.03 ELECTRIC HEATERS A. Electric heaters shall include the following: 1. Electric Unit Heaters 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and /or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment, to include color charts, dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance data and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the terminal units. 1.05 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 01 for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Electric Heaters 1. Trane 2. Berko - (Division of Marly) 3. Q -mark - (Division of Marly) 4. Brasch 5. Indeeco 2.02 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS A. Units shall have capacities and ratings and shall be of arrangement as scheduled on the drawings. B. Units shall be furnished complete with coils, enclosures, fans and motors as required to make complete functioning units. C. Enclosure: Shall be 12 -gauge (.080" min.) aluminum extrusion (ASL3) or 10gauge (.095" min.) aluminum extrusion (ASL5 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL HEATERS 12.137 268239-1 D. Size: Heaters shall be low profile (3 -5/8" x 6" or 5 -3/8" x 7 ") and available in length from 28- inches through 10 -feet. Additionally, custom length cabinets (up to 15' for ASL3, 12' for ASL5) with single or multiple heat decks shall be furnished as specified. E. Heating Lengths And Voltages: Heater lengths, voltages and wattage capacities shall be indicated on the plans. F. Finish: The top and front shall be finished with a baked enamel paint or anodized. G. Heating Elements: The nickel- chromium heating element wire shall be encased in a steel sheath for maximum, trouble -free element life. Aluminum fins shall be pressure bonded to the steel sheath. Elements shall be center anchored and shall float freely at each end through high - temperature Noryl bushings. H. Control Sections: Control sections, finished to match heaters, shall be used to house factory- installed controls as specified. I. Built -In Controls: Provide with low- voltage control relays for thermostat, and disconnect switches, controls relay and disconnect switches are accessible through the grille. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Install units and make electrical and controls connections as indicated on drawings 3.02 Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory- mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. A. Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start -up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. END OF SECTION 26 8239 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRICAL HEATERS 12.137 268239-2 SECTION 27 0010 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Bidding Information, conditions of the Contract and Division I, General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under the telecommunications contract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Pre - Register Project with structured cabling plant manufacturer if applicable. 2. Furnish and install a complete voice and data - wiring infrastructure. 3. Furnish, install, and terminate all UTP cable and fiber as applicable and per drawings. 4. Furnish and install all wall plates, jacks, patch panels, and patch cords as required and as indicated. 5. Furnish and install any cabinets, racks and ladder rack as required and as indicated. 6. Furnish any other material required to form a complete system. 7. Perform permanent link testing (100% of links) and certification of all components. 8. Furnish test results of all cabling to the owner on disk and paper format, listed by each closet, then by workstation ID. 9. Provide Owner As- builts in the form of one electronic copy and two hard copies of a labeled map of the building(s) showing the structured cabling plant. 10. Adhere and comply with all requirements of the Contractor Agreement for the structured cabling plant manufacturer to be used. 11. Provide Owner training and testing documentation. B. The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning telecommunications systems. C. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. D. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Code 2. Local Electrical Code 3. National Fire Protection Association 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 5. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 6. Applicable Building Codes 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act 8. Iowa Administrative Codes 9. TIA/EIA -526 -7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single -Mode Fiber Cable Plant 10. TIA/EIA- 526 -14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant 11. TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-1 12. TIA /EIA- 568 -B.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted -Pair Cabling Components 13. TIA /EIA- 568 -B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard 14. TIA /EIA -569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 15. TIA /EIA -570 Residential Telecommunications Wiring Standard 16. TIA /EIA -598 Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 17. TIA /EIA -606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 18. TIA /EIA -607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 19. TIA /EIA -758 Customer -Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard 20. BICSI - TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 21. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA - 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work. No extra compensation will be allowed for corrections or changes in the work required due to failure to comply with the applicable codes and standards. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REG ULA TORY AGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local serving utility companies and shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. 1.05 TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS A. Drawings for the telecommunications work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. B. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact quantities and locations for equipment. C. Contractor shall take own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. D. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items for a complete installation are not shown, but where such items are required by code (or referenced standards) where they are required for proper installation and operation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. C. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-2 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to become familiar with the conditions of the site which will affect the work and shall verify points of connection with utilities and /or existing system wiring. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate work with the schedule of General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Drawings and specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors, shall be called to the attention of the Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by Design Professional and his /her decision will be final. D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in areas previously finished by Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall be responsible for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. G. Where two or more specified items /systems in the specifications and /or the drawings are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship and the most financially expensive products shall take precedence. Such questions shall be referred to the Design Professional for final decision. 1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Design Professional. Where more than one unit is required of the same items, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-3 B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. Contractor shall include a cover sheet providing company name and contact information and leave adequate white space on the cover page for design professional review stamps. Company name on submittals cover page shall match contractor meeting the APPROVED CONTRACTOR requirements paragraph found later in this specification section. C. Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. D. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. E. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. F. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Design Professional for review. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-4 G. Submit required information on all items in the project for the following systems (see table). Submittals shall be sorted and separately identified per specification section listed below. SPEC EQUIPMENT DETAIL PROD SAMPLES INSTALL O&M CERTIFICATE OTHER SECTION DWGS DATA METHODS MANUAL OF SYSTEM (SEE DEMON- NOTES) STRATION 270010 Contractor Certifications Note 1 270010 Manufacturer Certification Note 2 271000 Grounding Equipment X X X 271000 Grounding Cabling X X X 271000 Grounding Hardware X X X 271100 UTP Cabling /Equipment X X X Note 6 271100 Fiber Cabling/Equipment X X X Note 6 271100 Coaxial Cable /Equipment X X X Note 6 271100 IDC /Lightning Blocks X X X Note 6 271100 Data Racks /Cabinets X X X Note 6 271100 Cable Management X X X Note 6 271100 JData Switch X I X I X Note 6 271100 UPS /Power Equipment X X X Note 6 271100 s- Builts at Closeout Note 3 271200 Tester, UTP /Fiber X X Note 4 271200 Test Report at Closeout Note 5 Notes: 1. Division 27 Contractor shall submit copies of the Contractor Certifications under section 27 0010 (BICSI or IBEW /NECA Certifications) showing compliance with the specification. See Approved Contractors paragraph for details. Provide this and all submittals to Owner and /or Design Professional as determined by Owner. 2. Division 27 Contractor shall submit Manufacturer Certification under section 27 0010. See Approved Contractors paragraph in this section for details, and further requirements listed in Cabling and Equipment specification section. 3. Division 27 Contractor shall submit As- Builts as specified in Cabling and Equipment section. 4. Division 27 Contractor shall submit product information on UTP and Fiber Tester. See testers specified in Testing and Documentation section. 5. Division 27 Contractor shall submit Test Report as specified in Testing and Documentation section. 6. Grounding and Bonding or Cabling and Equipment section submittals will not be opened or reviewed by the Design Professional until the Division 27 0010 Contractor Certifications (see Note 1) and Division 27 Manufacturer Certifications (see Note 2) have been received and found to be acceptable by the Design Professional. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-5 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME, ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBER OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 1.12 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. 1.13 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the telecommunications installation, the Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O &M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-6 4. Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands -on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: Training sessions shall include hands -on demonstrations of system wide start -up, operation in all possible modes, shut -down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hrs. Hrs. off Presented By Others Present Remarks on Site Site 27 1000 Grounding and Bonding 0.5 Contractor 27 1100 Cabling and Equipment 2 Contractor E. Each Contractor shall submit a certificate (in the project closeout submittals), signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-7 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 signature date signature date TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 270010-8 1. 14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC. A. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the telecommunication systems work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County, and Federal Agencies. 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier, manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to Design Professional at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, Design Professional will approve it in an addenda. The Design Professional will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specified item. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.16 APPROVED CONTRACTORS A. MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION: Contractor shall be a manufacturer certified installer for the structured cabling plant. A copy of the current annual manufacturer certification shall be provided with 27 0010 submittals. Contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the manufacturer requirements and shall be authorized to provide an extended Manufacturer's Product Warranty with his installation. The specific warranty program that is acceptable for each solution is listed with the connectivity solution in specification section 27 1100 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS CABLING AND EQUIPMENT. Contractors shall provide proof upon request that they have maintained the Manufacturers Certification in good standing for at least six months prior to the overall project bid. Temporary or short term certifications (less than the standard 12 month annual certification described above) or case -by -case certifications are not acceptable. B. CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION: Contractor shall meet one of the following two paragraphs and provide appropriate documentation in the 27 0010 submittals: Contractor shall have BICSI Registered Installers and Technicians on staff and assign them to this project. The project shall be staffed at all times by Installers and Technicians who, in the role of lead craft - persons, will be able to provide leadership and technical resources for the remaining craft - persons on the project. A minimum of 30 percent of personnel shall be BICSI registered telecommunications installers. Of that number 15 percent shall be registered at the Technician Level, at least 40 percent shall be registered at the Installer Level 2, and the balance shall be registered at the Installer Level 1. Contractor shall provide BICSI certifications showing employee name, level, and expiration date. BICSI certificate for the highest level attained shall be submitted. 2. Contractor shall have employees on staff and assigned to the project that are currently indentured in or have successfully completed the IBEW /NECA three -year Telecommunications Installer/Technician registered apprenticeship program. Contractor shall maintain a ratio of 1 Technician to 1 indentured Apprentice. Contractor shall provide documentation verifying the indentured status of Apprentices, and the Department of Labor Certificates of Completion for the Installer /Technicians. C. Contractor pulling the telecommunications cabling (if different from the prime Telecommunications Contractor) shall meet all the same BICSI or IBEW /NECA requirements, and requirements of this specification, as the prime Telecommunications Contractor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-9 D. Contractor shall be located within 125 miles of the construction site to establish a potential two hour response time for ongoing customer needs after construction completion. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the drawing schedules, are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers, who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of Contractor and /or the manufacturer. C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.18 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be a company specializing in telecommunication cable and /or accessories with a minimum of five years documented experience in installation of cable and /or accessories similar to those specified below. 1.19 WARRANTYAND SERVICES A. The entire telecommunications system including all sub - systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. B. A Manufacturer Product Warranty shall be provided which warrants functionality of all components used in the system for 20 years from the date of registration. The Manufacturers Product Warranty shall warrant the installed horizontal and /or backbone copper, and both the horizontal and the backbone optical fiber portions of the cabling system. C. Continuing Maintenance: The contractor shall furnish an hourly rate with the proposal submittal, which shall be valid for a period of one year from the date of acceptance. This rate will be used when cabling support is required to affect moves, adds, and changes to the system (MACs). MACs performed by an approved Contractor shall be added to the warranty. D. Final Acceptance & System Certification: Completion of the installation, in- progress and final inspections, receipt of the test and as -built documentation, and successful performance of the cabling system for a two week period will constitute acceptance of the system. Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the end user shall be provided with a numbered certificate registering the installation. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-10 1. 20 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. A Contract Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Contract Change Order. B. Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. The cost or credit to Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. Change Orders shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized on behalf of Owner. 1.21 GROUNDING AND BONDING OF SYSTEMS A. All low voltage systems shall be subject to the Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding specification section 27 1000. For those systems which may require a specialized sub- contractor, the sub - contractor providing and installing systems shall also be responsible for grounding and bonding per this specification. 1.22 COMPLETION B. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non - hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. C. When all the work is complete Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. D. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. END OF SECTION 27 0010 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GENERAL PROVISIONS 12.137 270010-11 SECTION 27 1000 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 27 0010 — Telecommunications General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this grounding and bonding system in compliance with the applicable standards, specifications and drawings. Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete and operational system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not. B. All division 27 low voltage systems shall adhere to these grounding and bonding requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data for equipment, cabling, and hardware shall consist of catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the materials with specific item designated by arrow or by being highlighted. 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. The Intersystem Grounding Busbar located outside the main electrical service equipment will be installed as part of the main electrical gear and connected back to the various building grounding sources (ground rods, water pipe, building steel, etc.). 1.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Contractor shall be responsible for fire stopping all conduit sleeves (internally only) and cable tray where required to maintain integrity of fire and /or smoke walls. The Contractor shall review architectural drawings to determine which walls have a fire and /or smoke rating. Any rating other than "non- rated" shall constitute a wall that requires fire stopping in all penetrations /openings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING EQUIPMENT A. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB): Panduit part number GB4B0624TP1 -1. B. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB): Panduit part number GB2B0306TP1 -1. C. Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding Conductor Label Kit: Panduit part number LTYK. D. Data Rack Grounding Busbar, 19 ": Panduit part number RGRB19U. E. Server Cabinet Grounding Busbar, Cagenut Mounting, 19 ": Panduit part number RGRB19CN. F. Electrostatic Discharge Port Kit: Panduit part number RGESD2 -1. 2.02 GROUNDING CABLING A. Cable used for Intersystem Grounding Busbar to Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be non - jacketed AWG #3/0 bare copper stranded grounding cable. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 271000-1 B. Cable used for Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) to Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be non - jacketed AWG #3/0 bare copper stranded grounding cable. C. Cable used for Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) or Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) to data racks /server cabinets inside the telecom room shall be AWG #6 copper stranded cable, green jacketed or bare copper. D. Cable used for Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) or Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) to any wall mounted low voltage system in the telecom room that requires grounding shall be AWG #6 copper stranded cable, green or bare copper. E. Cable used for Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) or Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) to the telecom room ladder rack system shall be AWG #6 copper stranded cable, green or bare copper. F. Cable used for Cable Tray and /or Wire Basket grounding outside the telecom room shall be #6 AWG stranded bare copper cable. 2.03 GROUNDING HARDWARE A. Two Hole Lug, Code Conductor, Long Barrel with Window, AWG #3/0 3/8" with 1" spacing. Panduit part number LCC3 /0- 38DW -X. B. Two Hole Lug, Code Conductor, Long Barrel with Window, AWG #6 with 5/8" spacing. Panduit part number LCC6- 14AW -L. C. Paint Piercing Grounding Washer Kit with Antioxidant: Panduit parts. D. Bonding Screws, #12 -24: Panduit part number RGTBSG -C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 STAR TOPOLOGY A. The telecom grounding and bonding system shall be provided and installed in a star topology. Each building shall receive one Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) in the designated telecom room or utility demarcation area (see below for location), and one Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) in each additional telecom room or identified specialty location (see below for locations). All TGB's shall receive a dedicated grounding connection back to the TMGB. The grounding conductor to 200A IT Closet shall be a typical dedicated run, but the conductor to all IT Closets above it in the tower shall be in series, with a AWG #3/0 grounding conductor from TGB to TGB, unless directed otherwise. The TMGB shall receive a dedicated grounding connection back to the building Intersystem Grounding Busbar (see Work By Others). The building Intersystem Grounding Busbar is usually just outside the main electrical service gear (interior to the building, visible on the wall. ��r�y�a�rrai�y 'L�`jr�►�L�]:Z•lllJl�]IJ[H �11Cy-�I:aszyrrc•�►�� A. ELEC.142 3.03 TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUNDING BUSBAR (TMGB) LOCATION: A. IT 023 B. If in a telecom room, the TMGB shall be mounted on a wall toward the rear of the room, preferably out of the way of other equipment and walk ways. C. If in a telecom room, the TMGB shall be mounted at an elevation approximately 6 " -12" below the ladder rack in the room to allow easy access for grounding cables from the ladder rack, and to keep it up and out of the way for better technician safety. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 271000-2 3.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUSBAR (TGB) LOCATION: A. IT 054 B. VAULT 110 NE CORNER (coordinate with Owner) C. IT 142 D. ELEC. / IT 253 E. 200A IT CLOSET F. 300A IT CLOSET G. 400A IT CLOSET H. 500A IT CLOSET I. 600A IT CLOSET J. If in a telecom room, the TGB shall be mounted on a wall toward the rear of the room, preferably out of the way of other equipment and walk ways. K. If in a telecom room, the TGB shall be mounted at an elevation approximately 6 " -12" below the ladder rack in the room to allow easy access for grounding cables from the ladder rack, and to keep it up and out of the way for better technician safety. 3.05 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM LADDER RACK A. All telecom room ladder rack shall be bonded together and to the telecommunications grounding busbar in that room. B. Bonding shall be accomplished per the following: 1. Use the #6 AWG green cable listed in the cable paragraph. 2. Use the #6 AWG two hole lugs listed in the hardware paragraph. 3. Use the bonding stud and bonding nuts listed in the hardware paragraph to secure the lug to the ladder rack. 4. Drill holes in ladder rack to accommodate the two hole lugs and bonding studs with bonding nuts. 5. Install bonding conductors in a neat and orderly fashion so as not to droop or hang away from the material it is bonding. 6. Use the #6 AWG two hole lugs to bond to the busbar. 3.06 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM RACKS AND CABINETS A. All telecom room racks and cabinets shall be individually bonded to the copper busbar in that room (the TMGB or TGB) using a dedicated cable installation. B. Grounding the rack or cabinet to the copper busbar shall be accomplished per the following: 1. Use the #6 AWG green cable listed in the cable paragraph. 2. Use the #6 AWG two hole lugs listed in the hardware paragraph to connect to the telecom room grounding busbar. 3. Use the #6 AWG two hole lugs listed in the hardware paragraph to connect to the rack or cabinet grounding busbar. 4. Use the paint piercing washers listed in the hardware paragraph. 5. Install bonding conductors in a neat and orderly fashion so as not to droop or hang away from the material it is bonding. 6. Use the #6 AWG two hole lugs to bond to the busbar. 3.07 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLE TRAY AND /OR WIRE BASKET A. All installations of cable tray and /or wire basket runs shall be bonded to the nearest copper busbar in a telecom room (the TGB or TMGB) using a AWG #6 stranded bare copper grounding conductor. The break point shall be at the same boundary as the UTP boundary between telecom rooms. Do not bond the cable tray or wire basket together across these boundaries as this could cause a grounding loop. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 271000-3 B. Bonding cable tray and /or wire basket shall be accomplished per the following: 1. The bare copper bonding conductor shall be one continuous run from the telecom room grounding busbar to the end of the cable tray and /or wire basket longest run. Remember to not bond across the boundaries (see above). 2. Additional branches of cable tray and /or wire basket that branch off the initial "longest run" shall have their own installation of continuous bare copper bonding conductor from the main run to the end. This run shall be mechanically and permanently bonded to the "longest run" using permanent crimp on Panduit lugs and the proper Panduit hydraulic tool for the job. The end result of this is like a tree with a main trunk and branches off that main trunk (the branches connect at the main trunk and do not need to individually run to the telecom room). 3. Each individual piece or stick of cable tray and /or wire basket shall be mechanically bonded to the bare copper grounding conductor. a) For cable tray, use a mechanical bonding lug with paint piercing washer and bolt with nylock nut through body of cable tray. The bare copper bonding cable shall slide into the "C" opening of the lug and be tightened using the lug stud. b) For wire basket, use a mechanical screw type compression lug. END OF SECTION 27 1000 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING 12.137 271000-4 SECTION 27 1100 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 27 0010 — Telecommunications General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer and Contractor Certifications are required submittals in the division 27 General Provisions specifications section. The Manufacturer Certification is based on the material information listed below in the Acceptable Manufacturers paragraph. B. Submittal data for cabling and components shall consist of catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the materials. 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. Unless noted otherwise, the building's Electrical Contractor will provide field device back boxes, and conduit paths for use by Contractor. In general, the following is provided: 1. Architect will specify each dedicated telecom room fully lined on all walls from floor to 8' AFF ( +96 ") with 0.75" fire retardant 3/4" AC plywood (A side visible after installation), painted with three coats of fire retardant bright white paint. Each sheet of plywood shall have one fire rating stamp masked off such that after painting this stamp is visible to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The Division 27 Contractor shall review the architectural drawings and be prepared to mount ladder rack and other equipment to masonry, gypsum, or other wall types if the plywood was omitted from the architectural design. 2. Conduits by Electrical Contractor unless otherwise noted. 1.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Contractor shall be responsible for fire stopping all conduit sleeves (internally only) and cable tray where required to maintain integrity of fire and /or smoke walls. The Contractor shall review architectural drawings to determine which walls have a fire and /or smoke rating. Any rating other than "non- rated" shall constitute a wall that requires fire stopping in all penetrations /openings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER UTP CABLE AND CONNECTIVITY PRODUCTS A. Cabling and connectivity products (devices, cover plates, patch panels, insulation displacement connectors, etc.) must be part of a matched solution, provided by manufacturers that have been tested together and provide a fully certified end to end system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: As specified by Owners. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 271100-1 C. Cable Jacket Rating: As determined by Owners. 1. Plenum 2. Non - Plenum Note: If the above selection is not edited down to only one cable jacket type, the Contractor shall provide jacket types as directed by owner. D. Additional Cabling and Connectivity Requirements: 1. Furnish and install cable between telecommunications room and field device locations as noted on the drawings. 2. Each field jack shall have a dedicated cable. 3. Provide cable terminations at telecommunications room. 4. Provide terminations at all field locations with an 8 pin, 8 conductor (RJ45 type) modular jack and flush wall plate per drawings. 5. Terminate using T568B wiring schematic unless noted otherwise. 6. Provide thermoplastic wall faceplates from the same connectivity manufacturer per location requirements for all field devices or as directed by Owner. Faceplate shall match electrical receptacle faceplates (if stainless steel, then match with stainless steel, if thermoplastic, then match with same color thermoplastic). Verify color /material before submittal time with Design Professional and include faceplate color /material choice in submittals. 7. Removable snap on colored icons shall be used to distinguish jacks meant for voice service and data service. For thermoplastic faceplate projects, all jacks shall be the same color as the thermoplastic faceplate unless specifically instructed otherwise (ask Design Professional about jack color for stainless steel faceplate projects — all jacks shall be the same color [only one color] unless specifically instructed otherwise by the Deisgn Professional). Provide at least 100 extra snap -on voice icons and at least 100 extra snap -on data icons to Owner. Contractor shall ask the Owner what two colors they want for voice and data icons respectively. 8. Configure faceplates as required for individual field locations per drawings. 9. Blanks shall be installed in all empty jack locations. 10. Provide terminations onto insulation displacement connectors for high pair count copper cables. 11. The Owner shall authorize all device during submittals, but unless decided otherwise, all patch panels shall be high density 48 port in 2RU (One EIA rack unit (1 RU) = 1.75 "). No standard density (24 port in 2RU) patch panels allowed. 12. If multiple floors are being fed from one telecom room, the Contractor shall provide patch panels for each floor (do not continue from one floor to another on the same patch panel). Each floors patch panels shall be separated in the rack such that each floor may be expanded by 20% by putting the new patch panels in the original line up). 2.02 CABLE TELEVISION (CATV) CABLING AND AMPLIFICATION A H C Provide and install CATV trunk and distribution cables, taps and /or splitters, amplifiers (if needed) and field devices as noted on plans. Acceptable Manufacturers: As specified by Owner or as listed below 1. CommScope 2275V, Series 6 Copper Clad Steel, 75 Ohm, 3GHz, Plenum. 2. CommScope 2285K, Series 11 Copper Clad Steel, 75 Ohm, 3GHz, Plenum. Additional Requirements: 1. Provide and install Ideal or connectors at all field locations. 2. Provide and install Ideal or connectors at the source end locations). Thomas and Betts longitudinal compression style F Thomas and Betts longitudinal compression style F of the coaxial cabling (telecom room or distributed tap MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 271100-2 3. Provide and install Blonder Tongue active amplifier(s) as needed to keep signal level within mandated range (see below). 4. CATV signal strength at each television /tuner location shall be +10dB, plus or minus 3dB. 5. All CATV drops over 150' in length shall be Series 11 coaxial cable. 2.03 WIRE BASKET HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT A. Wire basket shall be provided and installed (generally outside of telecom rooms only) as shown on the plans. B. Acceptable Manufacturers are: 1. Cablofil EZ Tray 2. GS Metals Flextray 3. Chatsworth (CPI) C. Additional Wire Basket Requirements: 1. All wire basket and hardware shall be galvanized (no other coatings). This is to ensure a product that is made of an electrically conductive material for grounding purposes. 2. Whenever possible the Contractor shall continue the basket around corners and changes in elevation by applying the factory instructions for cutting and bending the material rather than stopping the material, forcing the cable to jump from one installation to the other. 3. The Contractor shall only cut the material with manufacturer approved cutters which leave a square edge, rather than bolt cutters which leave a sharp edge that can damage cables and severely injure installers and the Owner in the future. 4. Wire basket is shown in part diagrammatically on the plans. Conduit sleeves are shown passing through walls often with a stub symbol on each end (so the Electrical Contractor knows what to install) looking like they are 3' or 4' long, but in the field that sleeve will often not be any longer than the wall is thick (which is acceptable as long as it has bushings). The Contractor shall install the wire basket to the intended target shown on the plans (the destination of the cable that is, possibly the area below a floor box, wall sleeves, or other longer conduit pathway, etc.). The maximum air gap between wire basket and the cable destination horizontally shall be one foot (12 "). The maximum air gap between wire basket and the cable destination vertically shall be two feet (24 "). 2.04 MULTIMODE FIBER AND CONNECTIVITY PRODUCTS A. Cabling and connectivity products (devices, coverplates, termination panels, connectors, etc.) must be part of a matched solution, provided by manufacturers that have been tested together and provide a fully certified and guaranteed end to end system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: The acceptable fiber solution shall be Corning Cable Systems hardware with Corning brand optical fiber cable (not someone else using Corning's glass) or as specified by Owner if included in project. 2.05 SINGLEMODE FIBER AND CONNECTI VITY PRODUCTS A. Cabling and connectivity products (devices, coverplates, splice /termination panels, connectors, etc.) must be part of a matched solution, provided by manufacturers that have been tested together and provide a fully certified and guaranteed end to end system. 1. The acceptable fiber solution shall be Corning Cable Systems hardware with Corning brand optical fiber cable (not someone else using Corning's glass) or as specified by Owner if included in project. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 271100-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND LABELING A. Install telecommunication systems cables and auxiliary materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices. 1. In general, all interior cables are installed in conduit. 2. D rings are allowed in telecommunications room as needed. 3. Contractor shall use hook and loop type fasteners on all UTP telecommunications cable. Tie wraps may be temporarily used loosely for dressing UTP cables during installation if they are removed before final inspection. Any tie wrap found in place around UTP cable tight enough that a 0.5" wooden dowel cannot be inserted into the bundle at the tie wrap location shall therefore obligate the Contractor to replace those potentially damaged UTP cables at the Design Professionals discretion, whether they pass electronic testing or not. 4. Tie wraps may be used carefully on OSP and armored cabling at light tension levels which do not result in any visible cable jacket deformation. 5. If unarmored fiber is specified without innerduct for any reason, tie wraps are forbidden on that cabling. 6. Any and all tie wraps used in the project shall be trimmed flush at the locking device using a fully flush cutter tool for safety. Any tie wrap found with a sharp point shall be removed by the Contractor and replaced without additional compensation. B. Identify all fiber, copper, and coaxial cables that terminate in the telecommunication room as to field location, and coordinate specifics with Owner prior to installation. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl -cloth self- adhesive cable /conductor markers of wrap- around type; either pre- numbered plastic coated type, or write -on type with clear plastic self- adhesive cover flap; numbered to show cable identification. Install within 6" of cable end. 2. Contractor shall not distinguish between UTP that is initially intended for voice or data use. The structured cabling plant is designed to be flexible and shall be numbered sequentially throughout the building. Room numbers shall not be used in the numbering scheme. For buildings with multiple Telecom Rooms (and /or per floor), an alphanumeric identifier shall identify the telecom room, followed by the sequentially numbered jack. For example, a jack labeled 2A -97 would terminate in the "A" Telecom Room on the second floor, and be connected to jack #97 on the patch panels. 3. All field device labeling shall match the telecom room labeling for the corresponding cable. 4. Jacks shall be numbered sequentially on the patch panel field, beginning at the top left, working across the row to the right, then down to the next row, etc. This will require Contractor to plan the installation and terminate sequentially on both ends through the building rather than terminate randomly which results in confusion for Owner. 5. When transitioning from one floor to another on a multi -floor installation served out of one telecom room (or a multi -floor section of a larger building), the patch panel at the end of the installation for a particular floor shall have at least 12 open jacks /slots for future growth on that floor. Also, a new patch panel shall always be started for each new floor. This means if a particular floor has 25 jacks (using 24 port patch panels), the Contractor shall leave the second patch panel with 23 openings and start a fresh patch panel for the next floor. C. After completion, all cables shall be thoroughly tested in accordance with the division 27 Testing and Documentation section. 1. Contractor shall provide all instruments for testing the cables. 2. Contractor shall demonstrate in the presence of Owner's representative that the telecommunications system is complete and operational. 3. Contractor shall complete and submit the Certificate of System Demonstration. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 271100-4 D. After completion, comprehensive As- Builts will be created and posted in each Telecom Room within 3 days. Two hard copies shall be created for each Telecom Room detailing the entire structured cabling plant and labeling scheme after installation. One hard copy shall consist of (at a minimum) the Telecom plans marked with permanent ink to show the labeling used at each field location, and a table or spreadsheet (for example, an 8'/" x 11" printed Excel file) that lists all the patch panel jacks in a column sequentially, followed by a cross reference column identifying the room name /number that the corresponding jack is in. This is the only part of the labeling process in which room name /numbers are acceptable. The second hard copy shall be identical to the first one. One copy shall be posted in each corresponding Telecom Room, and the other copy shall be submitted to the Design Professional for review according to the submittal process identified in the shop drawing paragraph of Specification Section 27 0010. This second copy will then be forwarded to Owner. END OF SECTION 27 1100 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING AND EQUIPMENT 12.137 271100-5 SECTION 27 1200 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PURPOSE A. The purpose of the testing is to ensure proper installation of the telecommunications cabling system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit product data for the following: 1. Hand -held testing equipment manufacturer, model, and software version. 2. Injector equipment manufacturer, model, and software version. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The following Performance Standards shall be followed. Unless otherwise stated, where Performance Standards conflict with manufacturer's recommendations, the more restrictive shall be applied: 1. TIA/EIA - 526 -7 2. TIA/EIA - 526 -14 3. TIA/EIA - 568 -1 4. TIA/EIA - 568 -2 5. TIA/EIA - 568 -3 1.04 TEST EQUIPMENT Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single -Mode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP -7. Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP -14. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted - Pair Cabling Components. Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. A. Test Equipment: Microtest Omniscanner 2, Hewlett Packard WireScope 350, Fluke DSP -4000 (5e only), Fluke DSP -4300, Fluke DTX -1800 or approved equal. B. The software version for the testers shall be the latest version available. 1.05 LINK DEFINITION FOR THE PROJECT A. A link consists of up to 90 meters (295 feet) of horizontal cabling, a connection at each end, up to 2 meters of test equipment lead from the main unit of the hand -held tester to the local connection, and up to 2 meters of test equipment lead from the remote unit to the remote connection. A total length of up to 94 meters (308 feet). B. The connection to the equipment at each end of the link is not included in the link definition. 1.06 CHANNEL DEFINITION FOR THE PROJECT A. A channel consists of up to 90 meters (295 feet) of horizontal cabling, a connection at each end, up to 7 meters for the cross - connect and equipment cable, and up to 3 meters for the work area equipment cable. A total length of up to 100 meters (328 feet). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 12.137 271200-1 B. The connection to equipment at each end of the channel is not included in the channel definition. PART 2 - COPPER CABLING ACCEPTANCE TESTING 2.01 ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. The following field acceptance tests shall be performed for twisted - pair cabling: 1. Wire Map (continuity). 2. Length. 3. Attenuation. 4. NEXT. 5. ELFEXT. 6. Delay and delay skew. 7. Return loss. 8. Power sum crosstalk (PSNEXT and PSELFEXT). 2.02 TEST EQUIPMENT SET -UP AND TEST PARAMETERS A. Autotest: Use the Autotests to perform the required tests. Customize the Autotest as necessary to satisfy testing requirements and parameters. B. Cable Type: Select the cable type being tested. Cable Type may vary. Always change the NVP for the type of cable being tested. C. Frequency Range: The frequency range for category 6 tests shall be 1 MHz to 250 MHz. D. Frequency Range: The frequency range for category 6A tests shall be 1 MHz to 500 MHz. E. Cable Pairs: Test all cable pairs. Select all pairs for TEST and all pairs for Pass /Fail criteria for Autotest. F. Length Units: Cable length test results shall be in feet. G. Date Style. The date style shall show month, day, and year. Date shall be the date the test is conducted. H. Language: The language shall be English. 2.03 TEST PROCEDURE A. Testing shall be performed with the tester at the distribution frame and the remote unit at the Work Area Outlet. B. Test leads and test hardware have limited life- cycles. Inspect and replace the test leads as necessary. C. Use only test leads specified by the test equipment manufacturer. D. Strictly follow the test equipment manufacturer's instructions for equipment setup, initialization, and calibration. PART 3 - MULTIMODE FIBER TESTING 3.01 ACCEPTABLE TESTS A. The following field acceptance tests shall be performed for multimode fiber if included in project: 1. End to end attenuation testing at 850 nm and 1300 nm for backbone links. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 12.137 271200-2 3.02 TEST PARAMETERS A. The following test parameters shall be adhered to: 1. Test jumpers must be of the same fiber core size and connector type as the cable system (e.g., 62.5/125 um jumpers for a 62.5/125 um system). 2. The power meter and the light source must be set to the same wavelength. 3. The power meter must be calibrated and traceable to the National Institute for Standards and Technologies (NIST). 4. The light source or OTDR must operate within the range of 850 +30 nm or 1300 +20nm for multimode testing in accordance with ANSI /TIA /EIA- 526 -14. 5. All system connectors, adapters, and jumpers must be properly cleaned before measurements are taken. PART 4 - SINGLEMODE FIBER TESTING 4.01 ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. The following field acceptance tests shall be performed for single mode fiber if included in project: 1. End to end attenuation testing at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. 4.02 TEST PARAMETERS A. The following tests parameters shall be adhered to: 1. Test jumpers must be of the same fiber core size and connector type as the cable system (e.g., singlemode jumpers for a singlemode system). 2. The power meter and the light source must be set to the same wavelength. 3. The power meter must be calibrated and traceable to the National Institute for Standards and Technologies (NIST). 4. The light source or OTDR must operate within the range of 1310 +10 nm or 1550 +20nm for singlemode testing in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA- 526 -7. 5. All system connectors, adapters, and jumpers must be properly cleaned before measurements are taken. PART 5 - TESTING DOCUMENTATION 5.01 DOCUMENTATION A. The Test Documentation requirements are the minimum requirements. Other details of presentation and recording methods will be discussed with Owner and Design Professional. Gain approval from Owner and Design Professional of the test documentation format and content prior to full -scale testing. Coordinate with Owner and Design Professional to get representative sample of the documentation format and content for review. B. Provide Owner with a printed copy of ONLY the summary report of all tests, the electronic file of the test results for each test on CD, and the electronic copy of the summary report on CD. Do not print out each report. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 12.137 271200-3 5.02 TEST REPORT A. The following header fields on each test report shall contain the appropriate information. These are minimum requirements. 1. Circuit ID 2. Test Result 3. Owner 4. Test Equipment Serial Number 5. Software Version 6. Date 7. Cable Type 8. NVP 9. Building 10. Closet B. The information in each user definable header field on each test report shall contain the information as follows. 1. Circuit ID: Indicate the outlet location number and jack number under test 2. Owner: Indicate the owner of the test equipment 3. Date: Indicate the date of the test 4. Cable Type: Indicate the cable type being tested 5. NVP: Indicate the field measured NVP 6. Building: Indicate the building where the cable is being tested 7. Closet: Indicate the closet identifier where the cable is terminated C. The minimum test result information on each report shall include the data for the tests identified in the Acceptance Tests paragraph of each applicable testing part. D. Contractor shall provide the test data in a complete and consistent format. Printed test results shall be printed from a laser printer. E. The contractor shall verify that a report for each jack in the Project is contained in the file list. F. Two weeks (14 days) prior to scheduled telecommunications systems start -up date Design Professional shall receive from Contractor complete printed cable performance test results via the submittal process (see 27 0010). Start -up shall not commence unless test results are submitted. 5.03 ELECTRONIC COPY A. The electronic copy of the test results shall be on CD. B. The CD's shall be labeled. The label shall read: Project Name building name (BLDG. No. x) "Copper /Fiber Test Results" "CD No." X of X date (month and year) C. The files on CD shall be in the original file format of the test equipment. END OF SECTION 27 1200 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation TELECOMMUNICATIONS TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION 12.137 271200-4 SECTION 27 4500 — SOUND MASKING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 27 0010 — Telecommunications General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this Sound Masking system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data for Sound Masking cabling and components shall consist of catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the materials. 1.04 WORK BY OTHERS A. Unless noted otherwise, the building's Electrical Contractor will provide field device backboxes if needed, and conduit paths for use by Contractor. 1.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Contractor shall be responsible for firestopping all conduit sleeves and cable tray where required to maintain integrity of fire walls. Contractor shall see architectural drawings for walls that require fire rating. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE SOUND MASKING CONTRACTORS A. The contractor shall be one of the following: 1. Saxton Inc., 600 3rd Street SE, Studio 300, Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 -2010. Contact Mandy at (319) 365 -6967 or cedarrapids @saxtoninc.com B. The contractor looking for a bid from the contractors listed above shall contact them as soon as possible to ensure they are aware of the project and have adequate time to prepare a bid. Two weeks should be considered a minimum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOUND MASKING SYSTEMS A. Sound Masking systems shall be provided with all applicable accessories as a system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lencore C. Additional Sound Masking System Requirements 1. The Sound Masking system shall be fully installed within manufacturer requirements and suggested guidelines for the outlined area as seen on plans. 2. Coordinate installation with Electrical Contractor regarding exact power location and connection type for head end equipment located in IT room. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SOUND MASKING SYSTEM 12.137 274500-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Sound Masking systems cables, equipment, and auxiliary materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices. Contractor shall use provided raceways or Contractor install J -hooks for all cabling. No fastening cabling to conduits, piping, equipment, or anything other than Contractor installed J- hooks. 2. All Sound Masking cabling shall be home -run, no splicing. B. Identify all Sound Masking cables as to field location. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl -cloth self- adhesive cable /conductor markers of wrap- around type; either pre- numbered plastic coated type, or write -on type with clear plastic self- adhesive cover flap; numbered to show cable identification. Install within 6" of cable end. C. After completion, all cables shall be thoroughly tested. 1. Contractor shall provide all instruments for testing the cables. 2. Contractor shall demonstrate in the presence of Owner's representative that the Sound Masking system is complete and operational. 3. Contractor shall complete and submit the Certificate of System Demonstration. D. After completion, comprehensive As- Builts shall be created and provided to the design team for review. Two hard copies shall be provided to Owner detailing the entire Sound Masking system after installation. Each field position shall be labeled and cross referenced to the appropriate head end position for ease of troubleshooting. 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. The Contractor shall coordinate a date /time with the Engineer after the system is fully operational, but before final payment, for the Contractor to provide a full system demonstration. This shall include all aspects of system operation that the user might encounter. END OF SECTION 27 4500 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation SOUND MASKING SYSTEM 12.137 274500-2 SECTION 28 0010 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section applies to all work under this division. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Furnish, install, and terminate all system equipment and cabling as applicable and per drawings. 2. Furnish and install any cabinets, racks and cable management as required and as indicated. 3. Furnish any other material required to form a complete and operational system. 4. Provide As -Built drawings per Division 0 and /or Division 1 specification. 5. Provide Owner training and testing documentation. 6. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. 7. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1. National Electrical Code 2. Local Electrical Code 3. National Fire Protection Association 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 5. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 6. International / Uniform Building Code as applicable 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act 8. Iowa Administrative Codes 9. TIA/EIA -568 -C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 10. TIA /EIA -569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 11. TIA /EIA -606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 12. TIA /EIA -607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 13. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA - 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work. No extra compensation will be allowed for corrections or changes in the work required due to failure to comply with the applicable codes and standards. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professional for final decision. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REG ULA TORY AGENCIES A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local serving utility companies and shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -1 B. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. 1.05 DRAWINGS A. Drawings for the work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. B. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact quantities and locations for equipment. C. Contractor shall take own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. D. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items for a complete installation are not shown, but where such items are required by code or where they are required for proper installation and operation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. C. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to become familiar with the conditions of the site which will affect the work and shall verify points of connection with utilities and /or existing system wiring. B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Design Professional reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various divisions shall be called to the attention of the Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Design Professional and the decision will be final. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -2 D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the Contractor to work in areas previously finished by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall be responsible for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. G. Where two or more specified items /systems in the specifications and /or the drawings are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship and the most financially expensive products shall take precedence. Such questions shall be referred to the Design Professional for final decision. 1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Design Professional. Where more than one unit is required of the same items, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C. The Design Professional will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. D. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. E. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. F. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Design Professional for review. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -3 G. Submit required information on the following items: SPEC EQUIPMENT DETAIL PROD SAMPLES INSTALL O&M CERTIFICATE OTHER SECTION DWGS DATA METHODS MANUAL OF SYSTEM (SEE DEMON- NOTES) STRATION 283100 Fire Alarm and Detection X X X X Systems Notes: 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Design Professional in duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard - backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME, ADDRESS AND PHONE NUMBER OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professional and Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 1.12 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by the Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. 1.13 TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. Prior to acceptance of the telecommunications installation, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1. Provide adequate notice to the Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2. Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -4 B. Equipment training: 1. Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instruction on each major piece of equipment. The Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2. Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O &M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3. Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. 4. The Contractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5. Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands -on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C. System training: Training sessions shall include hands -on demonstrations of system wide start -up, operation in all possible modes, shut -down and emergency procedures. D. The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: Section Description Hrs. on Site Hrs. off Site Presented By Others Present Remarks 28 3100 Fire Alarm and Detection 4 0 Manufacturer's Contractor 1 Systems Representative Remarks: 1. Perform complete system test at time of instruction. E. The Contractor shall submit a certificate, signed by the Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -5 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A. Project: B. System(s): C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMES DATE HOURS D. Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMES DATE HOURS Acknowledgement of demonstration: E. Contractor's Representative: Owner's Representative: MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation 12.137 signature date signature date ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -6 1. 14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC. A. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the telecommunication systems work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County, and Federal Agencies. 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier, manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to the Design Professional at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, the Design Professional will approve it in an addenda. The Design Professional will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specified item. B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.16 APPROVED CONTRACTORS A. The Contractor shall be a manufacturer certified installer and service provider for the product submitted and installed. A copy of the Contractor's manufacturer certification must be submitted under this specification section for the Access Control Contractor and the Video Surveillance Contractor if applicable to the project. The Contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the manufacturer requirements and must be authorized to provide a Manufacturer's Product Warranty with his installation. B. The Contractor pulling the cabling (if different from the prime system Contractor) shall meet the BICSI or IBEW /NECA requirements found in the Division 27 General Provisions. C. Contractor shall be located within 125 miles of the construction site to establish a potential two hour response time for ongoing customer needs after construction completion. 1.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plans are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to the Design Professional at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and /or the manufacturer. C. If the Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -7 1.18 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall be a company specializing in telecommunication cable and /or accessories with a minimum of five years documented experience in installation of cable and /or accessories similar to those specified below. 1.19 WARRANTY A. The entire telecommunications system including all sub - systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.20 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. A Contract Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and Contractor, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Contract Change Order. B. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. Change Orders shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized on behalf of the Owner. 1.21 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non - hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. B. When all the work is complete the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C. The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. END OF SECTION 28 0010 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 12.137 GENERAL PROVISIONS 280010 -8 SECTION 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM (ADDRESSABLE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 28 00 10 — Electronic Safety and Security General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system installation and wiring shall comply with applicable provisions of the current issue of NFPA -72 NFPA -80E, NFPA -90A, Life Safety Code NFPA 101, Iowa State Building Code, Iowa Administrative Code, Americans with Disabilities Act, and codes and regulations of local authorities having jurisdiction. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide fire alarm and detection system components which are UL- listed and labeled. D. FM Compliance: Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories which are FM- approved 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data for the fire alarm equipment shall consist of shop drawings showing line diagrams, full size drawings with device locations and addresses, quantities of equipment, catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the equipment and other descriptive data necessary to describe fully the equipment proposed. Submittals shall show approval from Engineer. B. In no instance shall the contract drawings be reproduced for shop drawing submittals. C. Contractor is responsible for any fees associated with the review and approval of the fire alarm drawings and product data by the Iowa City Fire Department. Contractor is also responsible for completion of the required fire alarm system submittal form and submittal of the final fire alarm shop drawings to the City. 1.04 RECORD DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. Record drawings shall be provided prior to the time of scheduling of the final inspection. They shall include the location of the overcurrent protection that feeds any fire alarm related equipment and shall be clearly marked on the drawings. Include changes made during system testing and acceptance. The following should be included: a. Alarm initiation devices with addresses. b. Alarm signal devices with module locations /addresses and circuit numbers. C. Door holders and smoke dampers with module location and addressed. d. Air handling units with module and relay locations and addresses. e. Junction pull boxes. f. Layout of conduit with circuit identification. g. 120 VAC power sources for control panels, door holders, and fire /smoke dampers. h. Location of all "end of line resistors." i. Calculations for voltage drop on circuits, battery, and audio amplifier sizing. 1.05 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Control of System: By the Fire Alarm Control Panel. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -1 B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification- appliance circuits. C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third -level priority. Higher - priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower- priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received. D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones. E. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the Fire Alarm Control Panel after initiating devices are restored to normal. Equipment that has been by- passed in software shall not change state of condition during a "reset ". Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be reprogrammed so that it can be reset only when a security level access level of 3 or greater is used. F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines. G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when a single ground or open circuit occurs in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification- appliance circuit. H. Loss of primary power at the Fire Alarm Control Panel initiates a trouble signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the annunciator. An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on the secondary power supply. I. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector, or operation of a sprinkler flow device initiates the following: 1. Notification - appliance operation. 2. Initiation of voice alarm system except for individual sleeping rooms. 3. Identification at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the remote annunciator of the device originating the alarm. 4. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 5. Release of fire and smoke doors held open. 6. Release of fire and smoke doors hold open if a detector adjacent to the door is in alarm. 7. Recall of elevators if the alarm is initiated by a detector located in an associated machine room, hoistway, or elevator lobby. 8. Shutdown of fans and other air - handling equipment serving the fire zone where alarm was initiated. 9. Initiation of smoke control sequence(s). 10. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving the fire zone where alarm was initiated. 11. Recording of the event in the system memory. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the remote annunciator. 1. Silencing- switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. 2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or fire zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. 3. When alarm- initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -2 K. Sprinkler valve- tamper switch operation initiates the following: 1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve- tamper" signal indication at Fire Alarm Control Panel and the annunciator. 2. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station. L. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the Fire Alarm Control Panel causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity- adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer. M. Removal of an alarm- initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following: 1. A "trouble" signal indication at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the annunciator for the device or zone involved. 2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station. N. Fire Alarm Control Panel Alphanumeric Display: Plain - English- language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm- initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory. 1. The upper line of the display shall indicate the zone in alarm according to the zone schedule on drawings. 2. The lower line of the display shall indicate the address of the device in alarm. O. LED Lights: 1. Only fire alarm zone lights and "device type" lights shall annunciate with a red LED. Device type, address and exact location shall annunciate on the digital readout. 2. Any by -pass, disable, or trouble condition shall annunciate with an amber LED, a trouble sounder and annunciate on the digital readout. A "trouble pending" control module shall be included. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than one unit. 2. Smoke Detectors and Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type. 3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type. 4. Keys and Tools: Five (5) extra sets for access to be locked and tamperproofed components. 1.07 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, signed by Contractor and manufacturer, agreeing to replace components that do not meet requirements or that fall within the specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Acceptance. Full warranty applies throughout the warranty period. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire alarm and detection systems of one of the following: 1. Simplex: Tyco /Grinnell 2. Notifier: NESCO Distributor 3. The equipment supplier shall provide the services of a factory trained representative. They shall supervise the system installation and final connections to the equipment and provide testing to assure that the system is in proper operating condition. 2.02 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide fire alarm and detection system products of types, sizes, and capacities indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components; construct in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Provide fire alarm and detection systems for applications indicated, with the sequence of operations, components and function features indicated. B. Materials and Equipment: Wiring System Materials: Provide basic wiring materials which comply with 26 0010 — Electrical General Provisions, 26 0553 — Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems, and 26 0519 - Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables; types to be selected by Installer. a. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1) Junction and pull boxes shall be clearly marked. This shall be done by painting the covers red, and properly labeling them. 2) All junction and pull boxes located at or above 8'0" from the floor shall be a minimum size of 4- 11/16 ". 3) No box extensions shall be permitted on new work. 4) All junction boxes shall be readily accessible. 5) No splicing in device mounting boxes. C. Manufacturer's Equipment: Provide manufacturer's standard construction equipment for material noted below: Central Fire Alarm Control Panel. a. Notifier NFS series. 1) All devices to be served from one (1) panel. b. Cabinet: Front lockable steel enclosure with a 14 gauge door and 16 gauge cabinet body, minimum. Arrange interior components so operations required fortesting or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. 1) Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic -resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels. 2) Mounting: Surface. 3) Keys: Common to all system components. C. Password Protection: Multi - level, applicable to system functions such as alarm silence, alarm reset, manual control, and disable /enable. Access to a level allows the operator to perform all actions within that level plus all actions of lower levels. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -4 d. Communication Format: Digital poll /response protocol with each initiating and control device. The system shall verify that the type device at each address matches the software configuration. e. Event Storage: 1) The system stores and logs alarm and trouble events. Each recorded event includes the time and date of the event's occurrence. 2) The system has the capability of recalling alarms, detector verifications, trouble conditions, acknowledgments, and silencing and reset activities in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. 3) Memory: Battery protected random access memory. 4) Alarm Log: 300 events. Trouble Log: 300 events. 5) Available Reports: a) Alarm, trouble and test conditions including the time and date of each occurrence. b) Status of each device in the system including detector sensitivity and verification tally. C) Detector trending. f. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Alarm- initiating zone boards consist of plug -in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable. 1) Initiating Device Capacity: Adequate for quantity of devices indicated on drawings plus 25 percent. 2) Quantity of Simultaneous Alarms: Unlimited. 3) Maintenance Alert: Automatically warns of a contaminated detector prior to false alarm. 4) One additional signal line circuit (SLC) for future. g. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm systems. Each circuit shall have 10 percent spare capacity. h. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound. i. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. j. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. Bypass switches shall provide specific alphanumeric display on the LCD annunciator. 1) Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. 2) Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. 3) Bypass Switches: Activation of a bypass switch allows system testing without operation of the bypassed circuit. A trouble condition is generated upon operation of a bypass switch. Provide bypass switches for the following: a) Remote monitoring station notification. b) Audio circuit. C) Visual circuit. d) Smoke dampers. e) Elevator recall, elevator 1. f) Elevator recall, elevator 2 g) AHU shutdown h) Fire doors. 4) Control Switches: Switches allow manual control or testing of the following: a) Alarm Test. Operation of switch simulates an alarm condition in the same manner as if a manual station was operated. Notification of the fire department or central monitoring station is bypassed. k. Programming: 1) System Memory: Non - volatile, programmable. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -5 2) Loading or editing of special instructions and operating sequences allowed as required. 3) Capable of on -site programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes. 4) Provisions for disabling and enabling all addressable devices, and all monitoring, signaling and control circuits individually for maintenance and testing purposes. 5) Provisions for distinctly different evacuation tone for disaster warning purposes. 6) Smoke sensor sensitivity: a) Automatic sensitivity adjustment of each sensor based on time of day and day of week. b) Multiple sensitivity settings per sensor. C) Pre -alarm or two -stage function to provide an indication when a sensor reaches 50 percent of its alarm threshold. 7) Contractor shall provide a detailed device description label that includes Room Name, Room Number, and Location in Building for common room name (i.e. Mech Room by main storage). I. Control Switches: Access Level City disconnect with digital readout (for both alarms and troubles) Level 3 Audio bypass with digital readout Level 3 Visual circuit bypass with digital readout Level 3 Smoke damper bypass with digital readout Level 1 Elevator bypass Level 1 Fire door bypass Level 1 Activation of elevator smoke damper Level 1 M. Provide air handler shutdown by specific unit or by fire zone (i.e. floor). Switch cannot be activated unless one or more of the following conditions occur: 1) Fire Alarm Control Panel is in access level 3. 2) Panel is in alarm condition. n. Fire alarm control panel power shall be supplied by dedicated circuit(s). 2. Manual Pull Stations a. Description: Fabricated of metal, and finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions of contrasting color. 1) Double- action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an alarm. 2) Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. 3) Indoor Protective Shield: Factory- fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery- powered audible horn intended to discourage false alarm operation. Shield shall be Notifier STI Stopper II, Model STI1130. 4) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual- station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 5) When surface - mounting pull stations, fire alarm equipment provider shall provide back boxes to match pull stations. Smoke Detectors a. General: Include the following features: 1) Operating Voltage: 24 -V dc, nominal. 2) Self- Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 3) Plug -in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects in a tamper- resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist- locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -6 4) Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in -place after installation. 5) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 6) Remote Controllability: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog - addressable type, individually monitored at the Fire Alarm Control Panel for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the Fire Alarm Control Panel. b. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features: 1) Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon -cell receiver. 2) Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 3) Magnetically actuated test switch. 4) Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed - temperature type with 135 deg F setting. C. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type. 1) Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 2) Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor - control circuit. 4. Other Detectors a. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or rate of rise of temperature. 1) Analog temperature measuring device with setpoint (rating) set by Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2) Mounting: Plug -in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases, where available. 3) Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Notification Appliances a. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections. 1) Combination Devices: Factory- integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting assembly. b. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1 -inch- high letters on the lens. 1) Rated Light Output: 15/75 candela minimum per UL 1971 for ADA use unless otherwise indicated on drawing or required to meet NFPA 72 criteria. 2) Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 3) Synchronized operation. 6. Magnetic Door Holders a. Description: Units equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching door plate. 1) Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25 -lbf holding force. 2) Wall- Mounted Units: Surface mounted, unless otherwise indicated. 3) Contact Plate: Adjustable. 4) Armature Plate: Door mounted, adjustable 95 deg. horizontal, 5 deg. vertical. 5) Rating: 24 -Vdc. b. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. C. Existing Units: Where existing units are shown for reconnection, provide necessary relays to operate at 24V dc. d. Mount units high on door. Signal Circuit Remote Power Supply a. General: Filtered, regulated, power limited with trouble indication; with emergency power supply. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -7 b. Cabinet Lockable steel, surface - mounted enclosure, keyed to match, Fire Alarm Control Panel. Battery Power Supply a. General: Components include valve - regulated, recombinant lead acid battery; charger; and an automatic transfer switch. 1) Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 4 years as a minimum. b. Battery Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72 for supplying a minimum of 24 hours of operation in normal condition, followed by no less than 15 minutes in full alarm for a system operating without a backup generator. C. Battery Charger: Solid- state, fully automatic, variable- charging -rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision. d. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. Addressable Interface Devices a. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm- initiating devices with normally open contacts; allows individual monitoring of non - addressable points. b. Control Module: Microelectronic module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address to relays for system control functions. 1) Relay: 24 VDC coil with red LED when in the "alarm" state; contacts rated 10A, 115 VAC, minimum; suitable for control function required. 10. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter a. Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFPA 72. b. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the Fire Alarm Control Panel panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station overthe remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Contractor /Installer shall meet with Owner prior to performing any work on existing /new system(s). Meeting shall determine existing building system functions and approach Contractor /Installer will take to remove the existing system. And, determine Contractor's /Installer's plan to install new system which includes raceway runs, typical wiring practices, and device and equipment installation, also to provide Contractor /Installer with Owner's expectations. B. The locations and spacing of alarm initiating devices and strobes indicated on the drawings are approximate. The equipment supplier shall verify device requirements and spacing and shall add devices as required to satisfy governing authorities. It shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier or his representative to determine the type of detector required by local authorities for each type of installation. C. Install the fire alarm system in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and similar devices necessary for a complete installation. Boxes shall be installed in accessible spaces without requiring the removal of light fixtures or any other equipment. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -8 D. Coordinate system programming with the authority having jurisdiction. E. Provide 120 volt power to annunciator panels and remote signal circuit power supplies. F. Paint the fire alarm power supply disconnect red and label "Fire Alarm Circuit Control ". Provide locking means. G. Coordinate the installation of equipment and devices that pertain to the work of other trades with the appropriate contractors. H. Provide switch and fuse stat's (type SOU) installed within the Fire Alarm Control Panel disconnect 120 VAC power and separately all battery power. 3.02 DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Provide devices as indicated on drawings and as required to perform specified functions. B. Initiating Devices: 1. Smoke Detectors: a. Cover all smoke detection devices immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness. b. Install within five feet of each door held open by the fire alarm system. C. Where adjacent to an air shaft, supply diffuser or return grille, install smoke detector 36 inches minimum from the edge of the diffuser or grille. d. Provide a smoke detector within 10 feet of each remote power supply panel. 2. Duct Detectors: a. Provide duct type smoke detectors in the supply ductwork of all air handling systems with a return of 2000 CFM or higher. b. Install duct detectors in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Provide a remote alarm LED indicator for each duct smoke detector which is not readily visible or which is located above a ceiling or on a roof. Mount in an easily accessible and readily visible location. Label with the name of the unit served by the detector. Indicate whether the detector is installed in the supply or return ductwork. d. Provide a labeled test switch with LED indicator for each duct smoke detector. Install switch at a height between 48 inches and 72 inches above finished floor. 3. Provide heat detectors in areas where smoke detectors would be subject to false alarm. 4. Program address for each device as directed by Owner or stated elsewhere in specification. 5. Program device output text by address and geographic location. 6. Provide an addressable interface module for each non - addressable device. 7. Provide an addressable interface module for each non - addressable initiating device. C. Signaling Devices: 1. Where plans indicate a signaling device installed adjacent to a manual station, install the signaling device on the wall directly above the manual station. 2. Provide a minimum of two weatherproof audible signaling devices of the same type as other signaling devices provided with the system. The audible signaling devices will be located by the fire department connection to each building. Owner will determine the exact locations. Mount the devices on the exterior of the building. Provide a separate circuit for exterior audible signaling devices. 3. In sprinkled buildings, provide a 120 volt circuit to the fire sprinkler bell location. Provide manual bypass from the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 4. Set taps for toilet room speakers at 1/4 watt where toilet room is under 1000 square feet. 5. Signaling devices shall be completely deactivated by pressing "signal silence ". 6. Audibles shall be placed so that they can be heard a minimum of 15 decibels above the ambient decibel level in all locations (refer to NFPA 72G and ISBC 17.705(12)). MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -9 D. Control Devices: 1. All devices controlled by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (i.e. dampers, doors, elevators, etc.) shall be operated by the use of "control modules" and not by relay type device on detector bases. No auxiliary equipment shall be directly connected to LMX control modules. Control modules shall activate a 24VDC relay with LED when in the "alarm ". 2. Elevators: Verify recall requirements with local codes, authorities, and installers prior to system programming. Provide control modules and relays as required. 3. Provide a control module and relay for each door or group of doors to be held open. 4. Provide control modules and relays as required to implement the required control sequences. 5. Provide control modules and relays for remote indication of alarm and trouble conditions. E. Door Holders: 1. Mount at the top of each door to be held open unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mount the magnet on the wall and the contact plate on the door. Provide extensions as necessary to assure proper mating between the magnet and contact plate. Magnet is to maintain hold of door under normal conditions. 3. Adjust so the door is held parallel to the wall on which the magnet is mounted. 4. Electromagnetic door holders which are indicated to be integral with a door closer shall be furnished by the Architect. Provide wiring so the door holders are normally energized from the fire alarm power supply. F. Cabinets: Mount Fire Alarm Control Panel and remote cabinets a maximum of 72 inches above finished floor to the top of the cabinet. Provide a 4 -inch space between adjacent cabinets. 3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26, Section 26 0533 -Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Surface - mounted wiremold shall be size 700 minimum. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power - limited and non - power - limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp -on terminal spade lugs, pressure -type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. Do not install spare conductors in conduits or junction boxes. C. Cable Taps: All cables in the fire alarm control panel, junction boxes, and pull boxes shall be clearly marked in English (i.e. SLC 1, 3rd Floor Speakers, etc.). Label all junction box covers to indicate circuits and /or devices enclosed. Label inside cover of all junction boxes in finished areas. Label outside cover of all junction boxes in unfinished /concealed areas. D. Color- Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building powerwiring. Use one color -code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color -code for supervisory circuits. Color -code audible alarm- indicating circuits differently from alarm- initiating circuits. Use different colors forvisible alarm- indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red and provide circuit labels on inside of cover. E. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1 -inch conduit between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. F. Install end -of -line resistors at the farthest device from panel or module in a separate junction box clearly marked "End -of -Line Resistor. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -10 G. Conductors (minimum size and color) and raceways shall be provided as listed below, unless otherwise recommended by the system manufacturer or required by the authority having jurisdiction: 1. 120VAC 12AWG 2. Initiating circuits #18 tw /sh pair White ( +) Black ( -) 3. Audible signaling circuits a. Horns /bells #14AWG Red ( +) Black ( -) b. Speakers #14 tw /sh pair Red ( +) Black ( -) 4. Module power #14AWG Violet ( +) Blue ( -) 5. Resettable module power #14AWG Yellow ( +) Gray( -) 6. Visual signaling circuits #14AWG Red ( +) Black ( -) 7. Door holder /smoke dampers #14AWG Brown ( +) White ( -) 8. Control circuits #14 AWG H. Conduit fill and box fill never to exceed 50 %. No spare conductors shall be installed in conduits or junction boxes. J. 3M #130C rubber tape (or approved equal) shall be used to insulate grounding shields. K. If surface Wiremold is specified, it shall be no smaller than 700 size. L. All junction and pull boxes located at or above 8' -0" from the floor shall be a minimum size of 4-11/16" square by 2 -1/8" deep. M. No box extensions shall be permitted on new work. N. All fire alarm devices, junction and pull boxes shall be installed so they are accessible without removing light fixtures, equipment, conduits, junction boxes or other items. O. No splicing will be allowed in device mounting boxes. P. "End of Line Resistors" shall be located at the device that is farthest away from the panel or module. Q. All devices being controlled by the fire alarm control panel (i.e. dampers, doors, etc.) shall be operated by the use of control modules and not by relay type devices in detector bases. No auxiliary equipment shall be directly connected to an addressable control module. Each control module shall activate a 24 vdc relay with LED when in the "alarm" state. R. Back boxes shall be provided by equipment supplier for any surface - mounted pull stations or signaling devices. S. T -taps may be used for signaling line circuits if manufacturer's recommendations are followed. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26, Section Identification for Electrical Systems. B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the Fire Alarm Control Panel. C. Paint power - supply disconnect switch or breaker red and label "FIRE ALARM ". D. Affix the name and telephone number of the local service organization to the inside of the door of the Fire Alarm Control Panel and each remote cabinet. E. Label each control module to indicate the equipment controlled. F. Maintain wiring color codes throughout the system. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -11 G. All labels shall be on the inside of the cover. 3.05 GROUNDING A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common -mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 -ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory- authorized service representative to inspect field - assembled components and connections and to supervise pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing. B. Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for performing a "Pre- Test" of the Fire Alarm System and preparing/ completing "Test Log ". 1. All equipment shall be installed prior to completing "Pre- Test ". 2. Scope of the Pre -Test is to: a. "Align, adjust, and balance the system." b. Confirm compliance with the drawings and specifications. C. Install, test and check for operation of 100% of all fire alarm equipment and items being controlled by the fire alarm system. 3. Manufacturer's representative is to be involved in the pre -test. 4. Perform a thorough cleaning of the fire alarm system so each detector's chamber value reads less than 50 %. 5. At completion of the pre -test, the fire alarm system is to be complete and ready for owner acceptance. 6. Complete a "Test Log ", a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results. C. In preparation for the final test, Contractor shall: 1. Submit a "Test Log" and test forms from NFPA 72 and include a print out proving detector chamber values of less than 50% for all detectors. 2. Provide a letter certifying pre -test compliance and a list of witnesses. 3. Provide an up to date and complete printout of software at the time of final inspection and after any and all corrections or changes. 4. Upon approval of the above items, schedule the Final Test with Owner's representative with a minimum of 10 days notice. Those present shall be Manufacturer's representative, Owner's representative, Contractor and necessary local code and fire authorities. D. Contractor shall perform a Final "Minimum System Test" per NFPA 72. 1. Contractor shall test all equipment per minimum system testing requirements and maintain a "Test Log ". 2. Contractor to have sufficient personnel to conduct the test efficiently. 3. Upon completion of the Final Test Contractor will submit the Test Log. 4. Owner's representative has the authority to void the Final Test if it is proven during the Final Test that the Fire Alarm system installation is not complete. a. Voiding the Final Test will require Contractor to schedule another Final Test. 5. Upon approval of Final Test, successful owner training and submittal of completed "As- Built" drawings and O &M manuals, Owner will provide Contractor with acceptance of new Fire Alarm System. a. Owner acceptance does not constitute "Project Closeout" or completion of "Final Punch List" MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -12 b. Owner acceptance only relieves Contractor of testing requirements, it does not relieve Contractor of other contract requirements. C. Final Testing does not constitute Owner training. d. Owner acceptance provides approval to activate the new Fire Alarm System as the primary system. 6. Contractor shall perform final test in the presence of manufacturer's representative, Owner's representatives, and necessary local code authorities. E. Minimum System Tests' test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation- testing device. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohm meter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record drawings. 4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and proper volume level. 8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. 9. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards. 10. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of test F. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall perform a 100% quality inspection of the final installation and in the presence of Contractor, Owner's Representative and local code and fire authorities, shall perform a complete finished test of all aspects of the system. A system certification verifying the proper system operation shall be required prior to acceptance. G. Audible sound level measurements shall be conducted throughout the entire building, and all spaces with the evacuation system off and sounding. H. Provide testing and check out as required to accommodate the project phasing. Testing of intermediate phase completion shall include interconnections between the existing and new fire alarm systems. Provide testing and demonstrations as required by the City of Iowa City. 3.07 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. Provide detector cleaning report proving a maximum chamber value of 50% for all detectors. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -13 3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of 4 hours training. 2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid. 3. Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven days advance notice. 3.09 MAINTENANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this purpose. B. Provide a maintenance contract from the local service organization beginning on the date of Substantial Completion and remaining in force throughoutthe warranty period. Include required NFPA testing at times scheduled by Owner. C. Provide Owner with a proposal from the local service organization for a one -year maintenance contract beginning at the end of the warranty period. END OF SECTION 28 31 00 MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation FIRE ALARM & DETECTION SYSTEMS (ADDRESSABLE) 12.137 2831 00 -14 SECTION 32 1123 -AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 BASE COURSE MATERIALS - CONCRETE PAVING A. Aggregate Base Course: Dense graded, angular crushed limestone (Road Stone) conforming to Iowa DOT Standard Specification Section 4120.04, gradation number 11. 1. Moisture content range from optimum: -3 to +3 percent. 1.02 BASE COURSE MATERIALS - PERVIOUS CONCRETE PAVING A. Aggregate Type - Drainage Fill: Angular crushed washed limestone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Iowa DOT Standard Specification Section 4121, gradation 12A. a. Minimum Porosity: 45 percent. 2. Graded in accordance with ASTM D 448, Size No. 67 within the following limits: 1.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials. B. Where aggregate materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, submit samples for compliance testing and analysis before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 12.137 321123-1 SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, parking areas, and roads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 3000 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. D. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant forjoints. E. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Pavement markings. F. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. G. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted subbase for paving. H. Section 32 1123 - Aggregate Base Courses: Dense - graded aggregate base course. I. Section 32 1343 - Pervious Concrete Paving. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. C. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. D. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. E. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2012a. F. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 2012. G. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2012. H. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 45 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAVING ASSEMBLIES A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301. B. Paving Thickness: As indicated in Drawings. 2.02 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: As specified in Section 03 1000. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; flexible, closed -cell foam. 1. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 2. Product: Sealtight Ceramar manufactured by W.R.Meadows, Inc. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONCRETE PAVING 12.137 321313-1 2.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Types specified in Section 03 2000. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 3000. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 2, Class B. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Joint Sealer: Polyurethane type as specified in Section 07 9005. 2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN - NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Concrete Properties: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 4000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Cement Content: Minimum 525 lb per cubic yard. 4. Water- Cement Ratio: Maximum 50 percent by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 6. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 2.07 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted granular base is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. See Section 32 1123 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement. C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONCRETE PAVING 12.137 321313-2 B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONCRETE PAVING 12.137 321313-3 B. Provide doweled joints inch on center at transverse joints. 3.06 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete as specified in Section 03 3000. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.08 JOINTS A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components . 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Provide sawn contraction joints: 1/8 inch wide; cut 1/3 into depth of slab. 1. At 5 feet intervals in pedestrian paving. 2. At 10 feet intervals in vehicular paving. D. Provide keyed joints as indicated. 3.09 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Wood float. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch radius. C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction. D. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Make two applications in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07 9005 forjoint sealer requirements. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 4000. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONCRETE PAVING 12.137 321313-3 C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit vehicular traffic over pavement for 10 days minimum after finishing. END OF SECTION MidWestOne Bank - Main Office Renovation CONCRETE PAVING 12.137 321313-4